WO2005034066A1 - Electronic display filter and electronic display device - Google Patents

Electronic display filter and electronic display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2005034066A1
WO2005034066A1 PCT/JP2004/013809 JP2004013809W WO2005034066A1 WO 2005034066 A1 WO2005034066 A1 WO 2005034066A1 JP 2004013809 W JP2004013809 W JP 2004013809W WO 2005034066 A1 WO2005034066 A1 WO 2005034066A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
electronic display
filter
transmittance
light
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2004/013809
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
Hidekazu Morii
Yukinari Haraguchi
Masashi Nakamaru
Original Assignee
Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2003434186A external-priority patent/JP2005189728A/en
Application filed by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation filed Critical Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation
Publication of WO2005034066A1 publication Critical patent/WO2005034066A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01JELECTRIC DISCHARGE TUBES OR DISCHARGE LAMPS
    • H01J2211/00Plasma display panels with alternate current induction of the discharge, e.g. AC-PDPs
    • H01J2211/20Constructional details
    • H01J2211/34Vessels, containers or parts thereof, e.g. substrates
    • H01J2211/44Optical arrangements or shielding arrangements, e.g. filters or lenses

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an electronic display filter and an electronic display device. For details, remove unnecessary light-emitting components by installing them on the front of electronic displays such as cathode ray tubes (CRT), liquid crystal displays (LCD), plasma displays (PDP), organic EL displays, and FED (field emission display) displays.
  • Filters for electronic displays that have a function, in particular, reduce the green light emission of the three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp without significantly reducing the green light emission intensity of the electronic display.
  • a filter for an electronic display that prevents unnatural coloring due to external light when the contrast is improved, that is, prevents the filter from being colored purple due to the enhancement of the blue and red components of fluorescent lamps.
  • plasma display panels have been used as display panels for various electronic devices such as large wall-mounted televisions, and their demand has increased, and the number thereof has been increasing.
  • red, green, and blue light-emitting phosphors are arranged on the surface of the display, and the color of these phosphors is white and their reflectance is high. It is. Therefore, when viewing an image on an electronic display in a light place where there is lighting, such as a fluorescent lamp, a light bulb, or sunlight, around the electronic display, external light is reflected on the surface of the electronic display. Phenomenon occurs.
  • a filter for lowering the transmittance is provided on the front surface of the electronic display.
  • the contrast enhancement function conventionally provided to a filter installed on the front of an electronic display has a function of absorbing external light by reducing the transmittance of the entire visible light region with the filter.
  • the light emission of the electronic display was enhanced because it was cut, and the effect of improving the contrast was too strong.
  • a filter for an electronic display having an external light suppressing layer that absorbs light in a specific wavelength band and thereby suppresses a decrease in contrast of light and dark due to external light.
  • the so-called light-dark contrast is a ratio of a light emission luminance when displaying an image on a display to a black luminance when displaying black.
  • the light emission luminance when displaying an image on a display is high, and the light-dark contrast is improved if the luminance when displaying black is low.
  • the light-emitting component of the display may be passed as it is, that is, the filter may be set to have a higher transmittance for the display light-emitting component.
  • luminosity refers to “a stimulus that is effective in generating a sense of brightness among radiation entering the eye. It is defined as "representing the ratio of" (Physics Dictionary Baifukan). The peak of this visibility is at 555 nm. In other words, by controlling the external light around 555 nm well, the contrast between light and dark can be controlled.
  • the green light-emitting component of the three-wavelength light-emitting fluorescent lamp F10 FIS Z8719—1996) which is very widely used in Japan, has a peak at 545 nm and a peak at 530—56 Onm. Most of them exist.
  • the green light emission component of the plasma display has a peak at 525 ⁇ m, and most of the light exists at 480 to 580 nm ⁇ . Comparing the green light emission component of a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp with the green light emission component of a plasma display, the 540-555 nm region has a large external light component and a small plasma display light emission component.
  • the region near 525 nm is a region where the plasma display has a large amount of light-emitting components and a small amount of external light components.
  • the transmittance of the filter is designed so that the light around 525 nm is more transmitted, it is possible to obtain a filter with excellent light / dark contrast.
  • a method of cutting light in the 540-555 nm region with a filter is achieved by, for example, laminating a film or the like containing a dye or pigment that absorbs light in the 540-555 nm region to the filter. it can. That is, if a filter capable of locally lowering the transmittance of the filter in the 540-555 nm region can be obtained, the brightness control of the electronic display can be improved.
  • the color of the filter that is visible to human eyes is the color of light that is transmitted through the filter, reflected from the display surface, and passed through the filter again, such as fluorescent light.
  • white light such as fluorescent light passes through a filter that cuts more green light twice, changing the balance of blue 'green' and red and increasing the ratio of blue and red. It becomes light and is observed by the human eye, so the color of the filter appears purple.
  • the optical filter is formed by thinly applying a functional material to a substrate (transparent substrate) made of a colorless and transparent material such as glass or PET, or attaching an optical functional film.
  • Such an optical function film is generally attached to a transparent substrate using an adhesive.
  • the inside of the display device tends to be relatively high in temperature, and since the display device is used for a long period of time, the optical function film may peel off from the edge portion due to aging.
  • the surface of a transparent substrate is processed to be smooth in order to improve the visual characteristics, and the adhesive strength is obtained in the first place.
  • the screen size of the display device has been increasing, the dimensional change of the transparent substrate caused by thermal expansion due to the heat generated by the display has increased, and the fluctuation of the tension applied to the film after pasting has also increased.
  • the factors that make it easy for the film attached to the transparent substrate to peel off are increasing, and this trend is expected to continue in the future.
  • An opaque (mainly black) frame is often printed in a frame shape on the outer peripheral portion of the transparent substrate due to a problem in appearance.
  • Conventionally, such printing (frame printing) has been regarded as important only in its appearance when viewed from the direction of the opposing surface of the transparent substrate (observation direction in the display device). (In contact with the transparent substrate! /, Na! / ⁇ printing surface), no attention was paid to the characteristics and utility.
  • the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and has as its object to provide a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp. To improve the contrast in bright places illuminated, and to suppress unnatural coloring of the filter itself.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a filter for an electronic display having both functions.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide an electronic display capable of attaching an optical functional film by using a portion where the surface roughness of an exposed surface in frame printing is controlled, while improving contrast in a light place.
  • the inventors of the present invention have studied the brightness of the electronic display in black display when viewing the electronic display in an environment illuminated by the three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp, and as a result, as described above, — We found that the lower the filter transmittance in the 555 nm region, the lower the brightness of the electronic display when displaying black. That is, the average value of the light transmittance of the filter at 540-555 nm Ta (%) is usually 40% or less, preferably 35% or less, more preferably 33% or less, still more preferably 30% or less, and most preferably 20% or less. It has been found that the lower the value is, the lower the brightness of black in black display of the electronic display when viewing the electronic display in an environment illuminated by a three-band fluorescent lamp. Was.
  • the light emission component of the plasma display is small! /
  • the filter transmittance in the region of 540 to 555 nm the luminance of black is reduced and the plasma display is reduced. If an optical design is made so as to increase the light transmittance when the light emitting component of the light is about 525 nm, the light emission luminance at the time of displaying an image on the electronic display will not be hindered.
  • the value obtained by dividing the light transmittance Tb (%) at 525 nm by the average value Ta (%) of the light transmittances at 540 to 555 nm is preferably 1.20 or more, more preferably 1.30 or more, still more preferably 1.40 or more, It has been found that the better the contrast is, preferably, 1.50 or more, the better the contrast is obtained.
  • the present inventors have found that, among the light-emitting components of the three-wavelength light-emitting fluorescent lamp, a main red light-emitting component and a green light-emitting component.
  • the ratio of the luminance near these three wavelengths (612 ⁇ 20 nm, 545 ⁇ 20 nm, 437 ⁇ 20 nm) to the luminance at all wavelengths (380-780 nm) is 76%, which accounts for the majority of the luminance at all wavelengths. I have. This fact means that, in a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp, the influence of light near these three wavelengths is considerably large.
  • the coloring of the filter installed on the front of the electronic display is based on the fact that the external light passes through the filter once, is reflected on the surface of the electronic display, and is again the light that has exited through the filter. Due to properties. That is, if the emission balance of red, green, and blue of light that passes through the filter twice is significantly disturbed, the filter looks unnaturally colored. Taking these factors into account, we found that by appropriately controlling the light transmittance of the filter at 612 nm, 545 nm, and 437 nm, the coloration of the filter could be suppressed.
  • the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value of the light transmittance (%) of the three-point filter at 612 nm (Te) should normally be 10 or less.
  • the smaller the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value is, preferably, 7 or less, more preferably 5 or less, and even more preferably 3 or less, the more preferable the color tone of the filter, the color tone of the filter is reduced .-- Eutral blue and neutral gray I found that I can do it.
  • the present invention has been completed based on the above findings, and the above object of the present invention is achieved by any one of the following 1) to 12).
  • a first gist of the first invention is a filter for an electronic display used for an electronic display device having a light emitting display device, wherein the filter has the following transmittance characteristics. Present in display filters.
  • At least one minimum value of the transmittance exists in the visible light region of wavelengths from 400 nm to 700 nm.
  • the difference between the minimum transmittance (%) among the minimum values of the transmittance and the maximum transmittance (%) in the visible light region is 10 or more.
  • the average value (%) of light transmittance at wavelengths of 540 nm to 555 nm is 40% or less.
  • the value obtained by dividing the light transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 525 nm by the average value (%) of the light transmittance at a wavelength of 540 nm to 555 nm is 1.10 or more.
  • the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value in the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 545 nm, the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 437 nm, and the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 612 nm is 10 or less.
  • a second aspect resides in an electronic display device characterized in that the electronic display filter of the first invention is provided.
  • a first gist of the second invention is a filter for an electronic display used for an electronic display device having a light emitting display device
  • the light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the three-band fluorescent tube is 5 or more lower than the light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the light emitting display device, or the light emitting display device is white.
  • the light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the 3-wavelength emission fluorescent tube is 1 or more lower than the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) when using the emission spectrum! ,
  • An external light suppression layer that suppresses transmission of a specific wavelength component of incident light on the light-emitting display device side surface of an electronic display filter and an electromagnetic wave shield layer that suppresses electromagnetic wave radiation from the electronic display device are formed by an electromagnetic wave shield.
  • the electronic display filter is characterized in that the layer is arranged so that the layer is closer to the light emitting display device than the external light suppressing layer.
  • a second gist of the second invention resides in an electronic display device including the electronic display filter according to the second invention.
  • a first aspect of the third invention is a filter for an electronic display used in an electronic display device having a light emitting display device
  • the light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the three-band fluorescent tube is 5 or more lower than the light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the light emitting display device, or the light emitting display device is white.
  • the light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the 3-wavelength emission fluorescent tube is 1 or more lower than the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) when using the emission spectrum! ,
  • An external light introduction layer with a luminous transmittance of 90% or more is provided on the outermost surface of the electronic display filter.
  • a second aspect of the third invention resides in an electronic display device including the electronic display filter according to the third invention described above.
  • a first gist of the fourth invention is a filter for an electronic display used for an electronic display device having a light emitting display device
  • the light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the three-band fluorescent tube is 5 or more lower than the light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the light emitting display device, or the light emitting display device is white.
  • the light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the 3-wavelength emission fluorescent tube is 1 or more lower than the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) when using the emission spectrum! ,
  • the electronic display filter is characterized in that the electronic display filter is composed of a transparent substrate having a haze value of 1.5% or less.
  • a second aspect of the fourth invention resides in an electronic display device including the electronic display filter according to the fourth invention.
  • a first gist of the fifth invention is a filter for an electronic display used in an electronic display device having a light emitting display device
  • the light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the three-band fluorescent tube is 5 or more lower than the light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the light emitting display device, or the light emitting display device is white.
  • the light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the 3-wavelength emission fluorescent tube is 1 or more lower than the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) when using the emission spectrum! ,
  • An electronic display filter characterized in that an electromagnetic wave shielding layer having a visible light transmittance of 60 to 80% is arranged on the surface of the electronic display filter on the light emitting display device side.
  • a second aspect of the fifth invention resides in an electronic display device including the electronic display filter according to the fifth invention.
  • a first gist of the sixth invention is a transparent substrate as a support for an electronic display filter used in an electronic display device having a light emitting display device, It has a frame-shaped opaque area on the outer periphery of the transparent substrate surface,
  • the opaque region has an arithmetic mean height (Ra) of 0.05 to 100 ⁇ m on the transparent substrate of the electronic display filter.
  • a second gist of the sixth invention is a transparent substrate as a support for an electronic display filter used in an electronic display device having a light emitting display device, which is provided on an outer peripheral portion of a surface of the transparent substrate. It has a frame-shaped opaque area, and the surface roughness of the opaque area is 0.05 to 100 ⁇ m in arithmetic mean height (Ra).
  • An electronic display filter comprising at least one optically functional film adhered thereto.
  • FIG. 1 shows a white light emission spectrum of the plasma display panel of the first invention, a light emission spectrum of a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10, and a transmission spectrum of a filter for an electronic display according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 1 shows a white light emission spectrum of the plasma display panel of the first invention, a light emission spectrum of a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10, and a transmission spectrum of a filter for an electronic display according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 conceptually illustrates light emitted from the electronic display and reflected light of external light on the surface of the electronic display in an electronic display device in which an electronic display filter is arranged in front of the electronic display.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an electronic display filter according to a second invention and an electronic display device using the same.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an emission spectrum of the plasma display panel of the second invention, an emission spectrum of a three-wavelength-band fluorescent lamp F10, and a transmission spectrum of a filter for an electronic display of the present invention.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an emission spectrum of a plasma display and an emission spectrum of a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10 after passing through an electronic display filter having the characteristics shown in FIG. 4 of the second invention. is there.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an electronic display device in which a filter for an electronic display of the second invention is directly bonded to a display panel via an adhesive layer.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an electronic display filter of the third, fourth, fifth, and sixth inventions and an electronic display device using the same.
  • FIG. 8 is a view showing an emission spectrum of the plasma display panel according to the third, fourth and fifth inventions, an emission spectrum of the three-band emission fluorescent lamp F10, and a transmission spectrum of a filter for an electronic display.
  • FIG. 9 is an emission spectrum of a plasma display and an emission spectrum of a three-band fluorescent lamp F10 after transmission through a filter for an electronic display having the characteristics shown in FIG. 8 of the third, fourth and fifth inventions.
  • FIG. 9 is an emission spectrum of a plasma display and an emission spectrum of a three-band fluorescent lamp F10 after transmission through a filter for an electronic display having the characteristics shown in FIG. 8 of the third, fourth and fifth inventions.
  • FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a positional relationship between frame printing on a transparent substrate of the sixth invention and a film to be pasted.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating the state of adhesion between the film and the transparent substrate in FIG. 10 of the sixth invention.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a transmission spectrum of an external light suppressing filter formed in an example of the sixth invention.
  • FIG. 13 is a view for explaining a mask pattern for forming a conductive shield mesh formed in the fifth and sixth embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram conceptually illustrating light emission of an electronic display and reflected light of external light on the surface of an electronic display in an electronic display device in which an electronic display filter is arranged in front of an electronic display.
  • the electronic display device has a structure in front of the plasma display panel 12.
  • the filter 100 is installed on the surface. Light emitted from the electronic display passes through the filter 100.
  • an external light source 20 such as a fluorescent lamp or a light bulb, and external light 201 such as sunlight, which are present around the electronic display, pass through the filter 100, The light is reflected off the display surface and passes through the filter 100 again.
  • the color of the filter that is visible to the human eye is due to the characteristics of light that passes through the filter once, reflects off the surface of the electronic display, and passes through the filter again.
  • An electronic display filter is a filter for an electronic display device using a light emitting display device.
  • the light-emitting display device is a minimum configuration that realizes a light-emitting display function such as a plasma display panel or a combination of a liquid crystal display panel and a backlight, in other words, a light-emitting device for which a display filter is used.
  • the light emitting display device according to the present invention is a color light emitting display device.
  • the electronic display device means a finished product in which a light emitting display device and a display filter are incorporated in a housing and are distributed as a television or a display device on site!
  • the electronic display filter of the present invention is disposed on the front surface of the light emitting display device, that is, in the optical path until the light emitted from the light emitting display device exits from the electronic display device using the light emitting display device. You.
  • the filter for an electronic display of the present invention is a filter having a function of suppressing external light.
  • the external light suppressing function is a function of one of the layers constituting the electronic display filter.
  • the layers constituting the filter for an electronic display need not necessarily be bonded to adjacent layers. For example, a form that is arranged apart from an adjacent layer or a form that does not have a force bonding in contact with an adjacent layer may be used.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a white light emission spectrum of a plasma display panel of the first invention, a light emission spectrum of a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10, and a transmission spectrum of an electronic display filter according to Example 1;
  • FIG. 4 shows an emission spectrum of a plasma display panel according to the second invention, an emission spectrum of a three-wavelength fluorescent lamp F10, and an electronic filter of the present invention.
  • FIG. 5 shows the transmission spectrum of a display filter;
  • FIG. 5 shows the emission spectrum of a plasma display after passing through an electronic display filter having the characteristics shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an emission spectrum;
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a white light emission spectrum of a plasma display panel of the first invention, a light emission spectrum of a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10, and a transmission spectrum of an electronic display filter according to Example 1;
  • FIG. 4 shows an emission spectrum of a plasma display panel according to the second invention, an emission spectrum of a three-wavelength fluorescent lamp F
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a configuration of an electronic display device in which the filter for an electronic display of the second invention is directly adhered to a display panel via an adhesive layer;
  • FIG. 5 and 6 are diagrams showing the configuration of the electronic display filter and the electronic display device using the same according to the invention;
  • FIG. FIG. 9 shows the emission spectrum of the plasma display panel of the invention, the emission spectrum of the three-band fluorescent lamp F10, and the transmission spectrum of the filter for an electronic display;
  • FIG. 9 shows the third, fourth, and fifth inventions in FIG.
  • FIG. 10 shows an emission spectrum of a plasma display and an emission spectrum of a three-band fluorescent lamp F10 after transmission through an electronic display filter having the characteristics shown in FIG. 10;
  • FIG. 10 shows an emission spectrum of a plasma display and an emission spectrum of a three-band fluorescent lamp F10 after transmission through an electronic display filter having the characteristics shown in FIG. 10;
  • FIG. 10 shows an emission spectrum of a plasma display and an emission spectrum of a three-band fluorescent lamp F10 after transmission
  • FIG. 11 is an explanatory view of a positional relationship with a film to be pasted;
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic view illustrating an adhesion state between a film and a transparent substrate in FIG. 10 of the sixth invention;
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a transmission spectrum of the external light suppressing filter formed in Step 5; and
  • FIG. 13 is an illustration of a mask pattern for forming a conductive shield mesh formed in the fifth and sixth embodiments. It is.
  • Electronic display filters have (1) at least one transmittance minimum in the visible light range of wavelengths from 400 nm to 700 nm; and (2) the minimum transmittance (%) among the transmittance minimums.
  • the difference from the maximum transmittance (%) in the visible light region is 10 or more; (3)
  • the average value (%) of the light transmittance at a wavelength of 540 nm to 555 nm is 40% or less; (4)
  • the wavelength of 525 nm The value obtained by dividing the light transmittance (%) by the average value (%) of the light transmittance at wavelengths of 540 nm to 555 nm is 1.10 or more; and (5)
  • the transmittance (%) of the wavelength 545 nm and the wavelength of 437 nm It has transmittance characteristics in which the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value in the transmittance (%) and the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 612 nm is 10 or less.
  • the filter for an electronic display according to the first invention, the transmittance in a predetermined wavelength range.
  • a layer containing an ultraviolet absorber, a near-infrared ray cut layer, an electromagnetic wave shielding layer, an anti-reflection layer, an anti-glare (non-glare) layer, etc. may be appropriately combined.
  • the filter according to the present invention can be used for an electronic display device.
  • FIG. 1 shows a white light emission spectrum of the plasma display panel of the first invention, a light emission spectrum of a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10 FIS Z8719-1996), and a light emission spectrum of 380-780 nm according to Example 1 described later.
  • the transmission spectrum of the filter whose transmittance at a specific wavelength is controlled is shown.
  • the horizontal axis shows the wavelength
  • the vertical axis shows the transmittance (%) of each wavelength.
  • the electronic display filter according to the first invention has at least one transmittance minimum in the visible light region of 400 to 700 nm. Further, as the filter for an electronic display according to the first invention, a filter having a minimum value of transmittance in a wavelength region of 480 to 520 nm and a minimum value of transmittance in a wavelength region of Z or 530 to 610 nm is preferable. .
  • having a minimum value of the transmittance in a predetermined wavelength range means that a light beam in this wavelength range is focused.
  • the “minimum value” has the same meaning as that defined in, for example, a graph of a quadratic function, that is, an inflection point at which a decreasing force increases on the graph, and a minimum value. Different from the value.
  • the difference between the minimum transmittance (%) among the minimum values of the transmittance and the maximum transmittance (%) in the visible light region is 10 or more.
  • the filter for an electronic display according to the first invention has an average value (%) of the light transmittance at a wavelength of 540 to 555 nm with respect to the light transmittance at all wavelengths (380 to 780 nm) of 40% or less, preferably 35% or less. Or less, more preferably 33% or less, even more preferably 30% or less, and most preferably 20% or less.
  • the electronic display filter according to the first invention has a value obtained by dividing the light transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 525 nm by the average value (%) of the light transmittance at a wavelength of 540 to 555 nm, and is preferably 1.10 or more, preferably It is at least 1.20, more preferably at least 1.30, even more preferably at least 1.40, most preferably at least 1.50.
  • the filter for an electronic display according to the first invention has a difference between the maximum value and the minimum value in the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 545 nm, the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 434 nm, and the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 612 nm. Is 10 Or less, preferably 7 or less, more preferably 5 or less, and still more preferably 3 or less.
  • the difference in transmittance (%) is preferably within ⁇ 10
  • the difference in transmittance (%) is preferably within ⁇ 10
  • the difference in transmittance (%) is preferably within ⁇ 10
  • the difference in transmittance (%) is preferably within ⁇ 10
  • the difference in transmittance (%) is preferably within ⁇ 10
  • the difference in transmittance (%) is preferably within ⁇ 10
  • the difference in transmittance (%) is preferably within ⁇ 10)
  • the difference in transmittance (%) is preferably within ⁇ 10
  • a dye that absorbs at 480-520 nm is added to the filter components to reduce the filter's transmittance at 480-520 nm to reduce the wavelength range of 480-520 nm. It is preferable that the transmittance has a minimum value. By reducing the transmittance of the filter from 480 to 520 nm, the green component of the blue light-emitting component can be cut, and the blue chromaticity of the panel when displaying blue can be maintained.
  • PDP has a problem that a vivid red color cannot be obtained due to a mixture of red and orange due to neon light emission.
  • the filter has a minimum value of transmittance in a wavelength region of 530 to 610 nm. By having a minimum value of the transmittance in the wavelength range of 530-6 lOnm, a function of absorbing and removing neon orange light can be provided.
  • the fact that the transmittance has a minimum value in the wavelength range of 530 to 610 nm means that light rays in this wavelength range are cut.
  • the wavelength range from 530 to 610 nm is the orange light emission part (neon light emission) between green light emission and red light emission. By cutting this part, a clear red display can be obtained, and furthermore, the color temperature can be obtained. Can be increased, so that a more favorable color tone image can be obtained.
  • the minimum transmittance is shorter than 530 nm because the effect of cutting neon emission is low and the effect of increasing color temperature is low. Further, it is not preferable that the minimum transmittance is on the long wavelength side than 610 nm, because the red light emission of the display is inhibited (red light is absorbed).
  • the transmission spectrum having a minimum value in the wavelength range of 530 to 610 nm has a sharp (valley) valley shape, which improves the color purity of red emission and ensures the brightness of the visual field. Preferred for.
  • a minimum value of the transmittance is provided in the wavelength range of 530 to 610 nm in order to cut off neon light emission.
  • the electronic display filter of the first invention has a wavelength (437 nm) where a blue emission peak exists, a wavelength where a green emission peak exists (545 nm), and a red emission peak of a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp.
  • the transmittance at these wavelengths is regulated by containing a compound having a maximum absorption near any one of the wavelengths (612 nm).
  • the compound used is not particularly limited, but in adjusting the amount of light absorption at wavelengths of 437 nm, 545 nm and 612 nm, a compound having a maximum absorption near these wavelengths can be used. .
  • a squarylium-based compound represented by the following formula (I)-(IV) can be mentioned.
  • the compound having the maximum absorption near 545 nm includes the compound of the following formula (I).
  • R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent or a hydroxyl group
  • the substituent A is a hydroxyl group or W—X—R 2
  • W represents an imino group or an alkylimino group
  • X represents a carboxyl group, a thiocarbol group or a sulfonyl group
  • R 2 represents a substituent.
  • Examples of the alkyl group for R 1 in the formula (I) include a methyl group, an ethyl group, and a propyl group. Butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, decyl, pentadecyl, dodecyl, tridecyl, pentadecyl, etc.
  • alkoxy group for R 1 examples include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, a butoxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, a heptyloxy group, an octyloxy group, a decyloxy group, a pendecyloxy group, a dodecyloxy group, and a tridecyloxy group.
  • linear or branched groups having 120 carbon atoms such as a pentadecyloxy group and a pentadecyloxy group.
  • Examples of the substituent of the alkyl group and the alkoxy group include a carbon number such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, and a decyl group.
  • a carbon number such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, and a decyl group.
  • 1-10 Alkoxy, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, heptyloxy, octyloxy, decyloxy, etc.C11-C10 alkoxy, cyclopropyl, cyclo
  • a cycloalkyl group having 110 carbon atoms such as a cycloalkyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, or a cycloheptyl group, an aryl group such as a fluor group, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, or a bromine atom.
  • Acetylamino, methanesulfo-amino, trifluoroacetylamino, trifluoromethanesulfon -Aromatic carbamino group such as lumino group, butanoylamino group, hexanoylamino group, nonanoylamino group, tridecanoylamino group, etc., having 11 to 15 carbon atoms, benzoylamino group and tolylamino group Group sulfonylamino groups and the like.
  • R 1 may be, as described above, (1) linear or branched having (1) an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group, or a halogen atom as a substituent.
  • An alkyl group is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms, or a linear or branched alkoxy group having 18 carbon atoms is particularly preferable.
  • the alkyl group of the alkylimino group represented by W in W—X—R 2 in the formula (I) is preferably a straight-chain or branched-chain group having 118 carbon atoms.
  • an imino group which is preferably an imino group or an alkylimino group, is particularly preferred.
  • R 2 is not a hydrogen atom.
  • alkyl group of R 2 in W- X- R 2 for example, alkyl in the R 1 Alkyl groups such as alkyl group, vinyl group, etc., aryl groups such as furyl group, naphthyl group, amino group, 3-pyridyl group, 2-furyl group, 2-tetrahydrofuryl group, 2-cell mentioned and heterocyclic groups such as groups, these alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, Ari group, amino group and heterocyclic group include an alkyl group in the R 1, the same as mentioned as the substituent of alkoxy group It may have an alkyl group having 110 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 110 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 110 carbon atoms, a halogen atom or an aryl group as a substituent.
  • the same alkyl group as the preferable alkyl group of the above R 1 may be substituted with an alkyl group having 118 carbon atoms, may be a fuel group or an alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms. Even if it is substituted, a butyl group is particularly preferred. Preferred examples are shown below.
  • Examples of the compound having the maximum absorption near 545 nm include a compound represented by the following formula ( ⁇ ). [0078] [Formula 6]
  • R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an alkoxy group which may have a substituent
  • the substituent A is a hydroxyl group or W—X — R 2
  • W represents an imino group
  • X represents a carbonyl group or a sulfol group
  • R 2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
  • An aryl group which may be substituted an aryl group which may have a substituent or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent
  • m represents 0 or 1
  • R 6 , R 7 Represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent
  • Z represents an oxygen atom.
  • Examples of the alkyl group of R 1 in the formula ( ⁇ ) include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, a decyl group, dodecyl group, tridecyl group, a linear also properly branched group having a carbon number of 1 one 20, such as a pentadecyl group, the alkoxy group of R 1, for example, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, flop port epoxy group, butoxy Straight-chain or branched-chain groups having 120 carbon atoms, such as group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, heptyloxy group, octyloxy group, decyloxy group, pendecyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, tridecy
  • Examples of the substituent of the alkyl group and the alkoxy group include those having 1 carbon atom such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, and a decyl group.
  • (I) C10-C10 alkoxy, cyclopropyl, such as alkyl, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, heptyloxy, octyloxy, and decyloxy groups; C11-C10 cycloalkyl group such as cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, cycloheptyl group, aryl group such as phenyl group, hydroxyl group, or fluorine atom, salt And halogen atoms such as elemental atoms and bromine atoms.
  • C11-C10 cycloalkyl group such as cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, cycloheptyl group, aryl group such as phenyl group, hydroxyl group, or fluorine atom, salt And halogen atoms such as
  • R 1 may have an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom as a substituent among the above, and is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group.
  • a linear or branched alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms is particularly preferred.
  • the alkyl group of the alkylimino group represented by W in W—X—R 2 in the formula ( ⁇ ) is preferably a straight-chain or branched-chain group having 118 carbon atoms.
  • an imino group which is preferably an imino group or an alkylimino group, is particularly preferred.
  • R is not a hydrogen atom.
  • W- X- in R 2 of the alkyl group R 2 for example, an alkyl group of the alkyl group the same way in the R 1, alkenyl groups such as vinyl group, Hue - group, such as naphthyl And aryl groups such as aryl groups, 3-pyridyl groups, 2-furyl groups, 2-tetrahydrofuryl groups, and 2-phenyl groups.
  • alkenyl groups such as vinyl group, Hue - group, such as naphthyl
  • aryl groups such as aryl groups, 3-pyridyl groups, 2-furyl groups, 2-tetrahydrofuryl groups, and 2-phenyl groups.
  • alkyl groups, alkyl groups, aryl groups and The heterocyclic group is, for example, an alkyl group for R 1, an alkyl group having 11 to 10 carbon atoms similar to the substituent of the alkoxy group, an alkoxy group having 11 to 10 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 11 to 10 carbon atoms, It may have a halogen atom, an aryl group or the like as a substituent.
  • a phenyl group is particularly preferable, even if it is substituted with the same alkyl group or an alkyl group having 18 to 18 carbon atoms as the preferable group of the above R 1 .
  • R 6 and R 7 the alkyl group or Ariru group same as the preferred group of R 2 is particularly preferred U, Preferred examples are shown below.
  • Examples of the compound having a maximum absorption near 612 nm include a compound represented by the following formula ( ⁇ ).
  • R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an alkoxy group which may have a substituent
  • the substituent B is a group represented by W—CO—R 2 (W represents an imino group or an alkylimino group
  • R 2 represents an alkenyl group which may have a substituent or an alkyl group which may have a substituent
  • m and m ′ Each independently represents 0 or 1.
  • the alkoxy group for R 1 include, for example, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, and a butoxy group.
  • Examples of the substituent of the alkyl group and the alkoxy group include those having 1 carbon atom such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group and a decyl group.
  • (I) C10-C10 alkoxy, cyclopropyl, such as alkyl, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, heptyloxy, octyloxy, and decyloxy groups; C11-C10 cycloalkyl groups such as cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group and cycloheptyl group, aryl groups such as phenyl group, hydroxyl group, fluorine atom and chlorine atom And a halogen atom such as a bromine atom.
  • R 1 represents, as described above, a linear or branched alkyl having (1) an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom as a substituent.
  • a linear or branched alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms or a linear or branched alkoxy group having 18 carbon atoms is particularly preferable.
  • the alkyl group of alkylimino groups W indicated by the formula ( ⁇ ) in W- CO- R 2, preferably a linear or branched group having 1 one 8 carbon tool W is particularly preferably an imino group which is preferably an imino group or an alkylimino group.
  • W- X- as R 2 in R 2 is Aruke such Bulle groups - group, Al keys such as acetylene group - le, and the like, these Aruke - group, alkyl - le are
  • the alkyl group in R 1 an alkyl group having 11 to 10 carbon atoms similar to the substituent of the alkoxy group, an alkoxy group having 11 to 10 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 11 to 10 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, It may have an aryl group or the like as a substituent.
  • V ⁇ vinyl groups are particularly preferred.
  • the compound having the maximum absorption near 437 nm includes a compound of the following formula (IV).
  • R ° represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, a cycloalkyl group which may have a substituent, and an aryl which may have a substituent.
  • R 4 is an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an alkoxycarbol group which may have a substituent, and which may have a substituent
  • R 5 represents an amino group or a hydrogen atom which may have a substituent
  • R 5 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, a cycloalkyl group which may have a substituent
  • Y represents an oxygen atom or an imino
  • alkyl group of the substituents R 3 and R 5 in Formula (IV) for example, a methyl group, Echiru group, propyl group, butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, Okuchiru group, decyl A straight-chain or branched-chain group having 120 carbon atoms, such as a group, a pendecyl group, a dodecyl group, a tridecyl group, a pentadecyl group, etc., and a cycloalkyl group of R and R
  • Examples thereof include a group having 120 carbon atoms such as a cyclopropyl group, a cyclobutyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a cycloheptyl group, and the aryl groups of R 3 and R 5 include Examples include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group.
  • Examples of the substituent for the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group and the aryl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, C1-C10 alkyl groups such as decyl groups, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, heptyloxy, octyloxy and decyloxy groups, etc.
  • Aryl groups such as alkoxy group, phenyl group, naphthyl group, aryloxy groups such as phenoxy group, naphthyloxy group, sulfonamide group, alkylsulfonamide group, dialkylsulfonamide group, nitro group, hydroxyl group, fluorine atom, chlorine And a halogen atom such as a bromine atom.
  • R 3 and R 5 may have (1) an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom as a substituent in the above.
  • R 3 is a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched chain having 118 carbon atoms Al kill group, or Hue - the preferred instrument R 5 is group, a linear or partial ⁇ chain alkyl group having 1 one 8 carbon atoms, or, have an alkyl group or a halogen atom as a substituent Still, a phenol group is preferred.
  • the alkyl group of R 4 in the formula (IV) is the same as the alkyl group of R 3 and R 5.
  • the alkoxy group of R 4 is, for example, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group.
  • Straight-chain or branched group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, heptyloxy group, octyloxy group, decyloxy group, pendecyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, tridecyloxy group, pentadecyloxy group, etc.
  • a branched chain group; an alkoxycarbonyl group for R 4 includes a carboxyl group having the alkoxy group; and a cycloalkyl group for R includes the cycloalkyl group for IT and similar groups can be mentioned, the same as Examples Ariru group R 4, mentioned as Ariru group in R and R It includes groups of R 4 ⁇ Li
  • Examples of the alkoxy group include a phenoxy group and a naphthyloxy group.
  • Examples of the aryloxycarbyl group for R 4 include the above-mentioned aryloxy group-containing carboxyl group.
  • Examples of the substituents of the alkyl group, alkoxy group, alkoxycarbol group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, aryloxy group, aryloxycarbol group and amino group include, for example, the alkyl group in R 3 and R 5, cycloalkyl group, and the substituents the same alkyl groups Ari group, an alkoxy group, Ariru group, Ariruokishi group, scan Ruhon'amido group, an alkylsulfonamido group, a dialkyl sulfonamide group, Examples include a nitro group and a halogen atom, an acyl group such as a propioyl group, a butyryl group and a benzoyl group, a sulfonyl group such as a methanesulfonyl group and a benzenesulfonyl group, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, and the like
  • branched alkoxy group (3) a carboxy group having an alkoxy group as a substituent, (4) an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a sulfonamide group, an alkyl sulfonamide Group, dialkylsulfonamide group, nitro group, hydroxyl group or halogen atom as a substituent, or aryl group, (5) aryl group optionally having an alkyl group or an alkoxy group as a substituent And a (6) alkyl group, an acyl group or a sulfol group as a substituent, and an amino group is particularly preferable, especially a straight-chain having 18 carbon atoms.
  • a chain or branched alkyl group is preferred
  • Y is preferably an oxygen atom.
  • R 5 and Y may be different from each other between both pyrazole rings, Those that are symmetrical with respect to the methine group are preferred.
  • a and B each independently represent a pyrazolyl group which may have a substituent.
  • R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent
  • R 2 may have a substituent and may be an alkyl group or a substituent. Yes, it is good !, indicates an aryl group. Note that each of R 1 and R 2 may be the same or different.
  • the dipyrazolylsquarylium-based compound represented by the formula (XV) has a pyrazole ring at each end.
  • the substituents ⁇ and ⁇ are optional substituents as long as the dipyrazolylsquarylium-based compound has a minimum value in a light transmittance curve in a wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm.
  • Each is independently substituted and is a virazolyl group, and its molecular weight is usually 500 or less.
  • Preferred pyrazolyl groups may be substituted and include 4-pyrazolyl groups, and more preferably a group represented by the following formula (XIV). [0124] [Formula 17]
  • R 4 represents a substituted or unsubstituted! Alkyl group or an aryl group which may be substituted; and R 5 represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group.
  • X represents an oxygen atom or an NH group. Show. ]
  • R 4 is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, an alkyl group or an aryl group which may be substituted. It is an alkyl group which may have a substituent.
  • the Ariru group of the substituent R 4 for example, phenyl group, and a naphthyl group.
  • substituent for the alkyl group and aryl group include, for example, a group having 11 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group and a decyl group.
  • 10-alkyl group methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, heptyloxy group, octyloxy group, decyloxy group, etc., alkoxy group having 110 carbon atoms; phenyl group, naphthyl Aryloxy group such as phenoxy group, naphthyloxy group, etc .; sulfolamide group, alkylsulfolamide group, dialkylsulfonamide group, arylsulfonamide group, diarylsulfolamide group, alkylarylsulfonyl group.
  • alkyl or aryl group such as Also good, sulfo - Ruamido group; - DOO port group, a hydroxyl group, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a halogen atom such as a bromine atom .
  • Preferred examples of the alkyl group which may be substituted for the substituent R 4 include a carbon atom which may be substituted with a substituent selected from the group consisting of an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a hydroxyl group and a halogen atom.
  • a straight-chain or branched-chain alkyl group having the number of 11 to 20 is preferred, and an alkoxy group or an alkyl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom is more preferred.
  • 8 alkyl groups Preferred examples of the aryl group which may be substituted with the substituent R 4 include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a sulfolamide group, a hydroxyl group and an aryl group which may be substituted with a nitrogen atom, More preferred are an alkyl group, an alkoxy group and an aryl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom, and particularly preferred are a phenyl group and an alkylphenyl group.
  • the substituent R 5 may have a substituent, may have a substituent, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group may have a substituent, or a substituent. May have an aryl group or a substituent; may have an amino group or a substituent; and / or may have an alkoxycarbol group or a substituent.
  • a aryloxycarbyl group preferably a substituted or substituted alkyl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group.
  • An optionally substituted alkyl group is particularly preferred.
  • Substituted substituents R 5, be good, the alkyl group, having a substituent of the substituted groups R 4, be good, the same as the Al kill group.
  • the alkoxy group of substituents R 5, a methoxy group, E butoxy group, a propoxy group, a butoxy group, Penchiruokishi group, to Kishiruokishi group, the Petit Ruokishi group, Okuchiruokishi group, an alkoxy group having a carbon number of 1 one 20 such Deshiruokishi group Is mentioned.
  • Examples of the substituent of the alkoxy group include an alkyl group having 11 to 10 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group and a decyl group; A C11-C10 alkoxy group such as a ethoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, a butoxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, a heptyloxy group, an octyloxy group or a decyloxy group; an aryl group such as a phenyl group or a naphthyl group; Groups, an aryloxy group such as a naphthyloxy group; a hydroxyl group; a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom,
  • Substituent R 5 may have a substituent, and the amino group may be an unsubstituted amino group; a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group
  • alkoxycarbonyl substituents R 5 - The group, methoxycarbonyl - Kishiruo group, pentyl Ruo propoxycarbonyl sulfonyl group to - group, Etokishikaru ball - group, propoxy carbo - group, butoxycarbonyl Examples thereof include straight-chain or branched-chain alkoxycarbol groups having 120 to 120 carbon atoms, such as a xycarbol group, a heptyloxycarbol group, and an octyloxycarbol group. Examples of the substituent of the alkoxycarbyl group include the same substituents as those of the alkoxy group.
  • substituent R 5 may have a substituent group ⁇ reel O propoxycarbonyl -
  • the group, Hue - Ruokishikarubo - le group, p- tolyl O propoxycarbonyl - le group, p- Metokishifue - Ruokishika Substituted with an alkyl group or an alkoxy group such as a reporter group, an aryloxy group and the like can be mentioned.
  • XIV represents an oxygen atom or an NH group, and among them, an oxygen atom is preferable.
  • a and B in Formula (XV) may be the same or different, but the stability as a dye and the ease of synthesis are as follows. Is most preferable when A and B are equal, that is, when they are symmetric. Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (XV) are shown in the following formula and Table 1.
  • the dipyrazolylsquarylium-based compound represented by the formula (XV) is preferably a compound obtained by combining the substituents A and B, and the substituent is preferably represented by the following formula (XVI).
  • a dibirazolylsquarylium-based compound is more preferable, and R 2 may have a substituent, and a compound in which R 2 is an alkyl group is still more preferable.
  • the dipyrazolyl squarylium-based compound represented by the formula (XVI) is a novel compound and effectively absorbs light in the 480-520 nm region, which is a valley between blue and green, and has a narrower half-value width. It does not hinder the emission of blue or green phosphors of primary colors, so it can be used for color tone adjustment, color purity improvement, or color reproduction. It is a dye particularly useful as a range expanding dye.
  • R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent
  • R 2 may have a substituent and be an alkyl group or a substituent. Yes, it is good !, indicates an aryl group.
  • each of R 1 and R 2 may be the same or different.
  • R 4 and R 5 may have the same substituents, and may have an alkyl group and a substituent, and may have an aryl group.
  • R 1 is preferably an alkoxy group or an alkyl group optionally substituted by a halogen atom, and particularly preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group having 118 carbon atoms.
  • an alkyl group which may be substituted with an alkoxy group or a halogen atom, or an aryl group which may be substituted with an alkyl group, an alkoxy group or a halogen atom is more preferable. It is a substituted alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms, a phenyl group or an alkylphenyl group, particularly preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms.
  • the electronic display filter of the first invention further contain a compound having a maximum absorption around 530 to 610 nm.
  • a compound having a maximum absorption around 530-6 lOnm in addition to the above formulas (1), ( ⁇ ) and (III), the following formulas (V) — (XI), (XII), (XIII ) And (XVII). [0138] [Formula 20]
  • R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, and a cycloalkyl which may have a substituent And a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group or a halogen atom
  • W in W—X—R 2 represents an imino group or an alkylimino X represents a carbonyl group or a sulfol group
  • R 2 represents a monovalent group or a hydrogen atom
  • i and i are each independently an integer of 0-5
  • m and m each independently represent an integer of 0-5, n and n 'each independently represent an integer of 0-3, i + m + n ⁇ 5, i' + m, + a Ita' ⁇ 5, when R 1 and W- X- R 2 are plural respectively present on the benzene ring, each of R 1 and W-
  • Examples of the alkyl group of R 1 in the formula (V) include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, a decyl group, Examples thereof include straight-chain or branched-chain groups having 120 carbon atoms, such as dodecyl, tridecyl, and pentadecyl groups.
  • Examples of the alkoxy group for R 1 include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, and a propoxy group.
  • a straight-chain having 120 carbon atoms such as butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, heptoxy, octyloxy, decyloxy, pendecyloxy, dodecyloxy, tridecyloxy, pentadecyloxy, etc.
  • the halogen atom for R 1 include a fluorine atom and Examples include a chlorine atom and a bromine atom.
  • Examples of the substituent of the alkyl group, alkoxy group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group and aryloxy group include, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group , Octyl, decyl, etc., C 11 -C 10 alkyl, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, heptyloxy, octyloxy, decyloxy, etc.
  • C10-C10 cycloalkyl group such as alkoxy group, cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, cycloheptyl group, etc., hydroxyl group, fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, etc. And the like.
  • a aryl group, (4) an alkyl group, an alkoxy group or an aryloxy group which may have a halogen atom as a substituent, or (5) a halogen atom is preferable.
  • a chain or branched chain alkyl group or a straight or branched chain alkoxy group having 18 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • alkyl group in the alkylimino group of W in W—X—R 2 in the formula (V) a linear or branched group having 118 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • an imino group or an alkylimino group is preferred, and an imino group is more preferred.
  • R 2 is not a hydrogen atom.
  • R 2 of W- X- R 2 in Formula (V) at for example, the same alkyl groups and ⁇ alkyl group for R 1, same as the alkoxy group in the R 1 alkoxy group, the same cycloalkyl groups and cycloalkyl group in R 1, the same Ariru groups and Ari Le group in R 1, the same Ariruokishi group and Ariruokishi group in R 1, an amino group, and a 3- Heterocyclic groups such as a pyridyl group, a 2-furyl group, a 2-tetrahydrofuryl group, and a 2-chel group; and the like, such as an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, and an amino group.
  • a heterocyclic group are, for example, Alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, cycloalkyl groups, aryl groups, and aryloxy groups having the same substituents as in the above, such as alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, alkoxy groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and cycloalkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms Group, a halogen atom, an aryl group, etc., as a substituent.
  • R 2 in the formula (V) the same alkyl group as the preferable group of the above R 1 , a phenyl group which may be substituted with an alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms, V ⁇ 2-furyl group, alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms substituted with 8 alkyl groups, molybdenum, phenyl group, alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms! And a cyclohexyl group which may be substituted with a 2-tetrahydrofuryl group or a C18 alkyl group.
  • each of R 1 and W- X- R 2 in one benzene ring, or, the other benzene ring May be different from each other.
  • Rs adjacent to each other on one benzene ring may be connected to each other to form an alkanediyl group, an alkylenedioxy group, or the like to form a cyclic structure.
  • R 1 represents a halogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkyl group which may have a substituent! M represents an integer of 13 and n represents an integer of 1-4. ]
  • halogen atom such as a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom and a bromine atom
  • C 1 carbon atoms such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, decyl, pendecyl, dodecyl, tridecyl, pentadecyl, etc.
  • Alkoxycarbonyl groups such as hydroxy, methoxycarboxy, ethoxycarbonyl, butoxycarbonyl, acetyloxycarbonyl, propyloxycarbonyl, etc.
  • an alkyl group such as methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, decyl group, phenyl group, 4-hydroxyphenyl group, 4 Alkoxy (e.g., C11-C10 alkoxy group) phenolic group, 3,4 bisalkoxy (e.g., C11-C10 alkoxy group) phenolic group, 3,5-bisalkoxy (e.g., Phenolic groups such as ethyl groups substituted with an alkoxy group having 11 to 10 carbon atoms) and 3,4,5-trisalkoxy (for example, alkoxy groups having 11 to 10 carbon atoms);
  • R 1 is a linear or branched alkyl group having 16 carbon atoms; a linear or branched alkyl group having 16 carbon atoms substituted with a hydroxyl group or an alkoxycarbyl group.
  • R 6 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, a cycloalkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
  • R 7 is an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an alkoxycarbonyl group which may have a substituent, Cycloalkyl group which may have a substituent, aryl group which may have a substituent group, aryloxy group which may have a substituent group, aryl group which may have a substituent group
  • Z represents an imino group or an alkylimino group
  • L represents a hydrogen atom or XR (R represents Represents a monovalent group or a hydrogen atom
  • X represents a carboxy group or a
  • Examples of the alkyl group of the substituent R 6 in the formula (VII) include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, Examples thereof include straight-chain or branched-chain groups having 120 carbon atoms, such as pendecyl, dodecyl, tridecyl, and pentadecyl groups.
  • Examples of the cycloalkyl group for R 6 include, for example, cyclopropyl and cyclobutyl groups.
  • cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, the group having a carbon number of 1 one 20, such as heptyl group consequent opening include cyclohexane, as the Ariru group R 6, e.g., Hue - group, and a naphthyl group.
  • Examples of the substituent for the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, and the aryl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, and an octyl group.
  • C 11 -C 10 alkoxy groups such as cis, octyloxy, decyloxy,
  • -Aryl group such as naphthyl group, aryloxy group such as phenoxy group and naphthyloxy group, formamino group, alkylcarbolamino group, alkylsulfolamino group, aminocarbol group, alkylaminocarbol Group, dialkylaminocarbol group, aminosulfol group, alkylaminosulfur group, dialkylaminosulfur group, amino group, nitro group, hydroxyl group, halogen atom such as fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom And the like.
  • R 6 may be, as described above, (1) having an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom as a substituent, and Or a branched or branched alkyl group, or (2) an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an amino group, an alkylcarbolamino group, an alkylsulfolamino group, a nitro group, a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom as a substituent.
  • aryl groups and particularly preferred are linear or branched alkyl groups having 18 to 18 carbon atoms which may have an alkoxy group as a substituent.
  • the alkyl group for R 7 is the same as the alkyl group for R 6, and the alkoxy group for R 7 is, for example, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, a butoxy group Straight-chain or branched-chain groups having a carbon number of 120 such as pentyloxy, hexyloxy, heptyloxy, octyloxy, decyloxy, pendecyloxy, dodecyloxy, tridecyloxy, and pentadecyloxy.
  • elevation Gerare the R 7 alkoxycarbonyl - the group, the carboxyalkyl having an alkoxy group - Le group.
  • the aryloxy group includes a phenoxy group, a naphthyloxy group and the like, and the aryloxycarbonyl group for R 7 includes a carbonyl group having the aryloxy group.
  • Examples of the substituents of the alkyl group, alkoxy group, alkoxycarbol group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, aryloxy group, aryloxycarbol group and amino group include, for example, Substitution of alkyl, cycloalkyl and aryl groups at R 6
  • examples of R 7, in the, (1) an alkoxy group, Ariru group, have Ariruokishi group, a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom as a substituent, even I, straight-chain Or (2) an alkoxy group as a substituent, or (3) an alkoxy group as a substituent.
  • a carbon group having a good alkoxy group (4) an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a sulfonamide group, an alkylsulfonamide group, a dialkylsulfonamide group, a nitro group, a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom as a substituent;
  • a aryl group (5) an alkyl group or an alkoxy group as a substituent, and a carbyl group having an aryl group, or (6) an alkyl group, an acyl group or a sulfo group.
  • a straight chain or branched chain alkyl group having 118 carbon atoms which may have an alkoxy group as a substituent is preferable, and an amino group is preferred. Better ,.
  • X- The monovalent groups represented by R in R, the alkyl group in R 6, cycloalkyl group, alkoxy group, Ariruokishi group having Ariru group in R 6, amino group, 3-pyridyl group, 2 And heterocyclic groups such as furyl group, 2-tetrahydrofuryl group, and 2-chel group, and anorecheninole groups such as bur group.
  • the alkyl group of the alkylimino group represented by Z is preferably a linear or branched one having 18 carbon atoms.
  • Z is preferably an imino group or an alkylimino group. Particularly preferred are imino groups, which are preferred.
  • X is a sulfonyl group, R is not a hydrogen atom.
  • R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, a cycloalkyl group which may have a substituent
  • W represents an imino group, an alkylimino group or an oxygen atom
  • R 2 represents a monovalent group or a hydrogen atom
  • i is an integer of 0-5
  • m is an integer of 0-5
  • R 1 and W—X—R 2 Each may be different.
  • R 6 is an alkyl group which may have a substituent, may have a substituent, may have a cycloalkyl group, may have a substituent! /, May have an aryl group or a hydrogen atom.
  • R 7 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an alkoxycarbol group which may have a substituent, Cycloalkyl group which may be substituted, aryl group which may have a substituent group, V which has a substituent group, and aryloxy group which has a substituent group;
  • Z represents an oxygen atom, an imino group or an alkylimino group;
  • L represents a hydrogen atom or XR ( R represents a monovalent group or a hydrogen atom, and X represents a carboxy group or a sulfol group.) Show. ]
  • R 1 represents a hydroxyl group, an amino group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent
  • R 2 represents An alkyl group which may have a group, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, a cycloalkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, or halogen Represents an atom, and s represents an integer of 0-5.
  • the aryl group of R 2 include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group. .
  • the alkoxy group for R 2 include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, a butoxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, a heptyloxy group, an octyloxy group, a decyloxy group, a pendecyloxy group, a dodecyloxy group, a tridecyloxy group, and a pentadecyloxy group.
  • Examples of the group include a linear or branched group having 120 carbon atoms such as a group.
  • Examples of the cycloalkyl group for R 2 include a cyclopropyl group, a cyclobutyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, and a cycloalkyl group.
  • Examples thereof include a group having 120 carbon atoms such as a heptyl group
  • examples of the halogen atom for R 1 include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, and a bromine atom.
  • Examples of the substituent for the alkyl group, alkoxy group, cycloalkyl group and aryl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, Carbons such as heptyl, octyl, decyl and other alkyl groups having 110 carbon atoms, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, heptyloxy, octyloxy, decyloxy, etc.
  • Aryl groups such as cycloalkyl groups having 11 to 10 carbon atoms such as alkoxy groups, cyclopropyl groups, cyclobutyl groups, cyclopentyl groups, cyclohexyl groups, and cycloheptyl groups, phenyl groups, naphthyl groups, and the like; Examples thereof include a halogen atom such as a hydroxyl group, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, and a bromine atom.
  • R 1 represents a hydroxyl group, an amino group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent
  • R 2 represents Represents an alkyl group which may have a group or an aryl group which may have a substituent
  • s represents an integer of 0 to 3.
  • the alkyl group of the RR 2 for example, a methyl group, Echiru group, propyl group, butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, Okuchiru group, decyl group, Undeshiru group , A dodecyl group, a tridecyl group, a pentadecyl group and the like, and a straight-chain or branched-chain group having 112 carbon atoms.
  • the Ariru group R 2 for example, Hue - group, and a naphthyl group.
  • Examples of the substituent of the alkyl group and the aryl group include those having 1 carbon atom such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, and a decyl group.
  • C 1-C 1 such as tyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl and cycloheptyl
  • Aryl groups such as cycloalkyl group, phenyl group, naphthyl group, hydroxyl group, fluorine atom
  • halogen atom such as a chlorine atom and a bromine atom.
  • R 1 to R 8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, or an alkyl group which may have a substituent.
  • M represents two hydrogen atoms, a divalent metal atom, a trivalent monosubstituted metal atom, a tetravalent disubstituted metal atom or an oxymetal atom.
  • examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, and a bromine atom.
  • examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, and a pentyl group. Carbon, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, decyl, decyl, dodecyl, tridecyl, pentadecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, etc.
  • Examples thereof include straight-chain, branched-chain and cyclic groups having the number of 11 to 20, and examples of the alkoxy group include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, a butoxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, and a heptyloxy group.
  • the aryloxy group include a hydrocarbon group such as a phenoxy group and a naphthyloxy group.
  • Examples include a heterocyclic aryloxy group such as an aryloxy group, a cheloxy group, a fluorooxy group, or a pyridyloxy group.
  • the alkylamino group or the dialkylamino group includes a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, and a butyl group.
  • Examples of the substituted amino group include an alkylthio group such as a methylthio group and an ethylthio group.
  • a straight-chain of 120 carbons such as thio, propylthio, butylthio, pentylthio, hexylthio, heptylthio, octylthio, decylthio, undecylthio, dodecylthio, tridecylthio, pentadecylthio, etc.
  • an aryloxy group for example, a fluorothio group or a naphthylthio group.
  • Examples of the substituent for the alkyl group, alkoxy group, aryl group, aryloxy group, alkylamino group, dialkylamino group, alkylthio group and arylthio group include, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, butyl group, C11-C10 alkyl groups such as pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, decyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl and cycloheptyl; methoxy Ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, heptyloxy group, octyloxy group, decyloxy group, etc., alkoxy group having 110 carbon atoms; hydroxyl group; fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, etc.
  • R 1 and R 2 , R 3 and R 4 , R 5 and R 6 , R 7 and R 8 are each connected to form — (CH 2)
  • CH 2 (CH 2) It may form an aliphatic carbon ring such as primary.
  • R 1 to R 8 are, as described above, (1) a linear or branched chain which may have an alkoxy group or a halogen atom as a substituent.
  • An alkyl group (2) a straight-chain or branched-chain alkyl group as a substituent, or a cycloalkyl group, (3) an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or a halogen atom as a substituent.
  • M represents two hydrogen atoms; two, three, four, eight, nine, ten, and ten groups of the periodic table based on the inorganic chemical nomenclature 1990 rule. Indicates a divalent metal atom, a trivalent mono-substituted metal atom, a tetravalent di-substituted metal atom, or an oxy metal atom, for which an elemental force belonging to genera 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15 is also selected.
  • divalent metal atoms include Cu, Zn, Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rd, Pd, Mn, Sn, Mg, Ti, etc.
  • trivalent monosubstituted metal atoms include A1— Examples include halogen atoms such as Cl, Ga—Cl, In—Cl, FeCl, and Ru—CI, and metal atoms mono-substituted with a hydroxyl group or an alkoxy group.
  • Examples thereof include a metal atom disubstituted with a 2222 222 atom, a hydroxyl group or an alkoxy group, and examples of the oxymetal include VO, MnO, and TiO. Of these, VO, Cu, Ni and Co are preferred, and VO and Cu are more preferred.
  • R 1 to R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a -toro group, a cyano group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, 20 alkyl groups, halogenoalkyl groups with 1 to 20 carbon atoms, alkoxy groups with 1 to 20 carbon atoms, alkenyl groups with 2 to 20 carbon atoms, alkoxyalkyl groups with 2 to 20 carbon atoms, 2 to 20 carbon atoms An alkoxyalkoxy group of 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryloxy group of 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an acyl group of 11 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkoxycarboyl group of 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkylaminocarboyl group of 2 to 20 carbon atoms, C3-20 dialkylaminocarboyl group, C2-20 alkylcarboamin
  • R 8 — R 11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, Alkyl group, halogenoalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, alkoxyalkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, 2 to 20 carbon atoms Alkoxy alkoxy group, aryloxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, acyl group having 11 to 20 carbon atoms, alkoxycarboyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, alkylaminocarbol group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, carbon number A 3-20 dialkylaminocarboyl group, a 2-20 carbon alkylcarbalumino group, a 7-20 carbon atom phenyl
  • R 1 to R 11 in the above formulas (XII) and ( ⁇ ) include a hydrogen atom; a nitro group; a cyano group; a hydroxy group; an amino group; a carboxyl group; a sulfonic acid group; fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine.
  • alkoxyalkoxy groups C6-20 aryloxy such as phenoxy, 2-methylphenoxy, 4-methylphenoxy, 4-t-butylphenoxy, 2-methoxyphenoxy, 4-iso-propylphenoxy, etc.
  • Ralkoxycarbol group methoxycarbolmethoxycarbol group, ethoxycarbolmethoxycarbol group, n-propoxycarbolmethoxycarbol group, isopropoxycarbol methoxycarbol C4-C20 alkoxycarboxyalkoxycarbol group such as a group; methyl A C420-C20 alkylcarboxyalkoxycarbol group such as a carboxymethoxycarbyl group and an ethylcarboxymethoxycarbyl group; a hydroxyethylaminocarbol group and a 2-hydroxypropylamino A mono (hydroxyalkyl) aminocarbol group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms such as a carboxyl group and a 3-hydroxypropylpyraminocarbyl group; a di (hydroxyethyl) aminocarbol group, a di (2-hydroxypropyl) group ) C3-C20 di (hydroxyalkyl) aminocarboyl groups such as aminocarboyl group and di (3
  • the metal M which forms a chelate compound together with the dipyrromethene compound represented by the formula (XII) is not particularly limited as long as it is generally a metal having the ability to form a chelate conjugate with a dibenzopyrromethene compound. , 9, 10 (VIII), 11 (lb), 12 (lib), 3 (Ilia), 4 (IVa), 5 (Va), 6 (Via) ) And Group 7 (Vila group) metals, preferably transition elements such as nickel, cobalt, iron, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, copper, osmium, iridium, platinum and zinc. [0186] [Formula 29]
  • - ⁇ - represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a group represented by —CR 1 ! ⁇ -(R 1 and R 2 each independently have 1 to 4 carbon atoms) Or RR 2 can be taken together to form a 3- to 6-membered ring which may contain an oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atom.
  • Y is each independently an organic group X represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group; R represents a halogen atom, a nitro group, an alkoxy group or an aryl group; k represents 1 or 2; Represents an m-valent ion, m represents an integer of 1 or 2, and p represents a coefficient for keeping the charge neutral.
  • Examples of the alkyl group having 14 carbon atoms represented by R 2 include methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, isobutyl and the like. Further, it may have a substituent which may contain a 3- to 6-membered ring oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atom capable of forming R 1 R 2 force.
  • Examples of the organic group which may have a substituent include cyclopropane 1,1-diyl, cyclobutane 1,1-diyl, 2,4-dimethylcyclobutane 1,1-diyl, 3-dimethylcyclobutane 1,1-diyl, and cyclobutane.
  • the organic group represented by Y is not particularly limited and includes, for example, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, isobutyl, amyl, isoamyl, tert-amyl, hexyl, and cyclohexyl.
  • a C1-C8 alkyl group butyl, 1-methylethyl, 2-methylethyl, propeninole, buteninole, isobuteninole, penteninole, hexeninole, hepteninole, octeyl, deceyl, pentadeceyl, 1 Alkyl groups such as phenylpropene 3-yl, phenol, naphthyl, 2-methylphenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 4-vinylphenol, 3-isopropylphenol, 4-isopropyl Fe, 4-butyl, 4-isobutyl, 4-tert-butyl, 4-xysyl, 4-cyclohexyl, 4-octyl, 4- (2-ethylhexyl) -4-phenylphenyl, 2,3-dimethylphenyl, 2,4-dimethylphenyl, 2,5-dimethyl
  • these groups may be substituted with an alkoxy group, an alkyl group, a nitro group, a cyano group, a halogen atom, or the like.
  • halogen atom represented by X include a fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine atom
  • alkyl group and the aryl group include those similar to those exemplified in the description of Y.
  • Examples of the halogen atom for R include a fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine atom, and examples of the alkoxy group include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, an n-propoxy group, an n-butoxy group, an iso-butyloxy group, and an n-xysiloxy group.
  • Examples of the anions represented by Anm- include, as monovalent, halogen-ones such as chlorine-one, bromine-one, iodine-one, and fluorine-one; -One, chloric acid, thiocyanate
  • Organic sulfonic acids such as inorganic arnone, benzenesulfonic acid arnone, toluenesulfonic acid arnone, trifluoromethanesulfonic acid arnone; octyl phosphate, dodecyl phosphate, Octadecyl phosphate, ferric phosphate,
  • Organic phosphoric acid a-ones such as 2-phenyl-phosphoric acid-one and 2,2-methylenebis (4,6-di-tert-butylphenyl) phosphonate; Examples thereof include benzenedisulfonic acid aone, naphthalenedisulfonic acid aone and the like. Also, quencher-one, which is a metal complex conjugate, can be used if necessary.
  • Examples of the quenchers described above include those described in JP-A-60-234892 and JP-A-22002-350632.
  • R 3 and R 4 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a —SO 2 —Z group (Z is a dialkylamino group, a diarylamino group , Piperidino group
  • A) and b each represent 0-3.
  • RR 6 , R 7 and R 8 each independently represent an alkyl group, an alkylphenyl group, an alkoxyphenyl group or a halogenated phenyl group, M represents a nickel or copper atom, and M represents a nickel or copper atom. Represents an atom. ]
  • examples of the halogen atom for the substituents R 3 and R 4 include fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine atoms, and examples of the alkyl group and aryl group include those of the above formula (XVII ) And the same substituents as those exemplified in the section of the substituent Y.
  • Examples of the alkyl group ⁇ include a linear or branched alkyl group having 118 carbon atoms, and examples of the aryl group of ⁇ are substituted with a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, or a bromine atom.
  • the alkyl group of the dialkylamino group may be a linear or branched alkyl group having 118 carbon atoms.
  • an electron-withdrawing group is preferred, and in particular, a 2,3,5-trichloro group, a 2,3-dichloro group, a 2,4-dichloro group, a 2,5-dichloro group , —SO Z is preferred.
  • Z group includes dimethylamino group,
  • Lamino, di-n-propylamino, di-n-butylamino, piperidino, and morpholino groups are preferred, and morpholino groups are particularly preferred.
  • the alkyl group of R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 and the alkyl group of the alkylphenol group include the substituent Y of the above formula (XVII)
  • the same ones as those exemplified in the section are mentioned.
  • Examples of the alkoxy group of the alkoxyphenyl group include the same as those exemplified in the section of the substituent R in the above formula (XVII) .
  • Halogen of the halogenated vinyl group includes fluorine, chlorine, and bromine. And iodine atoms.
  • the squarylium compound of the formula (I) and the formula (X) and the compound of the formula (XV)-(XVII) have different absorption wavelengths depending on the type of the substituent, and the tetraazaporphyrin compound of the formula (XI)
  • the absorption wavelength of the pyrromethene compound of the formula (II) differs depending on the combination of the type of the substituent and the central metal M.
  • Preferable examples of the squarylium-based compound of the formula (V) for expressing the minimum value K of the transmittance around 530 to 610 nm include the compounds exemplified in JP-A-2002-363434. Specific examples are shown below.
  • Preferred examples of the squarium-based compound of the formula (VII) for expressing a minimum value of transmittance K around 530-610 nm include, in the formula (VII), ⁇ represents an imino group and L represents a hydrogen atom. And R 6 and R 7 are compounds in which an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent. Preferred examples are shown below. [0202] [Formula 34]
  • L is a hydrogen atom
  • R 6 and R 7 may have an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or may have a substituent, and are preferably aryl groups. The preferred examples are shown below.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 7 is an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom or an aryl group, and s is preferably a 0-2 conjugate. The following are specific examples of the preferred levels.
  • tetraazaporphyrin compound of the formula (XI) for giving a minimum value of transmittance K around 530—6 lOnm at least four groups of R 1 to R 8 in the formula (XI) Is an alkyl group, the rest is a hydrogen atom, a metal atom M is a compound of VO, Cu, Ni, Co, or R 1 and R 2 , R 3 and R 4
  • R. And R 6 , R 7 and R 8 are connected to form an aliphatic group such as — (CH 2) 1, — (CH 2) 1, — (CH 2)
  • A-1 of * 1 represents the following structure in formula (A).
  • Compounds of the formulas (V)-(XII), (XVII), (I)-(III) and the like having the maximum absorption in the wavelength range of 530-610 nm used in the filter of the present invention include:
  • the transmittance curve preferably has a sharp valley shape (valley shape) so as not to hinder the light emission of the display, and the half width of the transmittance curve is preferably 60 nm or less.
  • the electronic display filter of the first invention is characterized in that the above-mentioned squarylium-based compound and Z or tetraazaporphyrin-based compound and Z or cyanine-based compound are contained alone or as a mixture in a binder resin. Can be obtained. Specifically, (1) a film made of a binder resin containing the above-described squarylium-based compound and Z or tetraazaporphyrin-based compound and Z or cyanine-based compound on a sheet-like or film-like transparent base material.
  • a plurality of squarylium-based compounds and Z or tetrazaporphyrin-based compounds and Z or cyanine-based compounds are mixed in separate binder resins, respectively, and each binder containing the compounds is mixed.
  • a method comprising laminating a plurality of sheets or films made of a resin and laminating a laminate comprising layers in which the obtained individual compounds are present separately on a sheet-shaped or film-shaped transparent substrate. .
  • the filter for an electronic display of the first invention can be configured to include functions necessary for a filter, such as antireflection, near-infrared absorption, and electromagnetic wave absorption.
  • the electronic display filter of the first invention has a luminous transmittance of usually 10% or more, preferably 20% or more, more preferably 30% or more, in order not to greatly reduce the luminance of the electronic display light emission. Preferably it is at least 40%.
  • Luminous transmittance is JIS Z8105-1982 Is the ratio of the luminous flux ⁇ t passing through an object to the luminous flux ⁇ i incident on the object, ⁇ ⁇ / ⁇ ⁇ , and the relative spectral responsivity of the human visual system to the sense of brightness (spectral luminous efficiency ), The average of the transmittance in the wavelength range of 380 to 780 nm, which roughly correlates with the relative brightness of the object. It is used as an indicator of
  • the luminous transmittance was calculated by the following method.
  • UV3100PC (trade name) manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation
  • a plasma display (H32 “W32-PD2100” (trade name)) was measured as the emission spectrum of the electronic display with a spectral radiance meter (“CS-1000” (trade name) manufactured by Minolta). ) was used.
  • an ultraviolet absorbing layer can be provided.
  • the ultraviolet absorbing layer a known ultraviolet absorbing layer which is not particularly limited can be used.
  • the transmittance of the ultraviolet absorbing layer is preferably less than 5% at a light wavelength of 380 nm or less.
  • the filter for an electronic display of the first invention can be provided with a near-infrared cut layer and an electromagnetic wave cut layer.
  • the near-infrared cut layer is placed on the front of the display to prevent malfunctions in remote control and transmission optical communication due to near-infrared radiation emitted from the plasma display.
  • the electromagnetic wave cut layer can use a vapor deposition or sputtering method of metal oxide, a mesh formed by etching a copper foil / a copper plating layer, or the like, and cuts an electromagnetic wave radiated from an electronic display.
  • a well-known near-infrared cut layer and an electromagnetic wave cut layer which are not particularly limited can be used.
  • an antireflection layer and a Z or anti-glare layer can be provided.
  • the anti-reflection layer and the anti-glare layer are not particularly limited, and may be any of known anti-reflection layers and anti-glare layers.
  • An anti-glitter layer can be used.
  • This filter for electronic display can be used as a single layer or as a laminate bonded to a transparent glass, a transparent resin plate or the like. Further, the present invention can be implemented by combining the characteristics of a plurality of members such as a member directly attached to a display surface of an electronic display, a member installed as a laminate bonded to a transparent glass, a transparent resin plate, or the like. Monkey
  • the electronic display filter of the first invention can be applied to a light-emitting display device to obtain an electronic display device.
  • a known display device or a commercially available product can be used without particular limitation.
  • the electronic display filter according to the second to fifth aspects of the present invention is characterized in that (a) the light transmittance Y4 (%) of the wavelength of the green light emission peak of the light emitting display device, The light transmittance Y2 (%) of the wavelength of 5 or more is lower, or (b) The luminous transmittance Y1 (%) when using the white light emission spectrum of the light emitting display device Green Light transmittance at the wavelength of the emission peak Y3 (%) Force Low transmission characteristics.
  • the electronic display filter targeted by the second to fifth inventions has a configuration including functions necessary for a filter, such as an external light suppressing layer, a near-infrared absorbing layer, and an electromagnetic wave shielding layer.
  • the light transmittance Y4 (%) of the wavelength of the green emission peak of the light-emitting display device to be installed (the wavelength is often 525 nm in the case of a plasma display panel, but varies depending on the type of phosphor, etc.) is 3%.
  • the light transmittance Y2 (%) of the wavelength of the green emission peak of the wavelength-band emission type fluorescent tube is usually 5 or more, preferably 7 or more, more preferably 10 or more, or the white emission spectrum of the light-emitting display device was used.
  • the light transmittance Y2 (%) at the green emission peak wavelength (usually 545 nm) of the three-band fluorescent tube is usually 1 or more, preferably 3 or more, and more preferably the luminous transmittance Y1 (%). Is 5 or more lower.
  • the emission spectrum (JIS Z8719—1996) of the three-band fluorescent lamp F10 is used.
  • the luminous transmittance Y3 ′ (%) obtained is preferably 1 or more, preferably 3 or more, more preferably 5 or more lower than the luminous transmittance Y1 (%).
  • the luminous transmittance Y3 '(%) is 1 or more lower, the effect of improving the light-dark contrast is more obtained.
  • the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) is usually 10 or more, preferably 20 or more, and more preferably 30 or more.
  • the luminous transmittance is the ratio of the luminous flux ⁇ t passing through an object to the luminous flux ⁇ i incident on an object, described in JIS Z8105—1982, which is ⁇ / i, which is equivalent to the brightness perception of the human visual system. This is the average value of the transmittance in the wavelength range of 380 to 780 nm, taking into account the relative spectral response (spectral luminous efficiency). And? Since the luminous transmittance is roughly correlated with the lightness indicating the relative brightness of the object, the luminous transmittance is used as an index of the brightness Z darkness of the filter.
  • a conventionally used ND filter neutral density filter: visible light
  • the filter has the same transmittance in the range, and is used for the purpose of reducing the amount of light), or the same effect as a ND filter cannot be obtained.
  • the filter for an electronic display according to the 2nd-5th invention can be used alone or as a laminate bonded to a transparent glass or another transparent resin plate. Also, by combining the characteristics of multiple members, such as members directly attached to the display surface of a light-emitting display device and members installed as a laminate bonded to transparent glass or another transparent resin plate, etc. — 5 inventions can be implemented.
  • the electronic display filter according to the second to fifth inventions can be applied to a light-emitting display device to obtain an electronic display device.
  • a known display device can be used without particular limitation as long as it is a commercially available product.
  • the absorption peak of the external light suppressing layer is set so that the green light emitted from the fluorescent light source F10 in the three wavelength region is well absorbed and the green light emitted from the plasma display panel is well transmitted. Will be designed.
  • the transmission spectrum 16 of the external light suppressing layer having the minimum value K in the wavelength range of 530 to 610 nm has a sharp valley shape so that the emission luminance of the display panel is ensured.
  • the plasma display panel emits strong light near the wavelength of 595 nm
  • cutting the 530 to 610 nm area weakens the light emission of the plasma display panel in this wavelength range and lowers the contrast, but this 595 nm light is encapsulated in the cell. This is due to the emission of Ne gas, which is an unnecessary component. Therefore, it is preferable to design so as to cut a light emitting component in a wavelength range of 530-6 lOnm.
  • a compound having a maximum absorption in a wavelength range of 530 to 610 nm usually a diphenylsquarylium-based compound represented by the following formula (XVIII), and a compound represented by the following formula (XI)
  • a diphenylsquarylium-based compound represented by the following formula (XVIII) usually a diphenylsquarylium-based compound represented by the following formula (XVIII), and a compound represented by the following formula (XI)
  • a tetraazaporphyrin-based compound a ferbilazolyl-based squarylium-based compound represented by the following formula ( ⁇ ) and Z or a pyromethene-based compound represented by the following formula (XIX) It is an optically functional film formed.
  • an optical functional film formed using a diphenylsquarylium-based compound represented by the following general formula (XVIII) and Z or a tetrazaporphyrin-based compound represented by the following formula (XI) is preferable.
  • R 1 may have a substituent! /, May have an alkyl group, may have a substituent! /, May have an alkoxy group, may have a substituent, May have an aryl group or a substituent. Indicates a aryloxy group or a halogen atom.
  • adjacent R 1 may be taken together to form an alkanediyl group or an alkylenedioxy group.
  • R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent
  • G 1 represents NR—
  • R 3 represents a group (here, R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group) or an oxygen atom
  • G 2 represents a carboxy group or a sulfol group (here, G 2 When is a sulfol-group, R 2 is not a hydrogen atom.)
  • n and p are integers of 0 or more, and m + n + p is 5 or less.
  • R 1 to R 8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, or an alkyl group which may have a substituent.
  • M represents two hydrogen atoms, divalent metal atoms, trivalent monosubstituted metal atoms, tetravalent disubstituted metal atoms or oxymetal atoms. . ] [0250] [Formula 46]
  • R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an alkoxy group which may have a substituent
  • the substituent A is a hydroxyl group or W—X — R 2
  • W represents an imino group
  • X represents a carboxyl group or a sulfol group
  • R 2 represents a hydrogen atom
  • R 6 and R 6 may be a heterocyclic group
  • m may represent 0 or 1, and may have a aryl group or a substituent, and may have a aryl group or a substituent
  • 7 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group
  • Z represents an oxygen atom.
  • R 1 —R 4 and R 7 —R U each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, An alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a halogenoalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkoxyalkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, C2-C20 alkoxyalkoxy, C6-C20 aryloxy, C1-C20 Alkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, alkoxyamino group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, alkylaminocarbon group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, dialkylaminocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, alkyl carboxyl having 2 to 20 carbon
  • R 8 to R 11 have the same meanings as described above, and M represents a transition metal.
  • a film for suppressing external light using such a compound is obtained by incorporating the above compounds individually or in a mixed state into a binder resin and forming the film or sheet by a known method.
  • the electronic display filter according to the second invention is characterized in that (a) the light transmittance of the green light emission peak wavelength of the three-wavelength emission fluorescent tube is obtained from the light transmittance Y4 (%) of the light emission display device at the green light emission peak wavelength. Rate Y2 (%) is 5 or more lower, or (b) from the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) when using the white emission spectrum of the light-emitting display device, the wave of the green emission peak of the three-band emission fluorescent tube Long light transmittance Y3 (%) has transmission characteristics lower by 1 or more,
  • An external light suppression layer that suppresses transmission of a specific wavelength component of incident light on the light-emitting display device side surface of an electronic display filter and an electromagnetic wave shield layer that suppresses electromagnetic wave radiation from the electronic display device are formed by an electromagnetic wave shield.
  • the layer is arranged so that the layer is closer to the light emitting display device than the external light suppressing layer.
  • FIG. 4 shows an example of the emission spectrum 14 of a plasma display panel as an example of a light-emitting display device, the emission spectrum 15 of a three-band fluorescent lamp F10 as an example of an external light source, and the transmission spectrum 16 of a filter satisfying the above conditions.
  • FIG. 5 shows the emission spectrum 14 of the plasma display panel shown in FIG. 4 and the emission spectrum 15 of the three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10 after passing through a filter having a transmission spectrum 16.
  • the spectra 14 'and 15' are shown. It can be seen that the external light is greatly reduced compared to the plasma display emission. Note that, as described above, the light that has passed through the external light suppressing layer twice is actually observed, and therefore, the emission spectrum 15 ′ of the external light in FIG. 5 shows the light transmitted through the filter twice.
  • the filter for the electronic display according to the present embodiment is different from the filter for the electronic display according to the present embodiment in order to exhibit the effect of improving the contrast between light and dark, which has a sufficient function of the external light suppressing layer.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding layer instead of providing the electromagnetic wave shielding layer in the optical path until external light incident on the display device reaches the external light suppressing layer, the electromagnetic wave shielding layer has a higher reflectivity than that of the member described above, but is located closer to the light emitting display device side than the external light suppressing layer. Deploy. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in contrast between light and dark due to external light reflected on the surface of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer, and thus to fully utilize the function of the external light suppressing layer.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of optical members in a plasma display device as an example of a display device to which the filter for an electronic display according to the present embodiment is applied.
  • the plasma display device includes, for example, an external light introducing layer 1, a glass plate 3, and a near-infrared absorbing layer from the side where the external light source 20, which is a three-wavelength emission fluorescent lamp, is present (outermost surface). 7, an external light suppressing layer 11, an electromagnetic shield layer 4, and a plasma display panel 12.
  • the members other than the plasma display panel 12 are bonded together by an adhesive layer (not shown) to form an electronic display filter 100.
  • the filter 100 and the plasma display panel 12 are arranged with a predetermined space therebetween. The space may be filled with a transparent resin sheet or an adhesive layer.
  • the configuration of the electronic display filter 100 will be further described.
  • the glass plate 3 is made of, for example, tempered glass, and mainly serves to improve the appearance of the display device and also functions as a base material of the filter 100.
  • an external light introducing layer 1 is provided on one surface of the glass plate 3.
  • the external light introducing layer 1 is preferably a layer that transmits external light incident on the filter without reflecting or scattering the same.
  • the luminous transmittance according to JIS Z8105-1982 is preferably 90% or more, more preferably 95% or more.
  • Such an external light introducing layer 1 is formed into a film or sheet by dispersing or mixing a material having a high luminous transmittance in a transparent binder resin, or is formed as a coating film on a transparent substrate. It can be formed by various methods, for example, directly on a transparent substrate by vapor deposition or the like, or by sticking a film-like object on the substrate.
  • the thickness of the external light guiding layer is preferably about 137.5 nm, which is the 1Z4 wavelength of 550 nm at which the human eye is most sensitive, it is preferable to form such a thin film by a method capable of forming such a thin film. .
  • the external light introducing layer 1 needs to have a lower refractive index than the adjacent layer (here, the glass plate 3), and the difference is preferably 0.06 or more, more preferably 0.10 or more. That is all.
  • the material and composition of the external light introducing layer are not particularly limited as long as the luminous transmittance and the above conditions are satisfied.
  • the near-infrared absorbing layer 7 has a structure in which a film having a near-infrared absorbing function is attached to one or both sides of a transparent base material such as a PET sheet, and absorbs near-infrared emitted from the plasma display panel 12. Cut it.
  • An external light suppressing layer 11 having the above-described optical characteristics is provided on the inner surface side of the near-infrared absorbing layer 7 via an adhesive layer (not shown).
  • the external light suppressing layer 11 is a layer of light of a specific wavelength range of the external light source 20. By absorbing the radiation, external light reaches the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 and the display panel 12, which will be described later, and return light due to reflection and scattering from the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 and the display panel 12 goes out of the display device. It suppresses both returning and suppresses the contrast of light and dark by external light.
  • the external light suppressing layer 11 has a configuration in which, for example, an external light suppressing functional film having the above-described transmission characteristics is attached on a transparent sheet made of PET. Further, the external light suppressing layer 11 contains the above-described compound having the maximum absorption in the wavelength range of 530-6 lOnm.
  • the external light suppressing layer 11 is further provided with an electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 via an adhesive layer (not shown).
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is formed, for example, by providing a metal thin film on a base material such as a PET sheet, and patterning the metal thin film by a method such as chemical etching to form a conductive mesh or on a base material.
  • the conductive thin film is formed by sputtering or the like, and is connected to a ground (not shown) to shield electromagnetic waves emitted from the plasma display panel 12.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding layer is formed of a mesh-shaped conductive material, unevenness caused by a portion where the conductive material exists and a portion where the conductive material does not exist is covered with a UV-curable resin or the like to smooth the surface. Is also good. In this case, it is preferable that the difference in the refractive index between the base material of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 and the smoothing material is small.
  • the surface of the conductive mesh may be blackened by a known method to further suppress the reflection by the mesh. Note that a color tone correction layer other than that shown in FIG. 3 may be included in the filter 100 for an electronic display.
  • the respective layers are bonded together by making the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer transparent by a heat treatment under pressure to form a filter 100. As shown in FIG. 6, the filter 100 and the display panel 12 may be bonded together via the adhesive layer 13).
  • the near-infrared absorbing layer 7, the external light suppressing layer 11, and the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 are configured in this order, but the order of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 and the external light suppressing layer 11 is maintained.
  • the arrangement of layers other than the external light introducing layer 1 is arbitrary.
  • the electronic display filter according to the third aspect of the present invention is characterized in that (a) the light transmittance of the green emission peak wavelength of the three-wavelength emission fluorescent tube is obtained from the light transmittance Y4 (%) of the green emission peak wavelength of the light emitting display device. Rate Y2 (%) is 5 or more lower, or (b) from the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) when using the white emission spectrum of the light-emitting display device, the wave of the green emission peak of the three-band emission fluorescent tube Long light transmittance Y3 (%) has transmission characteristics lower by 1 or more,
  • An external light introducing layer having a luminous transmittance of 90% or more is disposed on the outermost surface of the filter for an electronic display.
  • FIG. 8 shows the emission spectrum 14 of a plasma display panel as an example of a light-emitting display device, the emission spectrum 15 of a three-band fluorescent lamp F10 as an example of an external light source, and suppression of external light that meets the above conditions.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a transmission spectrum 16 of the layer.
  • FIG. 9 shows an emission spectrum 14 of the plasma display panel shown in FIG. 8 and an emission spectrum 15 of the three-band fluorescent lamp F10 having a transmission spectrum 16.
  • the emission spectra 14 ′ and 15 ′ after transmission through the external light suppression layer are shown. It can be seen that the external light is greatly reduced compared to the plasma display emission. However, as described above, since the external light that has passed through the external light suppressing layer twice is actually observed, the emission spectrum 15 ′ of the external light in FIG. It shows what has been transmitted.
  • the effect of improving the contrast between light and dark by sufficiently utilizing the function of the external light suppressing layer and the suppression of coloring of the filter when not in use are provided.
  • An embodiment for satisfying both will be described below.
  • the incident external light is used.
  • the layer is preferably a layer that transmits light without being reflected or scattered.
  • the external light introducing layer according to the present embodiment has a luminous transmittance according to JIS Z8105-1982 of usually 90% or more, preferably 95% or more.
  • Such an external light introducing layer is formed, for example, by dispersing or mixing a material having a high luminous transmittance in a transparent binder resin to form a film or sheet, or by forming a coating on a transparent substrate. It can be formed by various methods such as, for example, by directly providing on a transparent substrate by vapor deposition, or by attaching a film-like object on the substrate.
  • the thickness of the external light guiding layer is preferably about 137.5 nm, which is the 1Z4 wavelength of 550 nm at which the human eye is most sensitive, it is preferable to form such a thin film by a method capable of forming such a thin film. .
  • the external light introducing layer needs to have a lower refractive index than the adjacent layer (including the substrate of the external light introducing layer), and the difference is preferably at least 0.06, more preferably at least 0.10. is there.
  • the material and composition of the external light introducing layer are not particularly limited as long as the luminous transmittance and the above-mentioned conditions are satisfied.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of optical members in a plasma display device as an example of a display device to which the filter for an electronic display according to the present embodiment is applied.
  • the plasma display device is arranged such that the external light introducing layer 1, the glass plate 3, and the external light source 20, such as a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp, are located from the side (outermost surface side). It has an electromagnetic shield layer 4, a near-infrared absorbing layer 7, an external light suppressing layer 11, and a plasma display panel 12. The members other than the plasma display panel 12 are adhered by an adhesive layer, not shown, to constitute an electronic display filter 100.
  • the filter 100 and the plasma display panel 12 are arranged in a predetermined space!
  • the glass plate 3 is made of, for example, tempered glass, and mainly adjusts the appearance of the display device, and also includes a filter 100. Also functions as a base material.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is, for example, a metal thin film provided on a base material such as a PET sheet and a conductive mesh formed by etching the metal thin film, or a conductive thin film formed on the base material by sputtering or the like. It is connected to a ground (not shown) and shields electromagnetic waves emitted from the plasma display panel 12.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is provided with a near-infrared absorbing layer 7 via an adhesive layer (not shown).
  • the near-infrared absorbing layer 7 has a structure in which a film having a near-infrared absorbing function is attached to one or both sides of a transparent base material such as a PET sheet, and cuts near infrared emitted from the plasma display panel 12. I do.
  • the external light suppressing layer 11 has the above-described transmission characteristics, and absorbs light of a specific wavelength range of the external light source 20 so that the external light reaches the display panel 12 and the arrived light is transmitted to the display device. It suppresses both returning to the outside and suppresses the contrast of light and dark contrast caused by external light.
  • the external light suppressing layer 11 like the near infrared absorbing layer 7, has a configuration in which an external light suppressing functional film having the above-described transmission characteristics is attached to a transparent sheet made of PET, for example. Further, the external light suppressing layer 11 contains the above-described compound having the maximum absorption in the wavelength range of 530 nm to 610 nm. Note that a color tone correction layer other than that shown in FIG. 7 may be included in the electronic display filter 100.
  • an external light introduction layer having a luminous transmittance of 90% or more on the outermost surface of the filter for an electronic display external light incident on the display device is provided.
  • the ratio of reaching the external light suppression layer increases, and even if the external light suppression layer is provided at a position apart from the outermost surface of the filter, its performance can be fully utilized and the contrast between light and dark is improved. I do.
  • a sufficient contrast between light and dark can be obtained without increasing the amount of the dye used in the external light suppressing layer, the coloring of the filter when it is not used is hard to be observed.
  • external light reflected on the outermost surface of the electronic display filter (the surface of the glass 3 in the configuration of FIG. 7) is hardly reflected, so that the contrast is further improved. It becomes possible.
  • the filter for an electronic display according to the fourth invention comprises: (a) light having a wavelength of a green emission peak of the light emitting display device; Light transmittance ⁇ 2 (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the three-band fluorescent tube is 5 or more lower than the linear transmittance Y4 (%), or (b) The white emission spectrum of the light-emitting display device was used.
  • the light transmittance Y3 (%) of the wavelength of the green emission peak of the three-band fluorescent tube has a transmission characteristic lower by 1 or more than the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) of the case,
  • the filter for an electronic display is composed of a transparent base material having a haze value of 1.5% or less.
  • FIG. 8 shows the emission spectrum 14 of a plasma display panel as an example of a light-emitting display device, the emission spectrum 15 of a three-band fluorescent lamp F10 as an example of an external light source, and the transmission spectrum of an external light suppression layer satisfying the above conditions.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the light emission spectrum of the plasma display panel shown in FIG. 8, and FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the external light suppression having the light emission spectrum 15 and the transmission spectrum 16 of the three-band fluorescent lamp F10. Emission spectra 14 ′ and 15 ′ after transmission through the layer are shown. It can be seen that the external light is greatly reduced as compared with the plasma display emission. However, since external light that actually passed through the external light suppression layer twice was actually observed as described above, the external light emission portal 15 ′ in FIG. Show what has been transmitted once.
  • the embodiment of the fourth invention uses a member having specific optical characteristics for a functional layer or a base material constituting a filter for an electronic display, and in particular, by using a member having specific optical characteristics for the base material, thereby reducing the light scattered inside the filter.
  • the purpose of this method is to suppress the decrease in the contrast of light and dark, and to make full use of the function of the external light suppressing layer.
  • Fig. 7 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of optical members in a plasma display device as an example of a display device to which the filter for an electronic display according to the present embodiment is applied.
  • the plasma display device is arranged such that the external light introduction layer 1, the glass plate 3, the external light source 20, such as a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp, are located from the side where the external light source 20 exists (the outermost surface side). It has an electromagnetic shield layer 4, near-infrared absorption layer 7, outside light suppression layer 11, and plasma display panel 12. To do.
  • the members other than the plasma display panel 12 are adhered by an adhesive layer, not shown, to constitute an electronic display filter 100.
  • the filter 100 and the plasma display panel 12 are arranged in a predetermined space!
  • the configuration of the electronic display filter 100 will be further described.
  • the glass plate 3 is made of, for example, tempered glass, and mainly serves to improve the appearance of the display device and also functions as a base material of the filter 100.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is, for example, a metal thin film provided on a base material such as a PET sheet and a conductive mesh formed by etching the metal thin film, or a conductive thin film formed on the base material by sputtering or the like. It is connected to a ground (not shown) and shields electromagnetic waves emitted from the plasma display panel 12.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is provided with a near-infrared absorbing layer 7 via an adhesive layer (not shown).
  • the near-infrared absorbing layer 7 has a structure in which a film having a near-infrared absorbing function is attached to one or both sides of a transparent base material such as a PET sheet, and cuts near infrared emitted from the plasma display panel 12. I do.
  • the external light suppressing layer 11 has the above-described transmission characteristics, and absorbs light of a specific wavelength range of the external light source 20 so that the external light reaches the display panel 12 and the arrived light is transmitted to the display device. It suppresses both returning to the outside and suppresses the contrast of light and dark contrast caused by external light.
  • the external light suppressing layer 11, like the near infrared absorbing layer 7, has a configuration in which an external light suppressing functional film having the above-described transmission characteristics is attached to a transparent sheet made of PET, for example. Further, the external light suppressing layer 11 contains the above-described compound having the maximum absorption in the wavelength range of 530 to 610 nm. Note that a color tone correction layer or the like other than that shown in FIG. 7 may be included in the electronic display filter 100.
  • At least one of the layers existing in the optical path from the external light source to the external light suppressing layer has a haze value according to JIS K7105. It is usually at most 1.5%, preferably at most 1.0%, more preferably at most 0.5%.
  • the haze value is an index indicating the degree of haze, and the higher the haze value, the more the light is scattered.
  • a layer (substrate, It is desirable that all the adhesive layers, optical functional films, etc. have the above haze value.
  • the conductive thin film in the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 and the functional thin film such as the external light introducing layer 1
  • at least one, and preferably all of the substrates of the glass plate 3, the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4, the near-infrared absorbing layer 7, and the external light suppressing layer 11 have the above-mentioned haze value.
  • the scattering of external light in the optical path to the external light source and the external light suppressing layer is suppressed, so that a decrease in contrast between light and dark due to the scattering of external light can be suppressed.
  • suppression of scattering leads to a high percentage of external light incident on the display device to the external light suppressing layer, so that when an external light suppressing layer is used, its function becomes more effective. It can be used, and the contrast of light and dark can be further improved.
  • a sufficient contrast of light and dark can be obtained without increasing the amount of the dye used in the external light suppressing layer, so that coloring of the filter when not used is observed.
  • the filter for an electronic display according to the fifth aspect of the present invention is characterized in that (a) the light transmittance at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the three-band fluorescent lamp is obtained from the light transmittance Y4 (%) of the wavelength of the green emission peak of the light emitting display device. Rate Y2 (%) is 5 or more lower, or (b) from the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) when using the white emission spectrum of the light-emitting display device, the wave of the green emission peak of the three-band emission fluorescent tube Long light transmittance Y3 (%) has transmission characteristics lower by 1 or more,
  • An electromagnetic wave shielding layer having a visible light transmittance of 60 to 80% is disposed on the surface of the filter for electronic display on the light emitting display device side.
  • FIG. 8 shows the emission spectrum 14 of a plasma display panel as an example of a light-emitting display device, the emission spectrum 15 of a three-band fluorescent lamp F10 as an example of an external light source, and the transmission spectrum of an external light suppression layer satisfying the above conditions.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the light emission spectrum of the plasma display panel shown in FIG. 8, and FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the external light suppression having the light emission spectrum 15 and the transmission spectrum 16 of the three-band fluorescent lamp F10. Emission spectra 14 ′ and 15 ′ after transmission through the layer are shown. It can be seen that the external light is greatly reduced as compared with the plasma display emission. However, for external light, as described above, Since the light that has passed through the control layer twice is actually observed, the emission light source 15 ′ of the external light in FIG. 9 shows the light transmitted through the external light suppression layer twice.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of optical members in a plasma display device as an example of a display device to which the filter for an electronic display according to the present embodiment is applied.
  • the plasma display device is configured such that the external light introducing layer 1, the glass plate 3, and the external light source 20, such as a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp, are located from the side (outermost surface side). It has an electromagnetic shield layer 4, a near-infrared absorbing layer 7, an external light suppressing layer 11, and a plasma display panel 12. The members except for the plasma display panel 12 are adhered by an adhesive layer, not shown, to constitute an electronic display filter 100. In the figure, the filter 100 and the plasma display panel 12 are arranged at a predetermined space!
  • the external light introducing layer 1 is a layer that guides as much external light as possible to the external light suppressing layer, and is preferably a layer that transmits the external light without reflecting and scattering it.
  • the luminous transmittance of the external light introducing layer 1 according to JIS Z8105-1982 is usually 90% or more, preferably 95% or more.
  • Such an external light introducing layer is formed, for example, into a film or sheet by dispersing or mixing a material having high luminous transmittance in a transparent binder resin or as a coating film on a transparent substrate. It can be formed by various methods, for example, directly on a transparent substrate by vapor deposition, or by sticking a film-like material on the substrate.
  • the thickness of the external light introduction layer is preferably about 137.5 nm ⁇ l Onm, which is the 1Z4 wavelength of 550 nm, which is most sensitive to the human eye, so it is formed by a method that can produce such a thin film. Is preferred.
  • PET film / triacetylcellulose (TAC) film is generally used as the transparent substrate used for the external light introducing layer.
  • TAC film is suitable because it can introduce a large amount of external light. .
  • the configuration of the electronic display filter 100 will be further described.
  • the glass plate 3 also becomes tempered glass, for example, to mainly improve the appearance of the display device, Also functions as a substrate.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is formed, for example, by forming a metal thin film on a base material such as a PET sheet and forming a conductive mesh by etching the metal thin film, or by forming a conductive mesh on the base material by sputtering or the like. It is formed with a thin film and is connected to a ground (not shown) to shield electromagnetic waves emitted from the plasma display panel 12.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is provided with a near-infrared absorbing layer 7 via an adhesive layer (not shown).
  • the near-infrared absorbing layer 7 has a structure in which a film having a near-infrared absorbing function is attached to one or both sides of a transparent base material such as a PET sheet, and cuts near infrared rays emitted from the plasma display panel 12.
  • the external light suppressing layer 11 has the above-described transmission characteristics, and absorbs light in a specific wavelength range of the external light source 20 so that the external light reaches the display panel 12 and the arrived light is transmitted to the outside of the display device. And the contrast of light and dark contrast due to external light is suppressed.
  • the external light suppressing layer 11 has a configuration in which, for example, an external light suppressing functional film having the above-described transmission characteristics is adhered to a transparent sheet made of PET. Further, the external light suppressing layer 11 contains the aforementioned compound having the maximum absorption in the wavelength range of 530 nm to 610 nm. Note that a color tone correction layer other than that shown in FIG. 7 may be included in the electronic display filter 100.
  • an electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is generally provided in a filter 100 used for a display device using a light emitting display device that generates electromagnetic waves such as a plasma display panel.
  • the electronic display filter having the external light suppression layer has an electromagnetic wave shielding layer, by using a layer satisfying specific conditions for the electromagnetic wave shielding layer, the coloring of the filter is hardly observed, and Further, the contrast of light and dark is improved.
  • the visible light transmittance of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is controlled and the amount of external light reaching the light emitting display device is suppressed, it is attributed to the return light of the external light reflected by the display light emitting device. A decrease in brightness and contrast can be suppressed.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 in the fifth embodiment of the present invention has a structure in which a mesh made of conductive fibers is provided on a transparent base material, and a conductive thin film formed on the base material is used. " And a thin film of a conductive material (having no opening) formed by vapor deposition or sputtering on a substrate.
  • the visible light (wavelength 400 to 700 nm) transmittance of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is usually 60 to 80%, preferably 60 to 75%, more preferably 60 to 70%. It is.
  • Such a visible light transmittance is determined when the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is made of a mesh-shaped conductive material (a conductive thin film formed by meshing or etching a conductive fiber or the like). It can be realized by controlling the transmittance of the transparent substrate forming the layer and the aperture ratio thereof.
  • the aperture ratio is a ratio of a region (opening) capable of transmitting light per unit area (in other words, a ratio of a mesh occupied per unit area minus 100).
  • a PET film is generally used as a transparent base material for forming a mesh, and its visible light transmittance is about 90%. Therefore, the aperture ratio is usually 65 to 90%, preferably 65 to 85%.
  • the above-mentioned visible light transmittance can be realized by setting the ratio to more preferably 65 to 80%. Of course, the actual aperture ratio may be determined based on the measurement result of the visible light transmittance.
  • the visible light transmittance of the electromagnetic wave shield layer can be obtained as a value obtained by multiplying the visible light transmittance of the transparent base by the aperture ratio of the electromagnetic wave shield mesh.
  • the aperture ratio of the electromagnetic wave shielding mesh can be appropriately controlled according to the material and manufacturing method of the mesh. For example, in the case of manufacturing a mesh using a metal wire, the interval (line pitch) of the wire and the wire pitch may be reduced. This can be achieved by controlling the diameter of the wire, or by controlling the region to be etched when the mesh is formed by etching a metal thin film.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is formed using a conductive thin film that is not mesh-shaped (having no openings), it is necessary to control the material and thickness of the conductive thin film provided on the base material. Thereby, the above-mentioned visible light transmittance can be realized.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding layer may be formed of a plurality of conductive thin film layers, and the thickness and material can be independently selected for each of the plurality of conductive thin film layers.
  • the fifth embodiment of the present invention it is possible to improve the light / dark contrast by suppressing external light reaching the light emitting display device by the electromagnetic wave shield layer.
  • the amount of visible light transmitted through the external light suppressing layer is suppressed, at the same time, the flow when not in use is suppressed. Filtering can be suppressed.
  • the transparent substrate of the electronic display filter of the sixth invention has a frame-shaped opaque region on the outer peripheral portion of the surface of the transparent substrate, and the surface roughness of the opaque region has an arithmetic average height (Ra) of 0.05. 100 / zm.
  • the transparent substrate of the filter for an electronic display according to the sixth invention is applied to an optical filter used for a plasma display, but the transparent substrate according to the sixth invention is a display device of another type. It can be similarly applied to optical filters for use.
  • the transparent substrate of the filter for an electronic display according to the sixth invention can be used as a filter for an electronic display by forming a laminate by bonding the transparent substrate to the filter of the fifteenth invention. Then, the obtained filter for an electronic display can be applied to a light-emitting display device to obtain an electronic display device.
  • a known display device or a commercially available product can be used without particular limitation.
  • the optical filter for a display device is arranged at a position where light emitted from a display element (display panel, cathode ray tube, etc.) passes before exiting to the outside of the display device, and undergoes some change with respect to the incident light.
  • Means a filter that has the function of positively providing The optical filter specifically has a function of suppressing external light as described above, a function of improving contrast, a color correction, an anti-reflection (AR), an anti-reflection (AG), and the like.
  • Optical filters are usually formed by blending a functional material into a transparent substrate itself, typically glass or optical resin, or by applying a material having an optical function to a transparent substrate, A structure formed by attaching a functional film or a combination thereof is known.
  • the filter of the sixth invention is an optical filter having a configuration in which at least one film is attached to at least one surface of a transparent substrate, but the substrate itself may be provided with some optical function. . Further, a plurality of films may be laminated on a transparent substrate. Ma In addition to the film having an optical function, there may be a layer having no particular optical function, such as a metal mesh for suppressing electromagnetic waves or a base film thereof. Further, a layer formed by coating may be present.
  • the material and shape of the transparent substrate are not limited as long as the transparent substrate has strength and optical characteristics that can function as a substrate of the optical filter.
  • transparent resins used for glass and optical applications polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polycarbonate (PC), cyclic polyolefin resin (COP), triacetyl cellulose (TAC), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), etc.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • PC polycarbonate
  • COP cyclic polyolefin resin
  • TAC triacetyl cellulose
  • PEN polyethylene naphthalate
  • the formed substrate can be used.
  • the materials and techniques used for frame printing on a transparent substrate there are no particular restrictions on the materials and techniques used for frame printing on a transparent substrate, and any material capable of printing a frame such as achromatic color on glass or a transparent resin having a smooth surface without any particular limitations.
  • Techniques can be used. For example, for a glass substrate, black ceramic ink is screen-printed, then heat-treated and baked.- For a resin substrate, screen printing of pigment ink containing inorganic particles etc. can be used respectively. It is.
  • the frame printing color is often printed in black or a color close to black, but the frame printing color itself is irrelevant to the present invention, and any other color can be used.
  • sand blasting may be used to implement a white glass-like frame.
  • it is preferable that the opacity of the film attached to the frame printing portion is so low that the edge of the film is hardly observed.
  • the sixth invention is characterized in that the surface roughness of at least a region of the frame printing portion where the film is attached is controlled. That is, in FIG. 10, assuming that the frame printing portion is 51 and the film to be pasted is 55, at least the surface roughness in the area 53 where the film 55 and the frame printing portion 51 overlap is controlled. However, when performing frame printing by ceramic printing on a glass substrate, it is difficult to partially adjust the roughness. If 55 does not overlap, it is good to control the surface roughness including the area!
  • any method can be adopted. However, it is possible to control the particle size and shape of a substance contained in a paint (including a ceramic paste) and remaining after printing, or to control after printing.
  • the desired surface roughness can be achieved by roughening the surface of the frame printing portion by sandblasting or the like.
  • the surface roughness may be isotropic or anisotropic.
  • anisotropy at least one of the direction parallel to the long side of the substrate and the direction perpendicular to the long side is as described above. It is preferable to satisfy the conditions.
  • the surface roughness in the direction parallel to the longitudinal direction is taken into account in consideration of the magnitude of tension fluctuation applied to the film due to expansion.
  • the film is attached using an adhesive.
  • a pressure-sensitive adhesive excellent in optical properties (for example, having high transparency) and having little change in pressure-sensitive adhesiveness under a high-temperature and high-humidity environment and hardly undergoing aging is preferable.
  • a film to which this adhesive has been applied is prepared in advance, and it is possible to perform bonding by positioning and cutting on a transparent substrate. If the width d (FIG. 11) of the region 53 (FIG. 10) where the overlaps are too small, the effect of controlling the surface roughness of the frame printing portion cannot be obtained. If it is too large, the consumption of the film and the adhesive will be unnecessarily increased. Since the adhesive strength of the film depends not only on the width d but also on the performance of the pressure-sensitive adhesive, it cannot always be determined unambiguously. On the other hand, the necessity for a width exceeding 20 mm was seen, but it was not issued.
  • the film for suppressing external light is useful for improving the contrast during display and adjusting the screen color when the power is off.
  • the external light suppressing film means a film having a function of absorbing (cutting) external light of a specific wavelength or a wavelength band.
  • a film formed using the above-mentioned compound can be suitably used.
  • a compound having a maximum absorption in the wavelength range of 530-6 lOnm is usually a difluorsquarylium-based compound represented by the above formula (XVII), At least one of a tetraazaporphyrin compound represented by the formula (XI), a fluvirazolyl squarylium compound represented by the above formula ( ⁇ ), and a pyromethene compound represented by the above formula (XVIII)
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an arrangement example of optical members of a plasma display device as an example of a display device to which the filter for an electronic display according to the present embodiment can be applied.
  • the plasma display device is arranged such that the external light introducing layer 1, the glass plate 3, the external light source 20 such as a three-wavelength-band fluorescent tube, etc. It has an electromagnetic wave shield layer 4, a near-infrared cut layer 7, an external light suppression layer 11, and a plasma display panel 12.
  • the members other than the plasma display panel 12 are adhered by an adhesive layer, not shown, to constitute an electronic display filter 100.
  • the filter 100 and the plasma display panel 12 are arranged in a predetermined space!
  • the configuration of the electronic display filter 100 will be further described.
  • the glass plate 3 is made of, for example, tempered glass, and mainly serves to improve the appearance of the display device and also functions as a base material of the filter 100.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is formed, for example, by providing a metal thin film on a base material such as a PET sheet and etching the metal thin film. Or a conductive thin film formed on a substrate by sputtering or the like.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is provided with a near-infrared cut layer 7 via an adhesive layer (not shown).
  • the near-infrared cut layer 7 has a configuration in which a thin film having a near-infrared cut function is provided on one or both sides of a transparent base material such as a PET sheet, and cuts near infrared rays emitted from the plasma display panel 12.
  • the external light suppressing layer 11 has the above-described transmission characteristics, and absorbs light of a specific wavelength range of the external light source 20 so that external light reaches the display panel 12 and the arrived light is It suppresses both returning to the outside of the device, and suppresses the contrast of light and dark by the external light.
  • the external light suppressing layer 11 has a configuration in which an external light suppressing functional film having the above-described transmission characteristics is attached to a transparent sheet made of, for example, PET. Further, the external light suppressing layer 11 contains the above-described compound having the maximum absorption in the wavelength range of 530 to 610 nm. Note that a color tone correction layer other than that shown in FIG. 7 may be included in the electronic display filter 100.
  • FIG. 11 in the configuration shown in FIG. 7, the state of adhesion between the glass plate 3 as the transparent substrate and the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 as the film to be attached to the glass plate 3, particularly in the vicinity of the edge of the film
  • the bonding state is schematically shown in an enlarged manner.
  • the metal mesh provided on the base film of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is shown in FIG.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is attached to the surface of the glass plate 3 via the adhesive layer 56, and the end is adhered to the frame printing portion 51.
  • the width d of the portion of the film end portion (outer peripheral portion) overlapping the frame printing portion 51 is 3 mm or more and 20 mm or less.
  • 1,3 bis (5-hydroxy-1-methyl-3-propyl 1H virazol-4-yl) cyclobutenedidium-2,4-diolate and 1,3 bis (2- (2-ethylhexanoyl) Amino-4,6-dihydroxy-phenyl) cyclobutenediiridium-2,4-diolate was prepared in Example 2 of Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-149260 and Example 2 of Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-2 66415, respectively. Mass, NMR and IR were in agreement with the indicated product.
  • Table 3 A mixture of each dye, DME, and toluene at a ratio (wt% Z ⁇ fat) was dissolved and coated with No. 14 Bar Coater I (manufactured by Taiyu Kiki Co., Ltd.), and dried to form a coating film with a thickness of 4.5 m. (Finorem A) was obtained.
  • TY-300 is a dye of Asahi Den-Dai Kogyo Co., Ltd., product number: ⁇ -300 (trade name).
  • a polyethylene terephthalate film Mitsubishi Chemical Polyester Film's PET film "T600E W07J (trade name), thickness 100 ⁇ m)" and an alicyclic alkyl methacrylate resin (Hitachi Kasei Kogyo's "Obtretz OZ” — 1100 ”(trade name): 35% by weight of fat, 2.5% by weight of MEK3, 32.5% by weight of toluene in a solution of a dymo-pium-based near-infrared absorbing dye (N, N, N,, N, -tetrakis (p-dibutyl No.
  • a dymo-pium-based near-infrared absorbing dye N, N, N,, N, -tetrakis
  • Example 1 Gray Slightly bluish gray Good 37.9
  • Example 2 Gray Slightly bluish gray Good 38.0
  • Example 3 Gray Slightly bluish gray Good 31.4
  • Example 4 gray Slightly bluish gray Good 39.1
  • Example 5 Gray Slightly bluish dripping Good 37.7 Comparative Example 1 Red Red Good 43.6 Comparative Example 2 Reddish purple Bluish reddish purple Good 38.2 Comparative Example 3 Red Reddish reddish purple Good 43.5 Comparative Example 4 Slightly blueish Green Blue Green Good 34.5 Comparative Example 5 Yellowish Yellow Green Yellowish Yellow Green Good 37.6 Comparative Example 6 Greenish Yellow Green Greenish Yellow Green Good 34.2 Comparative Example 7 Red Red Good 44.1 Comparative Example 8 Slightly Greenish Blue Green Good 35.5 Comparative Example 9 Red Reddish Reddish Purple Good 44.3 Comparative Example 10 Red Purple Blued Reddish Purple Good 37.9 Comparative Example 11 Gray Somewhat bluish gray Poor 45.8
  • a polyacryl film (thickness: 100 m, refractive index: 1.49) that has been subjected to hard coating is set in a vacuum evaporation apparatus, the vacuum chamber is evacuated to about 8 Torr, and oxygen gas is introduced until about 5 Torr. did.
  • magnesium fluoride (refractive index: 1.38) was evaporated using an electron beam evaporation source, and was evaporated to a thickness of about 140 nm on the film to form an external light introducing layer.
  • For the external light introduction layer use a spectrophotometer (“UV3100PC” (trade name) manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) and use the emission spectrum (JIS Z8719—1996) of the F10 three-band fluorescent tube. Then, the luminous transmittance (constant [IS Z8105-1 982]) obtained by the calculation method according to JIS Z8722-2000 was 95.6%.
  • Polyethylene terephthalate film (Mitsubishi Chemical Polyester Film PET film “T600EU36” (trade name), thickness 50 / zm) was added to (1) polymethyl methacrylate resin (Mitsubishi Rayon “Dianal BR— 80 ”(trade name)) 30% by weight DME solution, (2) 1,3-bis (2- (2ethylhexanoylamino) 4,6-dihydroxy-phenyl) cyclobutenediyl-2,4-diolate 0.
  • the transmission spectrum of the external light suppressing layer had local minimum values at about 55 Onm and about 600nm.
  • Polyethylene terephthalate film Mitsubishi Chemical Polyester Film's PET film “T600EW07” (trade name), 100 m thick) and alicyclic alkyl methacrylate resin (Hitachi Kasei Kogyo's “Ovtrez OZ-1100” ( Trade name))
  • a dimo-pum absorption dye N, N, ⁇ ', ⁇ ', -tetrakis ( ⁇ -dibrutylaminophen) was added to a solution consisting of 35% by weight of fat, 32.5% by weight of MEK and 32.5% by weight of toluene.
  • -R ⁇ -Phenylenedipodium hexafluoride antimonate
  • an alicyclic alkyl methacrylate resin (“Optrez OZ-1100" (trade name) manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.) was used.
  • Aminothiol nickel complex near-infrared absorbing dye ⁇ bis-2,2- [1,2-di (3-fluorophenyl) ethylenedimine] benzenethiolate ⁇ in a solution consisting of 32.5 wt% toluene Mix and dissolve 5.0% 7% fat, toluene and MEK, apply with No. 10 bar coater (Tayu Kikai Co., Ltd.), dry and apply near infrared absorbing films on both sides.
  • a near-infrared absorbing layer 7 was formed.
  • the above-described external light introducing layer was bonded to the external light incident surface of the glass plate (thickness: 3 mm), and the near-infrared absorbing layer and the external light suppressing layer were sequentially bonded to the opposite surface.
  • An electromagnetic wave shielding layer (125 ⁇ m thick PET film (“A4300” manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd.) (trade name), a 250 ⁇ m line width, 10 ⁇ m line pitch)
  • the shielded copper mesh film was affixed to the metal mesh film side, with the adhesive layers provided at the respective interfaces, and the whole was heated under pressure with an autoclave.
  • a filter for an electronic display having a configuration of an external light introducing layer Z glass Z near infrared absorbing layer Z external light suppressing layer Z electromagnetic wave shielding layer was formed from the light source side.
  • the light transmittance Y2 (%) at the peak of green emission (545 nm) of the three-band emission fluorescent tube and the light transmittance Y4 (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak (525 nm) of the display, and the plasma display The luminous transmittance Y1 (%) using the white light emission spectrum and the luminous transmittance Y3 (%) using the light emission spectrum of the three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10 were evaluated.
  • specular reflection component (luminous reflectance (5 ° mirror surface)) was evaluated as follows.
  • a reference is taken using a reference mirror, and the sample is taken from the outside light introduction layer side. It was set up so that light was incident, and the area of 380-780 nm was measured at lmm intervals.
  • the Y of the tristimulus value of the XYZ display was calculated and used as the luminous reflectance.
  • the calculation was performed by a calculation method based on JIS Z8105-2000.
  • As an external light source a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10 having an emission spectrum specified in JIS Z8179-1996 was used.
  • the display device configured as described above is placed in a room where an F10 type three-wavelength-band fluorescent tube having a light emission vector specified in JIS Z8719-1996 is turned on as an external light source, and a central portion of the screen is displayed. Then, the contrast of light and dark when the white color was displayed and the remaining color was displayed black, and the color of the filter when the power was turned off were visually evaluated.
  • An electronic display filter provided with an electromagnetic wave shielding layer in the optical path where external light reaches the external light suppressing layer was formed by the following procedure. Note that the composition and forming method of each layer are the same as in Example 6.
  • the above-mentioned external light introducing layer is attached to the external light incident surface of a glass plate (thickness: 3 mm), and an electromagnetic wave shielding layer (electromagnetic wave shielding copper having a line width of 250 ⁇ m and a line pitch of 10 ⁇ m) is attached to the opposite surface. Then, a near infrared absorbing layer and then an external light suppressing layer were respectively pasted on the concave and convex surface of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer via an adhesive layer, followed by heat treatment with an autoclave. [0373] The obtained filter for an electronic display was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 6.
  • the specular reflection component was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 6, and as a result, the luminous reflectance (5 ° mirror surface) was 2.
  • Example 6 in which the electromagnetic wave shield layer was disposed closer to the light emitting display device than the external light suppression layer was compared with Comparative Example 12 in which the electromagnetic wave shield layer was provided in the optical path where the external light reaches the external light suppression layer.
  • the reflectance (return light) was reduced by about 5%, and it was confirmed by visual evaluation that the contrast was improved. Also, regarding the color of the filter, the configuration of Example 6 was felt darker and firmer.
  • Example 6 In the same manner as in Example 6, an external light introducing layer, a near infrared absorbing layer, and an external light suppressing layer were formed. That is, the above-described external light introducing layer was bonded to the external light incident surface of the glass plate (thickness: 3 mm), and the near-infrared absorbing layer and the external light suppressing layer were bonded to the opposite surface in this order. The bonding of each layer was performed using an adhesive layer provided at the interface.
  • a 30 m thick indium oxide layer and a 15 m thick PET film (A4300 (trade name) manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd.)
  • the electronic display filter thus obtained was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 6.
  • Example 7 The same procedure as in Example 7 was carried out except that the transparent electromagnetic wave shielding layer, the near-infrared absorbing layer, and the external light suppressing layer were laminated on the opposite surface of the glass plate in this order, from the light source side, the external light introducing layer ⁇ glass ⁇ electromagnetic wave shielding
  • the specular reflection component was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 6, and as a result, the luminous reflectance (5 ° mirror surface) was 8.36%. Further, the contrast of light and dark and the color of the filter in the power-off state were evaluated in the same manner as in Example 6.
  • Example 7 in which the electromagnetic wave shield layer was disposed closer to the light emitting display device than the external light suppression layer As for Comparative Example 13, the reflectance (return light) was reduced by about 64% as compared with Comparative Example 13 in which the electromagnetic wave shielding layer was provided in the optical path where the external light reaches the external light suppressing layer. It was recognized that the contrast was improved. Also, regarding the color of the filter, the configuration of Example 7 was felt darker and firmer.
  • a polyacryl film (thickness: 100 m, refractive index: 1.49) that has been subjected to hard coating is set in a vacuum evaporation apparatus, the vacuum chamber is evacuated to about 8 Torr, and oxygen gas is introduced until about 5 Torr. did.
  • magnesium fluoride (refractive index: 1.38) was evaporated using an electron beam evaporation source, and was evaporated to a thickness of about 140 nm on the film to form an external light introducing layer 1 (FIG. 7).
  • This external light introduction layer was measured using a spectrophotometer (“UV3100PC” (trade name) manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) and the emission spectrum (JIS Z8719—1996) of the F10 three-band fluorescent tube.
  • the luminous transmittance (constant [IS Z8 105-1982]) determined by the calculation method using Z8722-2000 was 95.6%.
  • Polyethylene terephthalate film as a substrate (Toyo ⁇ Ltd. PET film "A 7300" (trade port 3 ⁇ 4 name), thickness 125 m, haze value (JIS K7105 [Koyoru willow "value) 0.4 0/0) [this, Jifue represented by polymethyl methacrylate Tari rate ⁇ (Mitsubishi rayon Co., Ltd.
  • Polyethylene terephthalate film as a substrate (Toyo ⁇ Ltd. PET film "A 7300" (trade port 3 ⁇ 4 name), thickness 125 m, haze value (JIS K7105 [Koyoru willow "value) 0.4 0/0) [this, polymethyl methacrylate Tari rate ⁇ (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.
  • a dithiol nickel complex near-infrared absorbing dye ⁇ was added to a 30 wt% toluene solution of polymethyl methacrylate resin ("Dyanal BR-80" (trade name) manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.).
  • Bis 2,2 '-[1,2-di (3-chlorophenyl) ethylenedimine] benzenthiolate ⁇ -Heckel (11) 9.2 Mixture of 2wt% Z-fat, toluene and THF To form a near-infrared absorbing layer 7 having near-infrared absorbing films on both sides.
  • An external light suppressing layer was bonded to one surface of the near infrared absorbing layer. Also, near infrared absorption layer The remaining surface was bonded with an electromagnetic shield mesh (line width 12 m, line pitch 300 m, aperture ratio about 92%) and a glass plate. Finally, the above-described external light introducing layer was attached to the external light incident surface of the glass plate 3 to form an electronic display filter.
  • the light transmittance Y2 (%) at the green emission peak (545 nm) of the three-wavelength emission fluorescent tube and the light transmittance Y4 (%) at the green emission peak wavelength (525 nm) of the display, and the plasma display The luminous transmittance Y1 (%) using the white light emission spectrum and the luminous transmittance Y3 (%) using the emission spectrum of the three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10 were evaluated.
  • the display device configured in this manner is installed in a room where an F10 type three-wavelength band light-emitting fluorescent tube having a light emission vector specified by JIS Z8719-1996 is turned on as an external light source, and a central portion of the screen is displayed. Then, the contrast of light and dark when the white color was displayed and the remaining color was displayed black, and the color of the filter when the power was turned off were visually evaluated.
  • a display device was constructed and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 8 except that the external light introducing layer was not used.
  • Example 8 using the external light introducing layer it was confirmed that the contrast was improved as compared with Comparative Example 14 in which the external light introducing layer was not used. Even when not used, the color of the filter seemed darker and tighter when the external light introducing layer was used than when it was not used.
  • a polyacryl film (thickness: 100 m, refractive index: 1.49) that has been subjected to hard coating is set in a vacuum evaporation apparatus, the vacuum chamber is evacuated to about 8 Torr, and oxygen gas is introduced until about 5 Torr. did.
  • magnesium fluoride (refractive index: 1.38) was evaporated using an electron beam evaporation source, and was evaporated to a thickness of about 140 nm on the film to form an external light introducing layer 1 (FIG. 7).
  • This external light introduction layer was viewed by a calculation method according to JIS Z87 22-2000 using a spectrophotometer UV3100PC manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation and the emission spectrum (JIS Z8719-1996) of a three-wavelength emission fluorescent tube F10.
  • the light transmittance (constant [IS Z8105-1982]) was determined to be 95.6%.
  • Polyethylene terephthalate film as a substrate (Toyo ⁇ Ltd. PET film "A 7300" (trade port 3 ⁇ 4 name), thickness 125 m, haze value (JIS K7105 [Koyoru willow "value) 0.4 0/0) [this, Jifue represented by polymethyl methacrylate Tari rate ⁇ (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.
  • Dianal BR- 80 (trade name)) 30 w t% toluene solution of the above general formula (XVII) - Rusukuaririumu based compound
  • the above compound A having the following composition is 0.37 wt% Z fat
  • the above compound B is 0.26 wt% Z fat
  • PYL3G manufactured by Mitsubishi Iridaku Co.
  • the resin, DME and toluene are mixed and dissolved, and the mixture is coated with a NO.30 bar coater (manufactured by Taiyu Kikai Co., Ltd.) and dried to form an external light suppressing layer 11 having a coating film having a thickness of 4.5 / zm. Obtained.
  • the transmission spectrum 16 of the external light suppressing layer has a minimum value K at about 575 nm. Was.
  • Polyethylene terephthalate film as a substrate (Toyo ⁇ Ltd. PET film "A 7300" (trade port 3 ⁇ 4 name), thickness 125 m, haze value (JIS K7105 [Koyoru willow "value) 0.4 0/0) [this, polymethyl methacrylate Tari rate ⁇ (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.
  • a dithiol nickel complex near-infrared absorbing dye ⁇ Bis 2,2 '-[1,2-di (3-chlorophenyl) ethylenedimine] benzenthiolate ⁇ -Heckel (11) 9.
  • An external light suppressing layer was bonded to one surface of the near infrared absorbing layer.
  • an electromagnetic wave shielding mesh (line width 12 m, line pitch 300 m, aperture ratio about 92%) and a glass plate are attached to the remaining surface of the near infrared absorption layer.
  • the above-described external light introducing layer was attached to the external light incident surface of the glass plate 3 to form an electronic display filter.
  • the display device configured in this manner is placed in a room illuminated with an F10-type three-wavelength-band fluorescent tube having an emission vector specified by JIS Z8719-1996 as an external light source, and the center of the screen is displayed. Then, the contrast of light and dark when the white color was displayed and the remaining color was displayed black, and the color of the filter when the power was turned off were visually evaluated.
  • PET film “T600E125W07” (trade name) manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Polyester Film Co., Ltd., thickness 125 m, haze value measured by CilS K7105 2.0%) as a base material of the near infrared absorbing layer 2.0%)
  • PET film “T600E125W07” (trade name) manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Polyester Film Co., Ltd., thickness 125 m, haze value measured by CilS K7105 2.0%) as a base material of the near infrared absorbing layer 2.0%)
  • Example 9 using a substrate having a haze value of 0.4%, it was observed that the contrast was improved as compared with Comparative Example 15 using a substrate having a haze value of 2.0%. Was. The color of the filters also seemed darker and tighter.
  • Hard coated polyacrylic film (100 m thick, refractive index 1.49) After setting the vacuum chamber to about 8 Torr, oxygen gas was introduced to about 5 Torr. Next, magnesium fluoride (refractive index: 1.38) was evaporated using an electron beam evaporation source, and was evaporated to a thickness of about 140 nm on the film to form an external light introducing layer 1 (FIG. 7).
  • This external light introduction layer was viewed by a calculation method according to JIS Z87 22-2000 using a spectrophotometer UV3100PC manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation and the emission spectrum (JIS Z8719-1996) of a three-wavelength emission fluorescent tube F10. The light transmittance (constant [IS Z8105-1982]) was determined to be 95.6%.
  • Polyethylene terephthalate film as a substrate (Toyo ⁇ Ltd. PET film "A 7300" (trade port 3 ⁇ 4 name), thickness 125 m, haze value (JIS K7105 [Koyoru willow "value) 0.4 0/0) [this, Jifue represented by polymethyl methacrylate Tari rate ⁇ (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.
  • Dianal BR- 80 (trade name)) 30 w t% toluene solution of the above general formula (XVII) - Rusukuaririumu based compound
  • the above compound A having the following composition is 0.37 wt% Z fat
  • the above compound B is 0.26 wt% Z fat
  • PYL3G (manufactured by Mitsubishi Iridaku Co.) 0.80 wt% Z
  • the resin component, DME and toluene were mixed and dissolved, coated with a No. 30 bar coater (manufactured by Taiyu Kiki Co., Ltd.), dried, and dried to form an external light suppressing layer 11 having a coating film with a thickness of 4.5 / zm. Obtained.
  • the transmission spectrum 16 of this external light suppressing layer had a minimum value K at about 575 nm as shown in FIG.
  • Polyethylene terephthalate film as a substrate (Toyo ⁇ Ltd. PET film "A 7300" (trade port 3 ⁇ 4 name), thickness 125 m, haze value (JIS K7105 [Koyoru willow "value) 0.4 0/0) [this, polymethyl methacrylate Tari rate ⁇ (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.
  • the base material is a 125 ⁇ m thick, 700 mm wide polyethylene terephthalate film (A4300 (trade name, manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd., 90% visible light transmittance)), and a thermosetting adhesive (Takeda Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.) “Takedac A310” (trade name) manufactured by Co., Ltd.) was applied using a roll coater and dried to obtain a coating amount of 4 g / m 2 . Then, copper foil (“EXP-WS” (trade name), 700 mm wide, 9 ⁇ m thick, manufactured by Furukawa Circuit Wheel Co., Ltd.), both surfaces of which have been subjected to chromate treatment by chromate treatment, is used as a chromate layer. Using a laminating device that also has a metal roll and a rubber roll so as to overlap the adhesive layers, the laminate was attached to obtain a multilayer sheet having a thickness of 137 m.
  • casein was used as a light-sensitive resist, and was applied so as to cover the entire surface (copper foil surface) while transporting the multilayer sheet.
  • the pattern plate a shape for forming a mesh portion and a frame portion for grounding (grounding) as shown in Fig. 13 was used.
  • contact exposure was performed using this pattern plate, and after development, baking was performed at 100 ° C.
  • an etching solution (ferric chloride solution) is sprayed onto the copper foil, and the exposed portion is etched to form a mesh portion and a frame portion for ground. did. After washing with water and stripping of the resist with an alkaline solution, further washing and drying were performed to form an electromagnetic shield mesh. When the opening ratio of the mesh portion was measured, it was 78%. The visible light transmittance of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer (that is, the configuration in which the transparent substrate and the mesh were combined) was 69.0%.
  • An external light suppressing layer was bonded to one surface of the near infrared absorbing layer. Further, an electromagnetic wave shielding layer and a glass plate 3 were bonded to the remaining surface of the near-infrared absorbing filter. Finally, the above-described external light introducing layer is attached to the external light incident surface of the glass plate 3, and the electronic display filter is formed. Ruta was formed.
  • a display device was constructed in which this electronic display filter was arranged in front of a plasma display panel ("W32-PD2100" (trade name) manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.). This configuration is equivalent to the configuration shown in Fig. 7.
  • the light transmittance Y2 (%) at the green emission peak (545 nm) of the three-band fluorescent lamp of this filter, the light transmittance Y4 (%) at the green emission peak wavelength (525 nm) of the display, and the plasma display The luminous transmittance Y1 (%) using the white emission spectrum and the luminous transmittance Y3 (%) using the emission spectrum of the three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10 were evaluated.
  • the display device configured in this manner is placed in a room where an F10 type three-wavelength-band emission fluorescent tube having a light emission vector specified in JIS Z8719-1996 is turned on as an external light source, and a central portion of the screen is displayed. Then, the contrast of light and dark when the white color was displayed and the remaining color was displayed black, and the color of the filter when the power was turned off were visually evaluated.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding layer As the electromagnetic wave shielding layer, the electromagnetic wave shielding mesh (line width 12 m, line pitch 300 ⁇ m, aperture ratio 92%) bonded to the surface of the near-infrared absorption filter to which the external light suppression layer is bonded is used. Then, the above-described external light introducing layer was attached to the glass plate and the external light incident surface, thereby forming a filter for an electronic display.
  • the visible light transmittance of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer (that is, the combination of the transparent substrate and the mesh) was 83%.
  • Example 10 It was confirmed that the contrast of Example 10 was improved as compared with Comparative Example 16. In addition, the color of the filter was a tighter achromatic color.
  • ⁇ ⁇ -5 ⁇ (trade name), manufactured by Mitaka Optical Instruments Co., Ltd.) with a cutoff value of 0.80 mm
  • the measurement length is 0.1 mm at L m pitch.
  • Scan was measured over The average value of the data obtained in one scan was defined as the Ra value.
  • One sample was scanned three times, and the value obtained by simply averaging the Ra value of each time was used as the final surface roughness Ra value.
  • the peel strength was measured by the following method.
  • the unit was kgfZ20mm.
  • Example 11 As a transparent substrate, a glass plate with a length of 580 mm, a width of 980 mm, a thickness of 2.5 mm, and a black frame printing (approximately 50 mm wide) on the outer periphery was prepared.
  • frame printing multiple types of inks (mainly composed of glass and organic pigments) used for ceramic printing were selected, and the surface roughness after printing was 0.15 m in arithmetic average height Ra.
  • the surface roughness (Ra) of the unprinted glass surface was 0.01 ⁇ m.
  • a polyethylene terephthalate film (“A4300” (trade name) manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd.) having a thickness of 125 m and a width of 700 mm was used as a base material, and a thermosetting adhesive ("Takeda Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.” Takedac A310 ”(trade name)) was applied with a roll coater and dried to obtain a coating amount of 4 g / m 2 .
  • EXP-WS (trade name), 700 mm wide, 9 ⁇ m thick, manufactured by Furukawa Circuit Foil Co., Ltd.), both sides of which have been subjected to chromate treatment by chromate treatment, Using a laminating device having the strength of a metal roll and a rubber roll, the sheets were attached so that the layers overlapped to obtain a multilayer sheet having a thickness of 137 m.
  • casein was used as a light-sensitive resist, and was applied so as to cover one surface (copper foil surface) of the multilayer sheet while transporting it.
  • the shape used to form the mesh part and the frame part for grounding (grounding) as shown in Fig. 13 was used as the pattern plate.
  • a mesh angle of 90 °, a mesh line width of 12 ⁇ m, and a mesh pitch of 300 m were used. Then, close exposure was performed using this pattern plate, and after the development, baking was performed at 100 ° C.
  • an etching solution (ferric ferric salt solution) is sprayed on the copper foil, and the exposed portion is etched to form a mesh portion and a frame portion for ground. did.
  • a release film (“MRF75” (trade name) manufactured by Mitsubishi Iridaku Polyester Film Co., Ltd.)
  • MRF75 trade name
  • an adhesive Soken Iridani
  • An electromagnetic wave shield film with adhesive by transferring the adhesive release film aged from SK Dyne-2094 (trade name) manufactured by Gakusha Co., Ltd. with a thickness of 25 ⁇ m, dried and aged on the remaining surface of the base film. was formed.
  • this electromagnetic shielding mesh film was overlaid on a glass plate, aligned, cut, and bonded.
  • the width d of the overlapping portion between the electromagnetic wave shielding mesh film and the frame printing portion was set to 40 mm on each side.
  • bonding use an autoclave
  • the sample was heat-treated at 60 ° C, 0.6 MPa, and 60 minutes to obtain an actual size sample.
  • Polyethylene terephthalate film (Mitsubishi Chemical Polyester Film's PET film “T600E50W07” (trade name), thickness 50 ⁇ m, haze value (measured by JIS K7105) 1.3%), and polymethyl methacrylate resin (Mitsubishi Rayon “Dianal BR-80” (trade name))
  • a dimmo-pum-based near-infrared absorbing dye N, N, ⁇ ', ⁇ ', -tetrakis ( ⁇ -jibulchirua) Minofel) ⁇ -Phenylene dimodium hexafluoride antimonate
  • a polymethylmethacrylate resin (Dianal BR-80; manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.) was added to a 30 wt% toluene solution of a dithiol nickel complex near infrared absorbing pigment ⁇ bis 2, 2 '— [1,2-di (3-chloroethyl) ethylenedimine] benzenethiolate ⁇ Nickel (11) 9.2wt% Z-fat, toluene and THF are mixed and coated in the same manner.
  • an adhesive (“SK Dyne-2094” (trade name) manufactured by Soken-Danigaku Co., Ltd.) with a thickness of 25 ⁇ m is applied to a release film (“MRF75” (trade name) manufactured by Mitsubishi Iridaku Polyester Film Co., Ltd.).
  • MRF75 trade name manufactured by Mitsubishi Iridaku Polyester Film Co., Ltd.
  • a near-infrared cut layer was adhered to the mesh surface of the glass substrate to which the electromagnetic wave shielding mesh film was applied, which was created in Example 11, with an adhesive, and an external light suppressing layer was further adhered with an adhesive, thereby suppressing external light.
  • a filter for electronic displays having a function and a near-infrared cut function was formed.
  • Example 11 Example 12
  • Example 13 J ⁇ ⁇ 17 17 Ceramic printing Yes Yes Yes Yes No Electromagnetic wave shielding mesh film Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Outside light suppression layer No Yes Yes No Near infrared cut layer No No Yes No No Surface roughness Ra .m) 0.15 0.10 0.15 0.01
  • Example 11 13 in which the surface roughness was sufficiently large frame printing was performed, and a film was stuck using the surface. It was confirmed that the sample had sufficient strength 1 and peeling strength even after being left in a high temperature and high humidity environment.
  • Comparative Example 17 in which the film was stuck with a small surface roughness the peel strength after leaving in a high-temperature, high-humidity environment in which the initial peel strength was low was further reduced, and peeling occurred. A state that was easy to do was confirmed.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)

Abstract

There is provided an electronic display filter used in an electronic display device having a light emitting display device. The electronic display filter has transmittance characteristics as follows: (1) At least one minimal value of transmittance ratio exists in a visible light region of wavelength 400 nm to 700 nm. (2) The difference between the smallest transmittance ratio (%) among the minimal values of the transmittance ratio and the largest transmittance ratio (%) in the visible light region is 10 or above. (3) The average value (%) of the light transmittance ratio of wavelength 540 nm to 555 nm is 40% or below. (4) The light transmittance (%) of wavelength 525 nm divided by the average value (%) of the light transmittance ratio of wavelength 540 nm to 555 nm is 1.10 or above. (5) The difference between the maximal value and the minimal value in the transmittance ratio (%) of wavelength 545 nm, the transmittance ratio (%) of wavelength 437 nm, and the transmittance ratio (%) of wavelength 612 nm is 10 or below. It is possible to simultaneously improve the contrast in the bright place under 3-wavelength region light emitting type fluorescent lamp and suppress unnatural coloring of the filter itself. Moreover, it is possible to simultaneously improve the bright/dark contrast of the electronic display device using a filter having an external light suppression layer and suppress coloring of the filter.

Description

明 細 書  Specification
電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ及び電子ディスプレイ装置  Electronic display filter and electronic display device
技術分野  Technical field
[0001] 本発明は、電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ及び電子ディスプレイ装置に関する。詳しく は、ブラウン管 (CRT)、液晶ディスプレイ (LCD)、プラズマディスプレイ(PDP)、有 機'無機 ELディスプレイ、 FED (Field Emission Display)ディスプレイなど電子デイス プレイの前面に設置し、不要な発光成分の除去機能を有する電子ディスプレイ用フィ ルタ、特に、電子ディスプレイの緑色発光強度をあまり弱めず、 3波長域発光形蛍光 灯の緑色発光をカットすることにより、 3波長域発光形蛍光灯の照射下における明所 コントラストを向上させた際の外光による不自然な着色、すなわち、蛍光灯の青'赤成 分の強調によるフィルタの紫色への着色を防止した電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ及び  The present invention relates to an electronic display filter and an electronic display device. For details, remove unnecessary light-emitting components by installing them on the front of electronic displays such as cathode ray tubes (CRT), liquid crystal displays (LCD), plasma displays (PDP), organic EL displays, and FED (field emission display) displays. Filters for electronic displays that have a function, in particular, reduce the green light emission of the three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp without significantly reducing the green light emission intensity of the electronic display. A filter for an electronic display that prevents unnatural coloring due to external light when the contrast is improved, that is, prevents the filter from being colored purple due to the enhancement of the blue and red components of fluorescent lamps.
'装置に関する。  'On the device.
背景技術  Background art
[0002] 近年、大型の壁掛けテレビはじめ種々の電子機器の表示パネルとしてプラズマディ スプレイパネルが使用され、その需要が増大し、その数は益々増加している。  [0002] In recent years, plasma display panels have been used as display panels for various electronic devices such as large wall-mounted televisions, and their demand has increased, and the number thereof has been increasing.
[0003] プラズマディスプレイなど蛍光体を使用する電子ディスプレイでは、赤 '緑 '青色発 光蛍光体がディスプレイの表面に配置されており、これら蛍光体の色は白色であり、 その反射率が高いものである。そのため、蛍光灯、電球、太陽光などの電子ディスプ レイの設置された周りに存在する照明などが存在する明所において、電子ディスプレ ィの画像を視聴する場合、外光が電子ディスプレイの表面で反射する現象が起こる。  [0003] In an electronic display using a phosphor such as a plasma display, red, green, and blue light-emitting phosphors are arranged on the surface of the display, and the color of these phosphors is white and their reflectance is high. It is. Therefore, when viewing an image on an electronic display in a light place where there is lighting, such as a fluorescent lamp, a light bulb, or sunlight, around the electronic display, external light is reflected on the surface of the electronic display. Phenomenon occurs.
[0004] 例えば、電子ディスプレイで黒色を表示する場合、ディスプレイに何も表示させない 状態が黒色表示にあたる。特に、プラズマディスプレイ等の蛍光体を使用する電子デ イスプレイにおいては、蛍光体自体の色が白色であるため、外光が存在する環境下 では、表示した黒色が白けた黒色となり、電子ディスプレイ白色表示時の輝度と黒色 表示時の輝度比が小さぐその結果、良好な明暗コントラストが得られない。  [0004] For example, when displaying black on an electronic display, a state in which nothing is displayed on the display corresponds to black display. In particular, in an electronic display using a phosphor such as a plasma display, the color of the phosphor itself is white. As a result, the brightness ratio at the time of display and the brightness at the time of black display are small.
[0005] そこで、外光の反射成分を除去して白けた黒をより黒くするために、透過率を下げ るようなフィルタが電子ディスプレイの前面に設けられている。 [0006] し力しながら、従来、電子ディスプレイの前面に設置されるフィルタに付与されるコ ントラスト向上機能は、もっぱらフィルタで可視光全域の透過率を低下させることによ り外光を吸収、カットするというものであったため、当然、電子ディスプレイの発光も力 ットしてしまい、コントラスト向上の効果はあまりな力つた。そして、そのような問題を解 決するため、特定の波長帯の光を吸収することによって外光による明暗コントラストの 低下を抑制する外光抑制層を有する電子ディスプレイ用フィルタが提案されている。 特許文献 1 :特開 2003— 167118号公報 [0005] Therefore, in order to remove the reflection component of the external light to make the white black more black, a filter for lowering the transmittance is provided on the front surface of the electronic display. [0006] In contrast, the contrast enhancement function conventionally provided to a filter installed on the front of an electronic display has a function of absorbing external light by reducing the transmittance of the entire visible light region with the filter. Naturally, the light emission of the electronic display was enhanced because it was cut, and the effect of improving the contrast was too strong. In order to solve such a problem, there has been proposed a filter for an electronic display having an external light suppressing layer that absorbs light in a specific wavelength band and thereby suppresses a decrease in contrast of light and dark due to external light. Patent Document 1: JP 2003-167118 A
[0007] し力しながら、このフィルタの外光抑制能力は、主にオフィスや工場に設置される普 通形蛍光灯 F6環境下を主眼に置いたものであり、家庭や店頭によく設置される 3波 長域発光形蛍光灯環境下においては必ずしも十分に効果が出るわけではないこと がわかった。すなわち、外光、特に 3波長域発光形蛍光灯が存在する環境下で効果 的に明暗コントラストを得るためには、電子ディスプレイの発光をたくさん通し、外光 成分、特に 3波長域発光形蛍光灯発光成分のみを選択的にカットするようなフィルタ が望まれている。  [0007] However, the ability of this filter to suppress external light is mainly intended for ordinary fluorescent lamp F6 environments installed in offices and factories, and is often installed in homes and stores. It was found that the effect was not necessarily sufficient in a three-wavelength-emission fluorescent lamp environment. In other words, in order to obtain an effective contrast in an environment where external light, especially a three-wavelength fluorescent lamp, is present, it is necessary to pass a large amount of light from the electronic display and use the external light component, particularly a three-wavelength fluorescent lamp. There is a need for a filter that selectively cuts only the luminescent component.
[0008] ここで謂う明暗コントラストとは、ディスプレイに画像を表示させたときの発光輝度と、 黒を表示させたときの黒色輝度の比率である。ディスプレイに画像を表示させたとき の発光輝度は高ぐそして、黒を表示させたときの輝度が低ければ明暗コントラストは 向上する。ディスプレイの表示画像を明るくするためには、ディスプレイの発光成分を そのまま通すこと、すなわち、フィルタのディスプレイ発光成分に対する透過率をより 高くなる様に設定すればよい。  [0008] Here, the so-called light-dark contrast is a ratio of a light emission luminance when displaying an image on a display to a black luminance when displaying black. The light emission luminance when displaying an image on a display is high, and the light-dark contrast is improved if the luminance when displaying black is low. In order to brighten the display image on the display, the light-emitting component of the display may be passed as it is, that is, the filter may be set to have a higher transmittance for the display light-emitting component.
[0009] 次に、外光の存在する明所において、黒を表示させた時に黒をより黒く見せるため には、すなわち、黒の輝度を低くするには、外光の発光成分に対して、フィルタの透 過率をより低くなる様に設定すればよい。これは、ディスプレイの黒は、電流が流れて いない部分によって表されるものである、つまり、ディスプレイの黒の表示時は、その 明るさの大半が外光の反射光に起因するからである。  [0009] Next, in order to make black appear blacker when displaying black in a bright place where external light exists, that is, in order to lower the luminance of black, the light emission component of the external light must be What is necessary is just to set the transmittance of the filter to be lower. This is because the black color of the display is represented by a portion where no current flows, that is, when the black color of the display is displayed, most of its brightness is due to reflected light of external light.
[0010] 他方、人間は、光の波長によって明るさの感じ方が異なる。すなわち、視感度の高 い波長では明るさ/暗さをより多く感じ、視感度の低い波長ではそれほど感じない。こ こで、視感度とは「目に入る放射のうち、明るさの感覚を生じさせるために有効な刺激 となる割合を表すもの」(物理学辞典 培風館)と定義されている。この視感度のピー クは 555nmにある。すなわち、この 555nm近傍の外光をうまくコントロールすることに より、明暗コントラストを制御することが出来る。 [0010] On the other hand, humans perceive brightness differently depending on the wavelength of light. In other words, light / darkness is more perceived at wavelengths with higher luminosity, and not so much at wavelengths with lower luminosity. Here, luminosity refers to “a stimulus that is effective in generating a sense of brightness among radiation entering the eye. It is defined as "representing the ratio of" (Physics Dictionary Baifukan). The peak of this visibility is at 555 nm. In other words, by controlling the external light around 555 nm well, the contrast between light and dark can be controlled.
[0011] さまざまに存在する外光のうち、 日本で非常によく使用されている三波長域発光形 蛍光灯 F10 FIS Z8719— 1996)の緑発光成分は、 545nmをピークとし、 530— 56 Onmにその大部分が存在する。一方、プラズマディスプレイの緑発光成分は、 525η mをピークとし、 480— 580nm〖こその大半力存在する。三波長域発光形蛍光灯の緑 発光成分とプラズマディスプレイの緑発光成分とを比較してみると、 540— 555nmの 領域は、外光成分が多ぐプラズマディスプレイの発光成分が少なぐ逆に、 525nm 近傍の領域は、プラズマディスプレイの発光成分が多ぐ外光成分が少ない領域で あることがわかる。つまり、 540— 555nmの領域の光をフィルタによってカットし、 525 nm周辺の光をより透過する様にフィルタの透過率を設計すれば、明暗コントラスト〖こ 優れたフィルタを得ることが出来る。  [0011] Among the various types of external light, the green light-emitting component of the three-wavelength light-emitting fluorescent lamp F10 FIS Z8719—1996), which is very widely used in Japan, has a peak at 545 nm and a peak at 530—56 Onm. Most of them exist. On the other hand, the green light emission component of the plasma display has a peak at 525 ηm, and most of the light exists at 480 to 580 nm 〖. Comparing the green light emission component of a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp with the green light emission component of a plasma display, the 540-555 nm region has a large external light component and a small plasma display light emission component. It can be seen that the region near 525 nm is a region where the plasma display has a large amount of light-emitting components and a small amount of external light components. In other words, if the light in the region of 540-555 nm is cut by the filter and the transmittance of the filter is designed so that the light around 525 nm is more transmitted, it is possible to obtain a filter with excellent light / dark contrast.
[0012] 540— 555nmの領域の光をフィルタによってカットする方法は、例えば、 540— 55 5nmの領域に吸収を持つ色素 ·顔料 '染料などを配合したフィルム等をフィルタに張 り合わせることで達成できる。すなわち、フィルタの 540— 555nmの領域の透過率を 局所的に低下させられるようなフィルタが得られれば、電子ディスプレイの明暗コント ラス卜を向上させることが出来る。  [0012] A method of cutting light in the 540-555 nm region with a filter is achieved by, for example, laminating a film or the like containing a dye or pigment that absorbs light in the 540-555 nm region to the filter. it can. That is, if a filter capable of locally lowering the transmittance of the filter in the 540-555 nm region can be obtained, the brightness control of the electronic display can be improved.
[0013] 540— 555nm近傍の光とは、赤 ·緑'青の光の 3原色のうちの緑成分である。フィル タにより外光成分のうちの 540— 555nm近傍の光をその他の波長の光に対して相 対的に多くカットした場合には、外光成分のうちの青色'赤色の光は透過するが、緑 色の光は透過させないことになる。その結果、三波長域発光形蛍光灯下では、フィル タ自体の色が青と赤の混色、つまり、紫色に色付いてしまう欠点があった。  [0013] Light near 540-555 nm is a green component of the three primary colors of red, green and blue light. If the filter cuts off light of 540-555nm in the external light component relatively more than light of other wavelengths, the blue and red light of the external light component will be transmitted. Therefore, green light is not transmitted. As a result, under a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp, the color of the filter itself was a mixed color of blue and red, that is, a purple color.
[0014] つまり、人間の目に見えるフィルタの色とは、蛍光灯などの外光がフィルタを透過し 、ディスプレイ表面で反射して、もう一度フィルタを通過した光の色である。通常、白 色である蛍光灯などの光は、緑の光をより多くカットさせるようなフィルタを 2回通過す ることで、青 '緑'赤のバランスが変わり、青 ·赤の割合が多い光となって、人間の目に 観測されるので、フィルタの色が紫色に色づいて見えることになる。この様に、特に、 三波長域発光形蛍光灯が照射する明所でのコントラスト向上とフィルタ自体の不自 然な色づきの抑制という、 2つの機能の両立は困難であった。 [0014] In other words, the color of the filter that is visible to human eyes is the color of light that is transmitted through the filter, reflected from the display surface, and passed through the filter again, such as fluorescent light. Normally, white light such as fluorescent light passes through a filter that cuts more green light twice, changing the balance of blue 'green' and red and increasing the ratio of blue and red. It becomes light and is observed by the human eye, so the color of the filter appears purple. Thus, in particular, It was difficult to balance the two functions of improving the contrast in a bright place illuminated by a three-wavelength fluorescent lamp and suppressing the coloration of the filter itself.
[0015] 別に、光学フィルタは、ガラスや PET等の無色透明な材料カゝらなる基板 (透明基板 )に機能性材料を薄ぐ塗布したり、光学機能フィルムを貼り付けることによって形成さ れる。 [0015] Separately, the optical filter is formed by thinly applying a functional material to a substrate (transparent substrate) made of a colorless and transparent material such as glass or PET, or attaching an optical functional film.
[0016] このような光学機能フィルムは、一般には、粘着剤を使用して透明基板に貼り付け られている。しかしながら、ディスプレイ装置は、その内部が比較的高温になりやすく 、また、長期に使用される装置であるため、経年変化により光学機能フィルムが端部 力ら剥がれることがある。  [0016] Such an optical function film is generally attached to a transparent substrate using an adhesive. However, the inside of the display device tends to be relatively high in temperature, and since the display device is used for a long period of time, the optical function film may peel off from the edge portion due to aging.
[0017] 通常、透明基板は、視覚特性を向上させるためにその表面が平滑に加工されてお り、そもそも接着強度を得に《なっている。それに加え、近年、ディスプレイ装置の大 画面化が進んでおり、ディスプレイの発熱による熱膨張によって生じる透明基板の寸 法変化も増大し、貼り付け後にフィルムに加わる張力変動もまた増大している。この 様に、透明基板に貼り付けられたフィルムが剥がれやすくなる要因が増えており、今 後もこの傾向は続くものと考えられる。  [0017] Usually, the surface of a transparent substrate is processed to be smooth in order to improve the visual characteristics, and the adhesive strength is obtained in the first place. In addition, in recent years, the screen size of the display device has been increasing, the dimensional change of the transparent substrate caused by thermal expansion due to the heat generated by the display has increased, and the fluctuation of the tension applied to the film after pasting has also increased. As described above, the factors that make it easy for the film attached to the transparent substrate to peel off are increasing, and this trend is expected to continue in the future.
[0018] そのため、粘着剤、フィルムの経年変化および透明基板の寸法変動に耐えうる十 分なフィルムの接着強度が得られる様にフィルムを貼り付ける技術、手法などの改良 が必要とされて!/ヽる。これまでは平滑な面に対する粘着力に優れる限られた種類の 粘着剤を使用して対処されてきたが、これらの粘着剤は、経時変化や生産性、価格と V、つた他の条件で優れて 、るとは限らなかった。  [0018] Therefore, there is a need for improvements in techniques and techniques for attaching a film so as to obtain sufficient adhesive strength of the film that can withstand aging of the adhesive and the film and dimensional fluctuation of the transparent substrate! / Puru. In the past, this was addressed by using a limited class of adhesives that had good adhesion to smooth surfaces, but these adhesives were superior over time, productivity, price and V, and other conditions. That was not always the case.
[0019] 透明基板には、外観上の問題から、その外周部分に不透明(主に黒色)の枠が額 縁状に印刷されていることが多い。従来、このような印刷 (額縁印刷)部分については 、透明基板の対向する面の方向(ディスプレイ装置における観察方向)から見た際の 外観にっ 、てのみが重要視されており、露出した表面 (透明基板に接して!/、な!/ヽ印 刷面)の特性や効用につ 、ては何ら着目されて 、なかった。 [0019] An opaque (mainly black) frame is often printed in a frame shape on the outer peripheral portion of the transparent substrate due to a problem in appearance. Conventionally, such printing (frame printing) has been regarded as important only in its appearance when viewed from the direction of the opposing surface of the transparent substrate (observation direction in the display device). (In contact with the transparent substrate! /, Na! / ヽ printing surface), no attention was paid to the characteristics and utility.
発明の開示  Disclosure of the invention
発明が解決しょうとする課題  Problems to be solved by the invention
[0020] 本発明は上記の実情に鑑みなされたもので、その目的は、三波長域発光形蛍光灯 が照射する明所でのコントラスト向上と、フィルタ自体の不自然な色づきの抑制というThe present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and has as its object to provide a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp. To improve the contrast in bright places illuminated, and to suppress unnatural coloring of the filter itself.
、 2つの機能を両立させた電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを提供することにある。 An object of the present invention is to provide a filter for an electronic display having both functions.
[0021] 本発明の他の目的は、明所でのコントラスト向上と共に、額縁印刷における露出表 面の表面粗さが制御された部分を利用して光学機能フィルムを貼り付けることが出来 る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの透明基板を提供することにある。 [0021] Another object of the present invention is to provide an electronic display capable of attaching an optical functional film by using a portion where the surface roughness of an exposed surface in frame printing is controlled, while improving contrast in a light place. To provide a transparent substrate for an application filter.
課題を解決するための手段  Means for solving the problem
[0022] 三波長域発光形蛍光灯が照射された環境下での電子ディスプレイを視聴する際の 電子ディスプレイの黒表示時の輝度に関して、本発明者らが検討した結果、前述し た様に 540— 555nmの領域のフィルタ透過率を低くすればする程、電子ディスプレ ィの黒色表示時の輝度をより低くすることが出来ることを見出した。すなわち、フィルタ の 540— 555nmの光線透過率の平均値 Ta (%)を通常 40%以下、好ましくは 35% 以下、より好ましくは 33%以下、更により好ましくは 30%以下、最も好ましくは 20%以 下と低くすればする程、三波長域発光形蛍光灯を照射した環境下で、電子ディスプ レイを視聴する際の電子ディスプレイの黒表示時の黒の輝度を下げることが出来るこ とを見出した。 The inventors of the present invention have studied the brightness of the electronic display in black display when viewing the electronic display in an environment illuminated by the three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp, and as a result, as described above, — We found that the lower the filter transmittance in the 555 nm region, the lower the brightness of the electronic display when displaying black. That is, the average value of the light transmittance of the filter at 540-555 nm Ta (%) is usually 40% or less, preferably 35% or less, more preferably 33% or less, still more preferably 30% or less, and most preferably 20% or less. It has been found that the lower the value is, the lower the brightness of black in black display of the electronic display when viewing the electronic display in an environment illuminated by a three-band fluorescent lamp. Was.
[0023] 次に、明暗コントラストに関しては、前述のとおり、プラズマディスプレイの発光成分 が少な!/、540— 555nmの領域のフィルタ透過率を低くすることで、黒の輝度を低く すると共に、プラズマディスプレイの発光成分が多 ヽ 525nm近傍の光線透過率を高 くする様に光学設計すれば、電子ディスプレイの画像表示時の発光輝度を阻害しな いことになる。本発明者らの検討の結果、 525nmの光線透過率 Tb (%)を 540— 55 5nmの光線透過率の平均値 Ta (%)で除した値が通常 1.10以上の場合は、三波長 域発光形蛍光灯を照射した環境下で良好な明暗コントラストを得ることが出来ることを 見出した。すなわち、 525nmの光線透過率 Tb (%)を 540— 555nmの光線透過率 の平均値 Ta (%)で除した値が好ましくは 1.20以上、より好ましくは 1.30以上、更に より好ましくは 1.40以上、最も好ましくは 1.50以上と大きくすればする程、より良好な 明暗コントラストが得られることを見出した。  [0023] Next, regarding the light-dark contrast, as described above, the light emission component of the plasma display is small! / By lowering the filter transmittance in the region of 540 to 555 nm, the luminance of black is reduced and the plasma display is reduced. If an optical design is made so as to increase the light transmittance when the light emitting component of the light is about 525 nm, the light emission luminance at the time of displaying an image on the electronic display will not be hindered. As a result of the study by the present inventors, when the value obtained by dividing the light transmittance Tb (%) at 525 nm by the average value Ta (%) of the light transmittance at 540 to 555 nm is usually 1.10 or more, the emission in the three wavelength region is considered. It has been found that good light-dark contrast can be obtained in an environment illuminated by a fluorescent lamp. That is, the value obtained by dividing the light transmittance Tb (%) at 525 nm by the average value Ta (%) of the light transmittances at 540 to 555 nm is preferably 1.20 or more, more preferably 1.30 or more, still more preferably 1.40 or more, It has been found that the better the contrast is, preferably, 1.50 or more, the better the contrast is obtained.
[0024] また、本発明者らが三波長域発光形蛍光灯の発光成分の分光特性を検討した結 果、三波長域発光形蛍光灯の発光成分のうち、赤色の主要発光成分、緑色の主要 発光成分および青色の主要発光成分は、それぞれ 612nm、 545nm、 437nmをピ ークとして非常に狭 、領域に集中して 、る。全波長(380— 780nm)の輝度に対す るこれら 3波長の近傍(612± 20nm、 545± 20nm、 437± 20nm)の輝度の割合は 、 76%であり、全波長の輝度の大半を占めている。この事実は、三波長域発光形蛍 光灯にお 、ては、これら 3波長近傍の光の影響がかなり大き 、ことを意味して 、る。 [0024] Further, as a result of examining the spectral characteristics of the light-emitting components of the three-wavelength light-emitting fluorescent lamp, the present inventors have found that, among the light-emitting components of the three-wavelength light-emitting fluorescent lamp, a main red light-emitting component and a green light-emitting component. Main The light emitting component and the blue main light emitting component peak at 612 nm, 545 nm, and 437 nm, respectively, and are very narrow and concentrated in a region. The ratio of the luminance near these three wavelengths (612 ± 20 nm, 545 ± 20 nm, 437 ± 20 nm) to the luminance at all wavelengths (380-780 nm) is 76%, which accounts for the majority of the luminance at all wavelengths. I have. This fact means that, in a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp, the influence of light near these three wavelengths is considerably large.
[0025] 前述のとおり、電子ディスプレイの前面に設置されたフィルタの色づきは、外光がフ ィルタを一度通過して、電子ディスプレイ表面にて反射、そして再びフィルタを通過し て出てきた光の特性に起因する。つまり、フィルタを 2度通過して出てくる光の赤 '緑' 青の発光バランスが大幅に崩れて 、るとフィルタが不自然に色づ 、て見える。これら を勘案して、フィルタの 612nm、 545nm、 437nmの 3点の光線透過率を適切に制 御することで、フィルタの色づきを抑えることが出来ることを見出した。  [0025] As described above, the coloring of the filter installed on the front of the electronic display is based on the fact that the external light passes through the filter once, is reflected on the surface of the electronic display, and is again the light that has exited through the filter. Due to properties. That is, if the emission balance of red, green, and blue of light that passes through the filter twice is significantly disturbed, the filter looks unnaturally colored. Taking these factors into account, we found that by appropriately controlling the light transmittance of the filter at 612 nm, 545 nm, and 437 nm, the coloration of the filter could be suppressed.
[0026] すなわち、三波長域発光形蛍光灯の発光成分の分光特性を検討した結果、フィル タ自体の色が不自然に色づくのを抑えるためには、例えば、 437nm (Td)、 545nm ( Tc)、 612nm (Te)の 3点のフィルタの光線透過率(%)の最大値と最小値の差が通 常 10以下であればよぐそして、 3点のフィルタの光線透過率(%)の最大値と最小値 の差が好ましくは 7以下、より好ましくは 5以下、更により好ましくは 3以下と小さければ 小さい程、フィルタの色づきがなぐフィルタとして好ましい色目である-ユートラルブ ルー、ニュートラルグレーにすることが出来ることを見出した。  That is, as a result of examining the spectral characteristics of the light-emitting components of the three-band fluorescent lamp, in order to prevent the color of the filter itself from being unnaturally colored, for example, 437 nm (Td), 545 nm (Tc ), The difference between the maximum value and the minimum value of the light transmittance (%) of the three-point filter at 612 nm (Te) should normally be 10 or less. The smaller the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value is, preferably, 7 or less, more preferably 5 or less, and even more preferably 3 or less, the more preferable the color tone of the filter, the color tone of the filter is reduced .-- Eutral blue and neutral gray I found that I can do it.
[0027] 本発明は、上記知見に基づき完成されたものであり、本発明の前記の目的は以下 の 1)一 12)の何れかの態様によって達成される。  The present invention has been completed based on the above findings, and the above object of the present invention is achieved by any one of the following 1) to 12).
[0028] 1)第 1発明の第 1の要旨は、発光表示デバイスを有する電子ディスプレイ装置に使 用される電子ディスプレイ用フィルタであって、以下の透過率特性を有することを特 徴とする電子ディスプレイ用フィルタに存する。  1) A first gist of the first invention is a filter for an electronic display used for an electronic display device having a light emitting display device, wherein the filter has the following transmittance characteristics. Present in display filters.
(1)波長 400nm— 700nmの可視光領域に少なくとも一つの透過率の極小値が存 在する。  (1) At least one minimum value of the transmittance exists in the visible light region of wavelengths from 400 nm to 700 nm.
(2)透過率の極小値のなかの最小の透過率(%)と可視光領域の最大透過率(%) との差が 10以上である。  (2) The difference between the minimum transmittance (%) among the minimum values of the transmittance and the maximum transmittance (%) in the visible light region is 10 or more.
( 3)波長 540nm— 555nmの光線透過率の平均値(% )が 40 %以下である。 (4)波長 525nmの光線透過率(% )を波長 540nm— 555nmの光線透過率の平 均値(%)で除した値が 1. 10以上である。 (3) The average value (%) of light transmittance at wavelengths of 540 nm to 555 nm is 40% or less. (4) The value obtained by dividing the light transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 525 nm by the average value (%) of the light transmittance at a wavelength of 540 nm to 555 nm is 1.10 or more.
(5)波長 545nmの透過率(%)、波長 437nmの透過率(%)及び波長 612nmの透 過率(%)中の最大値と最小値の差が 10以下である。  (5) The difference between the maximum value and the minimum value in the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 545 nm, the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 437 nm, and the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 612 nm is 10 or less.
[0029] 2)第 2の要旨は、前述の第 1発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタが設けられているこ とを特徴とする電子ディスプレイ装置に存する。  [0029] 2) A second aspect resides in an electronic display device characterized in that the electronic display filter of the first invention is provided.
[0030] 3)第 2発明の第 1の要旨は、発光表示デバイスを有する電子ディスプレイ装置に使 用される電子ディスプレイ用フィルタであって、  3) A first gist of the second invention is a filter for an electronic display used for an electronic display device having a light emitting display device,
発光表示デバイスの緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過率 (%)より、 3波長域発光 形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過率 (%)が 5以上低い、または、発光 表示デバイスの白色発光スペクトルを使用した場合の視感透過率 Y1 (%)より、 3波 長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過率 (%)が 1以上低!、透過特 性を有すると共に、  The light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the three-band fluorescent tube is 5 or more lower than the light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the light emitting display device, or the light emitting display device is white. The light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the 3-wavelength emission fluorescent tube is 1 or more lower than the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) when using the emission spectrum! ,
(A)電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの発光表示デバイス側表面に入射光の特定波長 成分の透過を抑制する外光抑制層と電子ディスプレイ装置からの電磁波放射を抑制 するための電磁波シールド層とが、電磁波シールド層が外光抑制層よりも発光表示 デバイス側になる様に、配置されることを特徴とする電子ディスプレイ用フィルタに存 する。  (A) An external light suppression layer that suppresses transmission of a specific wavelength component of incident light on the light-emitting display device side surface of an electronic display filter and an electromagnetic wave shield layer that suppresses electromagnetic wave radiation from the electronic display device are formed by an electromagnetic wave shield. The electronic display filter is characterized in that the layer is arranged so that the layer is closer to the light emitting display device than the external light suppressing layer.
[0031] 4)第 2発明の第 2の要旨は、前述の第 2発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタが設け られていることを特徴とする電子ディスプレイ装置に存する。  4) A second gist of the second invention resides in an electronic display device including the electronic display filter according to the second invention.
[0032] 5)第 3発明の第 1の要旨は、発光表示デバイスを有する電子ディスプレイ装置に使 用される電子ディスプレイ用フィルタであって、  [0032] 5) A first aspect of the third invention is a filter for an electronic display used in an electronic display device having a light emitting display device,
発光表示デバイスの緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過率 (%)より、 3波長域発光 形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過率 (%)が 5以上低い、または、発光 表示デバイスの白色発光スペクトルを使用した場合の視感透過率 Y1 (%)より、 3波 長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過率 (%)が 1以上低!、透過特 性を有すると共に、  The light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the three-band fluorescent tube is 5 or more lower than the light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the light emitting display device, or the light emitting display device is white. The light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the 3-wavelength emission fluorescent tube is 1 or more lower than the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) when using the emission spectrum! ,
(B)電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの最外面に視感透過率 90%以上の外光導入層が 配置されることを特徴とする電子ディスプレイ用フィルタに存する。 (B) An external light introduction layer with a luminous transmittance of 90% or more is provided on the outermost surface of the electronic display filter. An electronic display filter characterized by being arranged.
[0033] 6)第 3発明の第 2の要旨は、前述の第 3発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタが設け られていることを特徴とする電子ディスプレイ装置に存する。  [0033] 6) A second aspect of the third invention resides in an electronic display device including the electronic display filter according to the third invention described above.
[0034] 7)第 4発明の第 1の要旨は、発光表示デバイスを有する電子ディスプレイ装置に使 用される電子ディスプレイ用フィルタであって、  7) A first gist of the fourth invention is a filter for an electronic display used for an electronic display device having a light emitting display device,
発光表示デバイスの緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過率 (%)より、 3波長域発光 形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過率 (%)が 5以上低い、または、発光 表示デバイスの白色発光スペクトルを使用した場合の視感透過率 Y1 (%)より、 3波 長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過率 (%)が 1以上低!、透過特 性を有すると共に、  The light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the three-band fluorescent tube is 5 or more lower than the light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the light emitting display device, or the light emitting display device is white. The light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the 3-wavelength emission fluorescent tube is 1 or more lower than the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) when using the emission spectrum! ,
(C)電子ディスプレイ用フィルタがヘイズ値 1. 5%以下の透明基材で構成されるこ とを特徴とする電子ディスプレイ用フィルタに存する。  (C) The electronic display filter is characterized in that the electronic display filter is composed of a transparent substrate having a haze value of 1.5% or less.
[0035] 8)第 4発明の第 2の要旨は、前述の第 4発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタが設け られていることを特徴とする電子ディスプレイ装置に存する。  8) A second aspect of the fourth invention resides in an electronic display device including the electronic display filter according to the fourth invention.
[0036] 9)第 5発明の第 1の要旨は、発光表示デバイスを有する電子ディスプレイ装置に使 用される電子ディスプレイ用フィルタであって、  9) A first gist of the fifth invention is a filter for an electronic display used in an electronic display device having a light emitting display device,
発光表示デバイスの緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過率 (%)より、 3波長域発光 形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過率 (%)が 5以上低い、または、発光 表示デバイスの白色発光スペクトルを使用した場合の視感透過率 Y1 (%)より、 3波 長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過率 (%)が 1以上低!、透過特 性を有すると共に、  The light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the three-band fluorescent tube is 5 or more lower than the light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the light emitting display device, or the light emitting display device is white. The light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the 3-wavelength emission fluorescent tube is 1 or more lower than the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) when using the emission spectrum! ,
(D)電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの発光表示デバイス側表面に可視光透過率 60— 80%の電磁波シールド層が配置されることを特徴とする電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ に存する。  (D) An electronic display filter characterized in that an electromagnetic wave shielding layer having a visible light transmittance of 60 to 80% is arranged on the surface of the electronic display filter on the light emitting display device side.
[0037] 10)第 5発明の第 2の要旨は、前述の第 5発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタが設け られていることを特徴とする電子ディスプレイ装置に存する。  [0037] A second aspect of the fifth invention resides in an electronic display device including the electronic display filter according to the fifth invention.
[0038] 11)第 6発明の第 1の要旨は、発光表示デバイスを有する電子ディスプレイ装置に 使用される電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの支持体としての透明基板であって、 透明基板表面の外周部に枠状の不透明領域を有し、 11) A first gist of the sixth invention is a transparent substrate as a support for an electronic display filter used in an electronic display device having a light emitting display device, It has a frame-shaped opaque area on the outer periphery of the transparent substrate surface,
不透明領域の表面粗さが算術平均高さ (Ra)で 0. 05— 100 μ mであることを特徴 とする電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの透明基板に存する。  The opaque region has an arithmetic mean height (Ra) of 0.05 to 100 μm on the transparent substrate of the electronic display filter.
[0039] 12)第 6発明の第 2の要旨は、発光表示デバイスを有する電子ディスプレイ装置に 使用される電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの支持体としての透明基板であって、透明基 板表面の外周部に枠状の不透明領域を有し、不透明領域の表面粗さが算術平均高 さ(Ra)で 0. 05— 100 μ mである電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの透明基板と、 電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの透明基板に貼り付けられている少なくとも 1枚の光学 機能フィルムとから成る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタに存する。 12) A second gist of the sixth invention is a transparent substrate as a support for an electronic display filter used in an electronic display device having a light emitting display device, which is provided on an outer peripheral portion of a surface of the transparent substrate. It has a frame-shaped opaque area, and the surface roughness of the opaque area is 0.05 to 100 μm in arithmetic mean height (Ra). An electronic display filter comprising at least one optically functional film adhered thereto.
発明の効果  The invention's effect
[0040] 本発明によれば、 3波長域発光形蛍光灯照射下の明所でのコントラスト向上と、フィ ルタ自体の不自然な色付きの抑制という 2つの機能の両立させることが出来る。また、 外光抑制層を有するフィルタを使用する電子ディスプレイ装置の明 B音コントラスト向 上およびフィルタの色づき抑制を両立することが出来る。別に、コントラスト向上と共 に、額縁印刷における露出表面の表面粗さが制御された部分を利用して光学機能フ イルムを貼り付けることにより、簡便な構成で十分強い粘着強度を得ることが出来る。 図面の簡単な説明  According to the present invention, it is possible to achieve both the two functions of improving the contrast in a light place under irradiation with a fluorescent light of a three-wavelength region and suppressing unnatural coloring of the filter itself. In addition, it is possible to improve both the bright B sound contrast of an electronic display device using a filter having an external light suppression layer and to suppress the coloring of the filter. Separately, by applying an optical function film using a portion where the surface roughness of the exposed surface in the frame printing is controlled together with the improvement of the contrast, a sufficiently strong adhesive strength can be obtained with a simple configuration. Brief Description of Drawings
[0041] [図 1]図 1は、第 1発明のプラズマディスプレイパネルの白色発光スペクトル、三波長 域発光形蛍光灯 F10の発光スペクトル、及び、実施例 1に係る電子ディスプレイ用フ ィルタの透過スペクトルを示す図である。  FIG. 1 shows a white light emission spectrum of the plasma display panel of the first invention, a light emission spectrum of a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10, and a transmission spectrum of a filter for an electronic display according to the first embodiment. FIG.
[図 2]図 2は、電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを電子ディスプレイの前面に配置した電子 ディスプレイ装置にお 、て、電子ディスプレイからの発光と電子ディスプレイ表面での 外光の反射光とを概念的に説明する図である。  [FIG. 2] FIG. 2 conceptually illustrates light emitted from the electronic display and reflected light of external light on the surface of the electronic display in an electronic display device in which an electronic display filter is arranged in front of the electronic display. FIG.
[図 3]図 3は、第 2発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ及びそれを使用した電子ディス プレイ装置の構成例を示す図である。  FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an electronic display filter according to a second invention and an electronic display device using the same.
[図 4]図 4は、第 2発明のプラズマディスプレイパネルの発光スペクトル及び 3波長域 発光形蛍光灯 F 10の発光スペクトル、並びに本発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの 透過スペクトルを示す図である。 [図 5]図 5は、第 2発明の図 4に示す特性を有する電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを透過 した後のプラズマディスプレイの発光スペクトル及び 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F10の発 光スペクトルを示す図である。 FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an emission spectrum of the plasma display panel of the second invention, an emission spectrum of a three-wavelength-band fluorescent lamp F10, and a transmission spectrum of a filter for an electronic display of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an emission spectrum of a plasma display and an emission spectrum of a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10 after passing through an electronic display filter having the characteristics shown in FIG. 4 of the second invention. is there.
[図 6]図 6は、第 2発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを粘着剤層を介してディスプレイ パネルに直接貼り合わせた電子ディスプレイ装置の構成例を示す図である。  FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an electronic display device in which a filter for an electronic display of the second invention is directly bonded to a display panel via an adhesive layer.
[図 7]図 7は、第 3、 4、 5及 6び発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ及びそれを使用した 電子ディスプレイ装置の構成例を示す図である。  FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an electronic display filter of the third, fourth, fifth, and sixth inventions and an electronic display device using the same.
[図 8]図 8は、第 3、 4及び 5発明のプラズマディスプレイパネルの発光スペクトル及び 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F 10の発光スペクトル、並びに電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの 透過スペクトルを示す図である。  FIG. 8 is a view showing an emission spectrum of the plasma display panel according to the third, fourth and fifth inventions, an emission spectrum of the three-band emission fluorescent lamp F10, and a transmission spectrum of a filter for an electronic display.
[図 9]図 9は、第 3、 4及び 5発明の図 8に示す特性を有する電子ディスプレイ用フィル タを透過した後のプラズマディスプレイの発光スペクトル及び 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F10の発光スペクトルを示す図である。  [FIG. 9] FIG. 9 is an emission spectrum of a plasma display and an emission spectrum of a three-band fluorescent lamp F10 after transmission through a filter for an electronic display having the characteristics shown in FIG. 8 of the third, fourth and fifth inventions. FIG.
[図 10]図 10は、第 6発明の透明基板の額縁印刷と、貼り付けされるフィルムとの位置 関係の説明図である。  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a positional relationship between frame printing on a transparent substrate of the sixth invention and a film to be pasted.
[図 11]図 11は、第 6発明の図 10におけるフィルムと透明基板との接着状態について 説明する模式図である。  [FIG. 11] FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating the state of adhesion between the film and the transparent substrate in FIG. 10 of the sixth invention.
[図 12]図 12は、第 6発明の実施例で形成した外光抑制フィルタの透過スペクトルを示 す図である。  FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a transmission spectrum of an external light suppressing filter formed in an example of the sixth invention.
[図 13]図 13は、第 5及び 6発明の実施例で形成した導電シールドメッシュ形成用のマ スクパターンを説明する図である。  FIG. 13 is a view for explaining a mask pattern for forming a conductive shield mesh formed in the fifth and sixth embodiments of the present invention.
発明を実施するための最良の形態  BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
[0042] 以下、本発明を詳細に説明する。本発明の説明に先立ち、図 2を使用して電子ディ スプレイの全面に設置されたフィルタの色づきについて説明する。図 2は、電子ディス プレイ用フィルタを電子ディスプレイの前面に配置した電子ディスプレイ装置におい て、電子ディスプレイ力 の発光と電子ディスプレイ表面での外光の反射光とを概念 的に説明する図である。  Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the present invention, coloring of a filter provided on the entire surface of the electronic display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram conceptually illustrating light emission of an electronic display and reflected light of external light on the surface of an electronic display in an electronic display device in which an electronic display filter is arranged in front of an electronic display.
[0043] 図 2に示す様に、電子ディスプレイ装置には、プラズマディスプレイパネル 12の前 面にフィルタ 100が設置されている。電子ディスプレイからの発光は、フィルター 100 を透過する。他方、電子ディスプレイの画像を視聴する場合、電子ディスプレイの設 置された周りに存在する蛍光灯、電球などの外光源 20からの光、太陽光などの外光 201は、フィルタ 100を透過し、ディスプレイ表面で反射して、もう一度フィルタ 100を 通過する。そして、人間の目に見えるフィルターの色とは、外光がフィルタを一度通過 し、電子ディスプレイ表面にて反射し、再びフィルターを通過して出てきた光の特性 に起因する。 As shown in FIG. 2, the electronic display device has a structure in front of the plasma display panel 12. The filter 100 is installed on the surface. Light emitted from the electronic display passes through the filter 100. On the other hand, when viewing an image on the electronic display, light from an external light source 20 such as a fluorescent lamp or a light bulb, and external light 201 such as sunlight, which are present around the electronic display, pass through the filter 100, The light is reflected off the display surface and passes through the filter 100 again. The color of the filter that is visible to the human eye is due to the characteristics of light that passes through the filter once, reflects off the surface of the electronic display, and passes through the filter again.
[0044] 次に、本発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタについて説明する。電子ディスプレイ用 フィルタとは、発光表示デバイスを使用する電子ディスプレイ装置用のフィルタである 。ここで、発光表示デバイスとは、プラズマディスプレイパネルや、液晶ディスプレイパ ネルとバックライトの組み合わせの様な、発光表示の機能を実現する最小構成、換言 すれば、ディスプレイフィルタを使用する対象となる発光表示体を意味する。そして、 本発明においての発光表示デバイスは、カラー発光表示デバイスである。また、電子 ディスプレイ装置とは、発光表示デバイス及びディスプレイフィルタが筐体に組み込 まれ、巿場でテレビやディスプレイ装置として流通して!/、る完成品の形態を意味する  Next, the filter for an electronic display of the present invention will be described. An electronic display filter is a filter for an electronic display device using a light emitting display device. Here, the light-emitting display device is a minimum configuration that realizes a light-emitting display function such as a plasma display panel or a combination of a liquid crystal display panel and a backlight, in other words, a light-emitting device for which a display filter is used. Means display body. Further, the light emitting display device according to the present invention is a color light emitting display device. In addition, the electronic display device means a finished product in which a light emitting display device and a display filter are incorporated in a housing and are distributed as a television or a display device on site!
[0045] 本発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、発光表示デバイスの前面、すなわち発光 表示デバイス力ゝら出射した光が、この発光表示デバイスを使用した電子ディスプレイ 装置から出射するまでの光路中に配置される。 The electronic display filter of the present invention is disposed on the front surface of the light emitting display device, that is, in the optical path until the light emitted from the light emitting display device exits from the electronic display device using the light emitting display device. You.
[0046] 本発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、外光抑制機能を有するフィルタである。外 光抑制機能は、電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを構成する層の 1つの有する機能である 。本発明において電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを構成する層は、隣り合う層と必ずしも 接着されている必要はない。例えば、隣り合う層と離れて配置されているような形態 や、隣り合う層と接してはいる力 接着はされていないような形態であってもよい。  The filter for an electronic display of the present invention is a filter having a function of suppressing external light. The external light suppressing function is a function of one of the layers constituting the electronic display filter. In the present invention, the layers constituting the filter for an electronic display need not necessarily be bonded to adjacent layers. For example, a form that is arranged apart from an adjacent layer or a form that does not have a force bonding in contact with an adjacent layer may be used.
[0047] 以下、添付図面に基づき、本発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ及び電子ディスプ レイ装置を説明する。図 1は、第 1発明のプラズマディスプレイパネルの白色発光ス ベクトル、 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F10の発光スペクトル、及び、実施例 1に係る電子 ディスプレイ用フィルタの透過スペクトルを示す図;図 3は、第 2発明の電子ディスプレ ィ用フィルタ及びそれを使用した電子ディスプレイ装置の構成を示す図;図 4は、第 2 発明のプラズマディスプレイパネルの発光スペクトル及び 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F1 0の発光スペクトル、並びに本発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの透過スペクトルを 示す図;図 5は、第 2発明の図 4に示す特性を有する電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを透 過した後のプラズマディスプレイの発光スペクトル及び 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F10の 発光スペクトルを示す図;図 6は、第 2発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを粘着剤層 を介してディスプレイパネルに直接貼り合わせた電子ディスプレイ装置の構成を示す 図;図 7は、第 3、 4、 5及 6び発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ及びそれを使用した 電子ディスプレイ装置の構成を示す図;図 8は、第 3、 4及び 5発明のプラズマデイス プレイパネルの発光スペクトル及び 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F10の発光スペクトル、並 びに電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの透過スペクトルを示す図;図 9は、第 3、 4及び 5発 明の図 8に示す特性を有する電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを透過した後のプラズマデ イスプレイの発光スペクトル及び 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F10の発光スペクトルを示す 図;図 10は、第 6発明の透明基板の額縁印刷と、貼り付けされるフィルムとの位置関 係の説明図;図 11は、第 6発明の図 10におけるフィルムと透明基板との接着状態に ついて説明する模式図;図 12は、第 6発明の実施例で形成した外光抑制フィルタの 透過スペクトルを示す図;及び、図 13は、第 5及び 6発明の実施例で形成した導電シ 一ルドメッシュ形成用のマスクパターンの説明図である。 Hereinafter, an electronic display filter and an electronic display device according to the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a white light emission spectrum of a plasma display panel of the first invention, a light emission spectrum of a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10, and a transmission spectrum of an electronic display filter according to Example 1; , The electronic display of the second invention FIG. 4 shows an emission spectrum of a plasma display panel according to the second invention, an emission spectrum of a three-wavelength fluorescent lamp F10, and an electronic filter of the present invention. FIG. 5 shows the transmission spectrum of a display filter; FIG. 5 shows the emission spectrum of a plasma display after passing through an electronic display filter having the characteristics shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an emission spectrum; FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a configuration of an electronic display device in which the filter for an electronic display of the second invention is directly adhered to a display panel via an adhesive layer; FIG. 5 and 6 are diagrams showing the configuration of the electronic display filter and the electronic display device using the same according to the invention; FIG. FIG. 9 shows the emission spectrum of the plasma display panel of the invention, the emission spectrum of the three-band fluorescent lamp F10, and the transmission spectrum of the filter for an electronic display; FIG. 9 shows the third, fourth, and fifth inventions in FIG. FIG. 10 shows an emission spectrum of a plasma display and an emission spectrum of a three-band fluorescent lamp F10 after transmission through an electronic display filter having the characteristics shown in FIG. 10; FIG. 11 is an explanatory view of a positional relationship with a film to be pasted; FIG. 11 is a schematic view illustrating an adhesion state between a film and a transparent substrate in FIG. 10 of the sixth invention; FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a transmission spectrum of the external light suppressing filter formed in Step 5; and FIG. 13 is an illustration of a mask pattern for forming a conductive shield mesh formed in the fifth and sixth embodiments. It is.
[0048] 先ず、第 1発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタについて、説明する。 First, the electronic display filter of the first invention will be described.
電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、(1)波長 400nm— 700nmの可視光領域に少なく とも一つの透過率の極小値が存在する;(2)透過率の極小値のなかの最小の透過率 (%)と可視光領域の最大透過率(%)との差が 10以上である;(3)波長 540nm— 55 5nmの光線透過率の平均値(%)が 40%以下である;(4)波長 525nmの光線透過 率(% )を波長 540nm— 555nmの光線透過率の平均値(% )で除した値が 1. 10以 上である;及び(5)波長 545nmの透過率(%)、波長 437nmの透過率(%)及び波 長 612nmの透過率(%)中の最大値と最小値の差が 10以下である透過率特性を有 する。  Electronic display filters have (1) at least one transmittance minimum in the visible light range of wavelengths from 400 nm to 700 nm; and (2) the minimum transmittance (%) among the transmittance minimums. The difference from the maximum transmittance (%) in the visible light region is 10 or more; (3) The average value (%) of the light transmittance at a wavelength of 540 nm to 555 nm is 40% or less; (4) The wavelength of 525 nm The value obtained by dividing the light transmittance (%) by the average value (%) of the light transmittance at wavelengths of 540 nm to 555 nm is 1.10 or more; and (5) The transmittance (%) of the wavelength 545 nm and the wavelength of 437 nm It has transmittance characteristics in which the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value in the transmittance (%) and the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 612 nm is 10 or less.
[0049] 第 1発明のに係る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタにおいては、所定の波長域に透過率 の極小値を持つ層を有する力 この層以外に、紫外線吸収剤を含有する層、近赤外 線カット層、電磁波シールド層、反射防止層、ぎらつき防止(ノングレア)層などを適 宜組み合わせて設けることが出来る。また、この発明に係るフィルタは、電子ディスプ レイ装置に使用することが出来る。 [0049] In the filter for an electronic display according to the first invention, the transmittance in a predetermined wavelength range. In addition to this layer, a layer containing an ultraviolet absorber, a near-infrared ray cut layer, an electromagnetic wave shielding layer, an anti-reflection layer, an anti-glare (non-glare) layer, etc. may be appropriately combined. Can be provided. Further, the filter according to the present invention can be used for an electronic display device.
[0050] 図 1は、第 1発明のプラズマディスプレイパネルの白色発光スペクトル、三波長域発 光形蛍光灯 F10 FIS Z8719- 1996)の発光スペクトル、及び、後述する実施例 1に 係る 380— 780nmの特定波長の透過率をコントロールしたフィルタの透過スペクトル を示し、図中、横軸に波長、縦軸に各波長の透過率 (%)を示す。  FIG. 1 shows a white light emission spectrum of the plasma display panel of the first invention, a light emission spectrum of a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10 FIS Z8719-1996), and a light emission spectrum of 380-780 nm according to Example 1 described later. The transmission spectrum of the filter whose transmittance at a specific wavelength is controlled is shown. In the figure, the horizontal axis shows the wavelength, and the vertical axis shows the transmittance (%) of each wavelength.
[0051] 第 1発明に係る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、 400— 700nmの可視光領域に少 なくとも一つの透過率の極小値を有する。さらに、第 1発明に係る電子ディスプレイ用 フィルタとして、 480— 520nmの波長領域に透過率の極小値を有する及び Z又は 5 30— 610nmの波長領域に透過率の極小値を有するフィルタが好適である。  The electronic display filter according to the first invention has at least one transmittance minimum in the visible light region of 400 to 700 nm. Further, as the filter for an electronic display according to the first invention, a filter having a minimum value of transmittance in a wavelength region of 480 to 520 nm and a minimum value of transmittance in a wavelength region of Z or 530 to 610 nm is preferable. .
[0052] なお、所定の波長域に透過率の極小値を持つと!、うことは、この波長域の光線を力 ットすることを意味している。ここで「極小値」とは、例えば、二次関数のグラフ等で定 義されている場合と同様な意味であり、即ち、グラフ上において減少力 増加に変わ る変曲点を意味し、最小値とは異なる。  [0052] It should be noted that having a minimum value of the transmittance in a predetermined wavelength range means that a light beam in this wavelength range is focused. Here, the “minimum value” has the same meaning as that defined in, for example, a graph of a quadratic function, that is, an inflection point at which a decreasing force increases on the graph, and a minimum value. Different from the value.
[0053] 第 1発明に係る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、透過率の極小値のなかの最小の透 過率 (%)と可視光領域の最大透過率 (%)との差が 10以上である。  [0053] In the electronic display filter according to the first invention, the difference between the minimum transmittance (%) among the minimum values of the transmittance and the maximum transmittance (%) in the visible light region is 10 or more.
[0054] 第 1発明に係る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、全波長(380— 780nm)の光線透 過率に対する波長 540— 555nmの光線透過率の平均値(%)が 40%以下、好ましく は 35%以下、より好ましくは 33%以下、更により好ましくは 30%以下、最も好ましくは 20%以下である。  The filter for an electronic display according to the first invention has an average value (%) of the light transmittance at a wavelength of 540 to 555 nm with respect to the light transmittance at all wavelengths (380 to 780 nm) of 40% or less, preferably 35% or less. Or less, more preferably 33% or less, even more preferably 30% or less, and most preferably 20% or less.
[0055] 第 1発明に係る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、波長 525nmの光線透過率(%)を 波長 540— 555nmの光線透過率の平均値(%)で除した値が 1. 10以上、好ましく は 1.20以上、より好ましくは 1.30以上、更により好ましくは 1.40以上、最も好ましくは 1.50以上である。  [0055] The electronic display filter according to the first invention has a value obtained by dividing the light transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 525 nm by the average value (%) of the light transmittance at a wavelength of 540 to 555 nm, and is preferably 1.10 or more, preferably It is at least 1.20, more preferably at least 1.30, even more preferably at least 1.40, most preferably at least 1.50.
[0056] 第 1発明に係る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、波長 545nmの透過率(%)、波長 4 37nmの透過率(%)及び波長 612nmの透過率(%)中の最大値と最小値の差が 10 以下、好ましくは 7以下、より好ましくは 5以下、更により好ましくは 3以下である。 The filter for an electronic display according to the first invention has a difference between the maximum value and the minimum value in the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 545 nm, the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 434 nm, and the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 612 nm. Is 10 Or less, preferably 7 or less, more preferably 5 or less, and still more preferably 3 or less.
[0057] フィルタの 437nmの透過率を調整する際、光の赤 ·緑.青の発光バランス(透過率( %)の差が ± 10以内であることが望ましい)を満足させるためには、 437nmの透過率 は当然低くしなければならない。しかしながら、 437nmの透過率が低下するに伴い、 プラズマディスプレイパネル (PDP)の青色表示時の青色が緑色付くこととなる。青色 が緑色付くことは、フィルタの 437nmの透過率を落とすことにより、大部分が 400— 5 20nmの波長領域に存在して 、る PDP青色蛍光体発光の青色成分がカットされ、相 対的に緑色成分が多くなることに起因している。青色が緑色付く問題を解決するため に、 480— 520nmに吸収を持つ色素をフィルタ構成成分に添カ卩して、フィルタの 48 0—520nmの透過率を低下させて、 480— 520nmの波長領域に透過率の極小値 を有することが好適である。フィルタの 480— 520nmの透過率を低下させることにより 、青色発光成分のうちの緑色成分をカットして、パネルの青色表示時の青色色度を 保持することが出来る。 When adjusting the transmittance of the filter at 437 nm, in order to satisfy the red, green, and blue light emission balance (the difference in transmittance (%) is preferably within ± 10), it is necessary to use 437 nm. Of course must be low. However, as the transmittance at 437 nm decreases, the blue color of the plasma display panel (PDP) when displaying blue becomes green. In order for blue to be green, the blue component of the PDP blue phosphor emission, which is mostly in the wavelength region of 400-520 nm, is cut by lowering the transmittance of the filter at 437 nm, This is due to an increase in green component. In order to solve the problem of blue to green color, a dye that absorbs at 480-520 nm is added to the filter components to reduce the filter's transmittance at 480-520 nm to reduce the wavelength range of 480-520 nm. It is preferable that the transmittance has a minimum value. By reducing the transmittance of the filter from 480 to 520 nm, the green component of the blue light-emitting component can be cut, and the blue chromaticity of the panel when displaying blue can be maintained.
[0058] また、通常、 PDPは、ネオン発光が原因で、赤色にオレンジ色が混ざり鮮やかな赤 色が得られない問題がある。特に、 PDP用フィルタの場合、 530— 610nmの波長領 域に透過率の極小値を有することが好適である。 530— 6 lOnmの波長領域に透過 率の極小値を有することにより、ネオンオレンジ光を吸収除去する機能を付与するこ とが出来る。  [0058] Further, usually, PDP has a problem that a vivid red color cannot be obtained due to a mixture of red and orange due to neon light emission. In particular, in the case of a PDP filter, it is preferable that the filter has a minimum value of transmittance in a wavelength region of 530 to 610 nm. By having a minimum value of the transmittance in the wavelength range of 530-6 lOnm, a function of absorbing and removing neon orange light can be provided.
[0059] 530— 610nmの波長域に透過率の極小値を有すると謂うことは、すなわち、この波 長域の光線をカットすることを意味する。 530— 610nmの波長領域は緑色発光と赤 色発光との間のオレンジ発光部分 (ネオン発光)であり、この部分をカットすることによ つて鮮明な赤色表示を得ることが出来、更に、色温度を高めることができるので、より 好ま 、色調の画像を得ることが出来る。極小透過率が 530nmよりも短波長側であ ると、ネオン発光をカットする効果が低ぐ且つ、色温度を高める効果も低いため好ま しくない。また、極小透過率が 610nmよりも長波長側であると、ディスプレイの赤色の 発光を阻害 (赤色を吸収)してしまうため好ましくな 、。  The fact that the transmittance has a minimum value in the wavelength range of 530 to 610 nm means that light rays in this wavelength range are cut. The wavelength range from 530 to 610 nm is the orange light emission part (neon light emission) between green light emission and red light emission. By cutting this part, a clear red display can be obtained, and furthermore, the color temperature can be obtained. Can be increased, so that a more favorable color tone image can be obtained. It is not preferable that the minimum transmittance is shorter than 530 nm because the effect of cutting neon emission is low and the effect of increasing color temperature is low. Further, it is not preferable that the minimum transmittance is on the long wavelength side than 610 nm, because the red light emission of the display is inhibited (red light is absorbed).
[0060] また、 530— 610nmの波長域に極小値を有する透過スペクトルは、シャープ(急峻 )なバレー型 (谷型)を有するほうが、赤発光の色純度向上および視野の明るさ確保 のため好ましい。 The transmission spectrum having a minimum value in the wavelength range of 530 to 610 nm has a sharp (valley) valley shape, which improves the color purity of red emission and ensures the brightness of the visual field. Preferred for.
[0061] 図 1の例では、上記の様に、ネオン発光をカットするために、 530— 610nmの波長 域に透過率の極小値を設けて!/ヽる。  In the example of FIG. 1, as described above, a minimum value of the transmittance is provided in the wavelength range of 530 to 610 nm in order to cut off neon light emission.
[0062] 第 1発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、 3波長域発光形蛍光灯の青色発光ピー クが存在する波長 (437nm)、緑色発光ピークが存在する波長(545nm)及び赤色 発光ピークが存在する波長(612nm)の何れかの波長近傍に最大吸収を有するィ匕 合物を含有することによって、これらの波長の透過率を規制して 、る。  The electronic display filter of the first invention has a wavelength (437 nm) where a blue emission peak exists, a wavelength where a green emission peak exists (545 nm), and a red emission peak of a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp. The transmittance at these wavelengths is regulated by containing a compound having a maximum absorption near any one of the wavelengths (612 nm).
[0063] 使用される化合物としては、特に限定されないが、波長 437nm、 545nm及び 612 nmにおける光の吸収量を調整するにあたり、これらの波長の近傍に最大吸収を有 する化合物を使用することが出来る。  [0063] The compound used is not particularly limited, but in adjusting the amount of light absorption at wavelengths of 437 nm, 545 nm and 612 nm, a compound having a maximum absorption near these wavelengths can be used. .
[0064] 例えば、 437nm、 545nm、 612nmの何れかの波長域に最大吸収を有する化合 物としては、下記式 (I)一(IV)で表されるスクァリリウム系化合物が挙げられる。具体 的に、 545nm近傍に最大吸収を有する化合物としては、下記式 (I)の化合物が挙げ られる。  For example, as the compound having the maximum absorption in any of the wavelength ranges of 437 nm, 545 nm, and 612 nm, a squarylium-based compound represented by the following formula (I)-(IV) can be mentioned. Specifically, the compound having the maximum absorption near 545 nm includes the compound of the following formula (I).
[0065] [化 1]  [0065]
Figure imgf000017_0001
Figure imgf000017_0001
[0066] 〔式 (I)中、 R1は、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよ いアルコキシ基または水酸基を示し、置換基 Aは、水酸基または W— X— R2 (Wは、ィ ミノ基またはアルキルイミノ基を示し、 Xは、カルボ-ル基、チォカルボ-ル基またはス ルホニル基を示し、 R2は、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してい てもよぃァルケ-ル基、置換基を有していてもよいァリール基、置換基を有していても 良 、ァミノ基または置換基を有して 、てもよ 、複素環基を示し、 m=0又は 1から 4の 整数を示し、 m' =0又は 1を示す。)を示す。〕 [In the formula (I), R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent or a hydroxyl group, and the substituent A is a hydroxyl group or W—X—R 2 (W represents an imino group or an alkylimino group, X represents a carboxyl group, a thiocarbol group or a sulfonyl group, and R 2 represents a substituent. Alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, a substituted or unsubstituted amino group or a substituted or unsubstituted amino group Represents a heterocyclic group, m = 0 or an integer of 1 to 4, and m ′ = 0 or 1.). ]
[0067] 式 (I)における R1のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、ェチル基、プロピル基 、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デシル基、ゥンデ シル基、ドデシル基、トリデシル基、ペンタデシル基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状も しくは分岐鎖状の基、 R1のアルコキシ基としては、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プ 口ポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、ヘプチルォキシ基、 ォクチルォキシ基、デシルォキシ基、ゥンデシルォキシ基、ドデシルォキシ基、トリデ シルォキシ基、ペンタデシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖 状の基が挙げられる。 [0067] Examples of the alkyl group for R 1 in the formula (I) include a methyl group, an ethyl group, and a propyl group. Butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, decyl, pentadecyl, dodecyl, tridecyl, pentadecyl, etc. Examples of the alkoxy group for R 1 include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, a butoxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, a heptyloxy group, an octyloxy group, a decyloxy group, a pendecyloxy group, a dodecyloxy group, and a tridecyloxy group. And linear or branched groups having 120 carbon atoms, such as a pentadecyloxy group and a pentadecyloxy group.
[0068] 前記アルキル基、アルコキシ基の置換基としては、例えば、メチル基、ェチル基、プ 口ピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デシル基 などの炭素数 1一 10のアルキル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ 基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、ヘプチルォキシ基、ォクチルォキシ基、 デシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルコキシ基、シクロプロピル基、シクロプチ ル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロへキシル基、シクロへプチル基などの炭素数 1一 10 のシクロアルキル基、フ -ル基などのァリール基、水酸基、弗素原子、塩素原子、 臭素原子などのハロゲン原子、ァセチルァミノ基、メタンスルフォ-ルァミノ基、トリフ ルォロアセチルァミノ基、トリフルォロメタンスルフォ-ルァミノ基、ブタノィルァミノ基、 へキサノィルァミノ基、ノナノィルァミノ基、トリデカノィルァミノ基などの炭素数 1一 15 のァシルァミノ基、ベンゾィルァミノ基、トリルアミノ基などの芳香族カルボ-ルァミノ基 、トシルァミノ基などの芳香族スルフォニルァミノ基などが挙げられる。  [0068] Examples of the substituent of the alkyl group and the alkoxy group include a carbon number such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, and a decyl group. 1-10 Alkoxy, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, heptyloxy, octyloxy, decyloxy, etc.C11-C10 alkoxy, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, etc. A cycloalkyl group having 110 carbon atoms, such as a cycloalkyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, or a cycloheptyl group, an aryl group such as a fluor group, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, or a bromine atom. , Acetylamino, methanesulfo-amino, trifluoroacetylamino, trifluoromethanesulfon -Aromatic carbamino group such as lumino group, butanoylamino group, hexanoylamino group, nonanoylamino group, tridecanoylamino group, etc., having 11 to 15 carbon atoms, benzoylamino group and tolylamino group Group sulfonylamino groups and the like.
[0069] 前記式 (I)において、 R1としては、前記の中で、(1)アルコキシ基、水酸基またはハ ロゲン原子を置換基として有して 、てもよ 、直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基が好 ましぐ炭素数 1一 8の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基、又は、炭素数 1一 8の直 鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルコキシ基が特に好まし 、。 In the above formula (I), R 1 may be, as described above, (1) linear or branched having (1) an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group, or a halogen atom as a substituent. An alkyl group is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms, or a linear or branched alkoxy group having 18 carbon atoms is particularly preferable.
[0070] また、前記式 (I)における W— X— R2中の Wが示すアルキルイミノ基のアルキル基と しては、炭素数 1一 8の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状の基が好ましぐ Wとしては、イミノ基 またはアルキルイミノ基が好ましぐィミノ基が特に好ましい。なお、 Xがスルホ -ル基 であるとき、 R2は水素原子ではない。 The alkyl group of the alkylimino group represented by W in W—X—R 2 in the formula (I) is preferably a straight-chain or branched-chain group having 118 carbon atoms. As the magus W, an imino group, which is preferably an imino group or an alkylimino group, is particularly preferred. When X is a sulfol group, R 2 is not a hydrogen atom.
[0071] また、 W— X— R2中の R2のアルキル基としては、例えば、前記 R1におけるアルキル 基と同様のアルキル基、ビニル基などのアルケニル基、フ -ル基、ナフチル基など のァリール基、アミノ基、 3—ピリジル基、 2—フリル基、 2—テトラヒドロフリル基、 2—チェ -ル基などの複素環基などが挙げられ、これらのアルキル基、アルケニル基、ァリー ル基、アミノ基および複素環基は、例えば、前記 R1におけるアルキル基、アルコキシ 基の置換基として挙げたと同様の、炭素数 1一 10のアルキル基、炭素数 1一 10のァ ルコキシ基、炭素数 1一 10のシクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子またはァリール基など を置換基として有して 、てもよ 、。 [0071] Further, the alkyl group of R 2 in W- X- R 2, for example, alkyl in the R 1 Alkyl groups such as alkyl group, vinyl group, etc., aryl groups such as furyl group, naphthyl group, amino group, 3-pyridyl group, 2-furyl group, 2-tetrahydrofuryl group, 2-cell mentioned and heterocyclic groups such as groups, these alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, Ari group, amino group and heterocyclic group include an alkyl group in the R 1, the same as mentioned as the substituent of alkoxy group It may have an alkyl group having 110 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 110 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 110 carbon atoms, a halogen atom or an aryl group as a substituent.
前記 R2のうち、前記 R1の好ましいアルキル基と同様のアルキル基、炭素数 1一 8の アルキル基で置換されて 、ても良 、フエ-ル基または炭素数 1一 8のアルキル基で 置換されて ヽても良!ヽビュル基が特に好ま ヽ。以下に好ま ヽ具体例を示す。 Of the above R 2, the same alkyl group as the preferable alkyl group of the above R 1 , and may be substituted with an alkyl group having 118 carbon atoms, may be a fuel group or an alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms. Even if it is substituted, a butyl group is particularly preferred. Preferred examples are shown below.
Figure imgf000020_0001
Figure imgf000020_0001
608CT0/l700Zdf/X3d 81· 990 SOOZ OAV O 608CT0 / l700Zdf / X3d 81990 SOOZ OAV O
Figure imgf000021_0001
Figure imgf000021_0001
Figure imgf000021_0002
Figure imgf000021_0002
()61— 4] () 61— Four]
Figure imgf000022_0001
[0076] [化 5]
Figure imgf000022_0001
[0076]
(n)(n)
Figure imgf000023_0001
Figure imgf000023_0001
[0077] 545nmの近傍に最大吸収を有する化合物としては、下記式 (Π)の化合物が挙げら れる。 [0078] [化 6] [0077] Examples of the compound having the maximum absorption near 545 nm include a compound represented by the following formula (Π). [0078] [Formula 6]
Figure imgf000024_0001
Figure imgf000024_0001
[0079] 〔式 (Π)中、 R1は、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基または置換基を有してい てもよいアルコキシ基を示し、置換基 Aは、水酸基または W— X— R2 (Wは、イミノ基を 示し、 Xは、カルボニル基またはスルホ -ル基を示し、 R2は、水素原子、置換基を有 していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよいァルケ-ル基、置換基を有し ていてもよいァリール基または置換基を有していてもよい複素環基を示し、 mは、 0又 は 1を示し、 R6, R7は、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基または置換基を有して いてもよいァリール基を示し、 Zは、酸素原子を示す。)を示す。〕 [In the formula (Π), R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, and the substituent A is a hydroxyl group or W—X — R 2 (W represents an imino group, X represents a carbonyl group or a sulfol group, and R 2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or a substituent. An aryl group which may be substituted, an aryl group which may have a substituent or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, m represents 0 or 1, and R 6 , R 7 Represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent, and Z represents an oxygen atom.). ]
[0080] 式 (Π)における R1のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、ェチル基、プロピル基 、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デシル基、ゥンデ シル基、ドデシル基、トリデシル基、ペンタデシル基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状も しくは分岐鎖状の基、 R1のアルコキシ基としては、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プ 口ポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、ヘプチルォキシ基、 ォクチルォキシ基、デシルォキシ基、ゥンデシルォキシ基、ドデシルォキシ基、トリデ シルォキシ基、ペンタデシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖 状の基が挙げられる。 [0080] Examples of the alkyl group of R 1 in the formula (Π) include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, a decyl group, dodecyl group, tridecyl group, a linear also properly branched group having a carbon number of 1 one 20, such as a pentadecyl group, the alkoxy group of R 1, for example, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, flop port epoxy group, butoxy Straight-chain or branched-chain groups having 120 carbon atoms, such as group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, heptyloxy group, octyloxy group, decyloxy group, pendecyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, tridecyloxy group and pentadecyloxy group. Is mentioned.
[0081] 前記アルキル基およびアルコキシ基の置換基としては、例えば、メチル基、ェチル 基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デ シル基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルキル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブ トキシ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、ヘプチルォキシ基、ォクチルォキ シ基、デシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルコキシ基、シクロプロピル基、シクロ ブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロへキシル基、シクロへプチル基などの炭素数 1一 10のシクロアルキル基、フエ-ル基などのァリール基、水酸基、又は、弗素原子、塩 素原子、臭素原子などのハロゲン原子などが挙げられる。 [0081] Examples of the substituent of the alkyl group and the alkoxy group include those having 1 carbon atom such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, and a decyl group. (I) C10-C10 alkoxy, cyclopropyl, such as alkyl, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, heptyloxy, octyloxy, and decyloxy groups; C11-C10 cycloalkyl group such as cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, cycloheptyl group, aryl group such as phenyl group, hydroxyl group, or fluorine atom, salt And halogen atoms such as elemental atoms and bromine atoms.
[0082] 前記式 (Π)において、 R1としては、前記の中、アルコキシ基、水酸基またはハロゲン 原子を置換基として有して ヽてもよ 、直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基が好ましく 、炭素数 1一 8の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基が特に好ましい。 In the above formula (Π), R 1 may have an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom as a substituent among the above, and is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group. A linear or branched alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms is particularly preferred.
[0083] また、前記式 (Π)における W— X— R2中の Wが示すアルキルイミノ基のアルキル基と しては、炭素数 1一 8の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状の基が好ましぐ Wとしては、イミノ基 またはアルキルイミノ基が好ましぐィミノ基が特に好ましい。なお、 Xがスルホ -ル基 であるとき、 Rは水素原子ではない。 The alkyl group of the alkylimino group represented by W in W—X—R 2 in the formula (Π) is preferably a straight-chain or branched-chain group having 118 carbon atoms. As the magus W, an imino group, which is preferably an imino group or an alkylimino group, is particularly preferred. When X is a sulfol group, R is not a hydrogen atom.
2  2
[0084] W— X— R2中の R2のアルキル基としては、例えば、前記 R1におけるアルキル基と同 様のアルキル基、ビニル基などのアルケニル基、フエ-ル基、ナフチル基などのァリ ール基、 3—ピリジル基、 2—フリル基、 2—テトラヒドロフリル基、 2—チェニル基などの複 素環基などが挙げられ、これらのアルキル基、ァルケ-ル基、ァリール基および複素 環基は、例えば、前記 R1におけるアルキル基、アルコキシ基の置換基と同様の炭素 数 1一 10のアルキル基、炭素数 1一 10のアルコキシ基、炭素数 1一 10のシクロアル キル基、ハロゲン原子、ァリール基などを置換基として有していてもよい。 [0084] W- X- in R 2 of the alkyl group R 2, for example, an alkyl group of the alkyl group the same way in the R 1, alkenyl groups such as vinyl group, Hue - group, such as naphthyl And aryl groups such as aryl groups, 3-pyridyl groups, 2-furyl groups, 2-tetrahydrofuryl groups, and 2-phenyl groups. These alkyl groups, alkyl groups, aryl groups and The heterocyclic group is, for example, an alkyl group for R 1, an alkyl group having 11 to 10 carbon atoms similar to the substituent of the alkoxy group, an alkoxy group having 11 to 10 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 11 to 10 carbon atoms, It may have a halogen atom, an aryl group or the like as a substituent.
[0085] 前記 R2のうち、前記 R1の好ましい基と同様のアルキル基または炭素数 1一 8のアル キル基で置換されて 、てもよ 、フエニル基が特に好ま U、。 Of the above R 2 , a phenyl group is particularly preferable, even if it is substituted with the same alkyl group or an alkyl group having 18 to 18 carbon atoms as the preferable group of the above R 1 .
[0086] R6及び R7の置換基を有して!/、てもよ!/、アルキル基または置換基を有して!/、てもよ Vヽァリール基としては、前記 R2で挙げた置換基を有して 、てもよ 、アルキル基または 置換基を有して 、てもよ 、ァリール基と同じ基が挙げられる。 [0086] have a substituent R 6 and R 7! /, Even I! /, Having an alkyl group or a substituted group! /, As the good VヽAriru group, in the R 2 The same groups as the aryl groups may be mentioned, which may have the above-mentioned substituents or may have the alkyl group or the substituents.
[0087] 前記 R6及び R7のうち、前記 R2の好ましい基と同様のアルキル基またはァリール基 が特に好ま U、。以下に好ま 、具体例を示す。 [0087] wherein one of R 6 and R 7, the alkyl group or Ariru group same as the preferred group of R 2 is particularly preferred U,. Preferred examples are shown below.
Figure imgf000026_0001
Figure imgf000026_0001
[8800] [8800]
608CT0/l700Zdf/X3d z 990 SOOZ OAV 608CT0 / l700Zdf / X3d z 990 SOOZ OAV
Figure imgf000027_0001
Figure imgf000027_0001
[8^ ] [6800]8CT0/l700Zdf/X3d 93 990 OAV [0090] [化 9] [8 ^] [6800] 8CT0 / l700Zdf / X3d 93 990 OAV [0090]
(n)H9C4((n) H 9 C 4 (
Figure imgf000028_0001
Figure imgf000028_0001
[0091] 545nmの近傍に最大吸収を有する化合物として、市販品の色素である旭電化工 業株式会社製の「TY— 300」等も挙げられる。 [0092] 612nmの近傍に最大吸収を有する化合物としては、下記式 (ΠΙ)の化合物が挙げ られる。 [0091] As a compound having a maximum absorption near 545 nm, a commercially available dye, "TY-300" manufactured by Asahi Denka Kogyo Co., Ltd. may be mentioned. [0092] Examples of the compound having a maximum absorption near 612 nm include a compound represented by the following formula (ΠΙ).
[0093] [化 10] [0093] [Formula 10]
Figure imgf000029_0001
Figure imgf000029_0001
[0094] 〔式 (III)中、 R1は、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基または置換基を有してい てもよいアルコキシ基を示し、置換基 Bは、 W— CO— R2 (Wは、イミノ基またはアルキ ルイミノ基を示し、 R2は、置換基を有していてもよいアルケニル基または置換基を有し ていてもよいアルキ-ル基を示し、 m及び m'は、それぞれ独立して、 0又は 1を示す 。)を示す。〕 [In the formula (III), R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, and the substituent B is a group represented by W—CO—R 2 (W represents an imino group or an alkylimino group, R 2 represents an alkenyl group which may have a substituent or an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and m and m ′ Each independently represents 0 or 1.). ]
[0095] 式 (III)における R1のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、ェチル基、プロピル 基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デシル基、ゥン デシル基、ドデシル基、トリデシル基、ペンタデシル基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状 もしくは分岐鎖状の基が挙げられ、 R1のアルコキシ基としては、例えば、メトキシ基、 エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、ヘプ チルォキシ基、ォクチルォキシ基、デシルォキシ基、ゥンデシルォキシ基、ドデシル ォキシ基、トリデシルォキシ基、ペンタデシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状 もしくは分岐鎖状の基が挙げられる。 The alkyl group of R 1 in the [0095] Formula (III), for example, a methyl group, Echiru group, propyl group, butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, Okuchiru group, decyl group, © down decyl , A dodecyl group, a tridecyl group, a pentadecyl group and the like, and a straight or branched chain group having 120 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkoxy group for R 1 include, for example, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, and a butoxy group. Group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, heptyloxy group, octyloxy group, decyloxy group, pendecyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, tridecyloxy group, pentadecyloxy group, etc. Groups.
[0096] 前記アルキル基およびアルコキシ基の置換基としては、例えば、メチル基、ェチル 基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デ シル基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルキル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブ トキシ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、ヘプチルォキシ基、ォクチルォキ シ基、デシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルコキシ基、シクロプロピル基、シクロ ブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロへキシル基、シクロへプチル基などの炭素数 1一 10のシクロアルキル基、フエ-ル基などのァリール基、水酸基、弗素原子、塩素原子 、臭素原子などのハロゲン原子などが挙げられる。 [0096] Examples of the substituent of the alkyl group and the alkoxy group include those having 1 carbon atom such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group and a decyl group. (I) C10-C10 alkoxy, cyclopropyl, such as alkyl, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, heptyloxy, octyloxy, and decyloxy groups; C11-C10 cycloalkyl groups such as cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group and cycloheptyl group, aryl groups such as phenyl group, hydroxyl group, fluorine atom and chlorine atom And a halogen atom such as a bromine atom.
[0097] 前記式 (ΠΙ)において、 R1としては、前記の中、(1)アルコキシ基、水酸基またはハ ロゲン原子を置換基として有して 、てもよ 、直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基が好 ましぐ炭素数 1一 8の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基、又は、炭素数 1一 8の直 鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルコキシ基が特に好まし 、。 [0097] In the above formula (ΠΙ), R 1 represents, as described above, a linear or branched alkyl having (1) an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom as a substituent. A linear or branched alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms or a linear or branched alkoxy group having 18 carbon atoms is particularly preferable.
[0098] また、前記式(ΠΙ)における W— CO— R2中の Wが示すアルキルイミノ基のアルキル 基としては、炭素数 1一 8の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状の基が好ましぐ Wとしては、イミ ノ基またはアルキルイミノ基が好ましぐィミノ基が特に好ま 、。 [0098] The alkyl group of alkylimino groups W indicated by the formula (ΠΙ) in W- CO- R 2, preferably a linear or branched group having 1 one 8 carbon tool W is particularly preferably an imino group which is preferably an imino group or an alkylimino group.
[0099] W— X— R2中の R2としては、ビュル基などのァルケ-ル基、アセチレン基などのアル キ-ル等が挙げられ、これらのァルケ-ル基、アルキ-ルは、例えば、前記 R1におけ るアルキル基、アルコキシ基の置換基と同様の炭素数 1一 10のアルキル基、炭素数 1一 10のアルコキシ基、炭素数 1一 10のシクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、ァリール 基などを置換基として有して 、てもよ 、。 [0099] W- X- as R 2 in R 2 is Aruke such Bulle groups - group, Al keys such as acetylene group - le, and the like, these Aruke - group, alkyl - le are For example, the alkyl group in R 1 , an alkyl group having 11 to 10 carbon atoms similar to the substituent of the alkoxy group, an alkoxy group having 11 to 10 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 11 to 10 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, It may have an aryl group or the like as a substituent.
[0100] 前記 R2のうち、炭素数 1一 8のアルキル基またはフエ-ル基で置換されていても良[0100] Among the R 2, an alkyl group or Hue of 1 one 8 carbon - Good be substituted by Le group
Vヽビニル基が特に好まし 、。 V ヽ vinyl groups are particularly preferred.
[0101] 以下に好ましい具体例を示す。 [0101] Preferred specific examples are shown below.
11] 11]
Figure imgf000031_0001
Figure imgf000031_0001
[0103] [化 12] [0103] [Formula 12]
Figure imgf000032_0001
Figure imgf000032_0001
[0104] 437nmの近傍に最大吸収を有する化合物としては、下記式 (IV)の化合物が挙げ られる。 The compound having the maximum absorption near 437 nm includes a compound of the following formula (IV).
[0105] [化 13] [0105] [Formula 13]
Figure imgf000032_0002
Figure imgf000032_0002
[0106] 〔式 (IV)中、 R°は、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよ ぃシクロアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよいァリール基または水素原子を示し、 R 4は、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよいアルコキシ基 、置換基を有していてもよいアルコキシカルボ-ル基、置換基を有していてもよいシク 口アルキル基、置換基を有していてもよいァリール基、置換基を有していてもよいァリ ールォキシ基、置換基を有していてもよいァリールォキシカルボ-ル基、置換基を有 していてもよいアミノ基または水素原子を示し、 R5は、置換基を有していてもよいアル キル基、置換基を有していてもよいシクロアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよいァリ ール基または水素原子を示し、 Yは、酸素原子またはイミノ基を示し、これらの R4、 R5 及び Yは、両方のピラゾール環の間で互いに異なっていてもよい。〕 [In the formula (IV), R ° represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, a cycloalkyl group which may have a substituent, and an aryl which may have a substituent. Represents a group or a hydrogen atom; R 4 is an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an alkoxycarbol group which may have a substituent, and which may have a substituent A good alkyl group, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an aryloxy group which may have a substituent, an aryloxycarbol group which may have a substituent, R 5 represents an amino group or a hydrogen atom which may have a substituent, and R 5 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, a cycloalkyl group which may have a substituent, Represents an aryl group or a hydrogen atom which may be possessed, Y represents an oxygen atom or an imino group, and these R 4 , R 5 and Y are different from each other in both pyrazole rings. Is also good. ]
[0107] 前記式 (IV)における置換基 R3及び R5のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、 ェチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル 基、デシル基、ゥンデシル基、ドデシル基、トリデシル基、ペンタデシル基などの炭素 数 1一 20の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状の基が挙げられ、 R及び Rのシクロアルキル基 [0107] The alkyl group of the substituents R 3 and R 5 in Formula (IV), for example, a methyl group, Echiru group, propyl group, butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, Okuchiru group, decyl A straight-chain or branched-chain group having 120 carbon atoms, such as a group, a pendecyl group, a dodecyl group, a tridecyl group, a pentadecyl group, etc., and a cycloalkyl group of R and R
3 5  3 5
としては、例えば、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロへキ シル基、シクロへプチル基などの炭素数 1一 20の基が挙げられ、 R3及び R5のァリー ル基としては、例えば、フエニル基、ナフチル基などが挙げられる。 Examples thereof include a group having 120 carbon atoms such as a cyclopropyl group, a cyclobutyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a cycloheptyl group, and the aryl groups of R 3 and R 5 include Examples include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group.
[0108] また、前記アルキル基、前記シクロアルキル基およびァリール基の置換基としては、 例えば、メチル基、ェチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、へ プチル基、ォクチル基、デシル基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルキル基、メトキシ基、エト キシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、ヘプチル ォキシ基、ォクチルォキシ基、デシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルコキシ基、 フエ-ル基、ナフチル基などのァリール基、フエノキシ基、ナフチルォキシ基などのァ リールォキシ基、スルホンアミド基、アルキルスルホンアミド基、ジアルキルスルホンァ ミド基、ニトロ基、水酸基、弗素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子などのハロゲン原子などが 挙げられる。 [0108] Examples of the substituent for the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group and the aryl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, C1-C10 alkyl groups such as decyl groups, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, heptyloxy, octyloxy and decyloxy groups, etc. Aryl groups such as alkoxy group, phenyl group, naphthyl group, aryloxy groups such as phenoxy group, naphthyloxy group, sulfonamide group, alkylsulfonamide group, dialkylsulfonamide group, nitro group, hydroxyl group, fluorine atom, chlorine And a halogen atom such as a bromine atom.
[0109] 前記式 (IV)において、 R3及び R5としては、前記の中で、(1)アルコキシ基、ァリー ル基、ァリールォキシ基、水酸基またはハロゲン原子を置換基として有していてもよ い直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基、(2)アルキル基、アルコキシ基、スルホンアミ ド基、アルキルスルホンアミド基、ジアルキルスルホンアミド基、ニトロ基、水酸基また はハロゲン原子を置換基として有していてもよいァリール基、又は、(3)水素原子が 好ましぐ特に、 R3としては、水素原子、炭素数 1一 8の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アル キル基、又は、フエ-ル基が好ましぐ R5としては、炭素数 1一 8の直鎖状もしくは分 岐鎖状アルキル基、又は、アルキル基またはハロゲン原子を置換基として有していて もよ 、フエ-ル基が好まし 、。 In the formula (IV), R 3 and R 5 may have (1) an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom as a substituent in the above. Linear or branched alkyl groups, (2) alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, sulfonamide groups, alkylsulfonamide groups, dialkylsulfonamide groups, nitro groups, hydroxyl groups, Is preferably an aryl group which may have a halogen atom as a substituent, or (3) a hydrogen atom is preferred. In particular, R 3 is a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched chain having 118 carbon atoms Al kill group, or Hue - the preferred instrument R 5 is group, a linear or partial岐鎖chain alkyl group having 1 one 8 carbon atoms, or, have an alkyl group or a halogen atom as a substituent Still, a phenol group is preferred.
[0110] 前記式 (IV)における R4のアルキル基としては、前記 R3及び R5におけるアルキル基 として挙げたと同様の基力 R4のアルコキシ基としては、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ 基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、へプチルォキ シ基、ォクチルォキシ基、デシルォキシ基、ゥンデシルォキシ基、ドデシルォキシ基、 トリデシルォキシ基、ペンタデシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状もしくは分 岐鎖状の基が挙げられ、 R4のアルコキシカルボニル基としては、前記アルコキシ基を 有するカルボ-ル基が挙げられ、 Rのシクロアルキル基としては、前記 IT及び に おけるシクロアルキル基として挙げたと同様の基が挙げられ、 R4のァリール基として は、前記 R及び Rにおけるァリール基として挙げたと同様の基が挙げられ、 R4のァリ The alkyl group of R 4 in the formula (IV) is the same as the alkyl group of R 3 and R 5. The alkoxy group of R 4 is, for example, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group. Straight-chain or branched group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, heptyloxy group, octyloxy group, decyloxy group, pendecyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, tridecyloxy group, pentadecyloxy group, etc. A branched chain group; an alkoxycarbonyl group for R 4 includes a carboxyl group having the alkoxy group; and a cycloalkyl group for R includes the cycloalkyl group for IT and similar groups can be mentioned, the same as Examples Ariru group R 4, mentioned as Ariru group in R and R It includes groups of R 4 § Li
3 5  3 5
ールォキシ基としては、フエノキシ基、ナフチルォキシ基などが挙げられ、 R4のァリー ルォキシカルボ-ル基としては、前記ァリールォキシ基を有するカルボ-ル基が挙げ られる。 Examples of the alkoxy group include a phenoxy group and a naphthyloxy group. Examples of the aryloxycarbyl group for R 4 include the above-mentioned aryloxy group-containing carboxyl group.
[0111] 前記アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルコキシカルボ-ル基、シクロアルキル基、ァリ ール基、ァリールォキシ基、ァリールォキシカルボ-ル基およびァミノ基の置換基とし ては、例えば、前記 R3及び R5におけるアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、及び、ァリー ル基の置換基と同様のアルキル基、アルコキシ基、ァリール基、ァリールォキシ基、ス ルホンアミド基、アルキルスルホンアミド基、ジアルキルスルホンアミド基、ニトロ基およ びハロゲン原子、プロピオ-ル基、ブチリル基、ベンゾィル基などのァシル基、メタン スルホニル基、ベンゼンスルホニル基などのスルホニル基、水酸基、ハロゲン原子な どが挙げられる。 [0111] Examples of the substituents of the alkyl group, alkoxy group, alkoxycarbol group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, aryloxy group, aryloxycarbol group and amino group include, for example, the alkyl group in R 3 and R 5, cycloalkyl group, and the substituents the same alkyl groups Ari group, an alkoxy group, Ariru group, Ariruokishi group, scan Ruhon'amido group, an alkylsulfonamido group, a dialkyl sulfonamide group, Examples include a nitro group and a halogen atom, an acyl group such as a propioyl group, a butyryl group and a benzoyl group, a sulfonyl group such as a methanesulfonyl group and a benzenesulfonyl group, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, and the like.
[0112] 前記式 (IV)において、 R4としては、前記の中で、(1)アルコキシ基、ァリール基、ァ リールォキシ基、水酸基またはハロゲン原子を置換基として有して 、てもよ 、直鎖状 もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基、(2)アルコキシ基を置換基として有して 、てもよ 、直鎖 状もしくは分岐鎖状アルコキシ基、(3)アルコキシ基を置換基として有して 、てもよ ヽ アルコキシ基を有するカルボ-ル基、(4)アルキル基、アルコキシ基、スルホンアミド 基、アルキルスルホンアミド基、ジアルキルスルホンアミド基、ニトロ基、水酸基または ハロゲン原子を置換基として有して 、てもよ 、ァリール基、 (5)アルキル基またはアル コキシ基を置換基として有していてもよいァリール基を有するカルボ-ル基、又は、( 6)アルキル基、ァシル基またはスルホ -ル基を置換基として有して 、てもよ 、ァミノ 基、が好ましぐ特に、炭素数 1一 8の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基が好ましい [0112] In the formula (IV), examples of R 4, in the, (1) an alkoxy group, Ariru group, have § Riruokishi group, a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom as a substituent, even I, straight It may have a linear or branched alkyl group or (2) an alkoxy group as a substituent. Or branched alkoxy group, (3) a carboxy group having an alkoxy group as a substituent, (4) an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a sulfonamide group, an alkyl sulfonamide Group, dialkylsulfonamide group, nitro group, hydroxyl group or halogen atom as a substituent, or aryl group, (5) aryl group optionally having an alkyl group or an alkoxy group as a substituent And a (6) alkyl group, an acyl group or a sulfol group as a substituent, and an amino group is particularly preferable, especially a straight-chain having 18 carbon atoms. A chain or branched alkyl group is preferred
[0113] 前記式 (IV)において、 Yとしては酸素原子が好ましい。更に、本発明において、前 記式 (IV)で表されるジピラゾリルメチン系化合物としては、前記 、 R5及び Yは、両 方のピラゾール環の間で互いに異なって 、てもよ 、が、メチン基を挟んで左右対象 であるものが好ましい。 In the above formula (IV), Y is preferably an oxygen atom. Further, in the present invention, as the dipyrazolylmethine compound represented by the formula (IV), R 5 and Y may be different from each other between both pyrazole rings, Those that are symmetrical with respect to the methine group are preferred.
[0114] 437nmの近傍に最大吸収を有する化合物としては、式 (IV)の化合物の内、 Yが 酸素原子、 R3が水素原子で、 R4及び R5が置換基を有していても良いアルキル基、又 は、置換基を有して 、ても良 ヽァリール基のである化合物が特に好まし!/、。 As the compound having the maximum absorption near 437 nm, among the compounds of the formula (IV), even when Y is an oxygen atom, R 3 is a hydrogen atom, and R 4 and R 5 have a substituent, Particularly preferred are compounds having a good alkyl group or a substituent and having a good aryl group!
[0115] 以下に好ましい具体例を示す。 [0115] Preferred specific examples are shown below.
[0116] [化 14] [0116] [Formula 14]
Figure imgf000036_0001
Figure imgf000036_0001
[0117] 480— 520nmの波長域にシャープな極小値を有することにより、青と緑との谷間の 波長のみを選択的にカットできる。 480— 520nmの波長域にシャープな極小値を発 現させるため、 480— 520nmの波長域に最大吸収を有する化合物として、下記式( XV)に示すピラゾリル基を有する特定のスクァリリウム系色素を使用することが出来る [0117] By having a sharp minimum value in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm, only the wavelength between the valleys between blue and green can be selectively cut. In order to generate a sharp minimum value in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm, a compound having the maximum absorption in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm is represented by the following formula ( Specific squarylium dyes having a pyrazolyl group shown in (XV) can be used
[0118] [化 15] [0118] [Formula 15]
Figure imgf000037_0001
Figure imgf000037_0001
[0119] 〔式 (XV)中、 A、 Bは、各々独立に、置換基を有していても良いピラゾリル基を示す。 [In the formula (XV), A and B each independently represent a pyrazolyl group which may have a substituent.
〕で表されるジピラゾリルスクァリリウム系化合物である。  And a dipyrazolylsquarylium compound represented by the formula:
[0120] より具体的には、下記式 (XVI)で示される。 [0120] More specifically, it is represented by the following formula (XVI).
[0121] [化 16] [0121] [Formula 16]
Figure imgf000037_0002
Figure imgf000037_0002
[0122] 〔式 (XVI)中、 R1は、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基を示し、 R2は、置換基を 有して 、ても良!、アルキル基または置換基を有して 、ても良!、ァリール基を示す。尚 、各々の R1及び R2は、同一でも異なっていても良い。〕 [0122] [In the formula (XVI), R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and R 2 may have a substituent and may be an alkyl group or a substituent. Yes, it is good !, indicates an aryl group. Note that each of R 1 and R 2 may be the same or different. ]
[0123] 式 (XV)で表されるジピラゾリルスクァリリウム系化合物は、両端にそれぞれピラゾー ル環を有している。式 (XV)において、置換基 Α、 Βは、ジピラゾリルスクァリリウム系 化合物がその光線透過率曲線において 480— 520nmの波長域に極小値を有する 限りにお 、ては、任意の置換基で各々独立に置換されて 、ても良!、ビラゾリル基で あり、その分子量は、通常 500以下である。好ましいピラゾリル基としては、置換され て ヽても良 、4 ピラゾリル基が挙げられ、さらに好ましくは下記式 (XIV)で表される 基が挙げられる。 [0124] [化 17] The dipyrazolylsquarylium-based compound represented by the formula (XV) has a pyrazole ring at each end. In the formula (XV), the substituents Α and Β are optional substituents as long as the dipyrazolylsquarylium-based compound has a minimum value in a light transmittance curve in a wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm. Each is independently substituted and is a virazolyl group, and its molecular weight is usually 500 or less. Preferred pyrazolyl groups may be substituted and include 4-pyrazolyl groups, and more preferably a group represented by the following formula (XIV). [0124] [Formula 17]
Figure imgf000038_0001
Figure imgf000038_0001
[0125] 〔式 (XIV)中、 R4は、置換基を有して!/ヽても良!、アルキル基または置換基を有して いても良いァリール基を示し、 R5は、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基、置換基 を有していても良いアルコキシ基、置換基を有していても良いァリール基、置換基を 有して ヽても良 、ァミノ基、置換基を有して!/ヽても良 、アルコキシカルボ-ル基また は置換基を有して ヽても良 、ァリールォキシカルボ二ル基を示し、 Xは酸素原子また は NH基を示す。〕 [In the formula (XIV), R 4 represents a substituted or unsubstituted! Alkyl group or an aryl group which may be substituted; and R 5 represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group. An alkyl group which may have a group, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an amino group, ! Represents an alkoxycarbonyl group or an arylcarbonyl group, and X represents an oxygen atom or an NH group. Show. ]
[0126] 式 (XIV)にお 、て、 R4は、置換基を有して!/ヽても良!、アルキル基または置換基を 有していても良いァリール基であり、好ましくは、置換基を有していても良いアルキル 基である。前記置換基 R4のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、ェチル基、プロ ピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デシル基、 ゥンデシル基、ドデシル基、トリデシル基、ペンタデシル基、シクロへキシル基などの 炭素数 1一 20の直鎖、分岐鎖状または環状のアルキル基が挙げられる。前記置換 基 R4のァリール基としては、例えば、フエニル基、ナフチル基などが挙げられる。なお 、前記アルキル基およびァリール基の置換基としては、例えば、メチル基、ェチル基 、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デシ ル基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルキル基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキ シ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、ヘプチルォキシ基、ォクチルォキシ基 、デシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルコキシ基;フエ-ル基、ナフチル基など のァリール基;フエノキシ基、ナフチルォキシ基などのァリールォキシ基;スルホ-ル アミド基、アルキルスルホ-ルアミド基、ジアルキルスルホ-ルアミド基、ァリールスル ホ-ルアミド基、ジァリールスルホ-ルアミド基、アルキルァリールスルホ-ルアミド基 などのアルキル基またはァリール基で置換されて ヽても良 、スルホ-ルアミド基; -ト 口基;水酸基;弗素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子などのハロゲン原子などが挙げられる 。前記置換基 R4の置換されていても良いアルキル基の好ましいものとしては、アルコ キシ基、ァリール基、ァリールォキシ基、水酸基およびハロゲン原子力もなる群より選 ばれる置換基で置換されていても良い炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アル キル基が挙げられ、さらに好ましくは、アルコキシ基またはハロゲン原子で置換されて いても良いアルキル基であり、特に好ましくは無置換の炭素数 1一 8のアルキル基で ある。前記置換基 R4の置換されていても良いァリール基の好ましいものとしては、ァ ルキル基、アルコキシ基、スルホ-ルアミド基、水酸基およびノヽロゲン原子で置換さ れていても良いァリール基であり、さらに好ましくは、アルキル基、アルコキシ基または ハロゲン原子で置換されていても良いァリール基であり、特に好ましくは、フエ-ル基 またはアルキルフエ-ル基である。 In the formula (XIV), R 4 is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, an alkyl group or an aryl group which may be substituted. It is an alkyl group which may have a substituent. The alkyl group of the substituents R 4, for example, a methyl group, Echiru group, propyl group, butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, Okuchiru group, decyl group, Undeshiru group, dodecyl group, tridecyl group And a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 120 carbon atoms, such as pentadecyl group, cyclohexyl group and the like. The Ariru group of the substituent R 4, for example, phenyl group, and a naphthyl group. Examples of the substituent for the alkyl group and aryl group include, for example, a group having 11 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group and a decyl group. 10-alkyl group; methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, heptyloxy group, octyloxy group, decyloxy group, etc., alkoxy group having 110 carbon atoms; phenyl group, naphthyl Aryloxy group such as phenoxy group, naphthyloxy group, etc .; sulfolamide group, alkylsulfolamide group, dialkylsulfonamide group, arylsulfonamide group, diarylsulfolamide group, alkylarylsulfonyl group. Substituted with an alkyl or aryl group such as Also good, sulfo - Ruamido group; - DOO port group, a hydroxyl group, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a halogen atom such as a bromine atom . Preferred examples of the alkyl group which may be substituted for the substituent R 4 include a carbon atom which may be substituted with a substituent selected from the group consisting of an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a hydroxyl group and a halogen atom. A straight-chain or branched-chain alkyl group having the number of 11 to 20 is preferred, and an alkoxy group or an alkyl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom is more preferred. And 8 alkyl groups. Preferred examples of the aryl group which may be substituted with the substituent R 4 include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a sulfolamide group, a hydroxyl group and an aryl group which may be substituted with a nitrogen atom, More preferred are an alkyl group, an alkoxy group and an aryl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom, and particularly preferred are a phenyl group and an alkylphenyl group.
式 (XIV)にお 、て、置換基 R5は、置換基を有して!/ヽても良!、アルキル基、置換基 を有していても良いアルコキシ基、置換基を有していても良いァリール基、置換基を 有して ヽても良 、ァミノ基、置換基を有して!/ヽても良 、アルコキシカルボ-ル基また は置換基を有して 、ても良 ヽァリールォキシカルボ-ル基であり、このうち置換基を 有して 、ても良!、アルキル基または置換基を有して 、ても良!、ァリール基が好ましく 、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基が特に好ましい。置換基 R5の置換基を有し て 、ても良 、アルキル基としては、前記置換基 R4の置換基を有して 、ても良 、アル キル基と同様のものが挙げられる。置換基 R5のアルコキシ基としては、メトキシ基、ェ トキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、へプチ ルォキシ基、ォクチルォキシ基、デシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 20のアルコキシ 基が挙げられる。前記アルコキシ基の置換基としては、例えば、メチル基、ェチル基、 プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デシル 基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルキル基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ 基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、ヘプチルォキシ基、ォクチルォキシ基、 デシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルコキシ基;フエ-ル基、ナフチル基などの ァリール基;フエノキシ基、ナフチルォキシ基などのァリールォキシ基;水酸基;弗素 原子、塩素原子、臭素原子などのハロゲン原子などが挙げられる。置換基 R5の置換 基を有して ヽても良 、ァリール基としては、前記置換基 R4の置換基を有して ヽても良 、ァリール基と同様のものが挙げられる。置換基 R5の置換基を有して 、ても良 、アミ ノ基としては、無置換のアミノ基;メチル基、ェチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチ ル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デシル基、ゥンデシル基、ドデシル基、 トリデシル基、ペンタデシル基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキ ル基で置換されたァミノ基;ァセチル基、プロピオニル基、プチリル基などのァシル基 で置換されたァミノ基などが挙げられる。 In the formula (XIV), the substituent R 5 may have a substituent, may have a substituent, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group may have a substituent, or a substituent. May have an aryl group or a substituent; may have an amino group or a substituent; and / or may have an alkoxycarbol group or a substituent. A aryloxycarbyl group, preferably a substituted or substituted alkyl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group. An optionally substituted alkyl group is particularly preferred. Substituted substituents R 5, be good, the alkyl group, having a substituent of the substituted groups R 4, be good, the same as the Al kill group. The alkoxy group of substituents R 5, a methoxy group, E butoxy group, a propoxy group, a butoxy group, Penchiruokishi group, to Kishiruokishi group, the Petit Ruokishi group, Okuchiruokishi group, an alkoxy group having a carbon number of 1 one 20 such Deshiruokishi group Is mentioned. Examples of the substituent of the alkoxy group include an alkyl group having 11 to 10 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group and a decyl group; A C11-C10 alkoxy group such as a ethoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, a butoxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, a heptyloxy group, an octyloxy group or a decyloxy group; an aryl group such as a phenyl group or a naphthyl group; Groups, an aryloxy group such as a naphthyloxy group; a hydroxyl group; a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, and a bromine atom. Evenヽsubstituted substituent R 5 good, as the Ariru group, it may also beヽhave a substituent of the substituent R 4 And aryl groups. Substituent R 5 may have a substituent, and the amino group may be an unsubstituted amino group; a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group An amino group substituted by a linear or branched alkyl group having 120 carbon atoms, such as octyl, decyl, decyl, pendecyl, dodecyl, tridecyl, pentadecyl; acetyl, propionyl, butyryl And an amino group substituted with an acyl group such as a group.
[0128] 置換基 R5のアルコキシカルボ-ル基としては、メトキシカルボ-ル基、エトキシカル ボ-ル基、プロポキシカルボ-ル基、ブトキシカルボ-ル基、ペンチルォキシカルボ ニル基、へキシルォキシカルボ-ル基、ヘプチルォキシカルボ-ル基、ォクチルォキ シカルボ-ル基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖もしくは分岐鎖状アルコキシカルボ-ル 基などが挙げられる。前記アルコキシカルボ-ル基の置換基としては、前記アルコキ シ基の置換基と同様のものが挙げられる。 [0128] alkoxycarbonyl substituents R 5 - The group, methoxycarbonyl - Kishiruo group, pentyl Ruo propoxycarbonyl sulfonyl group to - group, Etokishikaru ball - group, propoxy carbo - group, butoxycarbonyl Examples thereof include straight-chain or branched-chain alkoxycarbol groups having 120 to 120 carbon atoms, such as a xycarbol group, a heptyloxycarbol group, and an octyloxycarbol group. Examples of the substituent of the alkoxycarbyl group include the same substituents as those of the alkoxy group.
[0129] 置換基 R5の置換基を有していても良いァリールォキシカルボ-ル基としては、フエ -ルォキシカルボ-ル基、 p—トリルォキシカルボ-ル基、 p—メトキシフエ-ルォキシカ ルポ-ル基などのアルキル基またはアルコキシ基で置換されて 、ても良 、ァリールォ キシ基などが挙げられる。式 (XIV)において、 Xは酸素原子または NH基を示し、中 でも酸素原子が好ましい。 [0129] substituent R 5 may have a substituent group § reel O propoxycarbonyl - The group, Hue - Ruokishikarubo - le group, p- tolyl O propoxycarbonyl - le group, p- Metokishifue - Ruokishika Substituted with an alkyl group or an alkoxy group such as a reporter group, an aryloxy group and the like can be mentioned. In the formula (XIV), X represents an oxygen atom or an NH group, and among them, an oxygen atom is preferable.
[0130] 尚、前記ジピラゾリルスクァリリウム系化合物としては、式 (XV)において、 Aと Bが同 一であっても異なっていてもよいが、色素としての安定性、また合成の容易さから Aと Bとが等しい場合、すなわち左右対称である場合が最も好ましい。前記式 (XV)で表 される化合物の具体例を下記式および表 1に示す。 In the dipyrazolyl squarylium-based compound, A and B in Formula (XV) may be the same or different, but the stability as a dye and the ease of synthesis are as follows. Is most preferable when A and B are equal, that is, when they are symmetric. Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (XV) are shown in the following formula and Table 1.
Figure imgf000041_0001
Figure imgf000041_0001
[8 ] [ιειο] [8] [ιειο]
608CT0/l700Zdf/X3d 6ε 990 SOOZ OAV
Figure imgf000042_0001
608CT0 / l700Zdf / X3d 6ε 990 SOOZ OAV
Figure imgf000042_0001
また、前記式 (XV)で表されるジピラゾリルスクァリリウム系化合物は、置換基 Aと B の好ま 、置換基を組み合わせたものが好適である力 このうち下記式 (XVI)で表さ れるジビラゾリルスクァリリウム系化合物がより好ましぐ特に、 R2が置換基を有してい ても良 、アルキル基である化合物が更により好ま 、。式 (XVI)で表されるジピラゾリ ルスクァリリウム系化合物は、新規化合物であり、且つ、青色と緑色との谷間部分であ る 480— 520nmの領域の光を有効に吸収し、その半値幅がより狭ぐ原色の青や緑 の蛍光体発光を阻害することもないので、色調調節用、色純度改善用または色再現 範囲拡大用色素として特に有用な色素である。 Further, the dipyrazolylsquarylium-based compound represented by the formula (XV) is preferably a compound obtained by combining the substituents A and B, and the substituent is preferably represented by the following formula (XVI). In particular, a dibirazolylsquarylium-based compound is more preferable, and R 2 may have a substituent, and a compound in which R 2 is an alkyl group is still more preferable. The dipyrazolyl squarylium-based compound represented by the formula (XVI) is a novel compound and effectively absorbs light in the 480-520 nm region, which is a valley between blue and green, and has a narrower half-value width. It does not hinder the emission of blue or green phosphors of primary colors, so it can be used for color tone adjustment, color purity improvement, or color reproduction. It is a dye particularly useful as a range expanding dye.
[0134] [化 19]  [0134] [Formula 19]
Figure imgf000043_0001
Figure imgf000043_0001
[0135] 〔式 (XVI)中、 R1は、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基を示し、 R2は、置換基を 有して 、ても良!、アルキル基または置換基を有して 、ても良!、ァリール基を示す。な お、各々の R1及び R2は、同一でも異なっていても良い。〕 [In the formula (XVI), R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and R 2 may have a substituent and be an alkyl group or a substituent. Yes, it is good !, indicates an aryl group. Here, each of R 1 and R 2 may be the same or different. ]
[0136] 式 (XVI)中、置換基 R1及び R2の置換基を有して!/、ても良!、アルキル基および置換 基を有して 、ても良 、ァリール基は、前記 R4及び R5と同様の置換基を有して ヽても 良 、アルキル基および置換基を有して 、ても良 、ァリール基が挙げられる。このうち R1として、好ましくはアルコキシ基またはハロゲン原子で置換されていても良いアルキ ル基であり、特に好ましくは無置換の炭素数 1一 8のアルキル基である。このうち と して、好ましくはアルコキシ基またはハロゲン原子で置換されていても良いアルキル 基、又は、アルキル基、アルコキシ基またはハロゲン原子で置換されていても良いァ リール基であり、さらに好ましくは無置換の炭素数 1一 8のアルキル基、フエ-ル基ま たはアルキルフエニル基であり、特に好ましくは無置換の炭素数 1一 8のアルキル基 である。 In the formula (XVI), having the substituents of the substituents R 1 and R 2 ! / Or 良!, Having an alkyl group and a substituent, R 4 and R 5 may have the same substituents, and may have an alkyl group and a substituent, and may have an aryl group. Among them, R 1 is preferably an alkoxy group or an alkyl group optionally substituted by a halogen atom, and particularly preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group having 118 carbon atoms. Of these, an alkyl group which may be substituted with an alkoxy group or a halogen atom, or an aryl group which may be substituted with an alkyl group, an alkoxy group or a halogen atom, is more preferable. It is a substituted alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms, a phenyl group or an alkylphenyl group, particularly preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms.
[0137] 第 1発明の電子ディスプレイフィルタには、更に 530— 610nm付近に最大吸収を 有する化合物を併存させることが好適である。 530— 6 lOnm付近に最大吸収を有す る化合物として、前述の式 (1)、(Π)及び (III)の他に、下記の式 (V)— (XI)、(XII)、 (XIII)及び (XVII)で示される化合物が挙げられる。 [0138] [化 20] [0137] It is preferable that the electronic display filter of the first invention further contain a compound having a maximum absorption around 530 to 610 nm. As compounds having a maximum absorption around 530-6 lOnm, in addition to the above formulas (1), (Π) and (III), the following formulas (V) — (XI), (XII), (XIII ) And (XVII). [0138] [Formula 20]
Figure imgf000044_0001
Figure imgf000044_0001
[0139] 〔式 (V)中、 R1は、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよ いアルコキシ基、置換基を有していてもよいシクロアルキル基、置換基を有していても ょ ヽァリール基、置換基を有して 、てもよ ヽァリールォキシ基またはハロゲン原子を 示し、 W— X— R2中の Wは、イミノ基、アルキルイミノ基または酸素原子を示し、 Xは、力 ルポニル基またはスルホ -ル基を示し、 R2は、 1価の基または水素原子を示し、 i及び i,は、それぞれ独立して 0— 5の整数を示し、 m及び m,は、それぞれ独立して 0— 5 の整数を示し、 n及び n'は、それぞれ独立して 0— 3の整数を示し、 i+m+n≤5、 i' +m, +η'≤5であり、ベンゼン環上に R1及び W— X— R2がそれぞれ複数個存在する とき、 R1及び W— X— R2のそれぞれは、一方のベンゼン環において、又は、他方のベ ンゼン環との間で互いに異なっていてもよい。〕 [In the formula (V), R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, and a cycloalkyl which may have a substituent And a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group or a halogen atom, and W in W—X—R 2 represents an imino group or an alkylimino X represents a carbonyl group or a sulfol group; R 2 represents a monovalent group or a hydrogen atom; and i and i are each independently an integer of 0-5 And m and m each independently represent an integer of 0-5, n and n 'each independently represent an integer of 0-3, i + m + n≤5, i' + m, + a Ita'≤5, when R 1 and W- X- R 2 are plural respectively present on the benzene ring, each of R 1 and W- X- R 2, one of the benzene ring Or the other benzene ring may be different from each other. ]
[0140] 式 (V)における R1のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、ェチル基、プロピル基 、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デシル基、ゥンデ シル基、ドデシル基、トリデシル基、ペンタデシル基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状も しくは分岐鎖状の基が挙げられ、 R1のアルコキシ基としては、例えば、メトキシ基、ェ トキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、へプチ ルォキシ基、ォクチルォキシ基、デシルォキシ基、ゥンデシルォキシ基、ドデシルォ キシ基、トリデシルォキシ基、ペンタデシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状も しくは分岐鎖状の基が挙げられ、 R1のシクロアルキル基としては、例えば、シクロプロ ピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロへキシル基、シクロへプチル基な どの炭素数 1一 20の基が挙げられ、 R1のァリール基としては、例えば、フエニル基、 ナフチル基などが挙げられ、 R1のァリールォキシ基としては、例えば、フエノキシ基、 ナフチルォキシ基などが挙げられ、 R1のハロゲン原子としては、例えば、弗素原子、 塩素原子、臭素原子などが挙げられる。 [0140] Examples of the alkyl group of R 1 in the formula (V) include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, a decyl group, Examples thereof include straight-chain or branched-chain groups having 120 carbon atoms, such as dodecyl, tridecyl, and pentadecyl groups.Examples of the alkoxy group for R 1 include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, and a propoxy group. Or a straight-chain having 120 carbon atoms such as butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, heptoxy, octyloxy, decyloxy, pendecyloxy, dodecyloxy, tridecyloxy, pentadecyloxy, etc. the include branched chain groups, the cycloalkyl group of R 1, for example, Shikuropuro propyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, Hexyl group black, include groups heptyl group of which carbon number 1 one 20 cycloheteroalkyl, the Ariru group R 1, for example, phenyl group and a naphthyl group, a Ariruokishi group for R 1, Examples include a phenoxy group and a naphthyloxy group. Examples of the halogen atom for R 1 include a fluorine atom and Examples include a chlorine atom and a bromine atom.
[0141] 前記アルキル基、アルコキシ基、シクロアルキル基、ァリール基およびァリールォキ シ基の置換基としては、例えば、メチル基、ェチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチ ル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デシル基などの炭素数 1一 10のアル キル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキ シルォキシ基、ヘプチルォキシ基、ォクチルォキシ基、デシルォキシ基などの炭素数 [0141] Examples of the substituent of the alkyl group, alkoxy group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group and aryloxy group include, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group , Octyl, decyl, etc., C 11 -C 10 alkyl, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, heptyloxy, octyloxy, decyloxy, etc.
1一 10のアルコキシ基、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロ へキシル基、シクロへプチル基などの炭素数 1一 10のシクロアルキル基、水酸基、弗 素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子などのハロゲン原子などが挙げられる。 C10-C10 cycloalkyl group such as alkoxy group, cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, cycloheptyl group, etc., hydroxyl group, fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, etc. And the like.
[0142] 前記式 (V)において、 R1としては、前記の中で、(1)アルコキシ基、水酸基または ノ、ロゲン原子を置換基として有して 、てもよ 、直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基、( 2)アルコキシ基を置換基として有して 、てもよ 、直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルコキシ 基、(3)アルキル基、アルコキシ基またはハロゲン原子を置換基として有していてもよ ぃァリール基、(4)アルキル基、アルコキシ基またはハロゲン原子を置換基として有し ていてもよいァリールォキシ基、又は、(5)ハロゲン原子が好ましぐ特に、炭素数 1 一 8の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基または炭素数 1一 8の直鎖状もしくは分岐 鎖状アルコキシ基がより好まし 、。 [0142] In Formula (V), examples of R 1, among the above, (1) an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group or Bruno, a androgenic atom as a substituent, even I, straight-chain or branched-chain An alkyl group, (2) an alkoxy group as a substituent, or a linear or branched alkoxy group, (3) an alkyl group, an alkoxy group or a halogen atom as a substituent. Particularly, a aryl group, (4) an alkyl group, an alkoxy group or an aryloxy group which may have a halogen atom as a substituent, or (5) a halogen atom is preferable. A chain or branched chain alkyl group or a straight or branched chain alkoxy group having 18 carbon atoms is more preferable.
[0143] 前記式 (V)における W— X— R2中の Wのアルキルイミノ基におけるアルキル基として は、炭素数 1一 8の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状の基が好ましぐ Wとしては、イミノ基また はアルキルイミノ基が好ましぐ特に、イミノ基がより好ましい。尚、 Xがスルホ-ル基で あるとき、 R2は水素原子ではない。 As the alkyl group in the alkylimino group of W in W—X—R 2 in the formula (V), a linear or branched group having 118 carbon atoms is preferable. In particular, an imino group or an alkylimino group is preferred, and an imino group is more preferred. When X is a sulfo group, R 2 is not a hydrogen atom.
[0144] 又、式 (V)における W— X— R2中の R2の 1価基としては、例えば、前記 R1におけるァ ルキル基と同様のアルキル基、前記 R1におけるアルコキシ基と同様のアルコキシ基、 前記 R1におけるシクロアルキル基と同様のシクロアルキル基、前記 R1におけるァリー ル基と同様のァリール基、前記 R1におけるァリールォキシ基と同様のァリールォキシ 基、アミノ基、及び、 3—ピリジル基、 2—フリル基、 2—テトラヒドロフリル基、 2—チェ-ル 基などの複素環基などが挙げられ、これらのアルキル基、アルコキシ基、シクロアルキ ル基、ァリール基、ァリールォキシ基、アミノ基および複素環基は、例えば、前記 に おけるアルキル基、アルコキシ基、シクロアルキル基、ァリール基およびァリールォキ シ基の置換基と同様の、炭素数 1一 10のアルキル基、炭素数 1一 10のアルコキシ基 、炭素数 1一 10のシクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、ァリール基などを置換基として 有していてもよい。 [0144] As the monovalent group of R 2 of W- X- R 2 in Formula (V), at for example, the same alkyl groups and § alkyl group for R 1, same as the alkoxy group in the R 1 alkoxy group, the same cycloalkyl groups and cycloalkyl group in R 1, the same Ariru groups and Ari Le group in R 1, the same Ariruokishi group and Ariruokishi group in R 1, an amino group, and a 3- Heterocyclic groups such as a pyridyl group, a 2-furyl group, a 2-tetrahydrofuryl group, and a 2-chel group; and the like, such as an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, and an amino group. And a heterocyclic group are, for example, Alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, cycloalkyl groups, aryl groups, and aryloxy groups having the same substituents as in the above, such as alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, alkoxy groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and cycloalkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms Group, a halogen atom, an aryl group, etc., as a substituent.
[0145] 式 (V)における前記 R2のうち、前記 R1の好ましい基と同様のアルキル基、炭素数 1 一 8のアルキル基で置換されていても良いフエ-ル基、炭素数 1一 8のアルキル基で 置換されて 、ても良 、フエ-ル基、炭素数 1一 8のアルキル基で置換されて!、ても良 Vヽ 2—フリル基、炭素数 1一 8のアルキル基で置換されて 、ても良 、2—テトラヒドロフリ ル基、又は、炭素数 1一 8のアルキル基で置換されていても良いシクロへキシル基が 特に好ましい。 [0145] Of the above R 2 in the formula (V), the same alkyl group as the preferable group of the above R 1 , a phenyl group which may be substituted with an alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms, V ヽ 2-furyl group, alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms substituted with 8 alkyl groups, molybdenum, phenyl group, alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms! And a cyclohexyl group which may be substituted with a 2-tetrahydrofuryl group or a C18 alkyl group.
[0146] 前記式において、 i及び i'は、それぞれ独立して 0— 5の整数を示し、 m及び m'は、 それぞれ独立して 0— 5の整数を示し、 n及び n'は、それぞれ独立して 0— 3の整数を 示し、 i+m+n≤5、及び i' +m' +η'≤5であり、好ましくは i及び i'力 ^以上で、 i+ m+n≤3、及び i' +m' +η'≤3であり、より好ましくは i及び i'が 1一 3整数で、 m及 び m'が 0である。また、ベンゼン環上に R1及び W— X— R2がそれぞれ複数個存在す るとき、 R1及び W— X— R2のそれぞれは、一方のベンゼン環において、又は、他方の ベンゼン環との間で互 ヽに異なって 、てもよ 、。一方のベンゼン環上に隣接して存 在する R同士が互いに連結してアルカンジィル基やアルキレンジォキシ基などとな つて環状構造を形成して 、てもよ 、。 [0146] In the above formula, i and i 'each independently represent an integer of 0-5, m and m' each independently represent an integer of 0-5, and n and n 'each represent Independently represents an integer of 0 to 3, i + m + n≤5, and i '+ m' + η'≤5, preferably i and i'force, i + m + n≤3 , And i ′ + m ′ + η ′ ≦ 3, and more preferably, i and i ′ are 1 to 3 integers, and m and m ′ are 0. Also, when you there are a plurality of R 1 and W- X- R 2 each on the benzene ring, each of R 1 and W- X- R 2, in one benzene ring, or, the other benzene ring May be different from each other. Rs adjacent to each other on one benzene ring may be connected to each other to form an alkanediyl group, an alkylenedioxy group, or the like to form a cyclic structure.
[0147] [化 21]  [0147] [Formula 21]
Figure imgf000046_0001
Figure imgf000046_0001
[0148] 〔式 (VI)中、 R1は、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基、置換基 を有して!/ヽても良!、アルコキシ基または置換基を有して ヽても良!、ァルケ-ル基を表 し、 mは 1一 3の整数を、 nは 1一 4の整数を表す。〕 [In the formula (VI), R 1 represents a halogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkyl group which may have a substituent! M represents an integer of 13 and n represents an integer of 1-4. ]
[0149] 式 (VI)において、置換基 R1としては、例えば、次の(a)—(g)のようなものが例示で きる。 [0149] formula (VI), examples of the substituent R 1, for example, the following (a) - (g) of something like illustration Wear.
(a)フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子などのハロゲン原子;  (a) a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom and a bromine atom;
(b)メチル基、ェチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンンチル基、へキシル基、へプチ ル基、ォクチル基、デシル基、ゥンデシル基、ドデシル基、トリデシル基、ペンタデシ ル基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基;  (b) C 1 carbon atoms such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, decyl, pendecyl, dodecyl, tridecyl, pentadecyl, etc. One linear or branched alkyl group;
(c)置換基としてヒドロキシ基、メトキシカルボ-ル基、エトキシカルボニル基、ブトキシ カルボニル基などのアルキコキシカルボニル基、ァセチルォキシ基カルボニル基、プ 口ピオ-ルォキシカルボ-ル基などのァシルォキシカルボ-ル基、メトキシカルボ- ルォキシ基、エトキシカルボ-ルォキシ基、ブトキシカルボ-ルォキシ基などのアルコ キシカルボニルォキシ基、シクロへキシル基、フエ-ル基などを有する前記炭素数 1 一 20の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基;  (c) Alkoxycarbonyl groups such as hydroxy, methoxycarboxy, ethoxycarbonyl, butoxycarbonyl, acetyloxycarbonyl, propyloxycarbonyl, etc. A straight-chain having 1 to 20 carbon atoms having an alkoxycarbonyloxy group, a cyclohexyl group, a phenyl group, etc. such as a methoxy group, a methoxycarboxy group, an ethoxycarboxy group or a butoxycarboxy group. Linear or branched alkyl groups;
(d)メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンンチルォキシ基、へキシ ルォキシ基、ヘプチルォキシ基、ォクチルォキシ基、デシォキシ基、ゥンデシルォキ シ基、ドデシルォキシ基、トリデシルォキシ基、ペンタデシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1 一 20の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルコキシ基;  (d) carbon atoms such as methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentyloxy, hexoxy, heptyloxy, octyloxy, deoxy, pentadecyloxy, dodecyloxy, tridecyloxy, pentadecyloxy, etc. A straight-chain or branched-chain alkoxy group of the number 1 to 20;
(e)置換基としてメトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルォキシ 基、へキシルォキシ基、ヘプチルォキシ基、ォクチルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 8の アルコキシ基を有する前記炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルコキシ基; (e) having a carbon number of 11 to 20 having an alkoxy group having a carbon number of 118 such as a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, a butoxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, a heptyloxy group, an octyloxy group; Linear or branched alkoxy groups;
(f) ェテニノレ基などのァノレケニノレ基; (f) anorecheninole groups such as etheninole groups;
(g)置換基としてメチル基、ェチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンンチル基、へキシ ル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デシル基などのアルキル基、フエニル基、 4ーヒドロ キシフエ-ル基、 4 アルコキシ(例えば、炭素数 1一 10のアルコキシ基)フエ-ル基、 3, 4 ビスアルコキシ(例えば、炭素数 1一 10のアルコキシ基)フエ-ル基、 3, 5—ビ スアルコキシ(例えば、炭素数 1一 10のアルコキシ基)フエ-ル基、 3, 4, 5—トリスァ ルコキシ(例えば、炭素数 1一 10のアルコキシ基)フエ-ル基で置換されたェテュル 基などのァノレケニノレ基。  (g) As a substituent, an alkyl group such as methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, decyl group, phenyl group, 4-hydroxyphenyl group, 4 Alkoxy (e.g., C11-C10 alkoxy group) phenolic group, 3,4 bisalkoxy (e.g., C11-C10 alkoxy group) phenolic group, 3,5-bisalkoxy (e.g., Phenolic groups such as ethyl groups substituted with an alkoxy group having 11 to 10 carbon atoms) and 3,4,5-trisalkoxy (for example, alkoxy groups having 11 to 10 carbon atoms);
これらのうち、 R1は、炭素数 1一 6の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状のアルキル基;水酸基 またはアルコキシカルボ-ル基で置換された炭素数 1一 6の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状 のアルキル基;炭素数] 、6のアルコキシ基;または置換基を有するェテニル基が特 に好ましい。 Among them, R 1 is a linear or branched alkyl group having 16 carbon atoms; a linear or branched alkyl group having 16 carbon atoms substituted with a hydroxyl group or an alkoxycarbyl group. An alkyl group; carbon number], an alkoxy group having 6; or an ethenyl group having a substituent.
[0151] [化 22]  [0151] [Formula 22]
Figure imgf000048_0001
Figure imgf000048_0001
[0152] 〔式 (VII)中、 R6は、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を有していても よいシクロアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよいァリール基、又は、水素原子を示し 、 R7は、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよいアルコキ シ基、置換基を有していてもよいアルコキシカルボニル基、置換基を有していてもよ ぃシクロアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよいァリール基、置換基を有していてもよ ぃァリールォキシ基、置換基を有していてもよいァリールォキシカルボ-ル基、置換 基を有していてもよいアミノ基、水酸基、又は、水素原子を示し、 Zは、イミノ基または アルキルイミノ基を示し、 Lは、水素原子または XR(Rは、 1価の基または水素原子 を示し、 Xは、カルボ-ル基またはスルホ -ル基を示す。)を示し、これらの R6、 R7、 L 及び Zは、両方のピラゾール環の間で互いに異なっていてもよい。〕 [0152] [In the formula (VII), R 6 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, a cycloalkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent. Or represents a hydrogen atom, R 7 is an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an alkoxycarbonyl group which may have a substituent, Cycloalkyl group which may have a substituent, aryl group which may have a substituent group, aryloxy group which may have a substituent group, aryl group which may have a substituent group An oxycarbol group, an amino group which may have a substituent, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrogen atom, Z represents an imino group or an alkylimino group, L represents a hydrogen atom or XR (R represents Represents a monovalent group or a hydrogen atom, and X represents a carboxy group or a sulfol group ), And these R 6 , R 7 , L and Z may be different from each other between both pyrazole rings. ]
[0153] 前記式 (VII)における置換基 R6のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、ェチル 基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デ シル基、ゥンデシル基、ドデシル基、トリデシル基、ペンタデシル基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状の基が挙げられ、 R6のシクロアルキル基としては、例 えば、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロへキシル基、シク 口へプチル基などの炭素数 1一 20の基が挙げられ、 R6のァリール基としては、例えば 、フエ-ル基、ナフチル基などが挙げられる。 [0153] Examples of the alkyl group of the substituent R 6 in the formula (VII) include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, Examples thereof include straight-chain or branched-chain groups having 120 carbon atoms, such as pendecyl, dodecyl, tridecyl, and pentadecyl groups.Examples of the cycloalkyl group for R 6 include, for example, cyclopropyl and cyclobutyl groups. , cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, the group having a carbon number of 1 one 20, such as heptyl group consequent opening include cyclohexane, as the Ariru group R 6, e.g., Hue - group, and a naphthyl group.
[0154] 前記アルキル基、前記シクロアルキル基、及びァリール基の置換基としては、例え ば、メチル基、ェチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、へプチ ル基、ォクチル基、デシル基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルキル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ 基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、へプチルォキ シ基、ォクチルォキシ基、デシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルコキシ基、フエ[0154] Examples of the substituent for the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, and the aryl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, and an octyl group. , A decyl group, a C11-C10 alkyl group, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, a butoxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, a heptyloxy group. C 11 -C 10 alkoxy groups such as cis, octyloxy, decyloxy,
-ル基、ナフチル基などのァリール基、フエノキシ基、ナフチルォキシ基などのァリー ルォキシ基、ホルムアミノ基、アルキルカルボ-ルァミノ基、アルキルスルフォ-ルアミ ノ基、ァミノカルボ-ル基、アルキルアミノカルボ-ル基、ジアルキルアミノカルボ-ル 基、アミノスルフォ-ル基、アルキルアミノスルフォ-ル基、ジアルキルアミノスルフォ -ル基、アミノ基、ニトロ基、水酸基、弗素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子などのハロゲン 原子などが挙げられる。 -Aryl group such as naphthyl group, aryloxy group such as phenoxy group and naphthyloxy group, formamino group, alkylcarbolamino group, alkylsulfolamino group, aminocarbol group, alkylaminocarbol Group, dialkylaminocarbol group, aminosulfol group, alkylaminosulfur group, dialkylaminosulfur group, amino group, nitro group, hydroxyl group, halogen atom such as fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom And the like.
[0155] 前記式 (VII)において、 R6としては、前記の中で、(1)アルコキシ基、ァリール基、 ァリールォキシ基、水酸基またはハロゲン原子を置換基として有して 、てもよ 、直鎖 状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基、又は(2)アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アミノ基、アル キルカルボ-ルァミノ基、アルキルスルフォ-ルァミノ基、ニトロ基、水酸基またはハロ ゲン原子を置換基として有していてもよいァリール基が好ましぐ特に、アルコキシ基 を置換基として有していてもよい炭素数 1一 8の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基 力 り好ましい。 In the above formula (VII), R 6 may be, as described above, (1) having an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom as a substituent, and Or a branched or branched alkyl group, or (2) an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an amino group, an alkylcarbolamino group, an alkylsulfolamino group, a nitro group, a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom as a substituent. Especially preferred are aryl groups, and particularly preferred are linear or branched alkyl groups having 18 to 18 carbon atoms which may have an alkoxy group as a substituent.
[0156] 前記式 (VII)における R7のアルキル基としては、前記 R6におけるアルキル基と同様 のものが、 R7のアルコキシ基としては、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基 、ブトキシ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、ヘプチルォキシ基、ォクチルォ キシ基、デシルォキシ基、ゥンデシルォキシ基、ドデシルォキシ基、トリデシルォキシ 基、ペンタデシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状の基が挙 げられ、 R7のアルコキシカルボ-ル基としては、前記アルコキシ基を有するカルボ- ル基が挙げられ、 R7のシクロアルキル基としては、前記 R6におけるシクロアルキル基 として挙げたと同様の基が挙げられ、 R7のァリール基としては、前記 R6におけるァリ ール基として挙げたと同様の基が挙げられ、 R7のァリールォキシ基としては、フエノキ シ基、ナフチルォキシ基などが挙げられ、 R7のァリールォキシカルボニル基としては 、前記ァリールォキシ基を有するカルボニル基が挙げられる。 In the formula (VII), the alkyl group for R 7 is the same as the alkyl group for R 6, and the alkoxy group for R 7 is, for example, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, a butoxy group Straight-chain or branched-chain groups having a carbon number of 120 such as pentyloxy, hexyloxy, heptyloxy, octyloxy, decyloxy, pendecyloxy, dodecyloxy, tridecyloxy, and pentadecyloxy. elevation Gerare, the R 7 alkoxycarbonyl - the group, the carboxyalkyl having an alkoxy group - Le group. Examples of the cycloalkyl group R 7, the groups as listed as the cycloalkyl group for R 6 and examples of the Ariru group R 7, include the same groups as mentioned as § Li Lumpur group for R 6, the R 7 The aryloxy group includes a phenoxy group, a naphthyloxy group and the like, and the aryloxycarbonyl group for R 7 includes a carbonyl group having the aryloxy group.
[0157] 前記アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルコキシカルボ-ル基、シクロアルキル基、ァリ ール基、ァリールォキシ基、ァリールォキシカルボ-ル基およびァミノ基の置換基とし ては、例えば、前記 R6におけるアルキル基、シクロアルキル基およびァリール基の置 換基として挙げたと同様のアルキル基、同じくアルコキシ基、同じくァリール基、同じく ァリールォキシ基、同じくスルホンアミド基、同じくアルキルスルホンアミド基、同じくジ アルキルスルホンアミド基、同じくニトロ基、同じくハロゲン原子、並びに、プロピオ二 ル基、ブチリル基、ベンゾィル基などのァシル基、メタンスルホニル基、ベンゼンスル ホニル基などのスルホニル基、水酸基などが挙げられる。 [0157] Examples of the substituents of the alkyl group, alkoxy group, alkoxycarbol group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, aryloxy group, aryloxycarbol group and amino group include, for example, Substitution of alkyl, cycloalkyl and aryl groups at R 6 The same alkyl group, alkoxy group, aryl group, aryloxy group, sulfonamide group, alkylsulfonamide group, dialkylsulfonamide group, nitro group, nitro group, halogen atom, and Examples thereof include an acyl group such as a propionyl group, a butyryl group, and a benzoyl group; a sulfonyl group such as a methanesulfonyl group and a benzenesulfonyl group; and a hydroxyl group.
[0158] 前記式 (VII)において、 R7としては、前記の中で、(1)アルコキシ基、ァリール基、 ァリールォキシ基、水酸基またはハロゲン原子を置換基として有して 、てもよ 、直鎖 状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基、(2)アルコキシ基を置換基として有して 、てもよ ヽ直 鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルコキシ基、(3)アルコキシ基を置換基として有して 、てもよ いアルコキシ基を有するカルボ-ル基、(4)アルキル基、アルコキシ基、スルホンアミ ド基、アルキルスルホンアミド基、ジアルキルスルホンアミド基、ニトロ基、水酸基また はハロゲン原子を置換基として有して 、てもよ ヽァリール基、(5)アルキル基またはァ ルコキシ基を置換基として有して 、てもよ 、ァリール基を有するカルボ-ル基、又は、 (6)アルキル基、ァシル基またはスルホ -ル基を置換基として有して 、てもよ 、ァミノ 基が好ましぐ特に、アルコキシ基を置換基として有していてもよい炭素数 1一 8の直 鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基が好まし 、。 [0158] In the formula (VII), examples of R 7, in the, (1) an alkoxy group, Ariru group, have Ariruokishi group, a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom as a substituent, even I, straight-chain Or (2) an alkoxy group as a substituent, or (3) an alkoxy group as a substituent. A carbon group having a good alkoxy group, (4) an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a sulfonamide group, an alkylsulfonamide group, a dialkylsulfonamide group, a nitro group, a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom as a substituent; A aryl group, (5) an alkyl group or an alkoxy group as a substituent, and a carbyl group having an aryl group, or (6) an alkyl group, an acyl group or a sulfo group. A straight chain or branched chain alkyl group having 118 carbon atoms which may have an alkoxy group as a substituent is preferable, and an amino group is preferred. Better ,.
[0159] X— R中の Rの一価の基としては、 R6におけるアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アル コキシ基、 R6におけるァリール基を有するァリールォキシ基、アミノ基、 3—ピリジル基 、 2—フリル基、 2—テトラヒドロフリル基、 2—チェ-ル基などの複素環基、ビュル基など のァノレケニノレ基などが挙げらる。 [0159] X- The monovalent groups represented by R in R, the alkyl group in R 6, cycloalkyl group, alkoxy group, Ariruokishi group having Ariru group in R 6, amino group, 3-pyridyl group, 2 And heterocyclic groups such as furyl group, 2-tetrahydrofuryl group, and 2-chel group, and anorecheninole groups such as bur group.
[0160] 前記式 (VII)における Zが示すアルキルイミノ基のアルキル基としては、炭素数 1一 8の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状のものが好ましぐ Zとしては、イミノ基、又はアルキルイミ ノ基が好ましぐィミノ基が特に好ましい。尚、 Xがスルホニル基であるとき、 Rは水素 原子ではない。 [0161] [化 23] In the formula (VII), the alkyl group of the alkylimino group represented by Z is preferably a linear or branched one having 18 carbon atoms. Z is preferably an imino group or an alkylimino group. Particularly preferred are imino groups, which are preferred. When X is a sulfonyl group, R is not a hydrogen atom. [0161] [Formula 23]
(珊)
Figure imgf000051_0001
(Cor)
Figure imgf000051_0001
[0162] 〔式 (VIII)中、 R1は、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を有していても よいアルコキシ基、置換基を有していてもよいシクロアルキル基、置換基を有していて もよ 、ァリール基、置換基を有して 、てもよ 、ァリールォキシ基またはハロゲン原子を 示し、 Wは、イミノ基、アルキルイミノ基または酸素原子を示し、 Xは、カルボ二ル基ま たはスルホ -ル基を示し、 R2は、 1価の基または水素原子を示し、 iは 0— 5の整数で あり、 mは 0— 5の整数であり、 nは 0— 3の整数であり、 i+m+n≤5であり、ベンゼン 環上に R1及び W— X— R2がそれぞれ複数個存在するとき、 R1及び W— X— R2のそれぞ れは異なっていてもよい。 R6は、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を有 して 、てもよ 、シクロアルキル基、置換基を有して!/、てもよ 、ァリール基または水素原 子を示し、 R7は、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい アルコキシ基、置換基を有していてもよいアルコキシカルボ-ル基、置換基を有して いてもよいシクロアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよいァリール基、置換基を有して V、てもよ ヽァリールォキシ基、置換基を有して!/、てもよ ヽァリールォキシカルボ-ル 基、置換基を有していてもよいアミノ基、水酸基または水素原子を示し、 Zは、酸素原 子、イミノ基またはアルキルイミノ基を示し、 Lは、水素原子または XR (Rは、 1価の 基または水素原子を示し、 Xは、カルボ-ル基またはスルホ -ル基を示す。)を示す。 ] [In the formula (VIII), R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, a cycloalkyl group which may have a substituent Represents an aryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group or a halogen atom; W represents an imino group, an alkylimino group or an oxygen atom; R 2 represents a monovalent group or a hydrogen atom, i is an integer of 0-5, m is an integer of 0-5, n Is an integer of 0-3, i + m + n≤5, and when there are a plurality of R 1 and W—X—R 2 on the benzene ring, respectively, R 1 and W—X—R 2 Each may be different. R 6 is an alkyl group which may have a substituent, may have a substituent, may have a cycloalkyl group, may have a substituent! /, May have an aryl group or a hydrogen atom. R 7 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an alkoxycarbol group which may have a substituent, Cycloalkyl group which may be substituted, aryl group which may have a substituent group, V which has a substituent group, and aryloxy group which has a substituent group; Z represents an oxygen atom, an imino group or an alkylimino group; L represents a hydrogen atom or XR ( R represents a monovalent group or a hydrogen atom, and X represents a carboxy group or a sulfol group.) Show. ]
[0163] 前記式 (VIII)における 、 R2、 W、 X、 1、 m、 nは、式 (V)におけると同意義を表し、 R6、 R7、 L、 Zは、式 (VII)におけると同意義を表す。 [0164] [化 24] In the formula (VIII), R 2 , W, X, 1, m, and n represent the same meaning as in the formula (V), and R 6 , R 7 , L, and Z represent the formula (VII) Represents the same meaning as [0164] [Formula 24]
Figure imgf000052_0001
Figure imgf000052_0001
[0165] 〔式 (IX)中、 R1は、水酸基、アミノ基、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基または 置換基を有していても良いァリール基を表し、 R2は、置換基を有していてもよいアル キル基、置換基を有していてもよいアルコキシ基、置換基を有していてもよいシクロア ルキル基、置換基を有していてもよいァリール基またはハロゲン原子を示し、 sは 0— 5の整数を表す。〕 [In the formula (IX), R 1 represents a hydroxyl group, an amino group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent, and R 2 represents An alkyl group which may have a group, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, a cycloalkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, or halogen Represents an atom, and s represents an integer of 0-5. ]
[0166] 式 (IX)における R1のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、ェチル基、プロピル 基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デシル基、ゥン デシル基、ドデシル基、トリデシル基、ペンタデシル基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状 もしくは分岐鎖状の基が挙げられ、 R2のァリール基としては、例えば、フエニル基、ナ フチル基などが挙げられる。 The alkyl group of R 1 in the [0166] formula (IX), for example, a methyl group, Echiru group, propyl group, butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, Okuchiru group, decyl group, © down decyl , A dodecyl group, a tridecyl group, a pentadecyl group and the like, and a straight-chain or branched-chain group having 120 carbon atoms.Examples of the aryl group of R 2 include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group. .
[0167] 式 (IX)における R2のアルキル基としては、例えば、前記 R1と同様なアルキル基が 挙げられ、 R2のァリール基としては、例えば、前記 R1と同様なァリール基が挙げられ る。 R2のアルコキシ基としては、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキ シ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、ヘプチルォキシ基、ォクチルォキシ基 、デシルォキシ基、ゥンデシルォキシ基、ドデシルォキシ基、トリデシルォキシ基、ぺ ンタデシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状の基が挙げられ 、 R2のシクロアルキル基としては、例えば、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロ ペンチル基、シクロへキシル基、シクロへプチル基などの炭素数 1一 20の基が挙げら れ、 R1のハロゲン原子としては、例えば、弗素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子などが挙げ られる。 The alkyl group of R 2 in [0167] formula (IX), for example, the R 1 and include similar alkyl group, the Ariru group R 2, for example, include the same Ariru group and the R 1 It is possible. Examples of the alkoxy group for R 2 include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, a butoxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, a heptyloxy group, an octyloxy group, a decyloxy group, a pendecyloxy group, a dodecyloxy group, a tridecyloxy group, and a pentadecyloxy group. Examples of the group include a linear or branched group having 120 carbon atoms such as a group.Examples of the cycloalkyl group for R 2 include a cyclopropyl group, a cyclobutyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, and a cycloalkyl group. Examples thereof include a group having 120 carbon atoms such as a heptyl group, and examples of the halogen atom for R 1 include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, and a bromine atom.
[0168] 前記アルキル基、アルコキシ基、シクロアルキル基およびァリール基の置換基として は、例えば、メチル基、ェチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、 ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デシル基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルキル基、メトキシ基、 エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、ヘプ チルォキシ基、ォクチルォキシ基、デシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルコキシ 基、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロへキシル基、シクロ ヘプチル基などの炭素数 1一 10のシクロアルキル基、フエ-ル基、ナフチル基などの ァリール基、水酸基、弗素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子などのハロゲン原子などが挙 げられる。 [0168] Examples of the substituent for the alkyl group, alkoxy group, cycloalkyl group and aryl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, Carbons such as heptyl, octyl, decyl and other alkyl groups having 110 carbon atoms, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, heptyloxy, octyloxy, decyloxy, etc. Aryl groups such as cycloalkyl groups having 11 to 10 carbon atoms such as alkoxy groups, cyclopropyl groups, cyclobutyl groups, cyclopentyl groups, cyclohexyl groups, and cycloheptyl groups, phenyl groups, naphthyl groups, and the like; Examples thereof include a halogen atom such as a hydroxyl group, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, and a bromine atom.
[0169] [化 25]  [0169] [Formula 25]
Figure imgf000053_0001
Figure imgf000053_0001
[0170] 〔式 (X)中、 R1は、水酸基、アミノ基、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基または 置換基を有していても良いァリール基を表し、 R2は、置換基を有していても良いアル キル基または置換基を有していても良いァリール基を表し、 sは 0— 3の整数を表す。 ] [In the formula (X), R 1 represents a hydroxyl group, an amino group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent, and R 2 represents Represents an alkyl group which may have a group or an aryl group which may have a substituent, and s represents an integer of 0 to 3. ]
[0171] 式 (X)における、 R R2のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、ェチル基、プロ ピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デシル基、 ゥンデシル基、ドデシル基、トリデシル基、ペンタデシル基などの炭素数 1一 20の直 鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状の基が挙げられ、
Figure imgf000053_0002
R2のァリール基としては、例えば、フエ- ル基、ナフチル基などが挙げられる。
[0171] expressions in (X), the alkyl group of the RR 2, for example, a methyl group, Echiru group, propyl group, butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, Okuchiru group, decyl group, Undeshiru group , A dodecyl group, a tridecyl group, a pentadecyl group and the like, and a straight-chain or branched-chain group having 112 carbon atoms.
Figure imgf000053_0002
The Ariru group R 2, for example, Hue - group, and a naphthyl group.
[0172] 前記アルキル基およびァリール基の置換基としては、例えば、メチル基、ェチル基 、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デシ ル基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルキル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブト キシ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、ヘプチルォキシ基、ォクチルォキシ 基、デシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルコキシ基、シクロプロピル基、シクロブ チル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロへキシル基、シクロへプチル基などの炭素数 1一 1 0のシクロアルキル基、フエ-ル基、ナフチル基などのァリール基、水酸基、弗素原子[0172] Examples of the substituent of the alkyl group and the aryl group include those having 1 carbon atom such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, and a decyl group. (I) C10-C10 alkoxy, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, etc., such as 10 alkyl, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, heptyloxy, octyloxy, decyloxy, etc. C 1-C 1 such as tyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl and cycloheptyl Aryl groups such as cycloalkyl group, phenyl group, naphthyl group, hydroxyl group, fluorine atom
、塩素原子、臭素原子などのハロゲン原子などが挙げられる。 And a halogen atom such as a chlorine atom and a bromine atom.
[0173] [化 26]  [0173] [Formula 26]
Figure imgf000054_0001
Figure imgf000054_0001
[0174] 〔式 (XI)中、 R1— R8は、各々独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基、シァノ基 、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基、置換基を有してい ても良いアルコキシ基、置換基を有していても良いァリール基、置換基を有していて も良いァリールォキシ基、置換基を有していても良いアルキルアミノ基、置換基を有し ていても良いジアルキルアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いアルキルチオ基、又は 置換基を有していても良いァリールチオ基を示し、 R1と R2、 R3と R4、 R5と R6、 R7と R8 は各々連結して脂肪族炭素環を形成しても良い。 Mは、 2個の水素原子、 2価の金 属原子、 3価 1置換金属原子、 4価 2置換金属原子またはォキシ金属原子を示す。〕[In the formula (XI), R 1 to R 8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, or an alkyl group which may have a substituent. An alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an aryloxy group which may have a substituent, an alkylamino group which may have a substituent, A dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, an alkylthio group which may have a substituent, or an arylthio group which may have a substituent; R 1 and R 2 , R 3 and R 4 , R 5 and R 6 , and R 7 and R 8 may be linked to each other to form an aliphatic carbon ring. M represents two hydrogen atoms, a divalent metal atom, a trivalent monosubstituted metal atom, a tetravalent disubstituted metal atom or an oxymetal atom. ]
[0175] 前記式 (XI)において、ハロゲン原子としては、例えば、弗素原子、塩素原子、臭素 原子などが挙げられ、アルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、ェチル基、プロピル基 、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デシル基、ゥンデ シル基、ドデシル基、トリデシル基、ペンタデシル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル 基、シクロペンチル基、シクロへキシル基、シクロへプチル基などの炭素数 1一 20の 直鎖状、分岐鎖状もしくは環状のものが挙げられ、アルコキシ基としては、例えば、メ トキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ 基、ヘプチルォキシ基、ォクチルォキシ基、デシルォキシ基、ゥンデシルォキシ基、ド デシルォキシ基、トリデシルォキシ基、ペンタデシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 20の 直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状のものが挙げられ、ァリール基としては、例えば、フエ-ル基 、ナフチル基などの炭化水素系ァリール基、又は、チェニル基、フリル基、ピリジル基 などの複素環系ァリール基が挙げられ、ァリールォキシ基としては、例えば、フエノキ シ基、ナフチルォキシ基などの炭化水素系ァリールォキシ基、チェ-ルォキシ基、フ リルォキシ基、又は、ピリジルォキシ基などの複素環系ァリールォキシ基などが挙げ られ、アルキルアミノ基またはジアルキルアミノ基としては、メチル基、ェチル基、プロ ピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、ヘプチル基、ォクチル基、デシル基、 ゥンデシル基、ドデシル基、トリデシル基、ペンタデシル基などの炭素数 1一 20の直 鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基で 1置換または 2置換されたァミノ基挙げられ、アル キルチオ基としては、例えば、メチルチオ基、ェチルチオ基、プロピルチオ基、プチ ルチオ基、ペンチルチオ基、へキシルチオ基、へプチルチオ基、ォクチルチオ基、デ シルチオ基、ゥンデシルチオ基、ドデシルチオ基、トリデシルチオ基、ペンタデシルチ ォ基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状のものが挙げられ、ァリールチ ォ基としては、例えば、フ 二ルチオ基またはナフチルチオ基が挙げられる。 [0175] In the formula (XI), examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, and a bromine atom. Examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, and a pentyl group. Carbon, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, decyl, decyl, dodecyl, tridecyl, pentadecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, etc. Examples thereof include straight-chain, branched-chain and cyclic groups having the number of 11 to 20, and examples of the alkoxy group include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, a butoxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, and a heptyloxy group. Octyloxy, decyloxy, pendecyloxy, dodecyloxy, tridecyloxy, pe Examples thereof include straight-chain or branched-chain ones having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as antadecyloxy groups, and aryl groups include, for example, And a heterocyclic aryl group such as a phenyl group, a furyl group and a pyridyl group.Examples of the aryloxy group include a hydrocarbon group such as a phenoxy group and a naphthyloxy group. Examples include a heterocyclic aryloxy group such as an aryloxy group, a cheloxy group, a fluorooxy group, or a pyridyloxy group.The alkylamino group or the dialkylamino group includes a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, and a butyl group. A straight-chain or branched-chain alkyl group having 120 carbon atoms, such as pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, decyl, pendecyl, dodecyl, dodecyl, tridecyl, pentadecyl, etc. Examples of the substituted amino group include an alkylthio group such as a methylthio group and an ethylthio group. A straight-chain of 120 carbons such as thio, propylthio, butylthio, pentylthio, hexylthio, heptylthio, octylthio, decylthio, undecylthio, dodecylthio, tridecylthio, pentadecylthio, etc. And an aryloxy group, for example, a fluorothio group or a naphthylthio group.
[0176] 前記アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ァリール基、ァリールォキシ基、アルキルアミノ基、 ジアルキルアミノ基、アルキルチオ基およびァリールチオ基の置換基としては、例え ば、メチル基、ェチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、へキシル基、へプチ ル基、ォクチル基、デシル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基 、シクロへキシル基、シクロへプチル基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルキル基;メトキシ基 、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルォキシ基、へキシルォキシ基、へ プチルォキシ基、ォクチルォキシ基、デシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 10のアルコ キシ基;水酸基;弗素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子などのハロゲン原子などが挙げられ る。  [0176] Examples of the substituent for the alkyl group, alkoxy group, aryl group, aryloxy group, alkylamino group, dialkylamino group, alkylthio group and arylthio group include, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, butyl group, C11-C10 alkyl groups such as pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, decyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl and cycloheptyl; methoxy Ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, heptyloxy group, octyloxy group, decyloxy group, etc., alkoxy group having 110 carbon atoms; hydroxyl group; fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, etc. Examples include a halogen atom.
[0177] 前記式 (XI)において、 R1と R2、 R3と R4、 R5と R6、 R7と R8が各々連結して、— (CH ) In the above formula (XI), R 1 and R 2 , R 3 and R 4 , R 5 and R 6 , R 7 and R 8 are each connected to form — (CH 2)
(CH ) (CH )一等の脂肪族炭素環を形成していても良い。  (CH 2) (CH 2) It may form an aliphatic carbon ring such as primary.
3 2 4 2 5  3 2 4 2 5
[0178] 前記式 (XI)において、 R1— R8としては、前記の中で、(1)アルコキシ基或いはハロ ゲン原子を置換基として有していてもよい、直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基、 (2) 直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基を置換基として有して 、てもよ 、シクロアルキル 基、(3)アルキル基、アルコキシ基或いはハロゲン原子を置換基として有していてもよ ぃァリール基、(4)ハロゲン原子、又は、(5)それぞれが連結して脂肪族炭素環を形 成している場合が好ましぐ炭素数 1一 8の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状アルキル基、又 は、連結して (CH ) または— (CH )—を形成している場合が特に好ましい。 In the formula (XI), R 1 to R 8 are, as described above, (1) a linear or branched chain which may have an alkoxy group or a halogen atom as a substituent. An alkyl group, (2) a straight-chain or branched-chain alkyl group as a substituent, or a cycloalkyl group, (3) an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or a halogen atom as a substituent. Moyo A aryl group, (4) a halogen atom, or (5) a linear or branched alkyl group having 18 carbon atoms, which is preferably linked to each other to form an aliphatic carbocyclic ring. Or a case where they are linked to form (CH 2) or — (CH 2) —.
2 3 2 4  2 3 2 4
[0179] 前記式 (XI)における Mとしては、 2個の水素原子;無機化学命名法 1990年規則に 基づく周期律表の 2属、 3属、 4属、 8属、 9属、 10属、 11属、 12属、 13属、 14属また は 15属に属する元素力も選ばれる、 2価の金属原子、 3価 1置換金属原子、 4価 2置 換金属原子またはォキシ金属原子を示す。例えば、 2価の金属原子としては、 Cu、 Z n、 Fe、 Co、 Ni、 Ru、 Rd、 Pd、 Mn、 Sn、 Mg、 Ti等が挙げられ、 3価 1置換金属原子 としては、 A1— Cl、 Ga— Cl、 In— Cl、 Fe Cl、 Ru— CI等のハロゲン原子、水酸基また はアルコキシ基で 1置換された金属原子が挙げられ、 4価 2置換金属としては、 SiCl  [0179] In Formula (XI), M represents two hydrogen atoms; two, three, four, eight, nine, ten, and ten groups of the periodic table based on the inorganic chemical nomenclature 1990 rule. Indicates a divalent metal atom, a trivalent mono-substituted metal atom, a tetravalent di-substituted metal atom, or an oxy metal atom, for which an elemental force belonging to genera 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15 is also selected. For example, divalent metal atoms include Cu, Zn, Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rd, Pd, Mn, Sn, Mg, Ti, etc., and trivalent monosubstituted metal atoms include A1— Examples include halogen atoms such as Cl, Ga—Cl, In—Cl, FeCl, and Ru—CI, and metal atoms mono-substituted with a hydroxyl group or an alkoxy group.
2 2
、 GeCl、 TiCl、 SnCl、 Si (OH)、 Ge (OH)、 Mn (OH)、 Sn(OH) 等のハロゲ, GeCl, TiCl, SnCl, Si (OH), Ge (OH), Mn (OH), Sn (OH)
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ン原子、水酸基またはアルコキシ基で 2置換された金属原子が挙げられ、ォキシ金属 としては、 VO、 MnO、 TiO等が挙げられる。これらのうち、好ましくは VO、 Cu、 Ni及 び Coが挙げられ、更に好ましくは VO及び Cuが挙げられる。 Examples thereof include a metal atom disubstituted with a 2222 222 atom, a hydroxyl group or an alkoxy group, and examples of the oxymetal include VO, MnO, and TiO. Of these, VO, Cu, Ni and Co are preferred, and VO and Cu are more preferred.
[0180] [化 27] [0180] [Formula 27]
Figure imgf000056_0001
Figure imgf000056_0001
[0181] 〔式 (ΧΠ)中、 R1— R7は各々独立に水素原子、ハロゲン原子、 -トロ基、シァノ基、ヒ ドロキシ基、アミノ基、カルボキシル基、スルホン酸基、炭素数 1一 20のアルキル基、 炭素数 1一 20のハロゲノアルキル基、炭素数 1一 20のアルコキシ基、炭素数 2— 20 のァルケ-ル基、炭素数 2— 20のアルコキシアルキル基、炭素数 2— 20のアルコキ シアルコキシ基、炭素数 6— 20のァリールォキシ基、炭素数 1一 20のァシル基、炭素 数 2— 20のアルコキシカルボ-ル基、炭素数 2— 20のアルキルアミノカルボ-ル基、 炭素数 3— 20のジアルキルアミノカルボ-ル基、炭素数 2— 20のアルキルカルボ- ルァミノ基、炭素数 7— 20のフエ-ルカルポ-ルァミノ基、炭素数 7— 20のフエ-ル ァミノカルボ-ル基、炭素数 7— 20のフエノキシカルボ-ル基、炭素数 7— 20のァラ ルキル基、炭素数 6— 20のァリール基、炭素数 4一 20のへテロァリール基、炭素数 1 一 20のアルキルチオ基、炭素数 6— 20のフエ-ルチオ基、炭素数 3— 20のァルケ- ルォキシカルボ-ル基、炭素数 8— 20のァラルキルォキシカルボ-ル基、炭素数 4 一 20のアルコキシカルボ-ルアルコキシカルボ-ル基、炭素数 4一 20のアルキル力 ルポ-ルアルコキシカルボ-ル基、炭素数 2— 20のモノ(ヒドロキシアルキル)アミノカ ルポ-ル基、炭素数 3— 20のジ(ヒドロキシアルキル)ァミノカルボ-ル基、炭素数 3 一 20のモノ(アルコキシアルキル)ァミノカルボ-ル基または炭素数 5— 20のジ(アル コキシアルキル)ァミノカルボ-ル基を表し、 R2と R3及び/又は R5と R6はそれぞれ互 いに結合してピロール環に縮合する芳香環を形成してもよぐまた、これらによって形 成される縮合芳香環は、それぞれ同一であっても異なるものであってもよい。〕 [0181] [In the formula (ΧΠ), R 1 to R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a -toro group, a cyano group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, 20 alkyl groups, halogenoalkyl groups with 1 to 20 carbon atoms, alkoxy groups with 1 to 20 carbon atoms, alkenyl groups with 2 to 20 carbon atoms, alkoxyalkyl groups with 2 to 20 carbon atoms, 2 to 20 carbon atoms An alkoxyalkoxy group of 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryloxy group of 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an acyl group of 11 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkoxycarboyl group of 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkylaminocarboyl group of 2 to 20 carbon atoms, C3-20 dialkylaminocarboyl group, C2-20 alkylcarboamino group, C7-20 phenylcarboamino group, C7-20 phenylaminocarbol Group, phenoxycarbol group with 7-20 carbon atoms, aralkyl group with 7-20 carbon atoms, aryl group with 6-20 carbon atoms, heteroaryl group with 4-20 carbon atoms, alkylthio group with 1-20 carbon atoms Group, 6-20 carbon atoms thiol group, 3-20 carbon atoms, alkoxycarbonyl group, 8-20 carbon atoms, aralkyloxycarbonyl group, 4-20 carbon atoms -Alkoxycarbol group, alkyl force with 412 carbon atoms, alkoxyalkoxycarbonyl group, mono (hydroxyalkyl) aminocarbol group with 2-20 carbon atoms, di (3--20 carbon atom) (Hydroxyalkyl) aminocarboyl group, C 3-20 mono ( Turkey alkoxyalkyl) Aminokarubo - group or a carbon number of 5-20 di (Al Kokishiarukiru) Aminokarubo - represents a group, a pyrrole attached to R 2 and R 3 and / or R 5 and R 6 are each other physicians each ring The condensed aromatic rings formed by these may be the same or different. ]
[0182] [化 28] [0182] [Formula 28]
Figure imgf000057_0001
Figure imgf000057_0001
[0183] 〔式 (ΧΙΠ)中、 R8— R11は各々独立に水素原子、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基、シァノ基、 ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、カルボキシル基、スルホン酸基、炭素数 1一 20のアルキル基 、炭素数 1一 20のハロゲノアルキル基、炭素数 1一 20のアルコキシ基、炭素数 2— 2 0のァルケ-ル基、炭素数 2— 20のアルコキシアルキル基、炭素数 2— 20のアルコキ シアルコキシ基、炭素数 6— 20のァリールォキシ基、炭素数 1一 20のァシル基、炭素 数 2— 20のアルコキシカルボ-ル基、炭素数 2— 20のアルキルアミノカルボ-ル基、 炭素数 3— 20のジアルキルアミノカルボ-ル基、炭素数 2— 20のアルキルカルボ- ルァミノ基、炭素数 7— 20のフエ-ルカルポ-ルァミノ基、炭素数 7— 20のフエ-ル ァミノカルボ-ル基、炭素数 7— 20のフエノキシカルボ-ル基、炭素数 7— 20のァラ ルキル基、炭素数 6— 20のァリール基、炭素数 4一 20のへテロァリール基、炭素数 1 一 20のアルキルチオ基、炭素数 6— 20のフエ-ルチオ基、炭素数 3— 20のァルケ- ルォキシカルボ-ル基、炭素数 8— 20のァラルキルォキシカルボ-ル基、炭素数 4 一 20のアルコキシカルボ-ルアルコキシカルボ-ル基、炭素数 4一 20のアルキル力 ルポ-ルアルコキシカルボ-ル基、炭素数 2— 20のモノ(ヒドロキシアルキル)アミノカ ルポ-ル基、炭素数 3— 20のジ(ヒドロキシアルキル)ァミノカルボ-ル基、炭素数 3 一 20のモノ(アルコキシアルキル)ァミノカルボ-ル基または炭素数 5— 20のジ(アル コキシアルキル)ァミノカルボ-ル基を表し、 R1Gと R11はそれぞれ互いに結合して芳 香環を形成してもよい。)を表し、 Mは、遷移金属を表す。〕 [0183] [In the formula (ΧΙΠ), R 8 — R 11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, Alkyl group, halogenoalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, alkoxyalkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, 2 to 20 carbon atoms Alkoxy alkoxy group, aryloxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, acyl group having 11 to 20 carbon atoms, alkoxycarboyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, alkylaminocarbol group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, carbon number A 3-20 dialkylaminocarboyl group, a 2-20 carbon alkylcarbalumino group, a 7-20 carbon atom phenylcarboamine group, a 7-20 carbon atom phenylaminocarbol group, 7-20 carbon atoms phenoxycarbol group, 7-20 carbon atomsラ Alkyl group, C6-20 aryl group, C4-20 heteroaryl group, C1-20 alkylthio group, C6-20 phenylthio group, C3-20 arylke group Roxycarbol group, C8-C20 aralkyloxycarbon group, C4-C20 alkoxycarboxyalkoxycarbon group, C4-C20 alkyl force A mono (hydroxyalkyl) aminocarbon group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a di (hydroxyalkyl) aminocarboyl group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, and a mono (alkoxyalkyl) aminocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms. R 1G and R 11 may be bonded to each other to form an aromatic ring, or a di (alkoxyalkyl) aminocarboyl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms. ) And M represents a transition metal. ]
前記式 (XII)及び (ΧΙΠ)における R1— R11の具体例としては、水素原子;ニトロ基; シァノ基;ヒドロキシ基;アミノ基;カルボキシル基;スルホン酸基;フッ素、塩素、臭素、 ヨウ素のハロゲン原子;メチル基、ェチル基、 n-プロピル基、 iso-プロピル基、 n-ブチ ノレ基、 iso-ブチノレ基、 sec-ブチノレ基、 t-ブチノレ基、 n-ペンチノレ基、 iso-ペンチノレ基、Specific examples of R 1 to R 11 in the above formulas (XII) and (ΧΙΠ) include a hydrogen atom; a nitro group; a cyano group; a hydroxy group; an amino group; a carboxyl group; a sulfonic acid group; fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine. A halogen atom; methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butynole, iso-butynole, sec-butynole, t-butynole, n-pentynole, iso-pentynole ,
2-メチルブチル基、 1-メチルブチル基、 neo-ペンチル基、 1,2-ジメチルプロピル基、 1, 1-ジメチルプロピル基、 cyclo-ペンチル基、 n-へキシル基、 4-メチルペンチル基、2-methylbutyl, 1-methylbutyl, neo-pentyl, 1,2-dimethylpropyl, 1,1-dimethylpropyl, cyclo-pentyl, n-hexyl, 4-methylpentyl,
3-メチルペンチル基、 2-メチルペンチル基、 1-メチルペンチル基、 3,3-ジメチルブ チル基、 2, 3-ジメチルブチル基、 1,3-ジメチルブチル基、 2, 2-ジメチルブチル基、 1, 2-ジメチルブチル基、 1, 1-ジメチルブチル基、 3-ェチルブチル基、 2-ェチルブチル 基、 1-ェチルブチル基、 1,2,2-卜リメチルブチル基、 1,1,2-トリメチルブチル基、 1- ェチル -2-メチルプロピル基、 cyclo-へキシル基、 n-ヘプチル基、 2-メチルへキシル 基、 3-メチルへキシル基、 4-メチルへキシル基、 5-メチルへキシル基、 2,4-ジメチル ペンチル基、 n-ォクチル基、 2-ェチルへキシル基、 2,5-ジメチルへキシル基、 2,5,5 -トリメチルペンチル基、 2,4-ジメチルへキシル基、 2,2,4-トリメチルペンチル基、 n- ォクチル基、 3,5,5-トリメチルへキシル基、 n-ノ-ル基、 n-デシル基、 4-ェチルオタ チル基、 4-ェチル -4, 5-メチルへキシル基、 n-ゥンデシル基、 n-ドデシル基、 1,3,5, 7-テトラエチルォクチル基、 4-ブチルォクチル基、 6, 6-ジェチルォクチル基、 n-トリ デシル基、 6-メチル -4-ブチルォクチル基、 n-テトラデシル基、 n-ペンタデシル基、 3 ,5-ジメチルヘプチル基、 2,6-ジメチルヘプチル基、 2,4-ジメチルヘプチル基、 2,2, 5,5-テトラメチルへキシル基、 1- cyclo-ペンチル- 2,2-ジメチルプロピル基、 1 -cyclo-へキシル -2,2-ジメチルプロピル基などの炭素数 1一 20の直鎖、分岐または 環状のアルキル基;クロロメチル基、ジクロロメチル基、フルォロメチル基、トリフルォロ メチル基、ペンタフルォロェチル基、ノナフルォロブチル基などの炭素数 1一 20のハ ロゲノアルキル基;メトキシェチル基、エトキシェチル基、 iso-プロピルォキシェチル基 、 3-メトキシプロピル基、 2-メトキシブチル基などの炭素数 2— 20のアルコキシアルキ ル基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、 n-プロポキシ基、 iso-プロポキシ基、 n-ブトキシ基、 iso- ブトキシ基、 sec-ブトキシ基、 t-ブトキシ基、 n-ペントキシ基、 iso-ペントキシ基、 neo- ペントキシ基、 n-へキシルォキシ基、 n-ドデシルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 20のァ ルコキシ基;ビュル基、プロぺ-ル基、 1-ブテュル基、 iso-ブテュル基、 1-ペンテ- ル基、 2-ペンテ-ル基、 2-メチル -1-ブテュル基、 3-メチル -1-ブテュル基、 2-メチ ル- 2-ブテュル基、 2, 2-ジシァノビ-ル基、 2-シァノ -2-メチルカルボキシルビ-ル 基、 2-シァノ -2-メチルスルホンビュル基などの炭素数 2— 20のァルケ-ル基;メトキ シェトキシ基、エトキシエトキシ基、 3-メトキシプロピルォキシ基、 3- (iso-プロピルォキ シ)プロピルォキシ基などの炭素数 2— 20のアルコキシアルコキシ基;フエノキシ基、 2-メチルフエノキシ基、 4-メチルフエノキシ基、 4-t-ブチルフエノキシ基、 2-メトキシフ エノキシ基、 4- iso-プロピルフエノキシ基などの炭素数 6— 20のァリールォキシ基;ホ ルミル基、ァセチル基、ェチルカルボ-ル基、 n-プロピルカルボ-ル基、 iso-プロピ ノレカノレボニノレ基、 n-ブチノレカノレボニノレ基、 iso-ブチノレカノレボニノレ基、 sec-ブチノレ力 ノレボニノレ基、 t-ブチノレカノレボニノレ基、 n-ペンチノレカノレボニノレ基、 iso-ペンチノレ力ノレ ボ-ル基、 neo-ペンチルカルボ-ル基、 2-メチルブチルカルボ-ル基、ニトロべンジ ルカルボ-ル基などの炭素数 1一 20のァシル基;メトキシカルボ-ル基、エトキシカ ルボニル基、イソプロピルォキシカルボ-ル基、 2,4-ジメチルブチルォキシカルボ- ル基などのアルコキシカルボニル基;メチルァミノカルボニル基、ェチルァミノカルボ -ル基、 n-プロピルアミノカルボ-ル基、 n-ブチルァミノカルボ-ル基、 n-へキシル ァミノカルボ-ル基などの炭素数 2— 20のアルキルアミノカルボ-ル基;ジメチルアミ ノカルボ-ル基、ジェチルァミノカルボ-ル基、ジ- n-プロピルアミノカルボ-ル基、ジ -n-ブチルァミノカルボ-ル基、 N-メチル -N-シクロへキシルァミノカルボ-ル基など の炭素数 3— 20のジアルキルアミノカルボ-ル基;ァセチルァミノ基、ェチルカルボ -ルァミノ基、ブチルカルボ-ルァミノ基などの炭素数 2— 20のアルキルカルボ-ル アミノ基;フエ-ルァミノカルボ-ル基、 4-メチルフエ-ルァミノカルボ-ル基、 2-メトキ シフエ-ルァミノカルボ-ル基、 4- n-プロピルフエ-ルァミノカルボ-ル基などの炭素 数 7— 20のフエ-ルァミノカルボ-ル基;フエ-ルカルポ-ルァミノ基、 4-ェチルフエ 二ルカルボ-ルァミノ基、 3-ブチルフヱ-ルカルポ-ルァミノ基などの炭素数 7— 20 のフエ-ルカルポ-ルァミノ基;フエノキシカルボ-ル基、 2-メチルフエノキシカルボ- ル基、 4-メトキシフヱノキシカルボ-ル基、 4-t-ブチルフエノキシカルボ-ル基などの 炭素数 7— 20のフエノキシカルボ-ル基;ベンジル基、ニトロべンジル基、シァノベン ジル基、ヒドロキシベンジル基、メチルベンジル基、ジメチルベンジル基、トリメチルベ ンジル基、ジクロロべンジル基、メトキシベンジル基、エトキシベンジル基、トリフルォ ロメチルベンジル基、ナフチルメチル基、ニトロナフチルメチル基、シァノナフチルメ チル基、ヒドロキシナフチルメチル基、メチルナフチルメチル基、トリフルォロメチルナ フチルメチル基などの炭素数 7— 20のァラルキル基;フエ-ル基、ニトロフエ-ル基、 シァノフ -ル基、ヒドロキシフヱ-ル基、メチルフヱ-ル基、ジメチルフヱ-ル基、トリ メチルフエ-ル基、ジクロロフヱ-ル基、メトキシフエ-ル基、エトキシフエ-ル基、トリ フルォロメチルフエ-ル基、 Ν,Ν-ジメチルァミノフエ-ル基、ナフチル基、ニトロナフ チル基、シァノナフチル基、ヒドロキシナフチル基、メチルナフチル基、トリフルォロメ チルナフチル基などの炭素数 6— 20のァリール基;ピロリル基、チェ-ル基、フラニ ル基、ォキサゾィル基、イソォキサゾィル基、ォキサジァゾィル基、イミダゾィル基、ベ ンゾォキサゾィル基、ベンゾチアゾィル基、ベンゾイミダゾィル基、ベンゾフラ-ル基、 インドイル基などの炭素数 4一 20のへテロァリール基;メチルチオ基、ェチルチオ基、 η-プロピルチオ基、 iso-プロピルチオ基、 n-ブチルチオ基、 iso-ブチルチオ基、 sec- ブチルチオ基、 t-ブチルチオ基、 n-ペンチルチオ基、 iso-ペンチルチオ基、 2-メチ ルブチルチオ基、 1-メチルブチルチオ基、 neo-ペンチルチオ基、 1,2-ジメチルプロ ピルチオ基、 1 , 1-ジメチルプロピルチオ基などの炭素数 1一 20のアルキルチオ基;フ ェ-ルチオ基、 4-メチルフエ-ルチオ基、 2-メトキシフエ-ルチオ基、 4-t-プチルフエ 二ルチオ基などの炭素数 6— 20のフエ-ルチオ基;ビュル基、プロべ-ル基、 1-ブテ -ル基、 iso-ブテュル基、 1-ペンテ-ル基、 2-ペンテ-ル基、 2-メチル -1-ブテュル 基、 3-メチル -1-ブテュル基、 2-メチル -2-ブテュル基、 2,2-ジシァノビ-ル基、 2- シァノ -2-メチルカルボキシルビ-ル基、 2-シァノ -2-メチルスルホンビュル基などの 炭素数 2— 20のァルケ-ル基;ァリルォキシカルボ-ル基、 2-ブテノキシカルボ-ル 基などの炭素数 3— 20のァルケ-ルォキシカルボ-ル基;ベンジルォキシカルボ- ル基、フエネチルォキシカルボ-ル基などの炭素数 8— 20のァラルキルォキシカル ボ-ル基;メトキシカルボ-ルメトキシカルボ-ル基、エトキシカルボ-ルメトキシカル ボ-ル基、 n-プロポキシカルボ-ルメトキシカルボ-ル基、イソプロポキシカルボ-ル メトキシカルボ-ル基などの炭素数 4一 20のアルコキシカルボ-ルアルコキシカルボ -ル基;メチルカルボ-ルメトキシカルボ-ル基、ェチルカルボ-ルメトキシカルボ- ル基などの炭素数 4一 20のアルキルカルボ-ルアルコキシカルボ-ル基;ヒドロキシ ェチルァミノカルボ-ル基、 2-ヒドロキシプロピルアミノカルボ-ル基、 3-ヒドロキシプ 口ピルアミノカルボ-ル基などの炭素数 2— 20のモノ(ヒドロキシアルキル)ァミノカル ボール基;ジ(ヒドロキシェチル)ァミノカルボ-ル基、ジ(2-ヒドロキシプロピル)ァミノ カルボ-ル基、ジ(3-ヒドロキシプロピル)ァミノカルボ-ル基などの炭素数 3— 20の ジ(ヒドロキシアルキル)ァミノカルボ-ル基;メトキシメチルァミノカルボ-ル基、メトキ シェチルァミノカルボ-ル基、エトキシメチルァミノカルボ-ル基、エトキシェチルアミ ノカルボ-ル基、プロボキシェチルァミノカルボ-ル基などの炭素数 3— 20のモノ(ァ ルコキシアルキル)ァミノカルボ-ル基;ジ (メトキシェチル)ァミノカルボ-ル基、ジ(ェ トキシメチル)ァミノカルボ-ル基、ジ(エトキシェチル)ァミノカルボ-ル基、ジ(プロボ キシェチル)ァミノカルボ-ル基などの炭素数 5— 20のジ(アルコキシアルキル)ァミノ カルボール基などが挙げられる。 3-methylpentyl, 2-methylpentyl, 1-methylpentyl, 3,3-dimethylbutyl, 2,3-dimethylbutyl, 1,3-dimethylbutyl, 2,2-dimethylbutyl, 1,2-dimethylbutyl, 1,1-dimethylbutyl, 3-ethylbutyl, 2-ethylbutyl, 1-ethylbutyl, 1,2,2-trimethylbutyl, 1,1,2-trimethylbutyl , 1-ethyl-2-methylpropyl, cyclo-hexyl, n-heptyl, 2-methylhexyl, 3-methylhexyl, 4-methylhexyl, 5-methylhexyl, 2,4-dimethylpentyl, n-octyl, 2-ethylhexyl, 2,5-dimethylhexyl, 2,5,5-trimethylpentyl, 2,4-dimethylhexyl, 2, 2,4-trimethylpentyl, n-octyl, 3,5,5-trimethylhexyl, n-nor, n-decyl, 4-ethyl Tatyl group, 4-ethyl-4,5-methylhexyl group, n-pentadecyl group, n-dodecyl group, 1,3,5,7-tetraethyl octyl group, 4-butyl octyl group, 6, 6-ethyl octyl group Group, n-tridecyl group, 6-methyl-4-butyloctyl group, n-tetradecyl group, n-pentadecyl group, 3,5-dimethylheptyl group, 2,6-dimethylheptyl group, 2,4-dimethylheptyl group , 2,2, 1,20-carbon straight-chain, branched such as 5,5-tetramethylhexyl group, 1-cyclo-pentyl-2,2-dimethylpropyl group, 1-cyclo-hexyl-2,2-dimethylpropyl group Or a cyclic alkyl group; a halogenoalkyl group having 120 carbon atoms, such as a chloromethyl group, a dichloromethyl group, a fluoromethyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, a pentafluoroethyl group, a nonafluorobutyl group; a methoxyethyl group, an ethoxyxetyl An alkoxyalkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, such as an iso-propyloxystyl group, a 3-methoxypropyl group or a 2-methoxybutyl group; a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, an n-propoxy group, an iso-propoxy group , N-butoxy, iso-butoxy, sec-butoxy, t-butoxy, n-pentoxy, iso-pentoxy, neo-pentoxy, n-hexyloxy, n-dodecyloxy Alkoxy groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as butyl, propyl, 1-butyl, iso-butyl, 1-pentyl, 2-pentenyl, and 2-methyl-1 -Butyl group, 3-methyl-1-butyl group, 2-methyl-2-butul group, 2,2-dicyanovyl group, 2-cyano-2-methylcarboxylvinyl group, 2-cyano-2 -A 2 to 20 carbon atom alkenyl group such as a methyl sulfone butyl group; a 2 to 20 carbon atom such as a methoxetoxy group, an ethoxyethoxy group, a 3-methoxypropyloxy group, and a 3- (iso-propyloxy) propyloxy group. 20 alkoxyalkoxy groups; C6-20 aryloxy such as phenoxy, 2-methylphenoxy, 4-methylphenoxy, 4-t-butylphenoxy, 2-methoxyphenoxy, 4-iso-propylphenoxy, etc. Group: formyl group, acetyl group, ethyl carboxyl group , N-propylcarbonyl group, iso-propynolecanoleboninole group, n-butynolecanoleboninole group, iso-butynolecanoleboninole group, sec-butynolenolone group, t-butynolecanoleboninole group Group, n-pentynolecanoleboninole, iso-pentynolecarbonyl, neo-pentylcarbol, 2-methylbutylcarbol, nitrobenzylcarbol, etc. (I) 20 acyl groups; alkoxycarbonyl groups such as methoxycarbyl, ethoxycarbonyl, isopropyloxycarbol, and 2,4-dimethylbutyloxycarbol; methylaminocarbonyl, ethyl C2-C20 alkylaminocarboyl such as aminocarboyl, n-propylaminocarboyl, n-butylaminocarboyl, n-hexylaminocarboyl; dimethylamino Carboyl group, getylaminocarboyl group, di-n-propylaminocarboyl group, di-n-butylaminocarboyl group, N-methyl-N-cyclohexylaminocarbo- Group A dialkylaminocarboxy group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms; an alkylcarboamino group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms such as an acetylamino group, an ethylcarbylamino group, a butylcarboxyamino group; a phenylaminocarbol group, C7-C20 phenylaminocarbol groups such as methylphenylaminocarbyl group, 2-methoxyphenylaminocarbyl group and 4-n-propylphenylaminocarbyl group; phenylcarbamino group, 4 7- to 20-carbon phenol carboxyl groups such as -ethyl phenyl carboxylamino group and 3-butylphenol carboxylamino group; phenoxycarbol group, 2-methylphenoxycarbol group, 4-methoxy C7-C20 phenoxycarbol groups such as phenoxycarbol group and 4-t-butylphenoxycarbol group; benzyl group, nitrobenzyl group, cyanobe Benzyl, hydroxybenzyl, methylbenzyl, dimethylbenzyl, trimethylbenzyl, dichlorobenzyl, methoxybenzyl, ethoxybenzyl, trifluoromethylbenzyl, naphthylmethyl, nitronaphthylmethyl, cyanonaphthylmethyl Aralkyl groups having 7 to 20 carbon atoms, such as a carbonyl group, a hydroxynaphthylmethyl group, a methylnaphthylmethyl group, a trifluoromethylnaphthylmethyl group; a phenyl group, a nitrophenyl group, a cyanophenyl group, a hydroxyphenyl group, a methylphenyl group; -Methyl, dimethylphenyl, trimethylphenyl, dichlorophenyl, methoxyphenyl, ethoxyphenyl, trifluoromethylphenyl, Ν, メ チ ル -dimethylaminophenyl Group, naphthyl group, nitronaphthyl group, cyanonaphthyl group, hydroxyna Aryl groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, such as phthyl, methylnaphthyl, and trifluoromethylnaphthyl; pyrrolyl, cher, furanyl, oxazolyl, isoxoxazyl, oxaziazyl, imidazolyl, benzozoxazolyl, and benzothiazoyl. Group, benzimidazolyl group, benzofurayl group, indoyl group, etc., heteroaryl group having 412 carbon atoms; methylthio group, ethylthio group, η-propylthio group, iso-propylthio group, n-butylthio group, iso- Butylthio, sec-butylthio, t-butylthio, n-pentylthio, iso-pentylthio, 2-methylbutylthio, 1-methylbutylthio, neo-pentylthio, 1,2-dimethylpropylthio, C1-C20 alkylthio groups such as 1,1-dimethylpropylthio group; Chirufue - thio group, 2-Metokishifue - thio group, 4-t-Puchirufue carbon atoms such as a secondary Lucio group 6 20 Hue - Lucio group; Bulle group, Purobe - group, 1-butene -Butyl group, iso-butenyl group, 1-pentyl group, 2-pentenyl group, 2-methyl-1-buturyl group, 3-methyl-1-butyl group, 2-methyl-2-buturyl group, Aryloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms such as 2,2-dicyanobil group, 2-cyano-2-methylcarboxyl vinyl group, 2-cyano-2-methylsulfonulbule group; aryloxycarbo Alkenyl carboxy groups having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, such as benzyl group and 2-butenoxy carbol group; and 8 to 20 carbon atoms such as benzyloxy carbol group and phenethyloxy carbol group. Ralkoxycarbol group; methoxycarbolmethoxycarbol group, ethoxycarbolmethoxycarbol group, n-propoxycarbolmethoxycarbol group, isopropoxycarbol methoxycarbol C4-C20 alkoxycarboxyalkoxycarbol group such as a group; methyl A C420-C20 alkylcarboxyalkoxycarbol group such as a carboxymethoxycarbyl group and an ethylcarboxymethoxycarbyl group; a hydroxyethylaminocarbol group and a 2-hydroxypropylamino A mono (hydroxyalkyl) aminocarbol group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms such as a carboxyl group and a 3-hydroxypropylpyraminocarbyl group; a di (hydroxyethyl) aminocarbol group, a di (2-hydroxypropyl) group ) C3-C20 di (hydroxyalkyl) aminocarboyl groups such as aminocarboyl group and di (3-hydroxypropyl) aminocarboyl group; methoxymethylaminocarboyl group, methoxylethylamino 3 carbon atoms such as a carboxyl group, an ethoxymethylaminocarboyl group, an ethoxyshetylaminocarboyl group, and a propoxyshetylaminocarboyl group 20 mono (alkoxyalkyl) aminocarboyl groups; di (methoxyethyl) aminocarboyl group, di (ethoxymethyl) aminocarboyl group, di (ethoxyhexyl) aminocarboyl group, di (propoxyshethyl) aminocarboyl group And a di (alkoxyalkyl) aminocarbol group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms such as a group.
式 (XII)で示されるジピロメテン系化合物と一緒にキレート化合物を形成する金属 Mとしては、一般にジベンゾピロメテン系化合物とキレートイ匕合物を形成する能力を 有する金属であれば特に制限されないが、 8、 9、 10族 (VIII族)、 11族 (lb族)、 12 族 (lib族)、 3族 (Ilia族)、 4族 (IVa族)、 5族 (Va族)、 6族 (Via族)、 7族 (Vila族)の 金属が挙げられ、好ましくはニッケル、コバルト、鉄、ルテニウム、ロジウム、パラジウム 、銅、オスミウム、イリジウム、白金、亜鉛などの遷移元素が挙げられる。 [0186] [化 29] The metal M which forms a chelate compound together with the dipyrromethene compound represented by the formula (XII) is not particularly limited as long as it is generally a metal having the ability to form a chelate conjugate with a dibenzopyrromethene compound. , 9, 10 (VIII), 11 (lb), 12 (lib), 3 (Ilia), 4 (IVa), 5 (Va), 6 (Via) ) And Group 7 (Vila group) metals, preferably transition elements such as nickel, cobalt, iron, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, copper, osmium, iridium, platinum and zinc. [0186] [Formula 29]
Figure imgf000062_0001
Figure imgf000062_0001
[0187] 〔式 (XVII)中、 -Τ-は、酸素原子、硫黄原子、又は、—CR1!^-で表される基 (R1, R2は、各々独立に炭素数 1一 4のアルキル基を表し、又は、 R R2は一緒になつて酸 素、硫黄、窒素原子を含んでもよい 3— 6員環を形成することができる。)であり、 Yは 、各々独立に有機基を表し、 Xは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基またはァリ 一ル基を表し、 Rは、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基、アルコキシ基またはァリール基を表し、 kは 1又は 2を表し、 Anm-は、 m価のァ-オンを表し、 mは 1又は 2の整数を表し、 p は、電荷を中性に保つ係数を表す。〕 [In the formula (XVII), -Τ- represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a group represented by —CR 1 ! ^-(R 1 and R 2 each independently have 1 to 4 carbon atoms) Or RR 2 can be taken together to form a 3- to 6-membered ring which may contain an oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atom.) And Y is each independently an organic group X represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group; R represents a halogen atom, a nitro group, an alkoxy group or an aryl group; k represents 1 or 2; Represents an m-valent ion, m represents an integer of 1 or 2, and p represents a coefficient for keeping the charge neutral. ]
[0188] 上記式 (XVII)において、式中、
Figure imgf000062_0002
R2で表される炭素数 1一 4のアルキル基として は、例えば、メチル、ェチル、プロピル、イソプロピル、ブチル、第二ブチル、第三ブ チル、イソブチル等が挙げられる。また、 R1 R2力も形成することのできる 3— 6員環 の酸素、硫黄、窒素原子を含んでもよぐ置換基を有してもよい。置換基を有してもよ い有機基としては、シクロプロパン 1, 1ージィル、シクロブタン 1, 1—ジィル、 2, 4— ジメチルシクロブタン 1, 1ージィル、 3—ジメチルシクロブタン 1, 1ージィル、シクロべ ンタン 1, 1ージィル、シクロへキサン 1, 1ージィル、テトラヒドロピラン 4, 4 ジィル 、チアンー 4, 4ージィル、ピぺリジン 4, 4ージィル、 N 置換ピぺリジン 4, 4 ジィル 、モルホリン—2, 2—ジィル、モルホリン—3, 3—ジィル、 N—置換モルホリン—2, 2—ジ ィル、 N 置換モルホリン 3, 3—ジィル等が挙げられる。 Yで表される有機基としては 特に制限を受けず、例えば、メチル、ェチル、プロピル、イソプロピル、ブチル、第二 ブチル、第三ブチル、イソブチル、ァミル、イソァミル、第三ァミル、へキシル、シクロ へキシル、シクロへキシルメチル、 2—シクロへキシルェチル、ヘプチル、イソへプチル 、第三へプチル、 n—才クチル、イソオタチル、第三ォクチル、 2—ェチルへキシル、ノ -ル、イソノエル、デシル、ドデシル、トリデシル、テトラデシル、ペンタデシル、へキサ デシル、ぺプタデシル、ォクタデシル等の直鎖、分岐鎖状もしくは環状のアルキル基
In the above formula (XVII),
Figure imgf000062_0002
Examples of the alkyl group having 14 carbon atoms represented by R 2 include methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, isobutyl and the like. Further, it may have a substituent which may contain a 3- to 6-membered ring oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atom capable of forming R 1 R 2 force. Examples of the organic group which may have a substituent include cyclopropane 1,1-diyl, cyclobutane 1,1-diyl, 2,4-dimethylcyclobutane 1,1-diyl, 3-dimethylcyclobutane 1,1-diyl, and cyclobutane. 1,1-diyl, cyclohexane 1,1-diyl, tetrahydropyran 4,4-diyl, cyan-4,4-diyl, piperidine 4,4-diyl, N-substituted pyridin-4,4-diyl, morpholine-2,2 —Diyl, morpholine-3,3-diyl, N-substituted morpholine-2,2-diyl, N-substituted morpholine 3,3-diyl and the like. The organic group represented by Y is not particularly limited and includes, for example, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, isobutyl, amyl, isoamyl, tert-amyl, hexyl, and cyclohexyl. Xyl, cyclohexylmethyl, 2-cyclohexylethyl, heptyl, isoheptyl, tertiary heptyl, n-octyl, isootatyl, tertiary octyl, 2-ethylhexyl, nor, isonoel, decyl, dodecyl, Tridecyl, tetradecyl, pentadecyl, hex Linear, branched or cyclic alkyl groups such as decyl, peptadecyl, and octadecyl
、好ましくは C1一 C8のアルキル基:ビュル、 1ーメチルェテュル、 2—メチルェテュル、 プロぺニノレ、ブテニノレ、イソブテニノレ、ペンテ二ノレ、へキセニノレ、ヘプテニノレ、ォクテ -ル、デセ -ル、ペンタデセ -ル、 1 フエ-ルプロペン 3 -ィル等のアルケ-ル基、 フエ-ル、ナフチル、 2 メチルフエ-ル、 3 メチルフエ-ル、 4 メチルフエニル、 4— ビ-ノレフエ二ノレ、 3—イソプロピルフエ-ル、 4 イソプロピルフエ-ル、 4 ブチルフエ- ル、 4 イソブチルフエ-ル、 4—第三ブチルフエ-ル、 4 キシルフエ-ル、 4ーシクロ へキシルフエ-ル、 4ーォクチルフエ-ル、 4— (2—ェチルへキシル)フエ-ル、 4ーステ ァリルフエ-ル、 2, 3—ジメチルフエ-ル、 2, 4—ジメチルフエ-ル、 2, 5—ジメチルフ ェニル、 2, 6—ジメチルフエ-ル、 3, 4—ジメチルフエ-ル、 3, 5—ジメチルフエ-ル、 2 , 4ージ第三ブチルフエ-ル、シクロへキシルフェ-ル等のアルキルァリール基、ベン ジル、フエネチル、 2—フエ-ルプロパン 2—ィル、ジフエ-ルメチル、トリフエ-ルメチ ル、スチリル、シンナミル等のァリールアルキル基など、それがエーテル結合、チォェ 一テル結合で中断されたもの、例えば、 2—メトキシェチル、 3—メトキシプロピル、 4ーメ トキシブチル、 2—ブトキシェチル、メトキシエトキシェチル、メトキシェトキシエトキシェ チル、 3—メトキシブチル、 2—フエノキシェチル、 2—メチルチオェチル、 2 フエニルチ ォェチルが挙げられる。更に、これらの基は、アルコキシ基、ァルケ-ル基、ニトロ基 、シァノ基、ハロゲン原子などで置換されていてもよい。 Xで表されるハロゲン原子とし ては、フッ素、塩素、臭素およびヨウ素原子が挙げられ、アルキル基およびァリール 基としては、 Yの説明で例示したものと同様のものが挙げられる。 Rのハロゲン原子と しては、フッ素、塩素、臭素およびヨウ素原子が挙げられ、アルコキシ基としては、メト キシ基、エトキシ基、 n プロポキシ基、 n ブトキシ基、 iso—ブチルォキ基、 n キシ シルォキシ基、シクロへキシルォキシ基、 n—才クチルォキシ基などの炭素数 1一 8の 直鎖、分岐鎖状または環状アルコキシ基が挙げられ、ァリール基としては、 Yの説明 で例示したものと同様なものが挙げられる。 Anm-で表されるァ-オンとしては、例え ば、一価のものとして、塩素ァ-オン、臭素ァ-オン、ヨウ素ァ-オン、フッ素ァ-オン 等のハロゲンァ-オン;過塩素酸ァ-オン、塩素酸ァ-オン、チォシアン酸ァ-オン, Preferably a C1-C8 alkyl group: butyl, 1-methylethyl, 2-methylethyl, propeninole, buteninole, isobuteninole, penteninole, hexeninole, hepteninole, octeyl, deceyl, pentadeceyl, 1 Alkyl groups such as phenylpropene 3-yl, phenol, naphthyl, 2-methylphenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 4-vinylphenol, 3-isopropylphenol, 4-isopropyl Fe, 4-butyl, 4-isobutyl, 4-tert-butyl, 4-xysyl, 4-cyclohexyl, 4-octyl, 4- (2-ethylhexyl) -4-phenylphenyl, 2,3-dimethylphenyl, 2,4-dimethylphenyl, 2,5-dimethylphenyl, 2,6-dimethylphenyl, 3,4-dimethylphenyl Alkylaryl groups such as 3,5-dimethylphenyl, 2,4-ditert-butylphenyl, cyclohexylphenyl, benzyl, phenethyl, 2-phenylpropane-2-yl, diphenylmethyl Arylalkyl groups such as triphenylmethyl, styryl, cinnamyl, etc., which are interrupted by an ether bond or a thioether bond, for example, 2-methoxyethyl, 3-methoxypropyl, 4-methoxybutyl, 2-methoxybutyl, Butoxyshethyl, methoxyethoxyl, methoxyethoxyethoxyl, 3-methoxybutyl, 2-phenoxyl, 2-methylthioethyl, and 2-phenylthioethyl. Further, these groups may be substituted with an alkoxy group, an alkyl group, a nitro group, a cyano group, a halogen atom, or the like. Examples of the halogen atom represented by X include a fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine atom, and examples of the alkyl group and the aryl group include those similar to those exemplified in the description of Y. Examples of the halogen atom for R include a fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine atom, and examples of the alkoxy group include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, an n-propoxy group, an n-butoxy group, an iso-butyloxy group, and an n-xysiloxy group. A straight-chain, branched or cyclic alkoxy group having 18 carbon atoms, such as a cyclohexyloxy group or an n-octyloxy group, and the aryl group is the same as that exemplified in the description of Y. No. Examples of the anions represented by Anm- include, as monovalent, halogen-ones such as chlorine-one, bromine-one, iodine-one, and fluorine-one; -One, chloric acid, thiocyanate
、六フッ化リンァ-オン、六フッ化アンチモンァ-オン、四フッ化ホウ素ァ-オン等の 無機系ァ-オン、ベンゼンスルホン酸ァ-オン、トルエンスルホン酸ァ-オン、トリフ ルォロメタンスルホン酸ァ-オン等の有機スルホン酸ァ-オン;ォクチルリン酸ァ-ォ ン、ドデシルリン酸ァ-オン、ォクタデシルリン酸ァ-オン、フエ-ルリン酸ァ-オン、ノ, Phosphorus hexafluoride, antimony hexafluoride, boron tetrafluoride, etc. Organic sulfonic acids such as inorganic arnone, benzenesulfonic acid arnone, toluenesulfonic acid arnone, trifluoromethanesulfonic acid arnone; octyl phosphate, dodecyl phosphate, Octadecyl phosphate, ferric phosphate,
-ルフエ-ルリン酸ァ-オン、 2, 2,ーメチレンビス(4, 6—ジ第三ブチルフエ-ル)ホス ホン酸ァ-オン等の有機リン酸系ァ-オン等が挙げられ、二価のものとしては、例え ば、ベンゼンジスルホン酸ァ-オン、ナフタレンジスルホン酸ァ-オン等が挙げられる 。また、金属錯体ィ匕合物であるクェンチヤーァ-オンも必要に応じて使用することが 出来る。 Organic phosphoric acid a-ones such as 2-phenyl-phosphoric acid-one and 2,2-methylenebis (4,6-di-tert-butylphenyl) phosphonate; Examples thereof include benzenedisulfonic acid aone, naphthalenedisulfonic acid aone and the like. Also, quencher-one, which is a metal complex conjugate, can be used if necessary.
[0189] 上記のクェンチヤーァ-オンとしては、特開昭 60— 234892号公報および特開 220 02— 350632号公報に記載されたようなァ-オンが挙げられる。例えば、下記式 (A) 及び (B)で表されるァ-オンが挙げられる。  [0189] Examples of the quenchers described above include those described in JP-A-60-234892 and JP-A-22002-350632. For example, there are the aons represented by the following formulas (A) and (B).
[0190] [化 30]  [0190] [Formula 30]
Figure imgf000064_0001
Figure imgf000064_0001
(B)(B)
Figure imgf000064_0002
Figure imgf000064_0002
[0191] 〔式 (A)及び (B)中、 R3及び R4は各々独立に水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基 、ァリール基、 -SO -Z基 (Zは、ジアルキルアミノ基、ジァリールアミノ基、ピペリジノ基 [In the formulas (A) and (B), R 3 and R 4 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a —SO 2 —Z group (Z is a dialkylamino group, a diarylamino group , Piperidino group
2  2
、モルフオリノ基を表す。)表し、 a及び bは各々 0— 3を表す。 R R6、 R7及び R8は各 々独立にアルキル基、アルキルフヱ -ル基、アルコキシフヱ-ル基またはハロゲン化 フエ二ル基を表し、 Mは、ニッケル又は銅原子を表す Mは、ニッケル又は銅原子を表 す。〕 , A morpholino group. A) and b each represent 0-3. RR 6 , R 7 and R 8 each independently represent an alkyl group, an alkylphenyl group, an alkoxyphenyl group or a halogenated phenyl group, M represents a nickel or copper atom, and M represents a nickel or copper atom. Represents an atom. ]
[0192] 上記式 (A)にお 、て、置換基 R3、 R4のハロゲン原子としては、フッ素、塩素、臭素 およびヨウ素原子が挙げられ、アルキル基およびァリール基としては、上記式 (XVII) の置換基 Yの項で例示したものと同様なものが挙げられる。 In the above formula (A), examples of the halogen atom for the substituents R 3 and R 4 include fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine atoms, and examples of the alkyl group and aryl group include those of the above formula (XVII ) And the same substituents as those exemplified in the section of the substituent Y.
[0193] Ζのアルキル基としては、炭素数 1一 8の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状のアルキル基が 挙げられ、 Ζ基のァリール基としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子で置換され ていても良いフエ-ル基が挙げられ、ジアルキルアミノ基のアルキル基としては、炭素 数 1一 8の直鎖状もしくは分岐鎖状のアルキル基が挙げられる。置換基 R3、 R4として は、電子吸引性基が好ましぐ特に、 2,3,5-トリクロル基、 2,3-ジクロル基、 2,4-ジク ロル基、 2,5-ジクロル基、—SO Zが好ましい。 Z基としては、ジメチルァミノ基、ジェチ [0193] Examples of the alkyl group Ζ include a linear or branched alkyl group having 118 carbon atoms, and examples of the aryl group of Ζ are substituted with a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, or a bromine atom. And the alkyl group of the dialkylamino group may be a linear or branched alkyl group having 118 carbon atoms. As the substituents R 3 and R 4 , an electron-withdrawing group is preferred, and in particular, a 2,3,5-trichloro group, a 2,3-dichloro group, a 2,4-dichloro group, a 2,5-dichloro group , —SO Z is preferred. Z group includes dimethylamino group,
2  2
ルァミノ基、ジ- n-プロピルアミノ基、ジ- n-ブチルァミノ基、ピペリジノ基、モルフォリノ 基が好ましぐ特に、モルフォリノ基が好ましい。  Lamino, di-n-propylamino, di-n-butylamino, piperidino, and morpholino groups are preferred, and morpholino groups are particularly preferred.
[0194] 上記式(B)にお!/、て、 R5、 R6、 R7及び R8のアルキル基、アルキルフエ-ル基のァ ルキル基としては、上記式 (XVII)の置換基 Yの項で例示したものと同様なものが挙 げられる。アルコキシフエ-ル基のアルコキシ基としては、上記式 (XVII)の置換基 R の項で例示したものと同様なものが挙げられ、ハロゲン化フエ-ル基のハロゲンとして は、フッ素、塩素、臭素およびヨウ素原子が挙げられる。 In the above formula (B), the alkyl group of R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 and the alkyl group of the alkylphenol group include the substituent Y of the above formula (XVII) The same ones as those exemplified in the section are mentioned. Examples of the alkoxy group of the alkoxyphenyl group include the same as those exemplified in the section of the substituent R in the above formula (XVII) .Halogen of the halogenated vinyl group includes fluorine, chlorine, and bromine. And iodine atoms.
[0195] 式 (I)一式 (X)のスクァリリウム系化合物および式 (XV)—(XVII)の化合物は、置 換基の種類により吸収波長が異なり、式 (XI)のテトラァザポルフィリン系化合物およ び式 (ΧΠ)のピロメテン系化合物は、置換基の種類と中心金属 Mの組み合わせによ り吸収波長が異なる。  [0195] The squarylium compound of the formula (I) and the formula (X) and the compound of the formula (XV)-(XVII) have different absorption wavelengths depending on the type of the substituent, and the tetraazaporphyrin compound of the formula (XI) The absorption wavelength of the pyrromethene compound of the formula (II) differs depending on the combination of the type of the substituent and the central metal M.
[0196] 530— 610nm付近に透過率の極小値 Kを発現させるための式 (V)のスクァリリウム 系化合物の好ましい例としては、特開 2002— 363434で例示した化合物が挙げられ る力 そのうち特に好ましい具体例を以下に示す。 [0196] Preferable examples of the squarylium-based compound of the formula (V) for expressing the minimum value K of the transmittance around 530 to 610 nm include the compounds exemplified in JP-A-2002-363434. Specific examples are shown below.
CO CO
Figure imgf000066_0001
Figure imgf000066_0001
[0198] [化 32] [0198] [Formula 32]
Figure imgf000067_0001
Figure imgf000067_0001
[0199] 530— 610nm付近に透過率の極小値 Kを発現させるための式 (VI)のスクァリリウ ム系化合物の好ましい例としては、式 (VI)の内、 m=3、 n=0、又は、 m=3、 n=l で Rl=置換基を有していても良いアルキル基である化合物が挙げられる。以下にそ の好ましい具体例を示す。 [0200] [化 33] [0199] Preferable examples of the squarium-based compound of the formula (VI) for expressing a minimum value K of transmittance at around 530-610 nm include, in the formula (VI), m = 3, n = 0, or And m = 3, n = l and Rl = an alkyl group which may have a substituent. The preferred specific examples are shown below. [0200] [Formula 33]
Figure imgf000068_0001
Figure imgf000068_0001
[0201] 530— 610nm付近に透過率の極小値 Kを発現させるための式 (VII)のスクァリリウ ム系化合物の好ましい例としては、式 (VII)の内、 Ζがィミノ基、 Lが水素原子、 R6及 び R7が、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基、又は置換基を有していても良いァリ ール基である化合物が挙げられる。以下にその好ま 、具体例を示す。 [0202] [化 34] [0201] Preferred examples of the squarium-based compound of the formula (VII) for expressing a minimum value of transmittance K around 530-610 nm include, in the formula (VII), Ζ represents an imino group and L represents a hydrogen atom. And R 6 and R 7 are compounds in which an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent. Preferred examples are shown below. [0202] [Formula 34]
Figure imgf000069_0001
Figure imgf000069_0001
03] 530— 610nm付近に透過率の極小値 Kを発現させるための式 (vin)のスクァリリ ゥム系化合物としては、式 (vm)の内、 =アルキル基、 -W— X— R2において、 Wは 、イミノ基、 Xは、カルボ-ル基またはスルホ-ル基、 R2は、置換基を有していても良 V、アルキル基、置換基を有して 、ても良 、ァルケ-ル基または置換基を有して!/ヽても 良いァリール基、 i= 2又は 3、 m=0又は 1、 n=0又は 1で、 Zが酸素原子、 Lが水素 原子、 R6及び R7力 置換基を有していても良いアルキル基または置換基を有してい ても良いァリール基の場合力、 R1 =アルコキシ基、 i=0、 m= 3、 n=0で、 Zがィミノ 基、 Lが水素原子、 R6及び R7が、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基、又は置換 基を有して 、ても良 、ァリール基の場合が好ま 、。以下にその好ま U、具体例を示 す。 03] 530— As a squarium-based compound of formula (vin) for expressing a minimum value of transmittance K around 610 nm, in formula (vm), = alkyl group, -W— X—R 2 , W , An imino group, X is a carboxy group or a sulfol group, and R 2 is a group which may have a substituent V, an alkyl group, or a group which has a substituent. Or a substituted aryl group; i = 2 or 3, m = 0 or 1, n = 0 or 1, Z is an oxygen atom, L is a hydrogen atom, R 6 and R 7 Force In the case of an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent, force, R 1 = alkoxy group, i = 0, m = 3, n = 0, and Z is imino The group, L is a hydrogen atom, and R 6 and R 7 may have an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or may have a substituent, and are preferably aryl groups. The preferred examples are shown below.
[0204] [化 35] [0204] [Formula 35]
〔環一 1) (Circle 1)
W-2) W-2)
-3)  -3)
:環— 4) : Ring-4)
〔11—5)(11-5)
Figure imgf000071_0001
Figure imgf000071_0001
[0205] 530— 610nm付近に透過率の極小値 Kを発現させるための式 (IX)のスクァリリウ ム系化合物としては、式 (IX)の内、 R1は、水素原子、アルキル基またはァリール基、 R7は、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子または、ァリール基、 sは、 0— 2のィ匕 合物が好ましレヽ。以下にその好ましレヽ具体例を示す。
Figure imgf000072_0001
[0205] As a squarium-based compound of the formula (IX) for expressing a minimum value K of transmittance at around 530-610 nm, in the formula (IX), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group. R 7 is an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom or an aryl group, and s is preferably a 0-2 conjugate. The following are specific examples of the preferred levels.
Figure imgf000072_0001
[9S^ ] [9020][9S ^] [9020]
608CT0/l700Zdf/X3d oz 990 SOOZ OAV [0207] [化 37] 608CT0 / l700Zdf / X3d oz 990 SOOZ OAV [0207] [Formula 37]
Figure imgf000073_0001
Figure imgf000073_0001
[0208] 530— 610nm付近に透過率の極小値 Κを持たせる為の式 (X)のスクァリリウム系 化合物としては、式 (X)の内、 R1 =水素原子、アルキル基またはァリール基、 R2は、 アルキル基またはァリール基、 s = 2または 3の化合物が好ましい。以下にその好まし い具体例を示す。 [0208] As a squarylium-based compound of the formula (X) for giving a minimum value of transmittance 付 近 around 530-610 nm, in formula (X), R 1 = hydrogen atom, alkyl group or aryl group, R 2 is Alkyl or aryl groups, s = 2 or 3 compounds are preferred. Preferred examples are shown below.
[0209] [化 38] [0209] [Formula 38]
Figure imgf000074_0001
Figure imgf000074_0001
Figure imgf000074_0002
Figure imgf000074_0002
(X - 5) (X-6)
Figure imgf000074_0003
(X-5) (X-6)
Figure imgf000074_0003
[0210] 530— 6 lOnm付近に透過率の極小値 Kを持たせる為の式 (XI)のテトラァザポル フィリン系化合物としては、式 (XI)の内、 R1— R8の少なくとも 4個の基がアルキル基、 残りが水素原子、金属原子 Mが VO、 Cu、 Ni、 Coの化合物、又は、 R1と R2、 R3と R4 [0210] As the tetraazaporphyrin compound of the formula (XI) for giving a minimum value of transmittance K around 530—6 lOnm, at least four groups of R 1 to R 8 in the formula (XI) Is an alkyl group, the rest is a hydrogen atom, a metal atom M is a compound of VO, Cu, Ni, Co, or R 1 and R 2 , R 3 and R 4
、 R。と R6、 R7と R8が各々連結して、— (CH ) 一、— (CH ) 一、— (CH )一等の脂肪族 , R. And R 6 , R 7 and R 8 are connected to form an aliphatic group such as — (CH 2) 1, — (CH 2) 1, — (CH 2)
2 3 2 4 2 5 炭素環を形成し、金属原子 Mが VO、 Cu、 Ni、 Coである化合物が好ましい。以下 その好ま 、具体例を示す。 2 3 2 4 2 5 Compounds which form a carbocycle and in which the metal atom M is VO, Cu, Ni, Co are preferred. Preferred examples are shown below.
[化 39][Formula 39]
Figure imgf000075_0001
Figure imgf000075_0001
Figure imgf000075_0002
Figure imgf000075_0002
Figure imgf000075_0003
[0212] [化 40]
Figure imgf000075_0003
[0212] [Formula 40]
Figure imgf000076_0001
Figure imgf000076_0001
(XI— 7) (XI— 8)  (XI-7) (XI-8)
Figure imgf000076_0002
Figure imgf000076_0002
(XI— 9) (XI-10)  (XI—9) (XI-10)
( n :
Figure imgf000076_0003
(n:
Figure imgf000076_0003
(XI - 11) (XI- 12)  (XI-11) (XI-12)
[0213] 530— 610nm付近に透過率の極小値 Kを発現させるための式 (ΧΠ)のピロメテン 系化合物のうち、好ましい具体例としては、特開平 10— 226172の表— 1 (1)の 2— 8 一 2— 10、表— 1 (2)の 2— 18、 2— 20、表— 1 (11)の 11— 1—11—10、表— 1 (4)の 4— 1—4—13、表— 1 (5)の 4— 14一 4— 15、表— 1 (7)の 4— 47、 4—48、 4— 51等のィ匕合 物などが挙げられる。 [0214] 530— 600nm付近に透過率の極小値を持たせる為の式 (XVII)のシァニン系ィ匕 合物の内、好ましい具体例を、化学式と共に、以下の表 2に挙げる。 [0213] Among the pyrromethene-based compounds of the formula (II) for expressing the minimum value K of the transmittance around 530-610 nm, preferred specific examples are listed in Table 1 (1) of JP-A-10-226172. — 8 1 2—10, Table 1 (2) 2—18, 2—20, Table 1 (11) 11—1—11—10, Table 1 (4) 4—1—4— 13, Table 1 (5), 4-14 to 4-15, Table 1 (7), 4-47, 4-48, 4-51 and the like. [0214] Among the cyanine-based conjugates of the formula (XVII) for giving a minimum value of the transmittance around 530 to 600 nm, preferred specific examples together with the chemical formulas are shown in Table 2 below.
[0215] [化 41] [0215] [Formula 41]
Figure imgf000077_0001
Figure imgf000077_0001
[0216] [表 2] [0216] [Table 2]
Figure imgf000077_0003
Figure imgf000077_0003
[0217] 表 2中、 * 1の A-1は、式 (A)の内、下記の構造を示す。 [0217] In Table 2, A-1 of * 1 represents the following structure in formula (A).
[0218] [化 42] [0218] [Formula 42]
Figure imgf000077_0002
[0219] 表 2中、 * 2の A-2は、式 (A)の内、下記の構造を示す。 [0220] [化 43]
Figure imgf000077_0002
[0219] In Table 2, A-2 of * 2 represents the following structure in formula (A). [0220] [Formula 43]
Figure imgf000078_0001
Figure imgf000078_0001
[0221] 尚、本発明のフィルタに使用する 530— 610nmの波長域に最大吸収を有する前 記式 (V)— (XII)、(XVII)、(I)一(III)等の化合物としては、ディスプレイの発光を 阻害しない様に透過率曲線はシャープなバレー型 (谷型)を有しているほうが良ぐそ の透過率曲線の半値幅は、 60nm以下であることが好ましい。 [0221] Compounds of the formulas (V)-(XII), (XVII), (I)-(III) and the like having the maximum absorption in the wavelength range of 530-610 nm used in the filter of the present invention include: The transmittance curve preferably has a sharp valley shape (valley shape) so as not to hinder the light emission of the display, and the half width of the transmittance curve is preferably 60 nm or less.
[0222] 第 1発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、前述したスクァリリウム系化合物及び Z 又はテトラァザポルフィリン系化合物及び Z又はシァニン系化合物を単独または混 合物としてノ インダ榭脂に含有させることにより、得ることが出来る。具体的には、 (1) シート状またはフィルム状の透明基材上に、前述したスクァリリウム系化合物及び Z 又はテトラァザポルフィリン系化合物及び Z又はシァニン系化合物を含有するバイン ダー榭脂から成るフィルムを積層する方法、又は、(2)前述したスクァリリウム系化合 物及び Z又はテトラァザポルフィリン系化合物及び Z又はシァニン系化合物を含有 するバインダー榭脂から成る単層シートまたはフィルムを形成する方法で得ることが 出来る。  [0222] The electronic display filter of the first invention is characterized in that the above-mentioned squarylium-based compound and Z or tetraazaporphyrin-based compound and Z or cyanine-based compound are contained alone or as a mixture in a binder resin. Can be obtained. Specifically, (1) a film made of a binder resin containing the above-described squarylium-based compound and Z or tetraazaporphyrin-based compound and Z or cyanine-based compound on a sheet-like or film-like transparent base material. Or (2) a method of forming a single-layer sheet or film composed of a binder resin containing a squarylium-based compound and a Z or tetraazaporphyrin compound and a Z or a cyanine-based compound as described above. I can do it.
[0223] 積層する方法においては、例えば、複数のスクァリリウム系化合物及び Z又はテト ラァザポルフィリン系化合物及び Z又はシァニン系化合物をそれぞれ別のバインダ ー榭脂に混入し、前記化合物を含有する各バインダー榭脂から成る複数のシートま たはフィルムを積層して、得られた個々の化合物が別々に存在する層から成る積層 体をシート状またはフィルム状の透明基材上に積層する方法が挙げられる。  In the method of laminating, for example, a plurality of squarylium-based compounds and Z or tetrazaporphyrin-based compounds and Z or cyanine-based compounds are mixed in separate binder resins, respectively, and each binder containing the compounds is mixed. A method comprising laminating a plurality of sheets or films made of a resin and laminating a laminate comprising layers in which the obtained individual compounds are present separately on a sheet-shaped or film-shaped transparent substrate. .
[0224] 第 1発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、反射防止、近赤外線吸収、電磁波吸収 など、フィルタとして必要な機能を含む構成とすることが出来る。  [0224] The filter for an electronic display of the first invention can be configured to include functions necessary for a filter, such as antireflection, near-infrared absorption, and electromagnetic wave absorption.
[0225] 第 1発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、電子ディスプレイ発光の輝度を大きく低 下させないために、視感透過率が通常 10%以上、好ましくは 20%以上、より好ましく は 30%以上、更に好ましくは 40%以上である。視感透過率は、 JIS Z8105— 1982 に記述された、物体を透過する光束 φ tと物体に入射する光束 φ iとの比、 φ ί/ φ ί であり、人の視覚系の明るさ感覚に対する相対分光応答度 (分光視感効率)を考慮し た上での、 380— 780nmの波長域における透過率の平均で、これは物体の相対的 な明暗を示す明度とおおむね相関するため、視感透過率をフィルタの明るさ Z暗さ の指標としている。 [0225] The electronic display filter of the first invention has a luminous transmittance of usually 10% or more, preferably 20% or more, more preferably 30% or more, in order not to greatly reduce the luminance of the electronic display light emission. Preferably it is at least 40%. Luminous transmittance is JIS Z8105-1982 Is the ratio of the luminous flux φ t passing through an object to the luminous flux φ i incident on the object, φ ί / φ 、, and the relative spectral responsivity of the human visual system to the sense of brightness (spectral luminous efficiency ), The average of the transmittance in the wavelength range of 380 to 780 nm, which roughly correlates with the relative brightness of the object. It is used as an indicator of
[0226] なお、本発明では以下の方法で視感透過率を算出した。 [0226] In the present invention, the luminous transmittance was calculated by the following method.
<視感透過率(定 ¾[IS Z8105— 1982) >  <Luminous transmittance (constant ¾ [IS Z8105—1982)>
分光光度計 (島津製作所社製「UV3100PC」(商品名))により測定したフィルタの 透過スペクトルを使用し、 XYZ表色系の三刺激値の Yを計算し、?見感透過率とした。 計算方法は、 JIS Z8722— 2000による。  Using the transmission spectrum of the filter measured by a spectrophotometer (“UV3100PC” (trade name) manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation), calculate the Y value of the tristimulus value of the XYZ color system and calculate? The luminous transmittance was determined. The calculation method is based on JIS Z8722-2000.
なお、本計算では電子ディスプレイの発光スペクトルとして、分光放射輝度計 (ミノ ルタ社製「CS— 1000」(商品名))で測定したプラズマディスプレイ (日立製作所社製 「W32— PD2100」(商品名))の発光スペクトルを使用した。  In this calculation, a plasma display (H32 “W32-PD2100” (trade name)) was measured as the emission spectrum of the electronic display with a spectral radiance meter (“CS-1000” (trade name) manufactured by Minolta). ) Was used.
[0227] また、この発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの耐光性をより上げるために、紫外線 吸収層を設けることが出来る。紫外線吸収層としては、特に制限されるものではなぐ 公知の紫外線吸収層を使用することが出来る。紫外線吸収層の透過率としては、光 線波長 380nm以下で 5%未満であることが好ましい。  [0227] In order to further improve the light resistance of the electronic display filter of the present invention, an ultraviolet absorbing layer can be provided. As the ultraviolet absorbing layer, a known ultraviolet absorbing layer which is not particularly limited can be used. The transmittance of the ultraviolet absorbing layer is preferably less than 5% at a light wavelength of 380 nm or less.
[0228] さらに、第 1発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、近赤外線カット層、電磁波カット 層を設けることが出来る。近赤外線カット層は、プラズマディスプレイカゝら放射される 近赤外線によるリモコンや伝送系光通信における誤動作を防止する目的でディスプ レイの前面に設置する。電磁波カット層は、金属酸ィ匕物などの蒸着またはスパッタリ ング法、又は、銅箔ゃ銅メツキ層のエッチングによるメッシュ等が利用でき、電子ディ スプレイから放射される電磁波をカットする。近赤外線カット層および電磁波カット層 としては、特に制限されるものではなぐ公知の近赤外線カット層および電磁波カット 層を使用することが出来る。  Further, the filter for an electronic display of the first invention can be provided with a near-infrared cut layer and an electromagnetic wave cut layer. The near-infrared cut layer is placed on the front of the display to prevent malfunctions in remote control and transmission optical communication due to near-infrared radiation emitted from the plasma display. The electromagnetic wave cut layer can use a vapor deposition or sputtering method of metal oxide, a mesh formed by etching a copper foil / a copper plating layer, or the like, and cuts an electromagnetic wave radiated from an electronic display. As the near-infrared cut layer and the electromagnetic wave cut layer, a well-known near-infrared cut layer and an electromagnetic wave cut layer which are not particularly limited can be used.
[0229] また、この発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの明暗コントラストをより向上させるた めに、反射防止層及び Z又はぎらつき防止層を設けることが出来る。反射防止層お よびぎらつき防止層としては、特に制限されるものではなぐ公知の反射防止層およ びぎらつき防止層を使用することが出来る。 [0229] In order to further improve the light-dark contrast of the electronic display filter of the present invention, an antireflection layer and a Z or anti-glare layer can be provided. The anti-reflection layer and the anti-glare layer are not particularly limited, and may be any of known anti-reflection layers and anti-glare layers. An anti-glitter layer can be used.
[0230] この電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、単独層でも、または透明ガラス、透明榭脂板な どと貼り合わせた積層体としても使用することが出来る。また、電子ディスプレイ表示 面へ直接貼付される部材、透明ガラス、透明榭脂板などと貼り合わせた積層体として 設置される部材など複数の部材の特性を組み合わせることでこの発明を実施するこ とちでさる。  [0230] This filter for electronic display can be used as a single layer or as a laminate bonded to a transparent glass, a transparent resin plate or the like. Further, the present invention can be implemented by combining the characteristics of a plurality of members such as a member directly attached to a display surface of an electronic display, a member installed as a laminate bonded to a transparent glass, a transparent resin plate, or the like. Monkey
[0231] 第 1発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、発光表示装置に適用して電子ディスプ レイ装置を得ることが出来る。電子ディスプレイ用フィルタが適用される電子ディスプ レイまたはプラズマディスプレイパネル表示装置としては、公知の表示装置あるいは 市販品であれば特に限定なく使用することが出来る。  [0231] The electronic display filter of the first invention can be applied to a light-emitting display device to obtain an electronic display device. As an electronic display or a plasma display panel display device to which the filter for an electronic display is applied, a known display device or a commercially available product can be used without particular limitation.
[0232] 次に、第 2— 5発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタについて説明する。先ず、第 2— 5 発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの共通する透過特性について説明する。  Next, the filter for an electronic display according to the second to fifth inventions will be described. First, the common transmission characteristics of the electronic display filter according to the second to fifth inventions will be described.
[0233] 第 2— 5発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、(a)発光表示デバイスの緑色発光ピ ークの波長の光線透過率 Y4 (%)より、 3波長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの 波長の光線透過率 Y2 (%)が 5以上低い、又は、(b)発光表示デバイスの白色発光 スペクトルを使用した場合の視感透過率 Y1 (%)より、 3波長域発光形蛍光管の緑色 発光ピークの波長の光線透過率 Y3 (%)力 以上低い透過特性を有する。  [0233] The electronic display filter according to the second to fifth aspects of the present invention is characterized in that (a) the light transmittance Y4 (%) of the wavelength of the green light emission peak of the light emitting display device, The light transmittance Y2 (%) of the wavelength of 5 or more is lower, or (b) The luminous transmittance Y1 (%) when using the white light emission spectrum of the light emitting display device Green Light transmittance at the wavelength of the emission peak Y3 (%) Force Low transmission characteristics.
[0234] 《電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ全体の光学特性》  [0234] 《Optical characteristics of entire electronic display filter》
第 2— 5発明が対象とする電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、外光抑制層、近赤外線 吸収層、電磁波シールド層などの、フィルタとして必要な機能を含む構成を有してい る。そして、設置対象とする発光表示デバイスの緑色発光ピークの波長 (プラズマデ イスプレイパネルの場合 525nmである場合が多いが、蛍光体の種類などによって異 なる)の光線透過率 Y4 (%)に対して 3波長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波 長の光線透過率 Y2 (%)が通常 5以上、好ましくは 7以上、より好ましくは 10以上低い 、又は、発光表示デバイスの白色発光スペクトルを使用した視感透過率 Y1 (%)に対 して、 3波長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光ピーク波長(通常は 545nm)の光線透過率 Y2 (%)が通常 1以上、好ましくは 3以上、より好ましくは 5以上低い。  The electronic display filter targeted by the second to fifth inventions has a configuration including functions necessary for a filter, such as an external light suppressing layer, a near-infrared absorbing layer, and an electromagnetic wave shielding layer. The light transmittance Y4 (%) of the wavelength of the green emission peak of the light-emitting display device to be installed (the wavelength is often 525 nm in the case of a plasma display panel, but varies depending on the type of phosphor, etc.) is 3%. The light transmittance Y2 (%) of the wavelength of the green emission peak of the wavelength-band emission type fluorescent tube is usually 5 or more, preferably 7 or more, more preferably 10 or more, or the white emission spectrum of the light-emitting display device was used. The light transmittance Y2 (%) at the green emission peak wavelength (usually 545 nm) of the three-band fluorescent tube is usually 1 or more, preferably 3 or more, and more preferably the luminous transmittance Y1 (%). Is 5 or more lower.
[0235] さらに、 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F10の発光スペクトル (JIS Z8719— 1996)を使用 した視感透過率 Y3 ' (%)は、前記視感透過率 Y1 (%)に対して通常 1以上、好ましく は 3以上、よりに好ましくは 5以上低いことが好適である。視感透過率 Y3' (%)が 1以 上低いと、明暗コントラスト向上の効果がより多く得られる。 [0235] Furthermore, the emission spectrum (JIS Z8719—1996) of the three-band fluorescent lamp F10 is used. The luminous transmittance Y3 ′ (%) obtained is preferably 1 or more, preferably 3 or more, more preferably 5 or more lower than the luminous transmittance Y1 (%). When the luminous transmittance Y3 '(%) is 1 or more lower, the effect of improving the light-dark contrast is more obtained.
[0236] 但し、発光表示デバイスの輝度を大きく低下させな 、ために、視感透過率 Y1 (%) は、通常 10以上、好ましくは 20以上、より好ましくは 30以上であることが好適である。 視感透過率は、 JIS Z8105— 1982〖こ記述された、物体を透過する光束 φ tと物体 に入射する光束 φ iとの比: ΐ/ iであり、人の視覚系の明るさ感覚に対する相対 分光応答度 (分光視感効率)を考慮した上での、 380— 780nmの波長域における透 過率の平均値である。そして、?見感透過率は、物体の相対的な明暗を示す明度とお おむね相関するため、視感透過率をフィルタの明るさ Z暗さの指標としている。 [0236] However, in order not to significantly reduce the luminance of the light emitting display device, the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) is usually 10 or more, preferably 20 or more, and more preferably 30 or more. . The luminous transmittance is the ratio of the luminous flux φt passing through an object to the luminous flux φi incident on an object, described in JIS Z8105—1982, which is ΐ / i, which is equivalent to the brightness perception of the human visual system. This is the average value of the transmittance in the wavelength range of 380 to 780 nm, taking into account the relative spectral response (spectral luminous efficiency). And? Since the luminous transmittance is roughly correlated with the lightness indicating the relative brightness of the object, the luminous transmittance is used as an index of the brightness Z darkness of the filter.
[0237] 視感透過率 Y3 (%)が、視感透過率 Y1 (%)に対して 1%未満低!ヽ場合、従来使用 されて!/、る NDフィルタ(ニュートラル'デンシティフィルタ:可視光域での透過率が一 様なフィルタで、光量を落とす目的で使用される)、又は、 NDフィルタに類するフィル タと同等の効果し力得られない。  [0237] If the luminous transmittance Y3 (%) is lower than the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) by less than 1%! ヽ, a conventionally used ND filter (neutral density filter: visible light) The filter has the same transmittance in the range, and is used for the purpose of reducing the amount of light), or the same effect as a ND filter cannot be obtained.
[0238] 第 2— 5発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、単独はもちろん透明のガラスや他の 透明榭脂板などと貼り合わせた積層体として使用することができる。また、発光表示 デバイス表示面へ直接貼付される部材、透明ガラスや他の透明榭脂板などと貼り合 わせた積層体として設置される部材など、複数の部材の特性を組み合わせることで、 第 2— 5発明を実施することも出来る。  The filter for an electronic display according to the 2nd-5th invention can be used alone or as a laminate bonded to a transparent glass or another transparent resin plate. Also, by combining the characteristics of multiple members, such as members directly attached to the display surface of a light-emitting display device and members installed as a laminate bonded to transparent glass or another transparent resin plate, etc. — 5 inventions can be implemented.
[0239] 第 2— 5発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、発光表示装置に適用して電子ディス プレイ装置を得ることが出来る。電子ディスプレイ用フィルタが適用される電子ディス プレイまたはプラズマディスプレイパネル表示装置としては、公知の表示装置ある ヽ は市販品であれば特に限定なく使用することが出来る。  The electronic display filter according to the second to fifth inventions can be applied to a light-emitting display device to obtain an electronic display device. As the electronic display or plasma display panel display device to which the filter for electronic display is applied, a known display device can be used without particular limitation as long as it is a commercially available product.
[0240] 上述の条件を満たす電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの具体的な構成にっ 、て更に説 明する。  [0240] The specific configuration of the filter for an electronic display satisfying the above conditions will be further described.
[0241] 外光源として 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F10、発光表示デバイスとしてプラズマデイス プレイパネルと 、う組み合わせを考慮すると、外光抑制層の極小透過率が 530nmよ りも短波長側にある場合は、この波長域には外光成分が少ないため外光カットの効 果が低ぐまた、波長 525nm近傍にはプラズマディスプレイパネルの緑色の発光ピ ークがあり、この緑色発光を妨害 (緑色を吸収)してしまうためコントラスト向上の効果 が低くなり好ましくない。また、極小透過率が 610nmよりも長波長側である場合は、 ディスプレイパネルの赤色の発光を大きく妨害 (赤色を吸収)してしまうため好ましくな い。したがって、この外光源と発光表示デバイスの組み合わせにおいては、 3波長域 発光形蛍光灯 F10の緑色発光を良く吸収し、プラズマディスプレイパネルの緑色発 光を良く通過する様に外光抑制層の吸収ピークを設計することとなる。 [0241] Considering the combination of a three-band fluorescent lamp F10 as an external light source and a plasma display panel as a light-emitting display device, when the minimum transmittance of the external light suppressing layer is on the shorter wavelength side than 530 nm, Is less effective in this wavelength range because there is little outside light component. In addition, there is a green light emission peak of the plasma display panel near the wavelength of 525 nm, which interferes with the green light emission (absorbs green), which is not preferable because the effect of improving the contrast is reduced. On the other hand, if the minimum transmittance is on the long wavelength side of 610 nm, red light emission of the display panel is greatly obstructed (red light is absorbed), which is not preferable. Therefore, in this combination of the external light source and the light emitting display device, the absorption peak of the external light suppressing layer is set so that the green light emitted from the fluorescent light source F10 in the three wavelength region is well absorbed and the green light emitted from the plasma display panel is well transmitted. Will be designed.
[0242] また、 530— 610nmの波長域に極小値 Kを有する外光抑制層の透過スペクトル 16 はシャープ (急峻)なバレー型 (谷型)を有する方が、ディスプレイパネルの発光輝度 確保のため好ましい。なお、プラズマディスプレイパネルは波長 595nm近傍に強い 発光があるため、 530— 610nmの部分をカットするとこの波長域のプラズマディスプ レイパネルの発光も弱まり明暗コントラストが低下するものの、この 595nmの発光は セルに封入された Neガスの発光によるものであり、本来不要な成分である。そのため 、 530— 6 lOnmの波長域の発光成分をカットする様に設計することは好ましい。  [0242] In addition, the transmission spectrum 16 of the external light suppressing layer having the minimum value K in the wavelength range of 530 to 610 nm has a sharp valley shape so that the emission luminance of the display panel is ensured. preferable. Since the plasma display panel emits strong light near the wavelength of 595 nm, cutting the 530 to 610 nm area weakens the light emission of the plasma display panel in this wavelength range and lowers the contrast, but this 595 nm light is encapsulated in the cell. This is due to the emission of Ne gas, which is an unnecessary component. Therefore, it is preferable to design so as to cut a light emitting component in a wavelength range of 530-6 lOnm.
[0243] 具体的には、 530— 610nmの波長域に最大吸収を有する化合物であって、通常 下記式 (XVIII)で表されるジフ ニルスクァリリウム系化合物、下記式 (XI)で表され るテトラァザポルフィリン系化合物、下記式 (Π)で表されるフエ-ルビラゾリル系スクァ リリウム系化合物及び Z又は下記式 (XIX)で表されるピロメテン系化合物の少なくと も 1つの化合物を使用して形成した光学機能フィルムである。特に、下般式 (XVIII) で表されるジフ ニルスクァリリウム系化合物及び Z又は下記式 (XI)で表されるテト ラァザポルフィリン系化合物を使用して形成した光学機能フィルムが好適である。  [0243] Specifically, a compound having a maximum absorption in a wavelength range of 530 to 610 nm, usually a diphenylsquarylium-based compound represented by the following formula (XVIII), and a compound represented by the following formula (XI) Using at least one of a tetraazaporphyrin-based compound, a ferbilazolyl-based squarylium-based compound represented by the following formula (Π) and Z or a pyromethene-based compound represented by the following formula (XIX) It is an optically functional film formed. In particular, an optical functional film formed using a diphenylsquarylium-based compound represented by the following general formula (XVIII) and Z or a tetrazaporphyrin-based compound represented by the following formula (XI) is preferable.
[0244] [化 44]  [0244] [Formula 44]
(XVIII)
Figure imgf000082_0001
(XVIII)
Figure imgf000082_0001
[0245] 〔式 (XVIII)中、 R1は、置換基を有して!/ヽてもよ 、アルキル基、置換基を有して!/、て もよいアルコキシ基、置換基を有していても良いァリール基、置換基を有していてもよ ぃァリオールォキシ基またはハロゲン原子を示す。ここで、隣接する R1が一緒になつ て、アルカンジィル基やアルキレンジォキシ基を形成していても良い。〕 [In the formula (XVIII), R 1 may have a substituent! /, May have an alkyl group, may have a substituent! /, May have an alkoxy group, may have a substituent, May have an aryl group or a substituent. Indicates a aryloxy group or a halogen atom. Here, adjacent R 1 may be taken together to form an alkanediyl group or an alkylenedioxy group. ]
[0246] 式 (XVIII)にお!/、て、 R2は、水素原子または 1価の置換基を示し、 G1は、 NR—で In the formula (XVIII), R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and G 1 represents NR—
3 表される基 (ここで、 R3は、水素原子またはアルキル基を示す。)または酸素原子を示 し、 G2は、カルボ-ル基またはスルホ -ル基を示す(ここで、 G2がスルホル-基の場 合には、 R2は水素原子ではない。 ) o m、 n及び pは 0以上の整数であり、 m+n+pは 5以下である。 3 represents a group (here, R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group) or an oxygen atom, and G 2 represents a carboxy group or a sulfol group (here, G 2 When is a sulfol-group, R 2 is not a hydrogen atom.) Om, n and p are integers of 0 or more, and m + n + p is 5 or less.
[0247] なお、ベンゼン環上のこれらの置換基は、他方のベンゼン環との間で互いに異なつ ていてもよぐまた、一方のベンゼン環において、 m及び nが 2以上であるとき、 R1及び G1— G2— R2で表される基は、同一環内の他の置換基との間で互いに異なっていても よい。 [0247] These substituents on the benzene ring may be different from each other on the other benzene ring, and when m and n are 2 or more in one benzene ring, R The groups represented by 1 and G 1 —G 2 —R 2 may be different from each other with other substituents in the same ring.
[0248] [化 45]  [0248] [Formula 45]
Figure imgf000083_0001
Figure imgf000083_0001
[0249] 〔式 (XI)中、 R1— R8は、各々独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基、シァノ基 、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基、置換基を有してい ても良いシクロアルキル基、置換基を有していても良いアルコキシ基、置換基を有し ていても良いァリール基、置換基を有していても良いァリールォキシ基、置換基を有 して 、ても良 、アルキルアミノ基、置換基を有して!/、ても良 、ジアルキルアミノ基、置 換基を有して 、ても良 、アルキルチオ基または置換基を有して 、ても良!、ァリール チォ基を表し、 R1と R2、 R3と R4、 R5と R6、 R7と R8は各々連結して非芳香環を形成して も良ぐ Mは、 2個の水素原子、 2価の金属原子、 3価の 1置換金属原子、 4価の 2置 換金属原子またはォキシ金属原子を表わす。〕 [0250] [化 46] [In the formula (XI), R 1 to R 8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, or an alkyl group which may have a substituent. A cycloalkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an aryloxy group which may have a substituent, Having a substituent, an alkylamino group, having a substituent! /, Having a substituent, a dialkylamino group, or having a substituent, having an alkylthio group or a substituent. Represents an arylthio group, R 1 and R 2 , R 3 and R 4 , R 5 and R 6 , R 7 and R 8 are each connected to form a non-aromatic ring M represents two hydrogen atoms, divalent metal atoms, trivalent monosubstituted metal atoms, tetravalent disubstituted metal atoms or oxymetal atoms. . ] [0250] [Formula 46]
Figure imgf000084_0001
Figure imgf000084_0001
[0251] 〔式 (Π)中、 R1は、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基または置換基を有していて もよ 、アルコキシ基を示し、置換基 Aは水酸基または W— X— R2 (Wはイミノ基を示し、 Xはカルボ-ル基またはスルホ -ル基を示し、 R2は水素原子、置換基を有していても よいアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよいァルケ-ル基、置換基を有していてもよ V、ァリール基または置換基を有して 、てもよ 、複素環基を示し、 mは 0又は 1を示し、 R6及び R7は、置換基を有して 、てもよ 、アルキル基または置換基を有して 、てもよ ぃァリール基を示し、 Zは酸素原子を示す。)を示す。〕 [In the formula (Π), R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, and the substituent A is a hydroxyl group or W—X — R 2 (W represents an imino group, X represents a carboxyl group or a sulfol group, and R 2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, R 6 and R 6 may be a heterocyclic group, m may represent 0 or 1, and may have a aryl group or a substituent, and may have a aryl group or a substituent. 7 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, and Z represents an oxygen atom.). ]
[0252] [化 47]  [0252] [Formula 47]
Figure imgf000084_0002
Figure imgf000084_0002
[0253] 〔式 (XIX)中、 R1— R4、 R7— RUは各々独立に水素原子、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基、 シァノ基、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、カルボキシル基、スルホン酸基、炭素数 1一 20のァ ルキル基、炭素数 1一 20のハロゲノアルキル基、炭素数 1一 20のアルコキシ基、炭 素数 2— 20のァルケ-ル基、炭素数 2— 20のアルコキシアルキル基、炭素数 2— 20 のアルコキシアルコキシ基、炭素数 6— 20のァリールォキシ基、炭素数 1一 20のァシ ル基、炭素数 2— 20のアルコキシカルボ-ル基、炭素数 2— 20のアルキルアミノカル ボ-ル基、炭素数 3— 20のジアルキルアミノカルボ-ル基、炭素数 2— 20のアルキ ルカルボ-ルァミノ基、炭素数 7— 20のフヱ-ルカルポ-ルァミノ基、炭素数 7— 20 のフエ-ルァミノカルボ-ル基、炭素数 7— 20のフエノキシカルボ-ル基、炭素数 7— 20のァラルキル基、炭素数 6— 20のァリール基、炭素数 4一 20のへテロァリール基、 炭素数 1一 20のアルキルチオ基、炭素数 6— 20のフ 二ルチオ基、炭素数 3— 20の ァルケ-ルォキシカルボ-ル基、炭素数 8— 20のァラルキルォキシカルボ-ル基、 炭素数 4一 20のアルコキシカルボ-ルアルコキシカルボ-ル基、炭素数 4一 20のァ ルキルカルボ-ルアルコキシカルボ-ル基、炭素数 2— 20のモノ(ヒドロキシアルキル )ァミノカルボ-ル基、炭素数 3— 20のジ(ヒドロキシアルキル)ァミノカルボ-ル基、炭 素数 3— 20のモノ(アルコキシアルキル)ァミノカルボ-ル基または炭素数 5— 20のジ (アルコキシアルキル)ァミノカルボ-ル基を表し、 R2と R3及び Z又は R10と R11は、それ ぞれ互いに結合してピロール環に縮合する芳香環を形成してもよぐ又これらによつ て形成される縮合芳香環は、それぞれ同一であっても異なるものであってもよぐ式( V) : [In the formula (XIX), R 1 —R 4 and R 7 —R U each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, An alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a halogenoalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkoxyalkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, C2-C20 alkoxyalkoxy, C6-C20 aryloxy, C1-C20 Alkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, alkoxyamino group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, alkylaminocarbon group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, dialkylaminocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, alkyl carboxyl having 2 to 20 carbon atoms -Lumino group, C7-C20 phenol carboxyl group, C7-C20 phenylaminocarbon group, C7-C20 phenoxycarbol group, C7-C20 aralkyl group C6-20 aryl groups, C4-20 heteroaryl groups, C1-20 alkylthio groups, C6-20 fluorothio groups, C3-20 alkoxy carboxy- Alkenyl carboxy group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, alkaryl carboxy group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, alkaryl carboxy group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms , C2-C20 mono (hydroxyalkyl) aminocarbon A di (hydroxyalkyl) aminocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, a mono (alkoxyalkyl) aminocarbon group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms or a di (alkoxyalkyl) aminocarbon group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms. And R 2 and R 3 and Z or R 10 and R 11 may be bonded to each other to form an aromatic ring fused to a pyrrole ring, or a fused aromatic ring formed by these. Can be the same or different, respectively (V):
[0254] [化 48]  [0254] [Formula 48]
Figure imgf000085_0001
Figure imgf000085_0001
[0255] 〔式 (ΧΙΠ)中、 R8— R11は、前記と同意義を表わし、 Mは遷移金属を表わす。〕 [In the formula (ΧΙΠ), R 8 to R 11 have the same meanings as described above, and M represents a transition metal. ]
[0256] このような化合物を使用した外光抑制用フィルムは、上記化合物を個別に、又は、 混合した状態でバインダー榭脂に含有せしめ、周知の方法でフィルムやシート状に 形成することにより得られる。 [0256] A film for suppressing external light using such a compound is obtained by incorporating the above compounds individually or in a mixed state into a binder resin and forming the film or sheet by a known method. Can be
[0257] 次に、第 2発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタについて、説明する。第 2発明に係る 電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、(a)発光表示デバイスの緑色発光ピークの波長の光 線透過率 Y4 (%)より、 3波長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過 率 Y2 (%)が 5以上低い、又は、(b)発光表示デバイスの白色発光スペクトルを使用 した場合の視感透過率 Y1 (%)より、 3波長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波 長の光線透過率 Y3 (%)が 1以上低い透過特性を有すると共に、 Next, the electronic display filter of the second invention will be described. The electronic display filter according to the second invention is characterized in that (a) the light transmittance of the green light emission peak wavelength of the three-wavelength emission fluorescent tube is obtained from the light transmittance Y4 (%) of the light emission display device at the green light emission peak wavelength. Rate Y2 (%) is 5 or more lower, or (b) from the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) when using the white emission spectrum of the light-emitting display device, the wave of the green emission peak of the three-band emission fluorescent tube Long light transmittance Y3 (%) has transmission characteristics lower by 1 or more,
(A)電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの発光表示デバイス側表面に入射光の特定波長 成分の透過を抑制する外光抑制層と電子ディスプレイ装置からの電磁波放射を抑制 するための電磁波シールド層とが、電磁波シールド層が外光抑制層よりも発光表示 デバイス側になる様に配置されて 、る。  (A) An external light suppression layer that suppresses transmission of a specific wavelength component of incident light on the light-emitting display device side surface of an electronic display filter and an electromagnetic wave shield layer that suppresses electromagnetic wave radiation from the electronic display device are formed by an electromagnetic wave shield. The layer is arranged so that the layer is closer to the light emitting display device than the external light suppressing layer.
[0258] 上述の条件を満たす電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの具体的な構成にっ 、て更に説 明する。図 4は発光表示デバイスの一例としてのプラズマディスプレイパネルの発光 スペクトル 14と、外光源の一例としての 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F10の発光スペクトル 15及び上述の条件を満たすフィルタの透過スペクトル 16の例を示す図であり、図 5 は、図 4に示すプラズマディスプレイパネルの発光スペクトル 14と、 3波長域発光形 蛍光灯 F 10の発光スペクトル 15が、透過スペクトル 16を有するフィルタを透過した後 の発光スペクトル 14'及び 15'を示す。プラズマディスプレイ発光に比較して外光が 大きく減少していることが分かる。なお、上述の様に外光抑制層を 2回通過したものが 実際に観察されるため、図 5における外光の発光スペクトル 15'はフィルタを 2回透過 させたものを示している。  [0258] The specific configuration of the electronic display filter satisfying the above conditions will be further described. Figure 4 shows an example of the emission spectrum 14 of a plasma display panel as an example of a light-emitting display device, the emission spectrum 15 of a three-band fluorescent lamp F10 as an example of an external light source, and the transmission spectrum 16 of a filter satisfying the above conditions. FIG. 5 shows the emission spectrum 14 of the plasma display panel shown in FIG. 4 and the emission spectrum 15 of the three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10 after passing through a filter having a transmission spectrum 16. The spectra 14 'and 15' are shown. It can be seen that the external light is greatly reduced compared to the plasma display emission. Note that, as described above, the light that has passed through the external light suppressing layer twice is actually observed, and therefore, the emission spectrum 15 ′ of the external light in FIG. 5 shows the light transmitted through the filter twice.
[0259] 上述したような光学特性を有する電子ディスプレイ用フィルタにおいて、外光抑制 層の機能を十分生力 た明暗コントラストの向上効果を発現させるため、本実施形態 に係る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、他の部材よりも反射率の高 、電磁波シールド 層を、ディスプレイ装置に入射する外光が外光抑制層に到達するまでの光路中に設 けるかわりに、外光抑制層よりも発光表示デバイス側に配置する。これにより、電磁波 シールド層の表面で反射する外光による明暗コントラストの低下を抑制し、ひいては 外光抑制層の機能を十分活用することが出来る。  [0259] In the electronic display filter having the above-described optical characteristics, the filter for the electronic display according to the present embodiment is different from the filter for the electronic display according to the present embodiment in order to exhibit the effect of improving the contrast between light and dark, which has a sufficient function of the external light suppressing layer. Instead of providing the electromagnetic wave shielding layer in the optical path until external light incident on the display device reaches the external light suppressing layer, the electromagnetic wave shielding layer has a higher reflectivity than that of the member described above, but is located closer to the light emitting display device side than the external light suppressing layer. Deploy. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in contrast between light and dark due to external light reflected on the surface of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer, and thus to fully utilize the function of the external light suppressing layer.
[0260] 図 3は、本実施形態に係る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを適用したディスプレイ装置 の一例としてのプラズマディスプレイ装置の、光学部材の配置例を示す図である。図 3において、プラズマディスプレイ装置は、例えば、 3波長域発光型蛍光灯である外 光源 20が存在する側 (最外面側)から、外光導入層 1、ガラス板 3、近赤外線吸収層 7、外光抑制層 11、電磁シールド層 4及びプラズマディスプレイパネル 12を有する。 プラズマディスプレイパネル 12を除く各部材は図示しな ヽ粘着剤層によって貼り合わ され、電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ 100を構成している。なお、図 3において、フィルタ 100とプラズマディスプレイパネル 12とは所定の空間をおいて配置されている力 こ の空間を透明榭脂シートや粘着剤層などによって埋めても良い。 FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of optical members in a plasma display device as an example of a display device to which the filter for an electronic display according to the present embodiment is applied. In FIG. 3, the plasma display device includes, for example, an external light introducing layer 1, a glass plate 3, and a near-infrared absorbing layer from the side where the external light source 20, which is a three-wavelength emission fluorescent lamp, is present (outermost surface). 7, an external light suppressing layer 11, an electromagnetic shield layer 4, and a plasma display panel 12. The members other than the plasma display panel 12 are bonded together by an adhesive layer (not shown) to form an electronic display filter 100. In FIG. 3, the filter 100 and the plasma display panel 12 are arranged with a predetermined space therebetween. The space may be filled with a transparent resin sheet or an adhesive layer.
[0261] 電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ 100の構成について更に説明する。ガラス板 3は、例え ば、強化ガラスカゝらなり、主にディスプレイ装置の外観を整えるとともに、フィルタ 100 の基材としても機能する。  [0261] The configuration of the electronic display filter 100 will be further described. The glass plate 3 is made of, for example, tempered glass, and mainly serves to improve the appearance of the display device and also functions as a base material of the filter 100.
[0262] 第 2発明の実施形態において、ガラス板 3の一面には、外光導入層 1が設けられる 。外光導入層 1は、フィルタに入射した外光を反射、散乱することなく透過させる層で あることが好ましい。具体的には、 JIS Z8105— 1982による視感透過率が 90%以上 であることが好ましぐ 95%以上であることが特に好ましい。  In the embodiment of the second invention, an external light introducing layer 1 is provided on one surface of the glass plate 3. The external light introducing layer 1 is preferably a layer that transmits external light incident on the filter without reflecting or scattering the same. Specifically, the luminous transmittance according to JIS Z8105-1982 is preferably 90% or more, more preferably 95% or more.
[0263] このような外光導入層 1は、例えば、視感透過率の高い材質を透明バインダー榭脂 に分散もしくは混合させてフィルム状やシート状に形成したり、透明基板に塗膜として 形成したり、蒸着などによって透明基板上に直接設けたり、基板上にフィルム状のも のを貼り付けたりする等、様々な方法によって形成することができる。ただし、外光導 入層の厚みは人間の目が最も敏感に感じる 550nmの 1Z4波長である 137. 5nm程 度とするのが好ましいため、このような薄膜を生成可能な方法によって形成することが 好ましい。  [0263] Such an external light introducing layer 1 is formed into a film or sheet by dispersing or mixing a material having a high luminous transmittance in a transparent binder resin, or is formed as a coating film on a transparent substrate. It can be formed by various methods, for example, directly on a transparent substrate by vapor deposition or the like, or by sticking a film-like object on the substrate. However, since the thickness of the external light guiding layer is preferably about 137.5 nm, which is the 1Z4 wavelength of 550 nm at which the human eye is most sensitive, it is preferable to form such a thin film by a method capable of forming such a thin film. .
[0264] また、外光導入層 1は、隣接する層(ここではガラス板 3)よりも屈折率が低い必要が あり、その差が好ましくは 0. 06以上、さら〖こ好ましくは 0. 10以上である。視感透過率 および上述の条件を満たせば、外光導入層の材質、組成に特に制限はない。  [0264] The external light introducing layer 1 needs to have a lower refractive index than the adjacent layer (here, the glass plate 3), and the difference is preferably 0.06 or more, more preferably 0.10 or more. That is all. The material and composition of the external light introducing layer are not particularly limited as long as the luminous transmittance and the above conditions are satisfied.
[0265] ガラス板 3のもう一方の面には、近赤外線吸収層 7が設けられる。近赤外線吸収層 7 は、例えば、 PETシート等の透明基材の一面または両面に近赤外線吸収機能を有 するフィルムが貼り付けられた構成を有し、プラズマディスプレイパネル 12から放出さ れる近赤外線をカットする。  [0265] On the other surface of the glass plate 3, a near-infrared absorbing layer 7 is provided. The near-infrared absorbing layer 7 has a structure in which a film having a near-infrared absorbing function is attached to one or both sides of a transparent base material such as a PET sheet, and absorbs near-infrared emitted from the plasma display panel 12. Cut it.
[0266] 近赤外線吸収層 7の内面側に図示しな ヽ粘着剤層を介して上述した光学特性を有 する外光抑制層 11が設けられる。外光抑制層 11は、外光源 20の特定波長域の光 線を吸収することで、外光が後述する電磁波シールド層 4やディスプレイパネル 12に 到達すること、及び、電磁波シールド層 4やディスプレイパネル 12で反射や散乱され ることによる戻り光がディスプレイ装置外へ戻ることの両方を抑制し、外光による明暗 コントラストの悪ィ匕を抑制する。 [0266] An external light suppressing layer 11 having the above-described optical characteristics is provided on the inner surface side of the near-infrared absorbing layer 7 via an adhesive layer (not shown). The external light suppressing layer 11 is a layer of light of a specific wavelength range of the external light source 20. By absorbing the radiation, external light reaches the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 and the display panel 12, which will be described later, and return light due to reflection and scattering from the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 and the display panel 12 goes out of the display device. It suppresses both returning and suppresses the contrast of light and dark by external light.
[0267] 外光抑制層 11は、例えば、 PETからなる透明シート上に上述の透過特性を有する 外光抑制機能フィルムを貼り付けた構成を有する。また、外光抑制層 11は、上述した 530— 6 lOnmの波長域に最大吸収を有する化合物を含有する。  [0267] The external light suppressing layer 11 has a configuration in which, for example, an external light suppressing functional film having the above-described transmission characteristics is attached on a transparent sheet made of PET. Further, the external light suppressing layer 11 contains the above-described compound having the maximum absorption in the wavelength range of 530-6 lOnm.
[0268] 外光抑制層 11には、さらに図示しない粘着剤層を介して電磁波シールド層 4が設 けられる。電磁波シールド層 4は、例えば、 PETシート等の基材上に金属薄膜を設け 、この金属薄膜をケミカルエッチング等の方法によってパターユングし、導電性のメッ シュを形成したものや、基材上にスパッタリング等によって導電薄膜を形成したもので あり、図示しないアースに接続されて、プラズマディスプレイパネル 12から放出される 電磁波をシールドしている。なお、電磁波シールド層をメッシュ状の導電性材料によ り形成する場合、導電性材料がある部分と無い部分とによって生じる凹凸を、 UV硬 化性榭脂などで覆うことによって平滑ィ匕しても良い。この場合、電磁波シールド層 4の 基材と平滑ィ匕材料との屈折率の差が小さいことが好ましい。また、導電性メッシュの 表面を周知の方法で黒化処理し、メッシュによる反射をさらに抑制してもよい。なお、 図 3に示した以外の、色調補正層などが電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ 100に含まれて いても良い。  [0268] The external light suppressing layer 11 is further provided with an electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 via an adhesive layer (not shown). The electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is formed, for example, by providing a metal thin film on a base material such as a PET sheet, and patterning the metal thin film by a method such as chemical etching to form a conductive mesh or on a base material. The conductive thin film is formed by sputtering or the like, and is connected to a ground (not shown) to shield electromagnetic waves emitted from the plasma display panel 12. When the electromagnetic wave shielding layer is formed of a mesh-shaped conductive material, unevenness caused by a portion where the conductive material exists and a portion where the conductive material does not exist is covered with a UV-curable resin or the like to smooth the surface. Is also good. In this case, it is preferable that the difference in the refractive index between the base material of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 and the smoothing material is small. In addition, the surface of the conductive mesh may be blackened by a known method to further suppress the reflection by the mesh. Note that a color tone correction layer other than that shown in FIG. 3 may be included in the filter 100 for an electronic display.
[0269] 各層は、加圧加熱処理により粘着剤層を透明化することによって貼り合わされ、フィ ルタ 100を形成する。図 6に示す様に、フィルタ 100とディスプレイパネル 12とを粘着 剤層 13を介して貼り合わせても良 ヽ)。  [0269] The respective layers are bonded together by making the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer transparent by a heat treatment under pressure to form a filter 100. As shown in FIG. 6, the filter 100 and the display panel 12 may be bonded together via the adhesive layer 13).
[0270] 図 3においては、近赤外吸収層 7、外光抑制層 11、電磁波シールド層 4の順に構 成したが、電磁波シールド層 4と外光抑制層 11との順序が維持されていれば、外光 導入層 1以外の層の配置は任意である。  [0270] In Fig. 3, the near-infrared absorbing layer 7, the external light suppressing layer 11, and the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 are configured in this order, but the order of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 and the external light suppressing layer 11 is maintained. For example, the arrangement of layers other than the external light introducing layer 1 is arbitrary.
[0271] このような構成を使用することで、外光源力 外光抑制層に至る光路中における、 電磁波シールド層による外光の反射、散乱が抑制されるので、外光による明暗コント ラストの低下を抑制できる。また、従来電磁波シールド層で反射、散乱されていた外 光が外光抑制層 11に到達することになるため、外光抑制層の機能が効率よく利用で き、更なるコントラスト向上が実現できる。また、ディスプレイ装置内部で反射、散乱さ れた外光の戻り光が減少するため、未使用時のフィルタの色づきがさらに観察されに くくなる。 [0271] By using such a configuration, reflection and scattering of external light by the electromagnetic wave shielding layer in the optical path to the external light suppressing layer in the external light source force are suppressed, so that the contrast of light and dark caused by external light is reduced. Can be suppressed. In addition, outside that has been reflected and scattered by the electromagnetic wave shielding layer in the past Since the light reaches the external light suppressing layer 11, the function of the external light suppressing layer can be used efficiently, and the contrast can be further improved. In addition, since the return light of the external light reflected and scattered inside the display device is reduced, the coloring of the filter when not in use is further hardly observed.
[0272] 次に、第 3発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタについて、説明する。第 3発明に係る 電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、(a)発光表示デバイスの緑色発光ピークの波長の光 線透過率 Y4 (%)より、 3波長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過 率 Y2 (%)が 5以上低い、又は、(b)発光表示デバイスの白色発光スペクトルを使用 した場合の視感透過率 Y1 (%)より、 3波長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波 長の光線透過率 Y3 (%)が 1以上低い透過特性を有すると共に、  Next, the electronic display filter of the third invention will be described. The electronic display filter according to the third aspect of the present invention is characterized in that (a) the light transmittance of the green emission peak wavelength of the three-wavelength emission fluorescent tube is obtained from the light transmittance Y4 (%) of the green emission peak wavelength of the light emitting display device. Rate Y2 (%) is 5 or more lower, or (b) from the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) when using the white emission spectrum of the light-emitting display device, the wave of the green emission peak of the three-band emission fluorescent tube Long light transmittance Y3 (%) has transmission characteristics lower by 1 or more,
(B)電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの最外面に視感透過率 90%以上の外光導入層が 配置されている。  (B) An external light introducing layer having a luminous transmittance of 90% or more is disposed on the outermost surface of the filter for an electronic display.
[0273] 上述の条件を満たす電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの具体的な構成について、以下に 説明する。図 8は発光表示デバイスの一例としてのプラズマディスプレイパネルの発 光スペクトル 14と、外光源の一例としての 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F10の発光スぺタト ル 15及び上述の条件を満たす外光抑制層の透過スペクトル 16の例を示す図であり 、図 9は、図 8に示すプラズマディスプレイパネルの発光スペクトル 14と、 3波長域発 光形蛍光灯 F10の発光スペクトル 15が、透過スペクトル 16を有する外光抑制層を透 過した後の発光スペクトル 14'及び 15'を示す。プラズマディスプレイ発光に比較し て外光が大きく減少していることが分かる。但し、外光については、上述の様に外光 抑制層を 2回通過したものが実際に観察されるため、図 9における外光の発光スぺク トル 15'は外光抑制層を 2回透過させたものを示している。  [0273] A specific configuration of an electronic display filter satisfying the above conditions will be described below. Figure 8 shows the emission spectrum 14 of a plasma display panel as an example of a light-emitting display device, the emission spectrum 15 of a three-band fluorescent lamp F10 as an example of an external light source, and suppression of external light that meets the above conditions. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a transmission spectrum 16 of the layer. FIG. 9 shows an emission spectrum 14 of the plasma display panel shown in FIG. 8 and an emission spectrum 15 of the three-band fluorescent lamp F10 having a transmission spectrum 16. The emission spectra 14 ′ and 15 ′ after transmission through the external light suppression layer are shown. It can be seen that the external light is greatly reduced compared to the plasma display emission. However, as described above, since the external light that has passed through the external light suppressing layer twice is actually observed, the emission spectrum 15 ′ of the external light in FIG. It shows what has been transmitted.
[0274] 上述したような全体特性を有する本発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタにお 、て、 外光抑制層の機能を十分生力した明暗コントラストの向上効果と、未使用時のフィル タの色づき抑制を両立させるための実施形態について以下に説明する。  In the electronic display filter of the present invention having the overall characteristics as described above, the effect of improving the contrast between light and dark by sufficiently utilizing the function of the external light suppressing layer and the suppression of coloring of the filter when not in use are provided. An embodiment for satisfying both will be described below.
[0275] 電子ディスプレイ用フィルタに入射した外光が外光抑制層へできるだけ多く伝達す る様にするための一実施形態として、電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの最外層に外光導 入層を設ける構成について説明する。 [0276] <外光導入層の構成 > [0275] As an embodiment for transmitting as much external light as possible to the filter for electronic display to the external light suppressing layer, a configuration in which an external light guiding layer is provided as the outermost layer of the filter for electronic display will be described. I do. [0276] <Configuration of External Light Introducing Layer>
第 3発明の実施形態に係る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタにお ヽて使用する、入射し た外光を外光抑制層へできるだけ多く導くような層(外光導入層)としては、入射した 外光を反射、散乱することなく透過させる層であることが好ましい。具体的には、本実 施形態に係る外光導入層は、 JIS Z8105— 1982による視感透過率が通常 90%以 上、好ましくは 95%以上である。  As a layer (external light introduction layer) for guiding the incident external light to the external light suppressing layer as much as possible, which is used in the filter for an electronic display according to the embodiment of the third invention, the incident external light is used. The layer is preferably a layer that transmits light without being reflected or scattered. Specifically, the external light introducing layer according to the present embodiment has a luminous transmittance according to JIS Z8105-1982 of usually 90% or more, preferably 95% or more.
[0277] このような外光導入層は、例えば、視感透過率の高い材質を透明バインダー榭脂 に分散もしくは混合させてフィルム状やシート状に形成したり、透明基板に塗膜として 形成したり、蒸着などによって透明基板上に直接設けたり、基板上にフィルム状のも のを貼り付けたりする等、様々な方法によって形成することが出来る。ただし、外光導 入層の厚みは人間の目が最も敏感に感じる 550nmの 1Z4波長である 137. 5nm程 度とするのが好ましいため、このような薄膜を生成可能な方法によって形成することが 好ましい。  [0277] Such an external light introducing layer is formed, for example, by dispersing or mixing a material having a high luminous transmittance in a transparent binder resin to form a film or sheet, or by forming a coating on a transparent substrate. It can be formed by various methods such as, for example, by directly providing on a transparent substrate by vapor deposition, or by attaching a film-like object on the substrate. However, since the thickness of the external light guiding layer is preferably about 137.5 nm, which is the 1Z4 wavelength of 550 nm at which the human eye is most sensitive, it is preferable to form such a thin film by a method capable of forming such a thin film. .
[0278] フィルタに入射する外光をできるだけ内部に導入することが望ましいため、外光導 入層はフィルタの最外面に設けることが必要である。また、外光導入層は、隣接する 層(外光導入層の基材を含む)よりも屈折率が低い必要があり、その差が好ましくは 0 . 06以上、より好ましくは 0. 10以上である。視感透過率および上述の条件を満たせ ば、外光導入層の材質、組成に特に制限はない。  [0278] Since it is desirable to introduce external light entering the filter as much as possible inside, it is necessary to provide an external light guiding layer on the outermost surface of the filter. Further, the external light introducing layer needs to have a lower refractive index than the adjacent layer (including the substrate of the external light introducing layer), and the difference is preferably at least 0.06, more preferably at least 0.10. is there. The material and composition of the external light introducing layer are not particularly limited as long as the luminous transmittance and the above-mentioned conditions are satisfied.
[0279] 図 7は、本実施形態に係る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを適用したディスプレイ装置 の一例としてのプラズマディスプレイ装置の、光学部材の配置例を示す図である。  FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of optical members in a plasma display device as an example of a display device to which the filter for an electronic display according to the present embodiment is applied.
[0280] 図 7にお 、て、プラズマディスプレイ装置は、例えば、 3波長域発光型蛍光灯などの 外光源 20が存在する側 (最外面側)から、外光導入層 1、ガラス板 3、電磁波シール ド層 4、近赤外線吸収層 7、外光抑制層 11及びプラズマディスプレイパネル 12を有 する。プラズマディスプレイパネル 12を除く各部材は図示しな 、接着層によって接着 され、電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ 100を構成している。図 7において、フィルタ 100と プラズマディスプレイパネル 12とは所定の空間をお!/、て配置されて!、る。  In FIG. 7, for example, the plasma display device is arranged such that the external light introducing layer 1, the glass plate 3, and the external light source 20, such as a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp, are located from the side (outermost surface side). It has an electromagnetic shield layer 4, a near-infrared absorbing layer 7, an external light suppressing layer 11, and a plasma display panel 12. The members other than the plasma display panel 12 are adhered by an adhesive layer, not shown, to constitute an electronic display filter 100. In FIG. 7, the filter 100 and the plasma display panel 12 are arranged in a predetermined space!
[0281] 電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ 100の構成について更に説明する。ガラス板 3は、例え ば、強化ガラスカゝらなり、主にディスプレイ装置の外観を整えるとともに、フィルタ 100 の基材としても機能する。電磁波シールド層 4は、例えば、 PETシート等の基材上に 金属薄膜を設け、この金属薄膜をエッチングする等の方法によって導電性のメッシュ を形成したものや、基材上にスパッタリング等によって導電薄膜を形成したものであり 、図示しないアースに接続されて、プラズマディスプレイパネル 12から放出される電 磁波をシールドしている。 [0281] The configuration of the electronic display filter 100 will be further described. The glass plate 3 is made of, for example, tempered glass, and mainly adjusts the appearance of the display device, and also includes a filter 100. Also functions as a base material. The electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is, for example, a metal thin film provided on a base material such as a PET sheet and a conductive mesh formed by etching the metal thin film, or a conductive thin film formed on the base material by sputtering or the like. It is connected to a ground (not shown) and shields electromagnetic waves emitted from the plasma display panel 12.
[0282] 電磁波シールド層 4には、図示しない粘着剤層を介して近赤外線吸収層 7が設けら れる。近赤外線吸収層 7は、例えば、 PETシート等の透明基材の一面または両面に 近赤外線吸収機能を有するフィルムが貼り付けられた構成を有し、プラズマディスプ レイパネル 12から放出される近赤外線をカットする。外光抑制層 11は、上述した透 過特性を有し、外光源 20の特定波長域の光線を吸収することで、外光がディスプレ ィパネル 12に到達すること、及び、到達した光がディスプレイ装置外へ戻ることの両 方を抑制し、外光による明暗コントラストの悪ィ匕を抑制する。外光抑制層 11は、近赤 外線吸収層 7と同様、例えば、 PETからなる透明シート上に上述の透過特性を有す る外光抑制機能フィルムを貼り付けた構成を有する。また、外光抑制層 11は、上述し た 530nm— 610nmの波長域に最大吸収を有する化合物を含有する。なお、図 7に 示した以外の、色調補正層などが電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ 100に含まれて ヽても 良い。 [0282] The electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is provided with a near-infrared absorbing layer 7 via an adhesive layer (not shown). The near-infrared absorbing layer 7 has a structure in which a film having a near-infrared absorbing function is attached to one or both sides of a transparent base material such as a PET sheet, and cuts near infrared emitted from the plasma display panel 12. I do. The external light suppressing layer 11 has the above-described transmission characteristics, and absorbs light of a specific wavelength range of the external light source 20 so that the external light reaches the display panel 12 and the arrived light is transmitted to the display device. It suppresses both returning to the outside and suppresses the contrast of light and dark contrast caused by external light. The external light suppressing layer 11, like the near infrared absorbing layer 7, has a configuration in which an external light suppressing functional film having the above-described transmission characteristics is attached to a transparent sheet made of PET, for example. Further, the external light suppressing layer 11 contains the above-described compound having the maximum absorption in the wavelength range of 530 nm to 610 nm. Note that a color tone correction layer other than that shown in FIG. 7 may be included in the electronic display filter 100.
[0283] この様に、本実施形態の構成によれば、電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの最外面に、 視感透過率が 90%以上の外光導入層を設けることにより、ディスプレイ装置に入射 した外光のうち、外光抑制層に到達する割合が増加し、外光抑制層がフィルタの最 外面力 離れた位置に設けられていても、その性能を十分生かすことが可能になり、 明暗コントラストが向上する。また、外光抑制層に使用する色素の量を増力かしなくても 十分な明暗コントラストが得られるため、未使用時のフィルタの色づきが観察されにく くなる。さらに、外光抑制層が無い場合には電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの最外面(図 7の構成ではガラス 3の表面)で反射されていた外光が反射されにくくなるため、さら に明暗コントラストを向上することが可能になる。  [0283] As described above, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, by providing an external light introduction layer having a luminous transmittance of 90% or more on the outermost surface of the filter for an electronic display, external light incident on the display device is provided. Of these, the ratio of reaching the external light suppression layer increases, and even if the external light suppression layer is provided at a position apart from the outermost surface of the filter, its performance can be fully utilized and the contrast between light and dark is improved. I do. Further, since a sufficient contrast between light and dark can be obtained without increasing the amount of the dye used in the external light suppressing layer, the coloring of the filter when it is not used is hard to be observed. Furthermore, when there is no external light suppressing layer, external light reflected on the outermost surface of the electronic display filter (the surface of the glass 3 in the configuration of FIG. 7) is hardly reflected, so that the contrast is further improved. It becomes possible.
[0284] 次に、第 4発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタについて、説明する。第 4発明に係る 電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、(a)発光表示デバイスの緑色発光ピークの波長の光 線透過率 Y4 (%)より、 3波長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過 率 Υ2 (%)が 5以上低い、又は、(b)発光表示デバイスの白色発光スペクトルを使用 した場合の視感透過率 Y1 (%)より、 3波長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波 長の光線透過率 Y3 (%)が 1以上低い透過特性を有すると共に、 Next, the electronic display filter of the fourth invention will be described. The filter for an electronic display according to the fourth invention comprises: (a) light having a wavelength of a green emission peak of the light emitting display device; Light transmittance Υ2 (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the three-band fluorescent tube is 5 or more lower than the linear transmittance Y4 (%), or (b) The white emission spectrum of the light-emitting display device was used. The light transmittance Y3 (%) of the wavelength of the green emission peak of the three-band fluorescent tube has a transmission characteristic lower by 1 or more than the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) of the case,
(C)電子ディスプレイ用フィルタがヘイズ値 1. 5%以下の透明基材で構成されて ヽ る。  (C) The filter for an electronic display is composed of a transparent base material having a haze value of 1.5% or less.
[0285] 上述の条件を満たす電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの具体的な構成にっ 、て更に説 明する。図 8は発光表示デバイスの一例としてのプラズマディスプレイパネルの発光 スペクトル 14と、外光源の一例としての 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F10の発光スペクトル 15及び上述の条件を満たす外光抑制層の透過スペクトル 16の例を示す図であり、 図 9は、図 8に示すプラズマディスプレイパネルの発光スペクトル 14と、 3波長域発光 形蛍光灯 F 10の発光スぺクトル 15力 透過スペクトル 16を有する外光抑制層を透過 した後の発光スペクトル 14'及び 15'を示す。プラズマディスプレイ発光に比較して 外光が大きく減少していることが分かる。但し、外光については、上述の様に外光抑 制層を 2回通過したものが実際に観察されるため、図 9における外光の発光スぺタト ル 15 'は外光抑制層を 2回透過させたものを示して 、る。  [0285] The specific configuration of the electronic display filter satisfying the above conditions will be further described. Figure 8 shows the emission spectrum 14 of a plasma display panel as an example of a light-emitting display device, the emission spectrum 15 of a three-band fluorescent lamp F10 as an example of an external light source, and the transmission spectrum of an external light suppression layer satisfying the above conditions. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the light emission spectrum of the plasma display panel shown in FIG. 8, and FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the external light suppression having the light emission spectrum 15 and the transmission spectrum 16 of the three-band fluorescent lamp F10. Emission spectra 14 ′ and 15 ′ after transmission through the layer are shown. It can be seen that the external light is greatly reduced as compared with the plasma display emission. However, since external light that actually passed through the external light suppression layer twice was actually observed as described above, the external light emission portal 15 ′ in FIG. Show what has been transmitted once.
[0286] 上述したような全体特性を有する本発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタにお 、て、 外光抑制層の機能を十分生力した明暗コントラストの向上効果と、未使用時のフィル タの色づき抑制を両立させるための実施形態について以下に説明する。  [0286] In the filter for an electronic display of the present invention having the overall characteristics as described above, the effect of improving the contrast between light and dark, which fully utilizes the function of the external light suppressing layer, and the suppression of coloring of the filter when not in use. An embodiment for satisfying both will be described below.
[0287] 第 4発明の実施形態は、電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを構成する機能層や基材、特 に基材に特定の光学特性を有する部材を使用することにより、フィルタ内部で散乱す る光による明暗コントラストの低下を抑制し、ひいては外光抑制層の機能を十分活用 するものである。  [0287] The embodiment of the fourth invention uses a member having specific optical characteristics for a functional layer or a base material constituting a filter for an electronic display, and in particular, by using a member having specific optical characteristics for the base material, thereby reducing the light scattered inside the filter. The purpose of this method is to suppress the decrease in the contrast of light and dark, and to make full use of the function of the external light suppressing layer.
[0288] 図 7は、本実施形態に係る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを適用したディスプレイ装置 の一例としてのプラズマディスプレイ装置の、光学部材の配置例を示す図である。  [0288] Fig. 7 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of optical members in a plasma display device as an example of a display device to which the filter for an electronic display according to the present embodiment is applied.
[0289] 図 7にお 、て、プラズマディスプレイ装置は、例えば、 3波長域発光型蛍光灯などの 外光源 20が存在する側 (最外面側)から、外光導入層 1、ガラス板 3、電磁波シール ド層 4、近赤外線吸収層 7、外光抑制層 11及びプラズマディスプレイパネル 12を有 する。プラズマディスプレイパネル 12を除く各部材は図示しな 、接着層によって接着 され、電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ 100を構成している。図 7において、フィルタ 100と プラズマディスプレイパネル 12とは所定の空間をお!/、て配置されて!、る。 In FIG. 7, for example, the plasma display device is arranged such that the external light introduction layer 1, the glass plate 3, the external light source 20, such as a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp, are located from the side where the external light source 20 exists (the outermost surface side). It has an electromagnetic shield layer 4, near-infrared absorption layer 7, outside light suppression layer 11, and plasma display panel 12. To do. The members other than the plasma display panel 12 are adhered by an adhesive layer, not shown, to constitute an electronic display filter 100. In FIG. 7, the filter 100 and the plasma display panel 12 are arranged in a predetermined space!
[0290] 電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ 100の構成について更に説明する。ガラス板 3は、例え ば、強化ガラスカゝらなり、主にディスプレイ装置の外観を整えるとともに、フィルタ 100 の基材としても機能する。電磁波シールド層 4は、例えば、 PETシート等の基材上に 金属薄膜を設け、この金属薄膜をエッチングする等の方法によって導電性のメッシュ を形成したものや、基材上にスパッタリング等によって導電薄膜を形成したものであり 、図示しないアースに接続されて、プラズマディスプレイパネル 12から放出される電 磁波をシールドしている。  [0290] The configuration of the electronic display filter 100 will be further described. The glass plate 3 is made of, for example, tempered glass, and mainly serves to improve the appearance of the display device and also functions as a base material of the filter 100. The electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is, for example, a metal thin film provided on a base material such as a PET sheet and a conductive mesh formed by etching the metal thin film, or a conductive thin film formed on the base material by sputtering or the like. It is connected to a ground (not shown) and shields electromagnetic waves emitted from the plasma display panel 12.
[0291] 電磁波シールド層 4には、図示しな ヽ粘着剤層を介して近赤外線吸収層 7が設けら れる。近赤外線吸収層 7は、例えば、 PETシート等の透明基材の一面または両面に 近赤外線吸収機能を有するフィルムが貼り付けられた構成を有し、プラズマディスプ レイパネル 12から放出される近赤外線をカットする。外光抑制層 11は、上述した透 過特性を有し、外光源 20の特定波長域の光線を吸収することで、外光がディスプレ ィパネル 12に到達すること、及び、到達した光がディスプレイ装置外へ戻ることの両 方を抑制し、外光による明暗コントラストの悪ィ匕を抑制する。外光抑制層 11は、近赤 外線吸収層 7と同様、例えば、 PETからなる透明シート上に上述の透過特性を有す る外光抑制機能フィルムを貼り付けた構成を有する。また、外光抑制層 11は、上述し た 530— 610nmの波長域に最大吸収を有する化合物を含有する。なお、図 7に示し た以外の、色調補正層などが電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ 100に含まれていても良い  [0291] The electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is provided with a near-infrared absorbing layer 7 via an adhesive layer (not shown). The near-infrared absorbing layer 7 has a structure in which a film having a near-infrared absorbing function is attached to one or both sides of a transparent base material such as a PET sheet, and cuts near infrared emitted from the plasma display panel 12. I do. The external light suppressing layer 11 has the above-described transmission characteristics, and absorbs light of a specific wavelength range of the external light source 20 so that the external light reaches the display panel 12 and the arrived light is transmitted to the display device. It suppresses both returning to the outside and suppresses the contrast of light and dark contrast caused by external light. The external light suppressing layer 11, like the near infrared absorbing layer 7, has a configuration in which an external light suppressing functional film having the above-described transmission characteristics is attached to a transparent sheet made of PET, for example. Further, the external light suppressing layer 11 contains the above-described compound having the maximum absorption in the wavelength range of 530 to 610 nm. Note that a color tone correction layer or the like other than that shown in FIG. 7 may be included in the electronic display filter 100.
[0292] 第 4発明の実施形態において、電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを構成する層のうち、外 光源から外光抑制層に至る光路中に存在する層の少なくとも 1つは、 JIS K7105に よるヘイズ値が通常 1. 5%以下、好ましくは 1. 0%以下、より好ましくは 0. 5%以下 である。なお、ヘイズ値は曇り度合いを示す指標であり、その値が高いほど光を散乱 しゃすいことを意味する。 [0292] In the embodiment of the fourth invention, among the layers constituting the filter for an electronic display, at least one of the layers existing in the optical path from the external light source to the external light suppressing layer has a haze value according to JIS K7105. It is usually at most 1.5%, preferably at most 1.0%, more preferably at most 0.5%. The haze value is an index indicating the degree of haze, and the higher the haze value, the more the light is scattered.
[0293] 本実施形態において、外光源から外光抑制層に至る光路中に存在する層(基材、 粘着剤層、光学機能フィルム等)全てが上述のヘイズ値を有することが望ましいが、 例えば、図 7に示した構成では、電磁波シールド層 4における導電薄膜や、外光導入 層 1といった機能性薄膜を除ぐガラス板 3、電磁波シールド層 4、近赤外線吸収層 7 及び外光抑制層 11の基材の少なくとも 1つ、好ましくは全てが上述のヘイズ値を有 することが好ましい。 [0293] In the present embodiment, a layer (substrate, It is desirable that all the adhesive layers, optical functional films, etc. have the above haze value.For example, in the configuration shown in FIG. 7, the conductive thin film in the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 and the functional thin film such as the external light introducing layer 1 It is preferable that at least one, and preferably all of the substrates of the glass plate 3, the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4, the near-infrared absorbing layer 7, and the external light suppressing layer 11 have the above-mentioned haze value.
[0294] このような基材を使用することで、外光源力 外光抑制層に至る光路中における外 光の散乱が抑制されるので、外光の散乱による明暗コントラストの低下を抑制できる。 また、散乱が抑制されるということは、ディスプレイ装置に入射した外光を高い割合で 外光抑制層に導くことになるため、外光抑制層を使用した場合にはその機能をより有 効に活用でき、さらに明暗コントラストを向上することが可能となる。また、外光抑制層 に使用する色素の量を増カロしなくても十分な明暗コントラストが得られるため、未使用 時のフィルタの色づきが観察されに《なる。  [0294] By using such a base material, the scattering of external light in the optical path to the external light source and the external light suppressing layer is suppressed, so that a decrease in contrast between light and dark due to the scattering of external light can be suppressed. In addition, suppression of scattering leads to a high percentage of external light incident on the display device to the external light suppressing layer, so that when an external light suppressing layer is used, its function becomes more effective. It can be used, and the contrast of light and dark can be further improved. In addition, a sufficient contrast of light and dark can be obtained without increasing the amount of the dye used in the external light suppressing layer, so that coloring of the filter when not used is observed.
[0295] 次に、第 5発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタについて、説明する。第 5発明に係る 電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、(a)発光表示デバイスの緑色発光ピークの波長の光 線透過率 Y4 (%)より、 3波長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過 率 Y2 (%)が 5以上低い、又は、(b)発光表示デバイスの白色発光スペクトルを使用 した場合の視感透過率 Y1 (%)より、 3波長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波 長の光線透過率 Y3 (%)が 1以上低い透過特性を有すると共に、  Next, the electronic display filter of the fifth invention will be described. The filter for an electronic display according to the fifth aspect of the present invention is characterized in that (a) the light transmittance at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the three-band fluorescent lamp is obtained from the light transmittance Y4 (%) of the wavelength of the green emission peak of the light emitting display device. Rate Y2 (%) is 5 or more lower, or (b) from the luminous transmittance Y1 (%) when using the white emission spectrum of the light-emitting display device, the wave of the green emission peak of the three-band emission fluorescent tube Long light transmittance Y3 (%) has transmission characteristics lower by 1 or more,
(D)電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの発光表示デバイス側表面に可視光透過率 60— 80%の電磁波シールド層が配置されて!、る。  (D) An electromagnetic wave shielding layer having a visible light transmittance of 60 to 80% is disposed on the surface of the filter for electronic display on the light emitting display device side.
[0296] 上述の条件を満たす電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの具体的な構成にっ 、て更に説 明する。図 8は発光表示デバイスの一例としてのプラズマディスプレイパネルの発光 スペクトル 14と、外光源の一例としての 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F10の発光スペクトル 15及び上述の条件を満たす外光抑制層の透過スペクトル 16の例を示す図であり、 図 9は、図 8に示すプラズマディスプレイパネルの発光スペクトル 14と、 3波長域発光 形蛍光灯 F 10の発光スぺクトル 15力 透過スペクトル 16を有する外光抑制層を透過 した後の発光スペクトル 14'及び 15'を示す。プラズマディスプレイ発光に比較して 外光が大きく減少していることが分かる。但し、外光については、上述の様に外光抑 制層を 2回通過したものが実際に観察されるため、図 9における外光の発光スぺタト ル 15 'は外光抑制層を 2回透過させたものを示して 、る。 [0296] The specific configuration of the electronic display filter satisfying the above conditions will be further described. Figure 8 shows the emission spectrum 14 of a plasma display panel as an example of a light-emitting display device, the emission spectrum 15 of a three-band fluorescent lamp F10 as an example of an external light source, and the transmission spectrum of an external light suppression layer satisfying the above conditions. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the light emission spectrum of the plasma display panel shown in FIG. 8, and FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the external light suppression having the light emission spectrum 15 and the transmission spectrum 16 of the three-band fluorescent lamp F10. Emission spectra 14 ′ and 15 ′ after transmission through the layer are shown. It can be seen that the external light is greatly reduced as compared with the plasma display emission. However, for external light, as described above, Since the light that has passed through the control layer twice is actually observed, the emission light source 15 ′ of the external light in FIG. 9 shows the light transmitted through the external light suppression layer twice.
[0297] 上述したような全体特性を有する本発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタにお 、て、 外光抑制層の機能を十分生力した明暗コントラストの向上効果と、未使用時のフィル タの色づき抑制を両立させるための実施形態について以下に説明する。  [0297] In the filter for an electronic display of the present invention having the overall characteristics as described above, the effect of enhancing the contrast between light and dark by sufficiently utilizing the function of the external light suppressing layer, and the suppression of coloring of the filter when not in use. An embodiment for satisfying both will be described below.
[0298] 図 7は、本実施形態に係る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを適用したディスプレイ装置 の一例としてのプラズマディスプレイ装置の、光学部材の配置例を示す図である。  FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of optical members in a plasma display device as an example of a display device to which the filter for an electronic display according to the present embodiment is applied.
[0299] 図 7にお 、て、プラズマディスプレイ装置は、例えば、 3波長域発光型蛍光灯などの 外光源 20が存在する側 (最外面側)から、外光導入層 1、ガラス板 3、電磁シールド 層 4、近赤外線吸収層 7、外光抑制層 11及びプラズマディスプレイパネル 12を有す る。プラズマディスプレイパネル 12を除く各部材は図示しな 、接着層によって接着さ れ、電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ 100を構成している。図において、フィルタ 100とプラ ズマディスプレイパネル 12とは所定の空間をお!/、て配置されて!、る。  [0299] In Fig. 7, the plasma display device is configured such that the external light introducing layer 1, the glass plate 3, and the external light source 20, such as a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp, are located from the side (outermost surface side). It has an electromagnetic shield layer 4, a near-infrared absorbing layer 7, an external light suppressing layer 11, and a plasma display panel 12. The members except for the plasma display panel 12 are adhered by an adhesive layer, not shown, to constitute an electronic display filter 100. In the figure, the filter 100 and the plasma display panel 12 are arranged at a predetermined space!
[0300] 外光導入層 1は、入射した外光を外光抑制層へできるだけ多く導くような層であり、 入射した外光を反射、散乱することなく透過させる層であることが好ましい。具体的に は、外光導入層 1は、 JIS Z8105— 1982による視感透過率が通常 90%以上、好ま しくは 95%以上である。  [0300] The external light introducing layer 1 is a layer that guides as much external light as possible to the external light suppressing layer, and is preferably a layer that transmits the external light without reflecting and scattering it. Specifically, the luminous transmittance of the external light introducing layer 1 according to JIS Z8105-1982 is usually 90% or more, preferably 95% or more.
[0301] このような外光導入層は、例えば視感透過率の高い材質を透明バインダー榭脂に 分散もしくは混合させてフィルム状やシート状に形成したり、透明基板に塗膜として形 成したり、蒸着などによって透明基板上に直接設けたり、基板上にフィルム状のもの を貼り付けたりする等、様々な方法によって形成することができる。ただし、外光導入 層の厚みは人間の目が最も敏感に感じる 550nmの 1Z4波長である 137. 5nm± l Onm程度とするのが好ましいため、このような薄膜を生成可能な方法によって形成す ることが好ましい。外光導入層に使用する透明基板としては、ポリエチレンテレフタレ ート(PET)フィルムゃトリアセチルセルロース(TAC)フィルムが一般的である力 特 に、 TACフィルムが外光を多く導入でき好適である。  [0301] Such an external light introducing layer is formed, for example, into a film or sheet by dispersing or mixing a material having high luminous transmittance in a transparent binder resin or as a coating film on a transparent substrate. It can be formed by various methods, for example, directly on a transparent substrate by vapor deposition, or by sticking a film-like material on the substrate. However, the thickness of the external light introduction layer is preferably about 137.5 nm ± l Onm, which is the 1Z4 wavelength of 550 nm, which is most sensitive to the human eye, so it is formed by a method that can produce such a thin film. Is preferred. Polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film / triacetylcellulose (TAC) film is generally used as the transparent substrate used for the external light introducing layer. Particularly, the TAC film is suitable because it can introduce a large amount of external light. .
[0302] 電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ 100の構成について更に説明する。ガラス板 3は例え ば強化ガラス力もなり、主にディスプレイ装置の外観を整えるとともに、フィルタ 100の 基材としても機能する。電磁波シールド層 4は、例えば、 PETシート等の基材上に金 属薄膜を設け、この金属薄膜をエッチングする等の方法によって導電性のメッシュを 形成したものや、基材上にスパッタリング等によって導電薄膜を形成したものであり、 図示しないアースに接続されて、プラズマディスプレイパネル 12から放出される電磁 波をシールドしている。 [0302] The configuration of the electronic display filter 100 will be further described. The glass plate 3 also becomes tempered glass, for example, to mainly improve the appearance of the display device, Also functions as a substrate. The electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is formed, for example, by forming a metal thin film on a base material such as a PET sheet and forming a conductive mesh by etching the metal thin film, or by forming a conductive mesh on the base material by sputtering or the like. It is formed with a thin film and is connected to a ground (not shown) to shield electromagnetic waves emitted from the plasma display panel 12.
[0303] 電磁波シールド層 4には、図示しない粘着剤層を介して近赤外線吸収層 7が設けら れる。近赤外線吸収層 7は、例えば PETシート等の透明基材の一面または両面に近 赤外線吸収機能を有するフィルムが貼り付けられた構成を有し、プラズマディスプレ ィパネル 12から放出される近赤外線をカットする。外光抑制層 11は、上述した透過 特性を有し、外光源 20の特定波長域の光線を吸収することで、外光がディスプレイ パネル 12に到達すること、及び、到達した光がディスプレイ装置外へ戻ることの両方 を抑制し、外光による明暗コントラストの悪ィ匕を抑制する。外光抑制層 11は、近赤外 線吸収層 7と同様、例えば、 PETからなる透明シート上に上述の透過特性を有する 外光抑制機能フィルムを貼り付けた構成を有する。また、外光抑制層 11は、上述した 530nm— 610nmの波長域に最大吸収を有する化合物を含有する。なお、図 7に示 した以外の、色調補正層などが電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ 100に含まれて 、ても良 い。  [0303] The electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is provided with a near-infrared absorbing layer 7 via an adhesive layer (not shown). The near-infrared absorbing layer 7 has a structure in which a film having a near-infrared absorbing function is attached to one or both sides of a transparent base material such as a PET sheet, and cuts near infrared rays emitted from the plasma display panel 12. . The external light suppressing layer 11 has the above-described transmission characteristics, and absorbs light in a specific wavelength range of the external light source 20 so that the external light reaches the display panel 12 and the arrived light is transmitted to the outside of the display device. And the contrast of light and dark contrast due to external light is suppressed. Like the near-infrared ray absorbing layer 7, the external light suppressing layer 11 has a configuration in which, for example, an external light suppressing functional film having the above-described transmission characteristics is adhered to a transparent sheet made of PET. Further, the external light suppressing layer 11 contains the aforementioned compound having the maximum absorption in the wavelength range of 530 nm to 610 nm. Note that a color tone correction layer other than that shown in FIG. 7 may be included in the electronic display filter 100.
[0304] 図 7に示した様に、プラズマディスプレイパネルのような電磁波を発生する発光表示 デバイスを使用したディスプレイ装置に使用するフィルタ 100には、電磁波シールド 層 4が設けられるのが一般的である。本実施形態は、外光抑制層を有する電子ディ スプレイ用フィルタが電磁波シールド層を有する場合、電磁波シールド層に特定の 条件を満たす層を使用することにより、フィルタの色づきを観察されにくくするとともに 、かつ明暗コントラストの向上を実現するものである。  [0304] As shown in Fig. 7, an electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is generally provided in a filter 100 used for a display device using a light emitting display device that generates electromagnetic waves such as a plasma display panel. . In the present embodiment, when the electronic display filter having the external light suppression layer has an electromagnetic wave shielding layer, by using a layer satisfying specific conditions for the electromagnetic wave shielding layer, the coloring of the filter is hardly observed, and Further, the contrast of light and dark is improved.
[0305] すなわち、電磁波シールド層 4の可視光透過率を制御し、外光が発光表示デバィ スに到達する量を抑制すれば、表示発光デバイスで反射した外光の戻り光に帰因す る明喑コントラストの低下を抑制できる。  That is, if the visible light transmittance of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is controlled and the amount of external light reaching the light emitting display device is suppressed, it is attributed to the return light of the external light reflected by the display light emitting device. A decrease in brightness and contrast can be suppressed.
[0306] 第 5発明の実施形態における電磁波シールド層 4は、透明な基材上に導電性繊維 によるメッシュを設けたもの、基材上に形成した導電性薄膜をェ、」 状に形成したもの、基材上に蒸着やスパッタリングによって形成される(開口を有さな い)導電性物質の薄膜などによって形成することができる。 [0306] The electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 in the fifth embodiment of the present invention has a structure in which a mesh made of conductive fibers is provided on a transparent base material, and a conductive thin film formed on the base material is used. " And a thin film of a conductive material (having no opening) formed by vapor deposition or sputtering on a substrate.
[0307] 本実施形態にぉ 、て、電磁波シールド層 4の可視光(波長 400— 700nm)透過率 は、通常 60— 80%であり、好ましくは 60— 75%、より好ましくは 60— 70%である。  According to the present embodiment, the visible light (wavelength 400 to 700 nm) transmittance of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is usually 60 to 80%, preferably 60 to 75%, more preferably 60 to 70%. It is.
[0308] このような可視光透過率は、電磁波シールド層 4がメッシュ状の導電性材料 (導電 性繊維のメッシュ又はエッチング等によってメッシュ状に形成された導電性薄膜)を使 用する場合、メッシュを形成する透明基材の透過率およびその開口率を制御すること により実現できる。ここで、開口率とは、単位面積当たりの光透過可能な領域 (開口) の比率 (換言すれば、単位面積当たりにメッシュが占める割合を 100から差し引いた もの)である。  [0308] Such a visible light transmittance is determined when the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is made of a mesh-shaped conductive material (a conductive thin film formed by meshing or etching a conductive fiber or the like). It can be realized by controlling the transmittance of the transparent substrate forming the layer and the aperture ratio thereof. Here, the aperture ratio is a ratio of a region (opening) capable of transmitting light per unit area (in other words, a ratio of a mesh occupied per unit area minus 100).
[0309] メッシュを形成する透明基材としては PETフィルムが一般的であり、その可視光透 過率は約 90%であることから、開口率を通常 65— 90%、好ましくは 65— 85%、より 好ましくは 65— 80%とすることにより、上述の可視光透過率を実現できる。もちろん、 可視光透過率の測定結果に基づ 、て実際の開口率を決定する様にしても構わな 、 。なお、電磁波シールド層の可視光透過率は、透明基材の可視光透過率と、電磁波 シールドメッシュの開口率を乗じた値として求めることができる。  [0309] A PET film is generally used as a transparent base material for forming a mesh, and its visible light transmittance is about 90%. Therefore, the aperture ratio is usually 65 to 90%, preferably 65 to 85%. The above-mentioned visible light transmittance can be realized by setting the ratio to more preferably 65 to 80%. Of course, the actual aperture ratio may be determined based on the measurement result of the visible light transmittance. The visible light transmittance of the electromagnetic wave shield layer can be obtained as a value obtained by multiplying the visible light transmittance of the transparent base by the aperture ratio of the electromagnetic wave shield mesh.
[0310] 電磁波シールドメッシュの開口率制御は、メッシュの材料や製法に応じて適宜行う ことができるが、例えば金属ワイヤを使用してメッシュを製造する場合には、ワイヤの 間隔 (線ピッチ)とワイヤの径を制御することで、またメッシュを金属薄膜のエッチング で形成する場合には、エッチングする領域を制御することで実現できる。  [0310] The aperture ratio of the electromagnetic wave shielding mesh can be appropriately controlled according to the material and manufacturing method of the mesh. For example, in the case of manufacturing a mesh using a metal wire, the interval (line pitch) of the wire and the wire pitch may be reduced. This can be achieved by controlling the diameter of the wire, or by controlling the region to be etched when the mesh is formed by etching a metal thin film.
[0311] 一方、電磁波シールド層 4をメッシュ状でない(開口部分のない)導電性薄膜を使用 して形成する場合には、基材上に設ける導電性薄膜の材質や膜厚を制御すること〖こ より上述の可視光透過率を実現することができる。この場合、電磁波シールド層は複 数の導電性薄膜層によって形成しても良ぐまた厚み、材質は複数の導電性薄膜層 の各々で独立して選択可能である。  [0311] On the other hand, when the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is formed using a conductive thin film that is not mesh-shaped (having no openings), it is necessary to control the material and thickness of the conductive thin film provided on the base material. Thereby, the above-mentioned visible light transmittance can be realized. In this case, the electromagnetic wave shielding layer may be formed of a plurality of conductive thin film layers, and the thickness and material can be independently selected for each of the plurality of conductive thin film layers.
[0312] 第 5発明の実施形態によれば、発光表示デバイスに到達する外光を、電磁波シー ルド層によって抑制することにより、明暗コントラストを向上することが可能である。また 、外光抑制層を透過する可視光の量が抑制されるため、同時に未使用時におけるフ ィルタの色づきを抑制することができる。 [0312] According to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to improve the light / dark contrast by suppressing external light reaching the light emitting display device by the electromagnetic wave shield layer. In addition, since the amount of visible light transmitted through the external light suppressing layer is suppressed, at the same time, the flow when not in use is suppressed. Filtering can be suppressed.
[0313] 次に、第 6発明の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの透明基板について、説明する。第 6 発明に係る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの透明基板は、透明基板表面の外周部に枠 状の不透明領域を有し、その不透明領域の表面粗さが算術平均高さ (Ra)で 0. 05 一 100 /z mである。  Next, the transparent substrate of the electronic display filter of the sixth invention will be described. The transparent substrate of the electronic display filter according to the sixth invention has a frame-shaped opaque region on the outer peripheral portion of the surface of the transparent substrate, and the surface roughness of the opaque region has an arithmetic average height (Ra) of 0.05. 100 / zm.
[0314] 以下、第 6発明に係る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの透明基板を、プラズマディスプ レイに使用する光学フィルタに適用した場合を説明するが、第 6発明に係る透明基板 は他の方式のディスプレイ装置用光学フィルタにも同様に適用可能である。  [0314] Hereinafter, a case will be described in which the transparent substrate of the filter for an electronic display according to the sixth invention is applied to an optical filter used for a plasma display, but the transparent substrate according to the sixth invention is a display device of another type. It can be similarly applied to optical filters for use.
[0315] また、第 6発明に係る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの透明基板は、第 1一 5発明のフ ィルタと貼り合わせて積層体を形成し、電子ディスプレイ用フィルタとして使用すること が出来る。そして、得られた電子ディスプレイ用フィルタは、発光表示装置に適用して 電子ディスプレイ装置を得ることが出来る。電子ディスプレイ用フィルタが適用される 電子ディスプレイまたはプラズマディスプレイパネル表示装置としては、公知の表示 装置あるいは市販品であれば特に限定なく使用することが出来る。  Further, the transparent substrate of the filter for an electronic display according to the sixth invention can be used as a filter for an electronic display by forming a laminate by bonding the transparent substrate to the filter of the fifteenth invention. Then, the obtained filter for an electronic display can be applied to a light-emitting display device to obtain an electronic display device. As an electronic display or a plasma display panel display device to which the filter for an electronic display is applied, a known display device or a commercially available product can be used without particular limitation.
[0316] <光学フィルタの構成 >  [0316] <Configuration of optical filter>
第 6発明において、ディスプレイ装置用光学フィルタとは、ディスプレイ素子 (デイス プレイパネル、ブラウン管など)が発する光がディスプレイ装置外部に射出する前に 通過する位置に配置され、入射する光に対して何らかの変化を積極的に与える機能 を有するフィルタを意味する。光学フィルタは具体的には上述したような外光抑制機 能や、コントラスト向上、色補正、反射防止 (AR)、写り込み防止 (AG)等の機能を有 する。  In the sixth invention, the optical filter for a display device is arranged at a position where light emitted from a display element (display panel, cathode ray tube, etc.) passes before exiting to the outside of the display device, and undergoes some change with respect to the incident light. Means a filter that has the function of positively providing The optical filter specifically has a function of suppressing external light as described above, a function of improving contrast, a color correction, an anti-reflection (AR), an anti-reflection (AG), and the like.
[0317] 光学フィルタは通常ガラスや光学用榭脂を代表とする透明基材そのものに機能性 材料を配合して成形したものや、透明基板に光学的な機能を有する材料を塗布した り、光学機能フィルムを貼り付けて構成されるもの、又は、これらを組み合わせたもの が知られている。  [0317] Optical filters are usually formed by blending a functional material into a transparent substrate itself, typically glass or optical resin, or by applying a material having an optical function to a transparent substrate, A structure formed by attaching a functional film or a combination thereof is known.
[0318] 第 6発明のフィルタは、透明基板の少なくとも片面に少なくとも 1枚のフィルムを貼り 付けた構成を有する光学フィルタであるが、基板自体にも何らかの光学機能を付与 したものであっても良い。また、複数枚のフィルムを透明基板上に積層しても良い。ま た、光学的な機能を有するフィルム以外にも、電磁波抑制用の金属メッシュやその基 材フィルムの様に、光学的な機能を特に持たない層が存在していても良い。また、塗 布により形成された層が存在していても良い。 [0318] The filter of the sixth invention is an optical filter having a configuration in which at least one film is attached to at least one surface of a transparent substrate, but the substrate itself may be provided with some optical function. . Further, a plurality of films may be laminated on a transparent substrate. Ma In addition to the film having an optical function, there may be a layer having no particular optical function, such as a metal mesh for suppressing electromagnetic waves or a base film thereof. Further, a layer formed by coating may be present.
[0319] く透明基板 >  [0319] Ku transparent substrate>
第 6発明にお 、て、透明基板とは光学フィルタの基板として機能可能な強度と光学 的特性を有しさえすればその材料や形状に制限はない。例えば、ガラスや光学用途 向けに利用される透明榭脂(ポリエチレンテレフタレート (PET)、ポリカーボネート (P C)、環状ポリオレフイン榭脂(COP)、トリァセチルセルロース(TAC)、ポリエチレン ナフタレート (PEN)等)などで形成した基板を使用することが出来る。また、上述の 様に、基板自体に光学的な機能を持たせるベぐ機能材料を添加することも可能で める。  In the sixth invention, the material and shape of the transparent substrate are not limited as long as the transparent substrate has strength and optical characteristics that can function as a substrate of the optical filter. For example, transparent resins used for glass and optical applications (polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polycarbonate (PC), cyclic polyolefin resin (COP), triacetyl cellulose (TAC), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), etc.) The formed substrate can be used. As described above, it is also possible to add a functional material that gives the substrate itself an optical function.
[0320] <額縁印刷 >  [0320] <Frame printing>
第 6発明において、透明基板上になされる額縁印刷に使用される材料、手法には 特に制限はなぐ平滑な表面を有するガラスや透明榭脂上に無彩色などの枠を印刷 可能な任意の材料、手法を使用することが出来る。例えば、ガラス基板であれば黒色 のセラミックインクをスクリーン印刷し、熱処理して焼き付けするセラミック印刷力 榭 脂基板に対しては、無機粒子などを配合した顔料インクのスクリーン印刷などがそれ ぞれ利用可能である。なお、額縁印刷の色は、黒や黒に近い色で印刷されることが 多いが、額縁印刷の色自体は本発明とは無関係であり、他の任意の色を利用可能 である。例えば、スリガラス様の白色額縁を実施するにはサンドブラスト処理を採用し ても良い。ただし、額縁印刷部分に貼り付けられたフィルムの端部が観察されにくい 程度の不透明度を有することが好まし 、。  In the sixth invention, there are no particular restrictions on the materials and techniques used for frame printing on a transparent substrate, and any material capable of printing a frame such as achromatic color on glass or a transparent resin having a smooth surface without any particular limitations. , Techniques can be used. For example, for a glass substrate, black ceramic ink is screen-printed, then heat-treated and baked.- For a resin substrate, screen printing of pigment ink containing inorganic particles etc. can be used respectively. It is. The frame printing color is often printed in black or a color close to black, but the frame printing color itself is irrelevant to the present invention, and any other color can be used. For example, sand blasting may be used to implement a white glass-like frame. However, it is preferable that the opacity of the film attached to the frame printing portion is so low that the edge of the film is hardly observed.
[0321] <額縁印刷部分の表面粗度 >  [0321] <Surface roughness of printed frame part>
第 6発明にお 、ては、額縁印刷部分の少なくともフィルムが貼り付けられる領域の 表面粗度を制御することを特徴とする。すなわち、図 10において、額縁印刷部分を 5 1、貼り付けするフィルムを 55とすると、フィルム 55と額縁印刷部分 51とが重なった領 域 53における表面粗度を少なくとも制御する。ただし、ガラス基板に対してセラミック 印刷によって額縁印刷を行う場合、部分的な粗度の調整は困難であるため、フィルム 55が重ならな 、領域を含めて表面粗度を制御しても良!、。 The sixth invention is characterized in that the surface roughness of at least a region of the frame printing portion where the film is attached is controlled. That is, in FIG. 10, assuming that the frame printing portion is 51 and the film to be pasted is 55, at least the surface roughness in the area 53 where the film 55 and the frame printing portion 51 overlap is controlled. However, when performing frame printing by ceramic printing on a glass substrate, it is difficult to partially adjust the roughness. If 55 does not overlap, it is good to control the surface roughness including the area!
[0322] 表面粗度の制御方法としては任意の方法を採用可能であるが、塗料 (セラミックぺ 一ストを含む)に含まれ、印刷後に残る物質の粒径や形状を制御したり、印刷後に額 縁印刷部分の表面をサンドブラスト等によって粗面化することにより、所望の表面粗さ を実現することができる。  [0322] As a method of controlling the surface roughness, any method can be adopted. However, it is possible to control the particle size and shape of a substance contained in a paint (including a ceramic paste) and remaining after printing, or to control after printing. The desired surface roughness can be achieved by roughening the surface of the frame printing portion by sandblasting or the like.
[0323] 具体的な表面粗さとしては、算術平均高さ Ra (jIS B0601— 2001。算術平均粗さ  [0323] As the specific surface roughness, the arithmetic average height Ra (jIS B0601-2001.
(JIS B601— 1994)と同義)で 0. 05 m以上、好ましくは 0. 10 m以上とする。ま た、上限値については 100 m以下であることが好ましい。表面粗さが 0. 05 mを 下回ると、十分な接着強度を得ることが難しぐ特に角の部分力も剥がれやすくなる。  (Synonymous with JIS B601-1994)) and 0.05 m or more, preferably 0.10 m or more. The upper limit is preferably 100 m or less. When the surface roughness is less than 0.05 m, it is difficult to obtain sufficient adhesive strength, and the partial force at corners is also easily peeled off.
[0324] 表面粗さは等方性であっても異方性であっても良いが、異方性を有する場合には 少なくとも基板の長辺に平行な方向か垂直な方向の一方が上述の条件を満たすこと が好ましい。また、例えば図 10に示す様に縦横比が等しくない透明基板を使用する 場合には、膨張によってフィルムに加わる張力変動の大きさを考慮して、その長手方 向に平行な方向の表面粗さをその方向に直交する方向の表面粗さよりも大きくするこ とにより、フィルムの剥がれをより一層防止することが可能になる。  [0324] The surface roughness may be isotropic or anisotropic. In the case of having anisotropy, at least one of the direction parallel to the long side of the substrate and the direction perpendicular to the long side is as described above. It is preferable to satisfy the conditions. When a transparent substrate with an unequal aspect ratio is used, as shown in Fig. 10, for example, the surface roughness in the direction parallel to the longitudinal direction is taken into account in consideration of the magnitude of tension fluctuation applied to the film due to expansion. By making the surface roughness larger than the surface roughness in the direction perpendicular to the direction, it is possible to further prevent the film from peeling.
[0325] <フィルムの貼り付け >  [0325] <Paste film>
フィルムの貼り付けは粘着剤を使用して行う。粘着剤としては光学特性に優れ (例 えば、高透明度を有する)、且つ、高温、高湿の環境下において粘着度の低下が少 なぐ経年変化を起こしにくいものが好ましい。  The film is attached using an adhesive. As the pressure-sensitive adhesive, a pressure-sensitive adhesive excellent in optical properties (for example, having high transparency) and having little change in pressure-sensitive adhesiveness under a high-temperature and high-humidity environment and hardly undergoing aging is preferable.
[0326] 予めこの粘着剤を塗布したフィルムを用意しておき、透明基板上で位置合わせ及 び裁断することで貼り付けを行うことが可能であるが、この際、フィルムと額縁印刷部 分とが重なる領域 53 (図 10)の幅 d (図 11)が少なすぎる場合は、額縁印刷部分の表 面粗度制御による効果が得られない。多すぎる場合は、フィルムや粘着剤の消費量 を不必要に増大させることになる。フィルムの接着強度は幅 dのみならず粘着剤の性 能によっても左右されるため、必ずしも一義的に定めることはできないが、発明者の 検討によれば少なくとも 3mm以上の幅があることが好ましぐ一方 20mmを超える幅 の必要性は見 、だされなかった。  [0326] A film to which this adhesive has been applied is prepared in advance, and it is possible to perform bonding by positioning and cutting on a transparent substrate. If the width d (FIG. 11) of the region 53 (FIG. 10) where the overlaps are too small, the effect of controlling the surface roughness of the frame printing portion cannot be obtained. If it is too large, the consumption of the film and the adhesive will be unnecessarily increased. Since the adhesive strength of the film depends not only on the width d but also on the performance of the pressure-sensitive adhesive, it cannot always be determined unambiguously. On the other hand, the necessity for a width exceeding 20 mm was seen, but it was not issued.
[0327] <光学的機能フィルムの構成 > 第 6発明における光学フィルタに好適に使用される光学的機能フィルムとしては、 例えば、赤外線吸収 (カット)フィルムや外光抑制用フィルムがある。特に、外光抑制 用フィルムはディスプレイの表示時におけるコントラスト向上と電源断状態での画面 色の調整に有用である。なお、外光抑制用フィルムとは、特定波長または波長帯の 外光を吸収 (カット)する機能を有するフィルムを意味する。このような外光抑制用フィ ルムとしては、例えば、上述の化合物を使用して形成されたフィルムを好適に使用す ることが出来る。 <Configuration of Optically Functional Film> Examples of the optical functional film suitably used for the optical filter in the sixth invention include an infrared absorption (cut) film and a film for suppressing external light. In particular, the film for suppressing external light is useful for improving the contrast during display and adjusting the screen color when the power is off. The external light suppressing film means a film having a function of absorbing (cutting) external light of a specific wavelength or a wavelength band. As such an external light suppressing film, for example, a film formed using the above-mentioned compound can be suitably used.
[0328] 具体的には、 530— 6 lOnmの波長域に最大吸収を有する化合物であって、この化 合物が通常上述の式 (XVII)で表されるジフ -ルスクァリリウム系化合物、上述の 式 (XI)で表されるテトラァザポルフィリン系化合物、上述の式 (Π)で表されるフ -ル ビラゾリル系スクァリリウム系化合物、上述の式 (XVIII)で表されるピロメテン系化合 物の少なくとも 1つの化合物を使用して形成した光学機能フィルムであり、好ましくは 上述の式 (XVII)で表されるジフ -ルスクァリリウム系化合物及び Z又は上述の式( XI)で表されるテトラァザポルフィリン系化合物を使用して形成した光学機能フィルム である。  Specifically, a compound having a maximum absorption in the wavelength range of 530-6 lOnm, and this compound is usually a difluorsquarylium-based compound represented by the above formula (XVII), At least one of a tetraazaporphyrin compound represented by the formula (XI), a fluvirazolyl squarylium compound represented by the above formula (Π), and a pyromethene compound represented by the above formula (XVIII) Optically functional film formed using two compounds, preferably a difluorsquarylium compound represented by the above formula (XVII) and a tetraazaporphyrin compound represented by Z or the above formula (XI) An optical functional film formed using
[0329] <具体構成例 >  [0329] <Specific configuration example>
図 7は、本実施形態に係る電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを適用可能なディスプレイ装 置の一例としてのプラズマディスプレイ装置の、光学部材の配置例を示す図である。  FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an arrangement example of optical members of a plasma display device as an example of a display device to which the filter for an electronic display according to the present embodiment can be applied.
[0330] 図 7にお 、て、プラズマディスプレイ装置は、例えば、 3波長域発光形蛍光管などの 外光源 20が存在する側 (最外面側)から、外光導入層 1、ガラス板 3、電磁波シール ド層 4、近赤外線カット層 7、外光抑制層 11及びプラズマディスプレイパネル 12を有 する。プラズマディスプレイパネル 12を除く各部材は図示しな 、接着層によって接着 され、電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ 100を構成している。図 7において、フィルタ 100と プラズマディスプレイパネル 12とは所定の空間をお!/、て配置されて!、る。  [0330] In Fig. 7, for example, the plasma display device is arranged such that the external light introducing layer 1, the glass plate 3, the external light source 20 such as a three-wavelength-band fluorescent tube, etc. It has an electromagnetic wave shield layer 4, a near-infrared cut layer 7, an external light suppression layer 11, and a plasma display panel 12. The members other than the plasma display panel 12 are adhered by an adhesive layer, not shown, to constitute an electronic display filter 100. In FIG. 7, the filter 100 and the plasma display panel 12 are arranged in a predetermined space!
[0331] 電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ 100の構成について更に説明する。ガラス板 3は、例え ば、強化ガラスカゝらなり、主にディスプレイ装置の外観を整えるとともに、フィルタ 100 の基材としても機能する。電磁波シールド層 4は、例えば、 PETシート等の基材上に 金属薄膜を設け、この金属薄膜をエッチングする等の方法によって導電性のメッシュ を形成したものや、基材上にスパッタリング等によって導電薄膜を形成したものであり[0331] The configuration of the electronic display filter 100 will be further described. The glass plate 3 is made of, for example, tempered glass, and mainly serves to improve the appearance of the display device and also functions as a base material of the filter 100. The electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is formed, for example, by providing a metal thin film on a base material such as a PET sheet and etching the metal thin film. Or a conductive thin film formed on a substrate by sputtering or the like.
、図示しないアースに接続されて、プラズマディスプレイパネル 12から放出される電 磁波をシールドしている。 , Which is connected to a ground (not shown) to shield electromagnetic waves emitted from the plasma display panel 12.
[0332] 電磁波シールド層 4には、図示しない粘着剤層を介して近赤外線カット層 7が設け られる。近赤外線カット層 7は、例えば、 PETシート等の透明基材の一面または両面 に近赤外線カット機能を有する薄膜が設けられた構成を有し、プラズマディスプレイ パネル 12から放出される近赤外線をカットする。外光抑制層 11は、上述した透過特 性を有し、外光源 20の特定波長域の光線を吸収することで、外光がディスプレイパ ネル 12に到達すること、及び、到達した光がディスプレイ装置外へ戻ることの両方を 抑制し、外光による明暗コントラストの悪ィ匕を抑制する。外光抑制層 11は、近赤外線 カット層 7と同様、例えば PETからなる透明シート上に上述の透過特性を有する外光 抑制機能フィルムを貼り付けた構成を有する。また、外光抑制層 11は、上述した 530 一 610nmの波長域に最大吸収を有する化合物を含有する。なお、図 7に示した以 外の、色調補正層などが電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ 100に含まれて 、ても良い。  [0332] The electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is provided with a near-infrared cut layer 7 via an adhesive layer (not shown). The near-infrared cut layer 7 has a configuration in which a thin film having a near-infrared cut function is provided on one or both sides of a transparent base material such as a PET sheet, and cuts near infrared rays emitted from the plasma display panel 12. . The external light suppressing layer 11 has the above-described transmission characteristics, and absorbs light of a specific wavelength range of the external light source 20 so that external light reaches the display panel 12 and the arrived light is It suppresses both returning to the outside of the device, and suppresses the contrast of light and dark by the external light. Like the near-infrared cut layer 7, the external light suppressing layer 11 has a configuration in which an external light suppressing functional film having the above-described transmission characteristics is attached to a transparent sheet made of, for example, PET. Further, the external light suppressing layer 11 contains the above-described compound having the maximum absorption in the wavelength range of 530 to 610 nm. Note that a color tone correction layer other than that shown in FIG. 7 may be included in the electronic display filter 100.
[0333] 図 11に、図 7に示す構成において、透明基板としてのガラス板 3と、ガラス板 3に貼 り付けられるフィルムとしての電磁波シールド層 4との接着状態、特にフィルムの端部 近傍における接着状態を拡大して模式的に示す。なお、便宜上電磁波シールド層 4 の基材フィルム上に設けられた金属メッシュは図示して 、な 、。  [0333] In FIG. 11, in the configuration shown in FIG. 7, the state of adhesion between the glass plate 3 as the transparent substrate and the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 as the film to be attached to the glass plate 3, particularly in the vicinity of the edge of the film The bonding state is schematically shown in an enlarged manner. For convenience, the metal mesh provided on the base film of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is shown in FIG.
[0334] 図 11において、電磁波シールド層 4は粘着剤層 56を介してガラス板 3の表面に接 着されるととも〖こ、その端部は額縁印刷部分 51に接着される。上述した様に、フィル ム端部(外周部)の、額縁印刷部分 51と重なる部分の幅 dは 3mm以上、 20mm以下 であることが好ましい。  In FIG. 11, the electromagnetic wave shielding layer 4 is attached to the surface of the glass plate 3 via the adhesive layer 56, and the end is adhered to the frame printing portion 51. As described above, it is preferable that the width d of the portion of the film end portion (outer peripheral portion) overlapping the frame printing portion 51 is 3 mm or more and 20 mm or less.
実施例  Example
[0335] 以下、実施例により本発明を詳細に説明するが、本発明は、その要旨を超えない 限り、以下の実施例に限定されるものではない。  [0335] Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail with reference to Examples, but the present invention is not limited to the following Examples as long as the gist is not exceeded.
[0336] 以下の諸例は第 1発明の説明のためのものである。 [0336] The following examples are for explanation of the first invention.
[0337] 合成例 1 (式 I 2の化合物の合成): Synthesis Example 1 (Synthesis of Compound of Formula I2):
3, 4ージヒドロキシー 3—シクロブテン 1, 2—ジオン;塩化チォ -ルを原料として、 Tetrahedron Letters, 781 ( 1970)の方法で 1 , 2—ジクロロシクロブテン— 3, 4—ジオン を合成した。次に、 1 , 2—ジクロロシクロブテン 3, 4—ジオン(A)を使用して Dyesand Pigments 49, 161 (2001)に記載の以下の方法で、 2 クロ口— 1— (4ーメトキシフエ- ノレ)シクロブテン 3, 4—ジオン [EI- MS ; m/z222 (M+) , 1H- NMR (400MHz , inCDC13 δ ,ppm) ; 3.93(s,3H)、 7.08(d,2H)、 8.25(d,2H)]を経由し、 2—ヒドロキシ一 1— (4—メトキ シフエ-ル)シクロブテン 3, 4—ジオン [1H- NMR (400MHz, inCDC13 δ ,ppm); 3.90(s,3H)、 7.04(d,2H)、 8.11(d,2H)]を合成した。 3, 4-dihydroxy-3-cyclobutene 1, 2-dione; starting from thiol chloride 1,2-Dichlorocyclobutene-3,4-dione was synthesized by the method of Tetrahedron Letters, 781 (1970). Next, using 1, 2, -dichlorocyclobutene 3,4-dione (A), the following method described in Dyesand Pigments 49, 161 (2001) is used to prepare 2-chloro-1- (4-methoxyphenol). Cyclobutene 3,4-dione (EI-MS; m / z222 (M +), 1H-NMR (400 MHz, inCDC13δ, ppm); 3.93 (s, 3H), 7.08 (d, 2H), 8.25 (d, 2H) Via 2-Hydroxy-1- (4-methoxyphenyl) cyclobutene 3,4-dione [1H-NMR (400MHz, inCDC13δ, ppm); 3.90 (s, 3H), 7.04 (d, 2H ), 8.11 (d, 2H)].
[0338] [化 49] [0338] [Formula 49]
Figure imgf000103_0001
Figure imgf000103_0001
[0339] さらに、 2—ヒドロキシ一 1— (4ーメトキシフエ-ル)シクロブテン 3, 4—ジオン 0. 10g (0 . 49mmol)と n デカンン酸(3, 5—ジヒドロキシーフエ-ル)—アミド 0. 14g (0. 49mm ol)、トルエン 20ml及び n—ブタノール 20mlとをジーンスターク装置を備えた反応容 器に投入し、 4時間加熱還流処理した。 Further, 0.10 g (0.49 mmol) of 2-hydroxy-1- (4-methoxyphenyl) cyclobutene 3,4-dione and n-decanoic acid (3,5-dihydroxy-phenyl) -amide were used. 14 g (0.49 mmol), 20 ml of toluene and 20 ml of n-butanol were charged into a reaction vessel equipped with a Gene Stark apparatus, and heated under reflux for 4 hours.
[0340] 反応終了後、反応混合物を放冷し、沈殿物を濾過、トルエン Zへキサンで洗浄、乾 燥し、 目的の化合物(式: 1—2) 0. 15g (収率 65. 8%)を得た。  [0340] After the reaction was completed, the reaction mixture was allowed to cool, the precipitate was filtered, washed with toluene Z hexane, and dried to obtain 0.15 g of the desired compound (Formula 1-2) (yield 65.8%). ).
[可視部吸収 λ max : 552nm (テトラヒドロフラン)、マススぺクトノレ MALDI— TOF [Visible absorption λ max: 552nm (tetrahydrofuran), mass spectrum MALDI— TOF
MS [neg, no marix)法: m/z =465 MS (neg, no marix) method: m / z = 465
(M— ) ]  (M—)]
[0341] 合成例 2 (式 I 4の合成):  Synthesis Example 2 (Synthesis of Formula I4):
2—ヒドロキシー 1— (4ーメトキシフエ-ル)シクロブテン 3, 4—ジオン 0. 10g (0. 49m mol)と 1 , 3, 5—トリヒドロキシベンゼン 0. 063g (0. 50mmol)とトルエン 20mlと n—ブ タノール 20mlとをジーンスターク装置を備えた反応容器に投入し、 4時間加熱還流 処理した。  2-hydroxy-1- (4-methoxyphenyl) cyclobutene 3,4-dione 0.10 g (0.49 mmol), 1,3,5-trihydroxybenzene 0.063 g (0.50 mmol), toluene 20 ml and n- 20 ml of butanol was charged into a reaction vessel equipped with a Gene Stark apparatus, and heated under reflux for 4 hours.
[0342] 反応終了後、反応混合物を放冷し、沈殿物を濾過、トルエン Zへキサンで洗浄、乾 燥し、 目的の化合物 (I 4) 0. 12g (収率 85. 0%)を得た。 [可視部吸収 λ max : 532nm (テトラヒドロフラン)、マススぺクトノレ MALDI— TOF[0342] After completion of the reaction, the reaction mixture was allowed to cool, the precipitate was filtered, washed with toluene Z hexane, and dried to obtain 0.12 g of the desired compound (I4) (yield 85.0%). Was. [Visible absorption λ max: 532nm (tetrahydrofuran), mass spectrum MALDI— TOF
M¾ (negative ion mode, matrix: -し riCA)法: M¾ (negative ion mode, matrix: -shiriCA) method:
m/z= 311 (M-H) ]  m / z = 311 (M-H)]
[0343] 合成例 3 (式 ΠΙ— 3の合成): Synthesis Example 3 (Synthesis of Formula ΠΙ—3):
2,一ノネノイツク酸(3, 5—ジヒドロキシフエ-ルアミド) 0. 30gと 3, 4—ジヒドロキシー 3 —シクロブテン 1 , 2—ジオン 0. 065gとをトルエン 20mlと n—ブタノール 20mlとの混 合溶媒と共に、ジーンスターク装置を備えた反応容器に投入し、 4時間加熱還流処 理して反応させた。反応終了後、反応混合物を放冷し、沈殿物を濾過、トルエンで洗 浄し、乾燥させることにより、目的の化合物 (III 3) 0. 21g (収率 60. 9%)を得た。  Mixed solvent of 0.30 g of 2,1-nonenoic acid (3,5-dihydroxyphenylamide) and 0.065 g of 3,4-dihydroxy-3-cyclobutene 1,2-dione in 20 ml of toluene and 20 ml of n-butanol At the same time, the mixture was charged into a reaction vessel equipped with a Gene Stark apparatus, and heated and refluxed for 4 hours to cause a reaction. After completion of the reaction, the reaction mixture was allowed to cool, and the precipitate was filtered, washed with toluene, and dried to obtain 0.21 g of the desired compound (III 3) (yield: 60.9%).
[可視部吸収 λ max : 609nm (テトラヒドロフラン)、マススペクトル DEI— MS (pos )法: m/z= 605 (M +H) ]  [Visible absorption λ max: 609 nm (tetrahydrofuran), mass spectrum DEI-MS (pos) method: m / z = 605 (M + H)]
[0344] 合成例 4 (式: II 5の合成): Synthesis Example 4 (Synthesis of Formula: II 5):
2,ーェチルへキサン酸(3, 5—ジヒドロキシフエ-ルアミド) 0. 251gと 1ーメチルー 3— n プロピル 2 ピラゾリン 5 オン 0. 14gと 3, 4—ジヒドロキシー 3—シクロブテン 1 , 2—ジオン 0. 114gとをトルエン 20mlと n—ブタノール 20mlとの混合溶媒と共に、ジー ンスターク装置を備えた反応容器に投入し、 4時間加熱還流処理して反応させた。反 応終了後、反応混合物を放冷し、沈殿物を濾過、トルエンで洗浄し、乾燥させること により、反応物 0. 25gを得た。  0.251 g of 2, -ethylhexanoic acid (3,5-dihydroxyphenolamide) and 0.14 g of 1-methyl-3-n-propyl-2-pyrazolin-5one 0.14 g and 3,4-dihydroxy-3-cyclobutene 1,2-dione 0. 114 g and a mixed solvent of 20 ml of toluene and 20 ml of n-butanol were charged into a reaction vessel equipped with a GeneStark apparatus, and reacted by heating under reflux for 4 hours. After completion of the reaction, the reaction mixture was allowed to cool, and the precipitate was filtered, washed with toluene, and dried to obtain 0.25 g of a reaction product.
[0345] 1H-NMR [500MHz, d8— THF、 δ (ppm)、 25。C〕により、 1 , 3—ビス(5—ヒドロキ シ— 1ーメチルー 3 プロピル 1H—ピラゾールー 4 ィル)シクロブテンジイリゥム— 2, 4— ジォラートと 1 , 3 ビス(2— (2—ェチルへキサノィル)アミノー 4, 6—ジヒドロキシーフエ- ル)シクロブテンジイリゥム— 2, 4—ジォラートと式(Π— 5)の化合物との 18: 29: 53の 混合物であった。なお、 1 , 3 ビス(5—ヒドロキシー 1ーメチルー 3—プロピル 1H ビラ ゾールー 4 ィル)シクロブテンジイリゥム— 2, 4—ジォラート、及び、 1 , 3 ビス(2— (2— ェチルへキサノィル)アミノー 4, 6—ジヒドロキシーフエ-ル)シクロブテンジイリゥム— 2, 4—ジオラー卜は、それぞれ、特願 2000— 149260号の実施例 2および特願 2000—2 66415号の実施例 2に記載の生成物と Mass、 NMR、 IRがー致した。 [0345] 1H-NMR [500 MHz, d8-THF, δ (ppm), 25. C], 1,3-bis (5-hydroxy-1-methyl-3-propyl 1H-pyrazol-4-yl) cyclobutenediiridium-2,4-diolate and 1,3-bis (2- (2-ethyl) It was a 18:29:53 mixture of xanoyl) amino-4,6-dihydroxy-phenyl) cyclobutenediiridium-2,4-diolate and a compound of formula (II-5). In addition, 1,3 bis (5-hydroxy-1-methyl-3-propyl 1H virazol-4-yl) cyclobutenedidium-2,4-diolate and 1,3 bis (2- (2-ethylhexanoyl) Amino-4,6-dihydroxy-phenyl) cyclobutenediiridium-2,4-diolate was prepared in Example 2 of Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-149260 and Example 2 of Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-2 66415, respectively. Mass, NMR and IR were in agreement with the indicated product.
[可視部吸収: max : 549nm (テトラヒドロフラン); マススペクトル: DEI— MS (pos)法: m/z = 469 (M + H); [Visible absorption: max: 549 nm (tetrahydrofuran); Mass spectrum: DEI-MS (pos) method: m / z = 469 (M + H);
1H-NMR [500MHz, d8— THF、 δ (ppm)、 25°C]:  1H-NMR [500MHz, d8—THF, δ (ppm), 25 ° C]:
10.32(lH,s), 7.96(lH,d), 5.94(lH,d), 3.57(3H,s), 2.83 (2H,t),  10.32 (lH, s), 7.96 (lH, d), 5.94 (lH, d), 3.57 (3H, s), 2.83 (2H, t),
2.52 (lH,m), 1.80— 0.80(19H,m)]  2.52 (lH, m), 1.80—0.80 (19H, m)]
[0346] 合成例 5 (式 II— 11の合成): Synthesis Example 5 (Synthesis of Formula II-11):
3, 4ージメトキシー 3—シクロブテン 1, 2—ジオン 1. Ogと 1— (p—トリル)— 3—メチルビ ラゾリン 5 オン 1. 33gとをメタノール 72mlに溶解し、この溶液に炭酸カリウム 0. 97 gを添加して 25°Cで 2時間撹拌し、析出物を濾取した。得られた固体を炭酸カリウム 0 . 37gと水 16mlの混合液にカ卩え、 50°Cで 5時間反応させた後、水 32ml及び ImolZ 1塩酸水溶液を加えて、析出物を濾取した。得られた固体に n—ブタノール 100ml、ト ルェン 100ml及び 2,—ェチルへキサン酸(3, 5—ジヒドロキシフエ-ルアミド) 0. 84g を加えた後、ジーンスターク装置を備えた反応容器に入れ、 4時間加熱還流処理し た。 反応終了後、反応混合物を 10mほでエバポレーターで濃縮した後、メタノール 10mlをカ卩え、室温まで冷却し、沈殿物を濾取して、 目的の化合物(Π— 11) 0. 80gを 得た。  3,4-Dimethoxy-3-cyclobutene 1,2-dione 1. Og and 1 .- (p-tolyl) -3-methylbiazoline 5-one 1.33 g were dissolved in 72 ml of methanol, and 0.97 g of potassium carbonate was added to this solution. Was added and the mixture was stirred at 25 ° C for 2 hours, and the precipitate was collected by filtration. The obtained solid was added to a mixture of 0.37 g of potassium carbonate and 16 ml of water and reacted at 50 ° C. for 5 hours. Then, 32 ml of water and an aqueous solution of ImolZ1 hydrochloric acid were added, and the precipitate was collected by filtration. After adding 100 ml of n-butanol, 100 ml of toluene and 0.84 g of 2, -ethylhexanoic acid (3,5-dihydroxyphenylamide) to the obtained solid, put the mixture in a reaction vessel equipped with a Gene Stark apparatus, The mixture was heated under reflux for 4 hours. After the completion of the reaction, the reaction mixture was concentrated at about 10 m by an evaporator, then 10 ml of methanol was collected, cooled to room temperature, and the precipitate was collected by filtration to obtain 0.80 g of the desired compound (Π-11). .
[融点: 143°C, 可視部吸収 max: 557nm (テトラヒドロフラ  [Melting point: 143 ° C, visible absorption max: 557nm (tetrahydrofura
ン),マススペクトル: DEI— MS法 m/z = 517 (M+) ]  ), Mass spectrum: DEI-MS method m / z = 517 (M +)]
[0347] 合成例 6 (式 II 14の合成): Synthesis Example 6 (Synthesis of Formula II 14):
合成例 5の l—(p—トリル)— 3 メチルピラゾリン 5 オン 1. 33gの代わりに、 1— (tert -ブチル)ー3—フエ二ルビラゾリン- 5—オン 1. lgを使用する以外は、合成例 5と同様 な操作を行い、 目的の化合物(式 Π— 14) 0. 33gを得た。  L- (p-tolyl) -3-methylpyrazolin-5one in Synthesis Example 5 1. Instead of 33 g, 1- (tert-butyl) -3-phenylvirazoline-5-one The same operation as in Example 5 was performed to obtain 0.33 g of the desired compound (Formula 14-14).
[融点: 138°C, 可視部吸収 max: 558nm (テトラヒドロフラ  [Melting point: 138 ° C, visible absorption max: 558 nm (tetrahydrofura
ン),マススペクトル: DEI— MS法 m/z = 545 (M+) ]  ), Mass spectrum: DEI-MS method m / z = 545 (M +)]
[0348] <フィルタの製造 > [0348] <Manufacture of filter>
実施例 1一 5、比較例 1一 11 :  Examples 11-5, Comparative Examples 11-11:
ポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルム(三菱化学ポリエステルフィルム社製 PETフィ ルム「T600E U36J (商品名)、厚み 50 /z m)に、ポリメチルメタタリレート榭脂(三菱 レーヨン社製「ダイヤナール BR— 80」(商品名)) 30wt%DME溶液に、表 3に示す 割合 (wt%Z榭脂分)の各色素、 DME、トルエンを混合溶解し、 No. 14バーコータ 一 (太祐機材社製)で塗工し、乾燥し、膜厚 4. 5 mのコーティング膜を有するフィル ム(フイノレム A)を得た。 Polyethylene terephthalate film (PET film “T600E U36J (trade name), thickness 50 / zm, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Polyester Film Co., Ltd., thickness 50 / zm)” and polymethyl methacrylate resin (“Dianal BR-80” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. Name)) In a 30wt% DME solution, as shown in Table 3. A mixture of each dye, DME, and toluene at a ratio (wt% Z 榭 fat) was dissolved and coated with No. 14 Bar Coater I (manufactured by Taiyu Kiki Co., Ltd.), and dried to form a coating film with a thickness of 4.5 m. (Finorem A) was obtained.
[0349] [表 3] [Table 3]
Figure imgf000106_0001
Figure imgf000106_0001
[0350] 表 2中、「TY-300」は、旭電ィ匕工業社製の品番: ΤΥ-300 (商品名)の色素である。  [0350] In Table 2, "TY-300" is a dye of Asahi Den-Dai Kogyo Co., Ltd., product number: ΤΥ-300 (trade name).
[0351] ポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルム(三菱化学ポリエステルフィルム社製 PETフィ ルム「T600E W07J (商品名)、厚み 100 μ m)に、脂環式アルキルメタタリレート榭 脂(日立化成工業社製「ォブトレッツ OZ— 1100」(商品名))榭脂分 35wt%、 MEK3 2. 5wt%、トルエン 32. 5wt%溶液にジィモ -ゥム系近赤外線吸収色素(N, N, N, , N,ーテトラキス(p ジブチルァミノフエ-ル) p フエ-レンジィモ-ゥムの六フッ化 アンチモン酸塩) 11. 3%Z榭脂分、トルエン、 MEKを混合溶解して、 No. 10バー コーター (太祐機材 (株)製)で塗工し、乾燥し,膜厚 3. 0 mのコーティング膜を得 た。得られたフィルムの裏面に、脂環式アルキルメタタリレート榭脂(日立化成工業社 製「ォプトレッツ OZ— 1100」(商品名))榭脂分 35wt%、 MEK32. 5wt%、トルエン 32. 5wt%溶液にアミノチオールニッケル錯体近赤外線吸収色素 {ビス 2, 2— [1, 2—ジ(3 フルオロフェ -ル)エチレンジィミン]ベンゼンチォラート }-ッケル(Π) 5. 0 wt%Z榭脂分、トルエン、 MEKを混合溶解して同様にコーティングしたフィルムと、 上記フィルタ Aと、電磁波シールドメッシュ(線巾 10 m、線ピッチ 250 μ m)、ガラス を貼り合わせ、更に反射防止フィルム(日本油脂社製「リアルック 8201UV」(商品名 ) )を貼り合わせて、プラズマディスプレイパネル用フィルタを得た。 [0351] A polyethylene terephthalate film (Mitsubishi Chemical Polyester Film's PET film "T600E W07J (trade name), thickness 100 µm)" and an alicyclic alkyl methacrylate resin (Hitachi Kasei Kogyo's "Obtretz OZ" — 1100 ”(trade name): 35% by weight of fat, 2.5% by weight of MEK3, 32.5% by weight of toluene in a solution of a dymo-pium-based near-infrared absorbing dye (N, N, N,, N, -tetrakis (p-dibutyl No. 10 bar coater (Tayu Kikai Co., Ltd.) by mixing and dissolving 3% Z-fat, toluene and MEK. And dried to obtain a coating film with a thickness of 3.0 m. It was. On the back surface of the obtained film, alicyclic alkyl methacrylate resin (“Optrez OZ-1100” (trade name), manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.) 35% by weight of fat, 32.5% by weight of MEK, 32.5% by weight of toluene In solution, aminothiol nickel complex near-infrared absorbing dye {Bis 2,2- [1,2-di (3fluorophenyl) ethylenedimine] benzenethiolate} -nickel (Π) 5.0 wt% Z , Toluene, and MEK are mixed and dissolved, and a film coated in the same manner, the filter A, an electromagnetic shielding mesh (line width 10 m, line pitch 250 μm), and glass are bonded together. Manufactured by Rialok 8201UV (trade name)), to obtain a filter for a plasma display panel.
[0352] <フィルタの評価方法 > [0352] <Filter evaluation method>
(1)透過率:  (1) Transmittance:
分光光度計(島津製作所社製「UV3100PC」(商品名))により、フィルタの 612nm (Te%)、 555nm— 540nm (lnm間隔) 545nm (Tc%)、 525nm (Tb%)、 437nm (Td%)の各光線波長の透過率を測定し、 555nm— 540nmについては平均透過率 (Ta%)を算出し、 TbZTa値を求めた。その結果は、表 4に示す。  612nm (Te%), 555nm-540nm (interval of lnm) 545nm (Tc%), 525nm (Tb%), 437nm (Td%) of filter by spectrophotometer (“UV3100PC” (trade name) manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) The transmittance at each light wavelength was measured, and the average transmittance (Ta%) was calculated for 555 nm to 540 nm, and the TbZTa value was determined. The results are shown in Table 4.
[0353] [表 4] [Table 4]
透過率 (%) 555 540 Transmittance (%) 555 540
nmの平  nm flat
Tb/Ta値 Tb / Ta value
612nm 545nm 473nm 525nm 均透過率 612nm 545nm 473nm 525nm average transmittance
Te(%) Tc( ) Td(%) Tb(%) (%)  Te (%) Tc () Td (%) Tb (%) (%)
実施例 1 29.6 32.8 34.2 46.6 32.5 1.43 実施例 2 36.6 37.0 39.6 49.3 35.5 1.39 実施例 3 22.8 25.4 25.4 41.8 24.6 1.70 実施例 4 33.5 33.9 36.5 48.2 34.2 1.41 実施例 5 31.1 33.9 35.4 44.2 33.3 1.33 比較例 1 48.1 34.9 36.7 48.4 34.7 1.39 比較例 2 29.6 32.8 45.3 46.7 32.5 1.43 比較例 3 47.4 34.8 45.6 48.4 34.6 1.40 比較例 4 19.9 31.2 36.2 45.2 30.9 1.47 比較例 5 29.7 32.8 20.2 46.6 32.6 1.43 比較例 6 20.2 31.3 20.0 45.2 30.9 1.45 比較例 7 48.6 36.1 43.6 48.9 36.6 1.34 比較例 8 22.7 32.5 47.1 47.9 32.8 1.46 比較例 9 56.3 36.2 35.7 46.0 35.7 1.29 比較例 10 31.1 33.9 45.3 44.2 33.3 1.33 比較例 11 47.4 46.4 48.6 49.5 47.1 1.05  Example 1 29.6 32.8 34.2 46.6 32.5 1.43 Example 2 36.6 37.0 39.6 49.3 35.5 1.39 Example 3 22.8 25.4 25.4 41.8 24.6 1.70 Example 4 33.5 33.9 33.9 36.5 48.2 34.2 1.41 Example 5 31.1 33.9 35.4 44.2 33.3 1.33 Comparative example 1 48.1 34.9 36.7 48.4 34.7 1.39 Comparative Example 2 29.6 32.8 45.3 46.7 32.5 1.43 Comparative Example 3 47.4 34.8 45.6 48.4 34.6 1.40 Comparative Example 4 19.9 31.2 36.2 45.2 30.9 1.47 Comparative Example 5 29.7 32.8 20.2 46.6 32.6 1.43 Comparative Example 6 20.2 31.3 20.0 45.2 30.9 1.45 Comparative Example Example 7 48.6 36.1 43.6 48.9 36.6 1.34 Comparative example 8 22.7 32.5 47.1 47.9 32.8 1.46 Comparative example 9 56.3 36.2 35.7 46.0 35.7 1.29 Comparative example 10 31.1 33.9 45.3 44.2 33.3 1.33 Comparative example 11 47.4 46.4 48.6 49.5 47.1 1.05
[0354] (2)フィルタ着色の視感評価: (2) Visual evaluation of filter coloring:
プラズマディスプレイ(日立製作所社製「W32— PD2100」(商品名))から前面ガラ スフィルタを取り外した後のディスプレイパネルの前にフィルタを設置し、プラズマディ スプレイの電源を切断した状態で、 3波長域発行形昼白色蛍光灯および 3波長域発 光形昼光色蛍光灯のどちらか一方でフィルタを照射し、それぞれの場合についてフ ィルタの色調、コントラストを目視評価した。なお、評価は天井に 3波長域発行形昼白 色蛍光灯と 3波長域発光形昼光色蛍光灯のそれぞれが設置された暗室内で実施し た。その結果は、表 5に示す。  After removing the front glass filter from the plasma display (“W32-PD2100” (trade name) manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.), install the filter in front of the display panel and turn off the plasma display. The filter was illuminated with either one of the daylight fluorescent lamps of the region-emitting type and the daylight fluorescent lamp of the three-wavelength region, and the color tone and contrast of the filter were visually evaluated in each case. The evaluation was performed in a dark room where a three-wavelength region-emitting daylight fluorescent lamp and a three-wavelength region-emitting daylight fluorescent lamp were installed on the ceiling. The results are shown in Table 5.
[0355] [表 5] フィルタ色 (色目評価) コン卜ラ P D P視感 [Table 5] Filter color (Eye evaluation) Controller PDP sensation
3波長形昼白色 3波長形昼光色 ス卜 透過率 (%) 実施例 1 グレー やや青みのグレー 良い 37.9 実施例 2 グレー やや青みのグレー 良い 38.0 実施例 3 グレー やや青みのグレー 良い 31.4 実施例 4 グレー やや青みのグレー 良い 39.1 実施例 5 グレー やや青みのダレ一 良い 37.7 比較例 1 赤 赤 良い 43.6 比較例 2 赤紫 青みの赤紫 良い 38.2 比較例 3 赤 赤みの赤紫 良い 43.5 比較例 4 やや青みの緑 青緑 良い 34.5 比較例 5 黄みの黄緑 黄みの黄緑 良い 37.6 比較例 6 緑みの黄緑 緑みの黄緑 良い 34.2 比較例 7 赤 赤 良い 44.1 比較例 8 やや青みの緑 青緑 良い 35.5 比較例 9 赤 赤みの赤紫 良い 44.3 比較例 10 赤紫 青みの赤紫 良い 37.9 比較例 11 グレー やや青みのグレー 悪い 45.8  Three-wavelength day white Three-wavelength daylight color Storm transmittance (%) Example 1 Gray Slightly bluish gray Good 37.9 Example 2 Gray Slightly bluish gray Good 38.0 Example 3 Gray Slightly bluish gray Good 31.4 Example 4 gray Slightly bluish gray Good 39.1 Example 5 Gray Slightly bluish dripping Good 37.7 Comparative Example 1 Red Red Good 43.6 Comparative Example 2 Reddish purple Bluish reddish purple Good 38.2 Comparative Example 3 Red Reddish reddish purple Good 43.5 Comparative Example 4 Slightly blueish Green Blue Green Good 34.5 Comparative Example 5 Yellowish Yellow Green Yellowish Yellow Green Good 37.6 Comparative Example 6 Greenish Yellow Green Greenish Yellow Green Good 34.2 Comparative Example 7 Red Red Good 44.1 Comparative Example 8 Slightly Greenish Blue Green Good 35.5 Comparative Example 9 Red Reddish Reddish Purple Good 44.3 Comparative Example 10 Red Purple Blued Reddish Purple Good 37.9 Comparative Example 11 Gray Somewhat bluish gray Poor 45.8
[0356] 以下の諸例は第 2発明の説明のためのものである。 The following examples are for describing the second invention.
[0357] 実施例 6 :  Example 6:
<外光導入層の形成 >  <Formation of external light introduction layer>
ハードコート処理がなされたポリアクリルフィルム(厚さ 100 m、屈折率 1. 49)を真 空蒸着装置にセットし、真空室内を約 8Torrまで排気した後、酸素ガスを約 5Torr〖こ なるまで導入した。次いで、フッ化マグネシウム (屈折率 1. 38)を電子ビーム蒸発源 を使用して蒸発させ、フィルム上に厚さ約 140nm蒸着して、外光導入層とした。この 外光導入層について、分光光度計 (島津製作所社社製「UV3100PC」(商品名))を 使用し、 3波長域発光形蛍光管 F10の発光スペクトル (JIS Z8719— 1996)を使用 して、 JIS Z8722— 2000による計算方法によって視感透過率(定 ¾[IS Z8105— 1 982)を求めたところ、 95. 6%であった。 A polyacryl film (thickness: 100 m, refractive index: 1.49) that has been subjected to hard coating is set in a vacuum evaporation apparatus, the vacuum chamber is evacuated to about 8 Torr, and oxygen gas is introduced until about 5 Torr. did. Next, magnesium fluoride (refractive index: 1.38) was evaporated using an electron beam evaporation source, and was evaporated to a thickness of about 140 nm on the film to form an external light introducing layer. For the external light introduction layer, use a spectrophotometer (“UV3100PC” (trade name) manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) and use the emission spectrum (JIS Z8719—1996) of the F10 three-band fluorescent tube. Then, the luminous transmittance (constant [IS Z8105-1 982]) obtained by the calculation method according to JIS Z8722-2000 was 95.6%.
[0358] <外光抑制層の形成 >  <Formation of External Light Suppression Layer>
ポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルム(三菱化学ポリエステルフィルム社製 PETフィ ルム「T600EU36」(商品名)、厚み 50 /z m)に、(1)ポリメチルメタタリレート榭脂(三 菱レイヨン社製「ダイヤナール BR— 80」(商品名)) 30wt%の DME溶液、(2) 1, 3— ビス(2— (2 ェチルへキサノィルァミノ) 4, 6—ジヒドロキシーフエ-ル)シクロブテンジ イリゥム—2, 4—ジォラート 0. 438wt%Z榭脂分、(3) 1— (2—ェタンスルフォ-ルアミ ノー 4, 6—ジヒドロキシーフエ-ル)一 3— (4 エタンスルフォ -ルァミノ一 2, 6—ジヒドロキ シーフエ-ル)シクロブテンジイリゥム— 2, 4—ジォラート 0. 108wt%Z榭脂分、(4) 1 , 3 ビス(2, 4, 6—トリヒドロキシーフエ-ル)シクロブテンジイリゥム一 2, 4—ジォラート 0. 067wt%Z榭脂分、(5) 1—(2—(2 ェチルへキサノィルァミノ) 4, 6—ジヒドロキ シーフエ-ル)—3— (5—ヒドロキシー 1ーメチルー 3—プロピル 1H—ピラゾールー 4 ィル) シクロブテンジイリゥム一 2, 4—ジォラート 0. 250wt%Z榭脂分、 (6) 1, 3 ビス(5—ヒ ドロキシ— 1ーメチルー 3 プロピル 1H—ピラゾールー 4 ィル)シクロブテンジイリゥム— 2, 4ージォラート 0. 149wt%Z榭脂分、(7)ダイヤレジンイェロー L3G (三菱ィ匕学社 製、(商品名)) 1. 130 %7榭脂分、(8) DME、(9)トルエンを混合溶解し、 NO. 14バーコ一ター (太祐機材社製)で塗工し、乾燥し、膜厚 4. 5 mのコーティング膜 を有する外光抑制層 11を得た。  Polyethylene terephthalate film (Mitsubishi Chemical Polyester Film PET film “T600EU36” (trade name), thickness 50 / zm) was added to (1) polymethyl methacrylate resin (Mitsubishi Rayon “Dianal BR— 80 ”(trade name)) 30% by weight DME solution, (2) 1,3-bis (2- (2ethylhexanoylamino) 4,6-dihydroxy-phenyl) cyclobutenediyl-2,4-diolate 0. 438 wt% Z fat, (3) 1- (2-ethanesulfonylamino 4,6-dihydroxyphenyl) -3- (4 ethanesulfo-luamino-1,2,6-dihydroxyphenyl) cyclobutenediyl 2,4-Diolate 0.18 wt% Z-fat, (4) 1,3 bis (2,4,6-trihydroxyphenol) cyclobutenediyl-1,4-diolate 0 067wt% Z fat, (5) 1- (2- (2ethylhexanoylamino) 4,6-dihydroxy sulfide) -3- (5-hydroxy-1-methyl-3-propyl 1H-pyrazole-4yl) cyclobutenediyl-1,4-diolate 0.25 wt% Z fat, (6 ) 1,3-bis (5-hydroxy-1-methyl-3-propyl 1H-pyrazole-4yl) cyclobutenediirim-2,4diolate 0.149 wt% Z-fat, (7) Diamond Resin Yellow L3G (Mitsubishi) 1. 130% 7% fat, (8) DME, (9) Toluene mixed and dissolved, and coated with NO. 14 bar coater (Tayu Kiki Co., Ltd.) After drying, an external light suppressing layer 11 having a coating film having a thickness of 4.5 m was obtained.
[0359] この外光抑制層の透過スペクトルは図 4に透過スペクトル 16として示す様に、約 55 Onm及び約 600nmに極小値を有して!/、た。  [0359] As shown in Fig. 4 as the transmission spectrum 16, the transmission spectrum of the external light suppressing layer had local minimum values at about 55 Onm and about 600nm.
[0360] <近赤外線吸収層の形成 >  [0360] <Formation of near-infrared absorbing layer>
ポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルム(三菱化学ポリエステルフィルム社製 PETフィ ルム「T600EW07」(商品名)、厚み 100 m)に、脂環式アルキルメタタリレート榭脂 (日立化成工業社製「ォブトレッツ OZ— 1100」(商品名))榭脂分 35wt%、 MEK32 . 5wt%及びトルエン 32. 5wt%力 成る溶液にジィモ -ゥム吸収色素(N, N, Ν', Ν',ーテトラキス(ρ—ジブルチルァミノフエ-ル) ρ—フエ-レンジィモ-ゥムの六フッ 化アンチモン酸塩) 11. 3%Ζ榭脂分、トルエン及び ΜΕΚを混合溶解して、 NO. 10 バーコ一ター(太祐機材社製)で塗工し、乾燥して厚み 3. O /z mのコーティング膜を 作製した。 Polyethylene terephthalate film (Mitsubishi Chemical Polyester Film's PET film “T600EW07” (trade name), 100 m thick) and alicyclic alkyl methacrylate resin (Hitachi Kasei Kogyo's “Ovtrez OZ-1100” ( Trade name)) A dimo-pum absorption dye (N, N, Ν ', Ν', -tetrakis (ρ-dibrutylaminophen) was added to a solution consisting of 35% by weight of fat, 32.5% by weight of MEK and 32.5% by weight of toluene. -R) ρ-Phenylenedipodium hexafluoride antimonate) 11. Mix and dissolve 3% fat, toluene and ΜΕΚ to obtain NO. Coating was performed with a bar coater (manufactured by Taiyu Kikai Co., Ltd.), and the coating was dried to prepare a coating film having a thickness of 3. O / zm.
[0361] 次 、で、このフィルムの裏面に、脂環式アルキルメタタリレート榭脂(日立化成工業 社製「ォプトレッツ OZ— 1100」(商品名))榭脂分 35wt%、 MEK32. 5wt%及びトル ェン 32. 5wt%から成る溶液にアミノチオールニッケル錯体近近赤外線吸収色素 {ビ ス—2, 2-[1, 2-ジ(3-フルオロフェ -ル)エチレンジィミン]ベンゼンチォラート } -ッケ ル(II) 5. 0 %7榭脂分、トルエン及び MEKを混合溶解して、 No. 10バーコータ 一 (太祐機材社製)で塗工し、乾燥して両面に近赤外線吸収膜を有する近赤外線吸 収層 7を形成した。  [0361] Next, on the back surface of this film, an alicyclic alkyl methacrylate resin ("Optrez OZ-1100" (trade name) manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.) was used. Aminothiol nickel complex near-infrared absorbing dye {bis-2,2- [1,2-di (3-fluorophenyl) ethylenedimine] benzenethiolate} in a solution consisting of 32.5 wt% toluene Mix and dissolve 5.0% 7% fat, toluene and MEK, apply with No. 10 bar coater (Tayu Kikai Co., Ltd.), dry and apply near infrared absorbing films on both sides. A near-infrared absorbing layer 7 was formed.
[0362] <電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの形成 >  <Formation of Filter for Electronic Display>
ガラス板 (厚さ 3mm)の外光入射面に上述した外光導入層を貼り合わせ、反対側の 面に近赤外線吸収層および外光抑制層を順に貼り合わせた。外光抑制層の残りの 面には、電磁波シールド層(厚み 125 μ mの PETフィルム(東洋紡績社製「A4300」 (商品名)上に、線幅 250 μ m、線ピッチ 10 μ mの電磁波シールド銅メッシュフィルム が貼り付けされたもの)を金属メッシュフィルム側に貼り合わせた。貼り合わせは、それ ぞれ界面に設けた粘着剤層により行った。そして、全体をオートクレープで加圧加温 処理した。この結果、光源側から、外光導入層 Zガラス Z近赤外吸収層 Z外光抑制 層 Z電磁波シールド層という構成の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを形成した。  The above-described external light introducing layer was bonded to the external light incident surface of the glass plate (thickness: 3 mm), and the near-infrared absorbing layer and the external light suppressing layer were sequentially bonded to the opposite surface. An electromagnetic wave shielding layer (125 μm thick PET film (“A4300” manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd.) (trade name), a 250 μm line width, 10 μm line pitch) The shielded copper mesh film was affixed to the metal mesh film side, with the adhesive layers provided at the respective interfaces, and the whole was heated under pressure with an autoclave. As a result, a filter for an electronic display having a configuration of an external light introducing layer Z glass Z near infrared absorbing layer Z external light suppressing layer Z electromagnetic wave shielding layer was formed from the light source side.
[0363] そして、この電子ディスプレイ用フィルタをプラズマディスプレイパネル(日立製作所 社製「W32-PD2100」(商品名))の前に配置したディスプレイ装置を構成した。  [0363] Then, a display device was constructed in which this electronic display filter was arranged in front of a plasma display panel ("W32-PD2100" (trade name) manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.).
[0364] <評価 >  [0364] <Evaluation>
このフィルタの、 3波長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光のピーク(545nm)における光 線透過率 Y2 (%)及びディスプレイの緑色発光ピークの波長(525nm)における光線 透過率 Y4 (%)、プラズマディスプレイの白色発光スペクトルを使用した視感透過率 Y1 (%)、 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F10の発光スペクトルを使用した視感透過率 Y3 ( %)を評価した。  For this filter, the light transmittance Y2 (%) at the peak of green emission (545 nm) of the three-band emission fluorescent tube and the light transmittance Y4 (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak (525 nm) of the display, and the plasma display The luminous transmittance Y1 (%) using the white light emission spectrum and the luminous transmittance Y3 (%) using the light emission spectrum of the three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10 were evaluated.
[0365] その結果、 Yl = 35. 65、 Υ2 = 31. 67、 Υ3 = 32. 47、 Υ4=43. 37であり、  [0365] As a result, Yl = 35.65, Υ2 = 31.67, Υ3 = 32.47, Υ4 = 43.37,
Y4-Y2= l l. 7 ( > 5) Yl-Y2 = 3. 98 ( > 1) Y4-Y2 = l l. 7 (> 5) Yl-Y2 = 3.98 (> 1)
Yl-Y3 = 3. 18 ( > 1)  Yl-Y3 = 3.18 (> 1)
であった。  Met.
[0366] また、正反射成分 (視感反射率 (5° 鏡面) )を以下の様に評価した。  [0366] The specular reflection component (luminous reflectance (5 ° mirror surface)) was evaluated as follows.
[0367] <反射スペクトル測定 >  [0367] <Reflection spectrum measurement>
まず、入射角 5° の積分球付き分光光度計 (島津製作所社製「UV3150」(商品名 ) )を使用し、基準ミラーを使用して基準をとつた後、サンプルを外光導入層側から入 光する様に設置し、 380— 780nmの領域を lmm間隔で測定した。  First, using a spectrophotometer with an integrating sphere (Shimadzu Corporation “UV3150” (trade name)) with an incident angle of 5 °, a reference is taken using a reference mirror, and the sample is taken from the outside light introduction layer side. It was set up so that light was incident, and the area of 380-780 nm was measured at lmm intervals.
[0368] <視感反射率 (JIS Z8105— 2000)の算出 >  [0368] <Calculation of luminous reflectance (JIS Z8105-2000)>
得られた反射スペクトルを使用し、 XYZ表示計の三刺激値の Yを計算し、視感反射 率とした。計算は、 JIS Z8105— 2000に基づく算出方法により行った。なお、外光 源として、 JIS Z8179— 1996で規定される発光スペクトルを有する 3波長域発光形 蛍光灯 F10を使用した。  Using the obtained reflection spectrum, the Y of the tristimulus value of the XYZ display was calculated and used as the luminous reflectance. The calculation was performed by a calculation method based on JIS Z8105-2000. As an external light source, a three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10 having an emission spectrum specified in JIS Z8179-1996 was used.
[0369] 実施例 6で形成したフィルタを評価した結果、?見感反射率(5° 鏡面)は 2. 65%で あった。  [0369] As a result of evaluating the filter formed in Example 6,? The luminous reflectance (5 ° mirror surface) was 2.65%.
[0370] この様にして構成したディスプレイ装置を JIS Z8719— 1996で規定される発光ス ベクトルを有する F10型 3波長域発光形蛍光管を外光源として点灯させた室内に設 置し、画面中央部に白色を、残りを黒色を表示させた状態での明暗コントラストと、ま た電源断状態におけるフィルタの色をそれぞれ目視で評価した。  [0370] The display device configured as described above is placed in a room where an F10 type three-wavelength-band fluorescent tube having a light emission vector specified in JIS Z8719-1996 is turned on as an external light source, and a central portion of the screen is displayed. Then, the contrast of light and dark when the white color was displayed and the remaining color was displayed black, and the color of the filter when the power was turned off were visually evaluated.
[0371] 比較例 12 :  [0371] Comparative Example 12:
外光が外光抑制層に至る光路中に電磁波シールド層が設けられた電子ディスプレ ィ用フィルタを以下の手順で形成した。なお、各層の組成および形成方法は実施例 6と同一である。  An electronic display filter provided with an electromagnetic wave shielding layer in the optical path where external light reaches the external light suppressing layer was formed by the following procedure. Note that the composition and forming method of each layer are the same as in Example 6.
[0372] ガラス板 (厚さ 3mm)の外光入射面に上述した外光導入層を貼り付け、反対側の面 に電磁波シールド層(線幅 250 μ m、線ピッチ 10 μ mの電磁波シールド銅メッシュフ イルム)を貼り合わせ、次に電磁波シールド層の凹凸面に近赤外線吸収層、次いで 外光抑制層の順でそれぞれ粘着剤層を介して貼り合わせ、オートクレープで加圧カロ 温処理した。 [0373] 得られた電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを実施例 6と同様に評価した。 [0372] The above-mentioned external light introducing layer is attached to the external light incident surface of a glass plate (thickness: 3 mm), and an electromagnetic wave shielding layer (electromagnetic wave shielding copper having a line width of 250 μm and a line pitch of 10 μm) is attached to the opposite surface. Then, a near infrared absorbing layer and then an external light suppressing layer were respectively pasted on the concave and convex surface of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer via an adhesive layer, followed by heat treatment with an autoclave. [0373] The obtained filter for an electronic display was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 6.
実施 f列 6と同様に Y1— Y4を柳』定したところ、 Yl = 36. 00、 Υ2 = 32. 01、 Υ3 = 3 2. 78、 Υ4=43. 89であり、  Implementation Y1— Y4 willow as in row 6; Yl = 36.00, Υ2 = 32.01, Υ3 = 3 2.78, Υ4 = 43.89,
Y4-Y2= l l. 88 ( > 5)  Y4-Y2 = l l. 88 (> 5)
Υ1-Υ2 = 3. 99 ( > 1)  Υ1-Υ2 = 3.99 (> 1)
Υ1-Υ3 = 3. 22 ( > 1)  Υ1-Υ3 = 3.22 (> 1)
であった。  Met.
[0374] また、正反射成分を実施例 6と同様に評価した結果、視感反射率 (5° 鏡面)は 2.  The specular reflection component was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 6, and as a result, the luminous reflectance (5 ° mirror surface) was 2.
79%であった。また、明暗コントラストと電源断状態におけるフィルタの色を実施例 6 と同様にして評価した。  79%. The contrast of light and dark and the color of the filter in the power-off state were evaluated in the same manner as in Example 6.
[0375] <評価結果 >  [0375] <Evaluation results>
電磁波シールド層が外光抑制層よりも発光表示デバイス側に配置された実施例 6 については、外光が外光抑制層に至る光路中に電磁波シールド層が設けられた比 較例 12と比べて反射率 (戻り光)が約 5%減少しており、目視による評価によっても明 暗コントラストが向上していることが認められた。また、フィルタの色についても、実施 例 6の構成の方が暗ぐまた引き締まった様に感じられた。  Example 6 in which the electromagnetic wave shield layer was disposed closer to the light emitting display device than the external light suppression layer was compared with Comparative Example 12 in which the electromagnetic wave shield layer was provided in the optical path where the external light reaches the external light suppression layer. The reflectance (return light) was reduced by about 5%, and it was confirmed by visual evaluation that the contrast was improved. Also, regarding the color of the filter, the configuration of Example 6 was felt darker and firmer.
[0376] 実施例 7 :  Example 7:
<電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの形成 >  <Formation of filter for electronic display>
実施例 6と同様にして外光導入層、近赤外吸収層並びに外光抑制層を形成した。 すなわち、ガラス板 (厚さ 3mm)の外光入射面に上述した外光導入層を貼り合わせ、 反対側の面に近赤外線吸収層、外光抑制層の順に貼り合わせた。各層の貼り合わ せは、それぞれ界面に設けた粘着剤層により行った。外光抑制層の残りの面には、 厚み 125 /z mの PETフィルム(東洋紡績社製「A4300」(商品名))の片面に、厚さ 3 0 mの酸化インジウム層、厚さ 15 mの銀薄膜層、厚さ 30 mの酸化インジウム層 を真空下(5 X 10"5Torr)でスパッタリング法によりこの順に積層して得た透明電磁波 シールドフィルムを貼り合わせた。 In the same manner as in Example 6, an external light introducing layer, a near infrared absorbing layer, and an external light suppressing layer were formed. That is, the above-described external light introducing layer was bonded to the external light incident surface of the glass plate (thickness: 3 mm), and the near-infrared absorbing layer and the external light suppressing layer were bonded to the opposite surface in this order. The bonding of each layer was performed using an adhesive layer provided at the interface. On the other side of the external light suppression layer, a 30 m thick indium oxide layer and a 15 m thick PET film (A4300 (trade name) manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd.) A transparent electromagnetic wave shielding film obtained by laminating a silver thin film layer and an indium oxide layer having a thickness of 30 m in this order by a sputtering method under vacuum (5 × 10 ″ 5 Torr) was bonded.
[0377] そして、全体をオートクレープで加圧加温処理した。この結果、光源側から、外光導 入層 Zガラス Z近赤外吸収層 Z外光抑制層 Z電磁波シールド層という構成の電子 ディスプレイ用フィルタを形成した。 [0377] Then, the whole was heated under pressure by an autoclave. As a result, from the light source side, an electron with a configuration of external light guiding layer Z glass Z near-infrared absorbing layer Z external light suppressing layer Z electromagnetic wave shielding layer A display filter was formed.
[0378] この様にして得られた電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを実施例 6と同様に評価した。  The electronic display filter thus obtained was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 6.
[0379] 実施例 6と同様に Y1— Y4を測定したところ、 Yl = 28. 99、Υ2 = 26. 70、Υ3 = 2 5. 84、 Υ4 = 38. 92であり、 [0379] When Y1 to Y4 were measured in the same manner as in Example 6, Yl = 28.99, Υ2 = 26.70, Υ3 = 25.84, Υ4 = 38.92, and
Υ4-Υ2= 12. 22 ( > 5)  Υ4-Υ2 = 12.22 (> 5)
Υ1-Υ2 = 2. 29 ( > 1)  Υ1-Υ2 = 2.29 (> 1)
Υ1-Υ3 = 3. 14 ( > 1)  Υ1-Υ3 = 3.14 (> 1)
であった。  Met.
[0380] 正反射成分を実施例 6と同様に評価した結果、視感反射率(5° 鏡面)は 3. 02% であった。また、明暗コントラストと電源断状態におけるフィルタの色を実施例 6と同様 にして評価した。  [0380] As a result of evaluating the specular reflection component in the same manner as in Example 6, the luminous reflectance (5 ° mirror surface) was 3.02%. Further, the contrast of light and dark and the color of the filter in the power-off state were evaluated in the same manner as in Example 6.
[0381] 比較例 13 :  [0381] Comparative Example 13:
ガラス板の反対側の面に透明電磁波シールド層、近赤外線吸収層、外光抑制層の 順に貼り合わせた以外は実施例 7と同様にして、光源側から、外光導入層 Ζガラス Ζ 電磁波シールド層 Ζ近赤外吸収層 Ζ外光抑制層という構成の電子ディスプレイ用フ ィルタを形成した。  The same procedure as in Example 7 was carried out except that the transparent electromagnetic wave shielding layer, the near-infrared absorbing layer, and the external light suppressing layer were laminated on the opposite surface of the glass plate in this order, from the light source side, the external light introducing layer Ζ glass Ζ electromagnetic wave shielding A filter for an electronic display having the following structure: layer, near-infrared absorption layer, and external light suppression layer was formed.
[0382] この様にして得られた電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを実施例 6と同様に評価した。  [0382] The electronic display filter thus obtained was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 6.
[0383] 実施例 6と同様に Y1— Υ4を測定したところ、 Yl = 29. 05、 Υ2 = 26. 88、 Υ3 = 2 5. 98、 Υ4 = 38. 86であり、 [0383] When Y1-Υ4 was measured in the same manner as in Example 6, Yl = 29.05, Υ2 = 26.88, Υ3 = 25.98, Υ4 = 38.86, and
Y4-Y2= l l. 98 ( > 5)  Y4-Y2 = l l. 98 (> 5)
Υ1-Υ2 = 2. 17 ( > 1)  Υ1-Υ2 = 2.17 (> 1)
Υ1-Υ3 = 3. 07 ( > 1)  Υ1-Υ3 = 3.07 (> 1)
であった。  Met.
[0384] 正反射成分を実施例 6と同様に評価した結果、視感反射率(5° 鏡面)は 8. 36% であった。また、明暗コントラストと電源断状態におけるフィルタの色を実施例 6と同様 にして評価した。  [0384] The specular reflection component was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 6, and as a result, the luminous reflectance (5 ° mirror surface) was 8.36%. Further, the contrast of light and dark and the color of the filter in the power-off state were evaluated in the same manner as in Example 6.
[0385] <評価結果 >  [0385] <Evaluation results>
電磁波シールド層が外光抑制層よりも発光表示デバイス側に配置された実施例 7 については、外光が外光抑制層に至る光路中に電磁波シールド層が設けられた比 較例 13と比べて反射率 (戻り光)が約 64%減少しており、 目視による評価によっても 明暗コントラストが向上していることが認められた。また、フィルタの色についても、実 施例 7構成の方が暗ぐまた引き締まった様に感じられた。 Example 7 in which the electromagnetic wave shield layer was disposed closer to the light emitting display device than the external light suppression layer As for Comparative Example 13, the reflectance (return light) was reduced by about 64% as compared with Comparative Example 13 in which the electromagnetic wave shielding layer was provided in the optical path where the external light reaches the external light suppressing layer. It was recognized that the contrast was improved. Also, regarding the color of the filter, the configuration of Example 7 was felt darker and firmer.
[0386] 以下の諸例は第 3発明の説明のためのものである。  [0386] The following examples are for explanation of the third invention.
[0387] 実施例 8 :  [0387] Example 8:
<外光導入層の形成 >  <Formation of external light introduction layer>
ハードコート処理がなされたポリアクリルフィルム(厚さ 100 m、屈折率 1. 49)を真 空蒸着装置にセットし、真空室内を約 8Torrまで排気した後、酸素ガスを約 5Torr〖こ なるまで導入した。次いで、フッ化マグネシウム (屈折率 1. 38)を電子ビーム蒸発源 を使用して蒸発させ、フィルム上に厚さ約 140nm蒸着して、外光導入層 1 (図 7)とし た。この外光導入層について、分光光度計 (島津製作所社製「UV3100PC」(商品 名))を使用し、 3波長域発光形蛍光管 F10の発光スペクトル (JIS Z8719— 1996) を使用して、 JIS Z8722— 2000による計算方法によって視感透過率(定 ¾[IS Z8 105— 1982)を求めたところ、 95. 6%であった。  A polyacryl film (thickness: 100 m, refractive index: 1.49) that has been subjected to hard coating is set in a vacuum evaporation apparatus, the vacuum chamber is evacuated to about 8 Torr, and oxygen gas is introduced until about 5 Torr. did. Next, magnesium fluoride (refractive index: 1.38) was evaporated using an electron beam evaporation source, and was evaporated to a thickness of about 140 nm on the film to form an external light introducing layer 1 (FIG. 7). This external light introduction layer was measured using a spectrophotometer (“UV3100PC” (trade name) manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) and the emission spectrum (JIS Z8719—1996) of the F10 three-band fluorescent tube. The luminous transmittance (constant [IS Z8 105-1982]) determined by the calculation method using Z8722-2000 was 95.6%.
[0388] <外光抑制層の形成 >  <Formation of External Light Suppression Layer>
基材としてのポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルム (東洋紛績社製 PETフィルム「A 7300」(商口 ¾名)、厚み 125 m、ヘイズ値 (JIS K7105【こよる柳』定値) 0. 40/0)【こ、 ポリメチルメタタリレート榭脂(三菱レーヨン社製「ダイヤナール BR— 80」(商品名)) 30 wt%トルエン溶液に上述の一般式 (XVII)で表されるジフエ-ルスクァリリウム系化合 物である以下の組成を有する化合物 Aを 0. 37 %7榭脂分、化合物 Bを 0. 26wt %7榭脂分、 PYL3G (三菱ィ匕学社製) 0. 80wt%Z榭脂分、 DME及びトルエンを 混合溶解し、 NO. 30バーコ一ター (太祐機材社製)で塗工し、乾燥し、膜厚 4. 5 μ mのコーティング膜を有する外光抑制層 11を得た。 Polyethylene terephthalate film as a substrate (Toyo紛績Ltd. PET film "A 7300" (trade port ¾ name), thickness 125 m, haze value (JIS K7105 [Koyoru willow "value) 0.4 0/0) [this, Jifue represented by polymethyl methacrylate Tari rate榭脂(Mitsubishi rayon Co., Ltd. "Dianal BR- 80" (trade name)) 30 w t% toluene solution of the above general formula (XVII) - Rusukuaririumu based compound Compound A having the following composition is 0.37% 7% fat, Compound B 0.26wt% 7% fat, PYL3G (manufactured by Mitsubishi Iridaku Co.) 0.80% wt Z DME and toluene were mixed and dissolved, coated with a NO.30 bar coater (manufactured by Taiyu Kikai Co., Ltd.), and dried to obtain an external light suppressing layer 11 having a coating film having a thickness of 4.5 μm.
[0389] この外光抑制層の透過スペクトル 16は図 8に示す様に、約 575nmに極小値 Kを有 していた。 [0390] [化 50] 化合物 A: [0389] The transmission spectrum 16 of the external light suppressing layer had a minimum value K at about 575 nm as shown in FIG. [0390] Compound A:
( n ) H9C4 ( H5 ) C4H9 ( n )(n) H 9 C 4 (H 5 ) C 4 H 9 (n)
Figure imgf000116_0001
Figure imgf000116_0001
[0391] [化 51] 化合物 B: [0391] Compound B:
Figure imgf000116_0002
Figure imgf000116_0002
[0392] <近赤外線吸収層の形成 > [0392] <Formation of near-infrared absorbing layer>
基材としてのポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルム (東洋紛績社製 PETフィルム「A 7300」(商口 ¾名)、厚み 125 m、ヘイズ値 (JIS K7105【こよる柳』定値) 0. 40/0)【こ、 ポリメチルメタタリレート榭脂(三菱レイヨン社製「ダイヤナール BR— 80」(商品名)) 30 wt%トルエン溶液にジィモ -ゥム系近近赤外線吸収色素(N, N, Ν', Ν',ーテトラキ ス(ρ—ジブルチルァミノフエ-ル) ρ—フエ-レンジィモ-ゥムの六フッ化アンチモン 酸塩) 7. 6%Ζ榭脂分、トルエン及び ΜΕΚを混合溶解して、 NO. 30バーコ一ター( 太祐機材社製)で塗工し、乾燥して近赤外線吸収膜を作製した。 Polyethylene terephthalate film as a substrate (Toyo紛績Ltd. PET film "A 7300" (trade port ¾ name), thickness 125 m, haze value (JIS K7105 [Koyoru willow "value) 0.4 0/0) [this, polymethyl methacrylate Tari rate榭脂(manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. "Dianal BR- 80" (trade name)) Jiimo to 30 w t% toluene solution - ©-time system near the near-infrared absorbing dye (N, N, Ν ', Ν', -tetrax (ρ-dibultylaminophen) ρ-phenylenediforme hexamonate antimonate) 7. Mix and dissolve 6% of fat, toluene and ΜΕΚ. Then, it was coated with a NO. 30 bar coater (manufactured by Taiyu Kikai Co., Ltd.) and dried to produce a near-infrared absorbing film.
[0393] 次いで、基材フィルムの裏面に、ポリメチルメタタリレート榭脂(三菱レイヨン社製「ダ ィャナール BR— 80」(商品名 ) ) 30wt%トルエン溶液にジチオールニッケル錯体近 近赤外線吸収色素 {ビス 2, 2'— [1, 2—ジ(3 クロ口フエニル)エチレンジィミン]ベン ゼンチオラート}-ッケル (11) 9. 2wt%Z榭脂分、トルエン、 THFを混合溶解して同 様にコーティングし、両面に近赤外線吸収膜を有する近赤外線吸収層 7を形成した。  [0393] Next, on the back surface of the base film, a dithiol nickel complex near-infrared absorbing dye {was added to a 30 wt% toluene solution of polymethyl methacrylate resin ("Dyanal BR-80" (trade name) manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.). Bis 2,2 '-[1,2-di (3-chlorophenyl) ethylenedimine] benzenthiolate} -Heckel (11) 9.2 Mixture of 2wt% Z-fat, toluene and THF To form a near-infrared absorbing layer 7 having near-infrared absorbing films on both sides.
[0394] <電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの形成 >  [0394] <Formation of filter for electronic display>
近赤外線吸収層の一方の面に外光抑制層を貼り合わせた。また、近赤外線吸収層 の残りの面には、電磁波シールドメッシュ(線幅 12 m、線ピッチ 300 m、開口率 約 92%)及びガラス板を貼り合わせた。最後に、ガラス板 3の外光入射面に上述した 外光導入層を貼り付け、電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを形成した。 An external light suppressing layer was bonded to one surface of the near infrared absorbing layer. Also, near infrared absorption layer The remaining surface was bonded with an electromagnetic shield mesh (line width 12 m, line pitch 300 m, aperture ratio about 92%) and a glass plate. Finally, the above-described external light introducing layer was attached to the external light incident surface of the glass plate 3 to form an electronic display filter.
[0395] そして、この電子ディスプレイ用フィルタをプラズマディスプレイパネル(日立製作所 社製「W32— PD2100」(商品名))の前に配置したディスプレイ装置を構成した。この 構成は図 7に示す構成と等 Uヽ。  [0395] Then, a display device in which this electronic display filter was arranged in front of a plasma display panel ("W32-PD2100" (trade name) manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.) was configured. This configuration is equivalent to the configuration shown in Fig. 7.
[0396] <評価 >  [0396] <Evaluation>
このフィルタの、 3波長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光のピーク(545nm)における光 線透過率 Y2 (%)及びディスプレイの緑色発光ピークの波長(525nm)における光線 透過率 Y4 (%)、プラズマディスプレイの白色発光スペクトルを使用した視感透過率 Y1 (%)、 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F10の発光スペクトルを使用した視感透過率 Y3 ( %)を評価した。  For this filter, the light transmittance Y2 (%) at the green emission peak (545 nm) of the three-wavelength emission fluorescent tube and the light transmittance Y4 (%) at the green emission peak wavelength (525 nm) of the display, and the plasma display The luminous transmittance Y1 (%) using the white light emission spectrum and the luminous transmittance Y3 (%) using the emission spectrum of the three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10 were evaluated.
[0397] その結果、 Yl =40. 7、 Υ2 = 36. 6、 Υ3 = 38. 8、 Υ4 = 51. 8であり、  [0397] As a result, Yl = 40.7, Υ2 = 36.6, Υ3 = 38.8, Υ4 = 51.8,
Υ4-Υ2= 15. 2 ( > 5)  Υ4-Υ2 = 15.2 (> 5)
Υ1-Υ2=4. 1 ( > 1)  Υ1-Υ2 = 4.1 (> 1)
Υ1-Υ3 = 1. 9 ( > 1)  Υ1-Υ3 = 1.9 (> 1)
であった。  Met.
[0398] この様にして構成したディスプレイ装置を JIS Z8719— 1996で規定される発光ス ベクトルを有する F10型 3波長域発光形蛍光管を外光源として点灯させた室内に設 置し、画面中央部に白色を、残りを黒色を表示させた状態での明暗コントラストと、ま た電源断状態におけるフィルタの色をそれぞれ目視で評価した。  [0398] The display device configured in this manner is installed in a room where an F10 type three-wavelength band light-emitting fluorescent tube having a light emission vector specified by JIS Z8719-1996 is turned on as an external light source, and a central portion of the screen is displayed. Then, the contrast of light and dark when the white color was displayed and the remaining color was displayed black, and the color of the filter when the power was turned off were visually evaluated.
[0399] 比較例 14 :  [0399] Comparative Example 14:
外光導入層を使用しない以外は実施例 8と同様にしてディスプレイ装置を構成し、 評価を行った。  A display device was constructed and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 8 except that the external light introducing layer was not used.
[0400] このフィルタについて、実施例 8と同様に Y1— Υ4を測定したところ、 Yl =40. 5、 Υ2 = 36. 5、Υ3 = 38. 6、Υ4 = 51. 7であり、  [0400] For this filter, when Y1-—4 was measured in the same manner as in Example 8, Y1 = 40.5, Υ2 = 36.5, Υ3 = 38.6, Υ4 = 51.7, and
Υ4-Υ2= 15. 2 ( > 5)  Υ4-Υ2 = 15.2 (> 5)
Υ1-Υ2=4. 0 ( > 1) Yl-Y3 = l. 9 ( > 1) Υ1-Υ2 = 4.0 (> 1) Yl-Y3 = l. 9 (> 1)
であった。評価を実施例と同様にして行った。  Met. The evaluation was performed in the same manner as in the examples.
[0401] <評価結果 > [0401] <Evaluation results>
外光導入層を使用した実施例 8は、使用しない比較例 14と比較して、明暗コントラ ストが向上していることが認められた。また、未使用時においても、外光導入層を使用 した場合には使用しない場合に比べてフィルタの色はより暗ぐまた引き締まった様 に感じられた。  In Example 8 using the external light introducing layer, it was confirmed that the contrast was improved as compared with Comparative Example 14 in which the external light introducing layer was not used. Even when not used, the color of the filter seemed darker and tighter when the external light introducing layer was used than when it was not used.
[0402] 以下の諸例は第 4発明の説明のためのものである。  [0402] The following examples are for explanation of the fourth invention.
[0403] 実施例 9 :  [0403] Example 9:
<外光導入層の形成 >  <Formation of external light introduction layer>
ハードコート処理がなされたポリアクリルフィルム(厚さ 100 m、屈折率 1. 49)を真 空蒸着装置にセットし、真空室内を約 8Torrまで排気した後、酸素ガスを約 5Torr〖こ なるまで導入した。次いで、フッ化マグネシウム (屈折率 1. 38)を電子ビーム蒸発源 を使用して蒸発させ、フィルム上に厚さ約 140nm蒸着して、外光導入層 1 (図 7)とし た。この外光導入層について、島津社製分光光度計 UV3100PCを使用し、 3波長 域発光形蛍光管 F10の発光スペクトル (JIS Z8719— 1996)を使用して、 JIS Z87 22— 2000による計算方法によって視感透過率(定 ¾[IS Z8105— 1982)を求めた ところ、 95. 6%であった。  A polyacryl film (thickness: 100 m, refractive index: 1.49) that has been subjected to hard coating is set in a vacuum evaporation apparatus, the vacuum chamber is evacuated to about 8 Torr, and oxygen gas is introduced until about 5 Torr. did. Next, magnesium fluoride (refractive index: 1.38) was evaporated using an electron beam evaporation source, and was evaporated to a thickness of about 140 nm on the film to form an external light introducing layer 1 (FIG. 7). This external light introduction layer was viewed by a calculation method according to JIS Z87 22-2000 using a spectrophotometer UV3100PC manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation and the emission spectrum (JIS Z8719-1996) of a three-wavelength emission fluorescent tube F10. The light transmittance (constant [IS Z8105-1982]) was determined to be 95.6%.
[0404] <外光抑制層の形成 >  <Formation of External Light Suppression Layer>
基材としてのポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルム (東洋紛績社製 PETフィルム「A 7300」(商口 ¾名)、厚み 125 m、ヘイズ値 (JIS K7105【こよる柳』定値) 0. 40/0)【こ、 ポリメチルメタタリレート榭脂(三菱レイヨン社製「ダイヤナール BR— 80」(商品名)) 30 wt%トルエン溶液に上述の一般式 (XVII)で表されるジフエ-ルスクァリリウム系化合 物である下記の組成を有する上述の化合物 Aを 0. 37wt%Z 脂分、上述の化合 物 Bを 0. 26wt%Z榭脂分、 PYL3G (三菱ィ匕学社製) 0. 80wt%Z榭脂分、 DME 及びトルエンを混合溶解し、 NO. 30バーコ一ター (太祐機材社製)で塗工し、乾燥し 、膜厚 4. 5 /z mのコーティング膜を有する外光抑制層 11を得た。 Polyethylene terephthalate film as a substrate (Toyo紛績Ltd. PET film "A 7300" (trade port ¾ name), thickness 125 m, haze value (JIS K7105 [Koyoru willow "value) 0.4 0/0) [this, Jifue represented by polymethyl methacrylate Tari rate榭脂(manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. "Dianal BR- 80" (trade name)) 30 w t% toluene solution of the above general formula (XVII) - Rusukuaririumu based compound The above compound A having the following composition is 0.37 wt% Z fat, the above compound B is 0.26 wt% Z fat, PYL3G (manufactured by Mitsubishi Iridaku Co.) 0.80 wt% Z The resin, DME and toluene are mixed and dissolved, and the mixture is coated with a NO.30 bar coater (manufactured by Taiyu Kikai Co., Ltd.) and dried to form an external light suppressing layer 11 having a coating film having a thickness of 4.5 / zm. Obtained.
[0405] この外光抑制層の透過スペクトル 16は図 2に示す様に、約 575nmに極小値 Kを有 していた。 [0405] As shown in Fig. 2, the transmission spectrum 16 of the external light suppressing layer has a minimum value K at about 575 nm. Was.
[0406] <近赤外線吸収層の形成 >  [0406] <Formation of near-infrared absorbing layer>
基材としてのポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルム (東洋紛績社製 PETフィルム「A 7300」(商口 ¾名)、厚み 125 m、ヘイズ値 (JIS K7105【こよる柳』定値) 0. 40/0)【こ、 ポリメチルメタタリレート榭脂(三菱レイヨン社製「ダイヤナール BR— 80」(商品名)) 30 wt%トルエン溶液にジィモ -ゥム系近近赤外線吸収色素(N, N, Ν', Ν',ーテトラキ ス(ρ—ジブルチルァミノフエ-ル) ρ—フエ-レンジィモ-ゥムの六フッ化アンチモン 酸塩) 7. 6%Ζ榭脂分、トルエン及び ΜΕΚを混合溶解して、 NO. 30バーコ一ター( 太祐機材社製)で塗工し、乾燥して近赤外線吸収膜を作製した。 Polyethylene terephthalate film as a substrate (Toyo紛績Ltd. PET film "A 7300" (trade port ¾ name), thickness 125 m, haze value (JIS K7105 [Koyoru willow "value) 0.4 0/0) [this, polymethyl methacrylate Tari rate榭脂(manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. "Dianal BR- 80" (trade name)) Jiimo to 30 w t% toluene solution - ©-time system near the near-infrared absorbing dye (N, N, Ν ', Ν', -tetrax (ρ-dibultylaminophen) ρ-phenylenediforme hexamonate antimonate) 7. Mix and dissolve 6% of fat, toluene and ΜΕΚ. Then, it was coated with a NO. 30 bar coater (manufactured by Taiyu Kikai Co., Ltd.) and dried to produce a near-infrared absorbing film.
[0407] 次いで、基材フィルムの裏面に、ポリメチルメタタリレート榭脂(三菱レイヨン社製「ダ ィャナール BR— 80」(商品名 ) ) 30wt%トルエン溶液にジチオールニッケル錯体近 近赤外線吸収色素 {ビス 2, 2'— [1, 2—ジ(3 クロ口フエニル)エチレンジィミン]ベン ゼンチオラート}-ッケル (11) 9. 2wt%Z榭脂分、トルエン及び THFを混合溶解して 同様にコーティングし、両面に近赤外線吸収膜を有する近赤外線吸収層 7を形成し た。  [0407] Next, on the back surface of the base film, a dithiol nickel complex near-infrared absorbing dye { Bis 2,2 '-[1,2-di (3-chlorophenyl) ethylenedimine] benzenthiolate} -Heckel (11) 9. Mix and dissolve 2wt% Z-fat, toluene and THF Coating was performed to form a near-infrared absorbing layer 7 having near-infrared absorbing films on both sides.
[0408] <電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの形成 >  <Formation of Filter for Electronic Display>
近赤外線吸収層の一方の面に外光抑制層を貼り合わせた。また、近赤外線吸収層 の残りの面には、電磁波シールドメッシュ(線幅 12 m、線ピッチ 300 m、開口率 約 92%)及びガラス板を貼り合わせ。最後に、ガラス板 3の外光入射面に上述した外 光導入層を貼り付け、電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを形成した。  An external light suppressing layer was bonded to one surface of the near infrared absorbing layer. In addition, an electromagnetic wave shielding mesh (line width 12 m, line pitch 300 m, aperture ratio about 92%) and a glass plate are attached to the remaining surface of the near infrared absorption layer. Finally, the above-described external light introducing layer was attached to the external light incident surface of the glass plate 3 to form an electronic display filter.
[0409] そして、この電子ディスプレイ用フィルタをプラズマディスプレイパネル(日立製作所 社製「W32— PD2100」(商品名))の前に配置したディスプレイ装置を構成した。この 構成は図 7に示す構成と等 Uヽ。 [0409] Then, a display device in which this electronic display filter was arranged in front of a plasma display panel ("W32-PD2100" (trade name) manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.) was configured. This configuration is equivalent to the configuration shown in Fig. 7.
[0410] <評価 > [0410] <Evaluation>
このフィルタの 3波長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光のピーク(545nm)における光線 透過率 Y2 (%)及びディスプレイの緑色発光ピークの波長(525nm)における光線透 過率 Y4 (%)、プラズマディスプレイの白色発光スペクトルを使用した視感透過率 Y1 (%)、 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F10の発光スペクトルを使用した視感透過率 Y3 (%) を評価した。 The light transmittance Y2 (%) at the green emission peak (545 nm) of the three-band fluorescent lamp of this filter, the light transmittance Y4 (%) at the green emission peak wavelength (525 nm) of the display, and the plasma display Luminous transmittance Y1 (%) using the white emission spectrum, Luminous transmittance Y3 (%) using the emission spectrum of the three-band fluorescent lamp F10 Was evaluated.
[0411] その結果、 Yl =40. 7、 Υ2 = 36. 6、 Υ3 = 38. 8、 Υ4 = 51.  [0411] As a result, Yl = 40.7, Υ2 = 36.6, Υ3 = 38.8, Υ4 = 51.
8であり、  8 and
Υ4-Υ2= 15. 2 ( > 5)  Υ4-Υ2 = 15.2 (> 5)
Υ1-Υ2=4. 1 ( > 1)  Υ1-Υ2 = 4.1 (> 1)
Υ1-Υ3 = 1. 9 ( > 1)  Υ1-Υ3 = 1.9 (> 1)
であった。  Met.
[0412] この様にして構成したディスプレイ装置を JIS Z8719— 1996で規定される発光ス ベクトルを有する F10型 3波長域発光形蛍光管を外光源として点灯させた室内に設 置し、画面中央部に白色を、残りを黒色を表示させた状態での明暗コントラストと、ま た電源断状態におけるフィルタの色をそれぞれ目視で評価した。  [0412] The display device configured in this manner is placed in a room illuminated with an F10-type three-wavelength-band fluorescent tube having an emission vector specified by JIS Z8719-1996 as an external light source, and the center of the screen is displayed. Then, the contrast of light and dark when the white color was displayed and the remaining color was displayed black, and the color of the filter when the power was turned off were visually evaluated.
[0413] 比較例 15 :  [0413] Comparative Example 15:
近赤外線吸収層の基材として、ポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルム(三菱化学ポリ エステルフィルム社製 PETフィルム「T600E125W07」(商品名)、厚み 125 m、へ ィズ値 CilS K7105による測定値) 2. 0%)を使用した点を除いて実施例と同様に各 層を形成し、電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを形成し、実施例と同様に評価した。  Polyethylene terephthalate film (PET film “T600E125W07” (trade name) manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Polyester Film Co., Ltd., thickness 125 m, haze value measured by CilS K7105 2.0%) as a base material of the near infrared absorbing layer 2.0%) Each layer was formed in the same manner as in the example, except that was used, a filter for an electronic display was formed, and evaluation was performed in the same manner as in the example.
[0414] このフィルタについて、実施例 9と同様に Y1— Y4を測定したところ、 Yl =40. 8、 Υ2 = 36. 8、 Υ3 = 39. 1、 Υ4 = 51. 9であり、 Υ4— Υ2= 15. 1 ( > 5) Y1-Y2 =4. 0 ( > 1) Υ1-Υ3 = 1. 7 ( > 1)であった。評価を実施例 9と同様にして行つ た。  [0414] When Y1 to Y4 were measured for this filter in the same manner as in Example 9, Yl = 40.8, Υ2 = 36.8, Υ3 = 39.1, Υ4 = 51.9, and Υ4-Υ2 = 15.1 (> 5) Y1-Y2 = 4.0 (> 1) Υ1-Υ3 = 1.7 (> 1). The evaluation was performed in the same manner as in Example 9.
[0415] <評価結果 >  [0415] <Evaluation results>
ヘイズ値が 0. 4%の基材を使用した実施例 9については、ヘイズ値が 2. 0%の基 材を使用した比較例 15と比べて明暗コントラストが向上して 、ることが認められた。ま た、フィルタの色についてもより暗ぐまた引き締まった様に感じられた。  In Example 9 using a substrate having a haze value of 0.4%, it was observed that the contrast was improved as compared with Comparative Example 15 using a substrate having a haze value of 2.0%. Was. The color of the filters also seemed darker and tighter.
[0416] 以下の諸例は第 5発明の説明のためのものである。 [0416] The following examples are for explanation of the fifth invention.
[0417] 実施例 10 : Example 10:
<外光導入層の形成 >  <Formation of external light introduction layer>
ハードコート処理がなされたポリアクリルフィルム(厚さ 100 m、屈折率 1. 49)を真 空蒸着装置にセットし、真空室内を約 8Torrまで排気した後、酸素ガスを約 5Torr〖こ なるまで導入した。次いで、フッ化マグネシウム (屈折率 1. 38)を電子ビーム蒸発源 を使用して蒸発させ、フィルム上に厚さ約 140nm蒸着して、外光導入層 1 (図 7)とし た。この外光導入層について、島津社製分光光度計 UV3100PCを使用し、 3波長 域発光形蛍光管 F10の発光スペクトル (JIS Z8719— 1996)を使用して、 JIS Z87 22— 2000による計算方法によって視感透過率(定 ¾[IS Z8105— 1982)を求めた ところ、 95. 6%であった。 Hard coated polyacrylic film (100 m thick, refractive index 1.49) After setting the vacuum chamber to about 8 Torr, oxygen gas was introduced to about 5 Torr. Next, magnesium fluoride (refractive index: 1.38) was evaporated using an electron beam evaporation source, and was evaporated to a thickness of about 140 nm on the film to form an external light introducing layer 1 (FIG. 7). This external light introduction layer was viewed by a calculation method according to JIS Z87 22-2000 using a spectrophotometer UV3100PC manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation and the emission spectrum (JIS Z8719-1996) of a three-wavelength emission fluorescent tube F10. The light transmittance (constant [IS Z8105-1982]) was determined to be 95.6%.
[0418] <外光抑制層の形成 >  [0418] <Formation of external light suppressing layer>
基材としてのポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルム (東洋紛績社製 PETフィルム「A 7300」(商口 ¾名)、厚み 125 m、ヘイズ値 (JIS K7105【こよる柳』定値) 0. 40/0)【こ、 ポリメチルメタタリレート榭脂(三菱レイヨン社製「ダイヤナール BR— 80」(商品名)) 30 wt%トルエン溶液に上述の一般式 (XVII)で表されるジフエ-ルスクァリリウム系化合 物である以下の組成を有する上述の化合物 Aを 0. 37wt%Z 脂分、上述の化合 物 Bを 0. 26wt%Z榭脂分、 PYL3G (三菱ィ匕学社製) 0. 80wt%Z榭脂分、 DME 及びトルエンを混合溶解し、 No. 30バーコ一ター (太祐機材社製)で塗工し、乾燥し 、膜厚 4. 5 /z mのコーティング膜を有する外光抑制層 11を得た。 Polyethylene terephthalate film as a substrate (Toyo紛績Ltd. PET film "A 7300" (trade port ¾ name), thickness 125 m, haze value (JIS K7105 [Koyoru willow "value) 0.4 0/0) [this, Jifue represented by polymethyl methacrylate Tari rate榭脂(manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. "Dianal BR- 80" (trade name)) 30 w t% toluene solution of the above general formula (XVII) - Rusukuaririumu based compound The above compound A having the following composition is 0.37 wt% Z fat, the above compound B is 0.26 wt% Z fat, PYL3G (manufactured by Mitsubishi Iridaku Co.) 0.80 wt% Z The resin component, DME and toluene were mixed and dissolved, coated with a No. 30 bar coater (manufactured by Taiyu Kiki Co., Ltd.), dried, and dried to form an external light suppressing layer 11 having a coating film with a thickness of 4.5 / zm. Obtained.
[0419] この外光抑制層の透過スペクトル 16は図 8に示す様に、約 575nmに極小値 Kを有 していた。  [0419] The transmission spectrum 16 of this external light suppressing layer had a minimum value K at about 575 nm as shown in FIG.
[0420] <近赤外線吸収層の形成 >  [0420] <Formation of near-infrared absorbing layer>
基材としてのポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルム (東洋紛績社製 PETフィルム「A 7300」(商口 ¾名)、厚み 125 m、ヘイズ値 (JIS K7105【こよる柳』定値) 0. 40/0)【こ、 ポリメチルメタタリレート榭脂(三菱レイヨン社製「ダイヤナール BR— 80」(商品名)) 30 wt%トルエン溶液にジィモ -ゥム系近近赤外線吸収色素(N, N, Ν', Ν',ーテトラキ ス(ρ—ジブルチルァミノフエ-ル) ρ—フエ-レンジィモ-ゥムの六フッ化アンチモン 酸塩) 7. 6%Ζ榭脂分、トルエン及び ΜΕΚを混合溶解して、 No. 30バーコ一ター( 太祐機材社製)で塗工し、乾燥して近赤外線吸収膜を作製した。 Polyethylene terephthalate film as a substrate (Toyo紛績Ltd. PET film "A 7300" (trade port ¾ name), thickness 125 m, haze value (JIS K7105 [Koyoru willow "value) 0.4 0/0) [this, polymethyl methacrylate Tari rate榭脂(manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. "Dianal BR- 80" (trade name)) Jiimo to 30 w t% toluene solution - ©-time system near the near-infrared absorbing dye (N, N, Ν ', Ν', -tetrax (ρ-dibultylaminophenol) ρ-phenylenedimo- hexamonate hexafluoride) 7. Mix and dissolve 6% of fat, toluene and ΜΕΚ And coated with a No. 30 bar coater (manufactured by Taiyu Kikai Co., Ltd.) and dried to produce a near-infrared absorbing film.
[0421] 次いで、基材フィルムの裏面に、ポリメチルメタタリレート榭脂(三菱レイヨン社製「ダ ィャナール BR— 80」(商品名)) 30wt%トルエン溶液にジチオールニッケル錯体近 近赤外線吸収色素 {ビス 2, 2'— [1, 2—ジ(3 クロ口フエニル)エチレンジィミン]ベン ゼンチオラート}-ッケル (11) 9. 2wt%Z榭脂分、トルエン及び THFを混合溶解して 同様にコーティングし、両面に近赤外線吸収膜を有する近赤外線吸収層 7を形成し た。 [0421] Next, on the back surface of the base film, a 30% by weight toluene solution of polymethyl methacrylate resin ("Dyanal BR-80" (trade name) manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.) was mixed with a dithiol nickel complex. Near-infrared absorbing dye {Bis 2, 2 '-[1,2-di (3-chlorophenyl) ethylenediimine] benzenthiolate] -Heckel (11) 9. Mix 2wt% Z-fat, toluene and THF After dissolving and coating similarly, a near-infrared absorbing layer 7 having near-infrared absorbing films on both surfaces was formed.
[0422] <電磁波シールド層の形成 >  [Formation of Electromagnetic Wave Shielding Layer]
厚さ 125 μ m、幅 700mmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(東洋紡績社製「A 4300」(商品名)、可視光透過率 90%)を基材とし、その片面に熱硬化性の接着剤( 武田薬品社製「タケダック A310」(商品名))をロールコーターで塗布、乾燥して塗工 量 4g/m2とした。そして、両面がクロメート処理により黒ィ匕処理されている銅箔(古河 サーキットフォイ一ル社製「EXP— WS」(商品名)、幅 700mm、厚さ 9 μ m)を、クロメ ート層と接着剤層が重なるよう、金属ロールとゴムロール力もなるラミネート装置を使 用して貼り付け、厚さ 137 mの複層シートを得た。 The base material is a 125 μm thick, 700 mm wide polyethylene terephthalate film (A4300 (trade name, manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd., 90% visible light transmittance)), and a thermosetting adhesive (Takeda Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.) “Takedac A310” (trade name) manufactured by Co., Ltd.) was applied using a roll coater and dried to obtain a coating amount of 4 g / m 2 . Then, copper foil (“EXP-WS” (trade name), 700 mm wide, 9 μm thick, manufactured by Furukawa Circuit Wheel Co., Ltd.), both surfaces of which have been subjected to chromate treatment by chromate treatment, is used as a chromate layer. Using a laminating device that also has a metal roll and a rubber roll so as to overlap the adhesive layers, the laminate was attached to obtain a multilayer sheet having a thickness of 137 m.
[0423] 次 、で、マスキング処理およびエッチング処理を行った。具体的には、カゼインを感 光性レジストとし、複層シートを搬送させながらその片面 (銅箔面)全体を覆う様に塗 布した。パターン版としては図 13に示すような、メッシュ部とアース (接地)用の枠部を 形成するための形状を使用した。実施例 10ではメッシュ角度 90度、メッシュ線幅 15 μ m、線ピッチ 200 m (開口率約 81%)のものを使用した。そして、このパターン版 を使用して密着露光し、現像の後 100°Cでべ一キングした。  Next, a masking process and an etching process were performed. Specifically, casein was used as a light-sensitive resist, and was applied so as to cover the entire surface (copper foil surface) while transporting the multilayer sheet. As the pattern plate, a shape for forming a mesh portion and a frame portion for grounding (grounding) as shown in Fig. 13 was used. In Example 10, a mesh angle of 90 degrees, a mesh line width of 15 μm, and a line pitch of 200 m (an aperture ratio of about 81%) was used. Then, contact exposure was performed using this pattern plate, and after development, baking was performed at 100 ° C.
[0424] さらに、レジストパターンを耐エッチング用マスクとして、エッチング液 (塩ィ匕第二鉄 溶液)をスプレーで銅箔に吹きかけ、露出部分をエッチングしてメッシュ部およびァー ス用枠部を形成した。そして、水洗、レジストの剥離をアルカリ溶液で行った後、さら に洗浄処理および乾燥を行い、電磁波シールドメッシュを形成した。メッシュ部の開 口率を測定したところ、 78%であった。また、電磁波シールド層(すなわち、透明基材 とメッシュとを組み合わせた構成)の可視光透過率は 69. 0%であった。  [0424] Further, using a resist pattern as an etching-resistant mask, an etching solution (ferric chloride solution) is sprayed onto the copper foil, and the exposed portion is etched to form a mesh portion and a frame portion for ground. did. After washing with water and stripping of the resist with an alkaline solution, further washing and drying were performed to form an electromagnetic shield mesh. When the opening ratio of the mesh portion was measured, it was 78%. The visible light transmittance of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer (that is, the configuration in which the transparent substrate and the mesh were combined) was 69.0%.
[0425] <電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの形成 >  [0425] <Formation of filter for electronic display>
近赤外線吸収層の一方の面に外光抑制層を貼り合わせた。また、近赤外線吸収フ ィルタの残りの面には、電磁波シールド層およびガラス板 3を貼り合わせた。最後に、 ガラス板 3の外光入射面に上述した外光導入層を貼り付け、電子ディスプレイ用フィ ルタを形成した。 An external light suppressing layer was bonded to one surface of the near infrared absorbing layer. Further, an electromagnetic wave shielding layer and a glass plate 3 were bonded to the remaining surface of the near-infrared absorbing filter. Finally, the above-described external light introducing layer is attached to the external light incident surface of the glass plate 3, and the electronic display filter is formed. Ruta was formed.
[0426] そして、この電子ディスプレイ用フィルタをプラズマディスプレイパネル(日立製作所 社製「W32— PD2100」(商品名))の前に配置したディスプレイ装置を構成した。この 構成は図 7に示す構成と等 Uヽ。  [0426] Then, a display device was constructed in which this electronic display filter was arranged in front of a plasma display panel ("W32-PD2100" (trade name) manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.). This configuration is equivalent to the configuration shown in Fig. 7.
[0427] <評価 >  [0427] <Evaluation>
このフィルタの 3波長域発光形蛍光管の緑色発光のピーク(545nm)における光線 透過率 Y2 (%)及びディスプレイの緑色発光ピークの波長(525nm)における光線透 過率 Y4 (%)、プラズマディスプレイの白色発光スペクトルを使用した視感透過率 Y1 (%)、 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F10の発光スペクトルを使用した視感透過率 Y3 (%) を評価した。  The light transmittance Y2 (%) at the green emission peak (545 nm) of the three-band fluorescent lamp of this filter, the light transmittance Y4 (%) at the green emission peak wavelength (525 nm) of the display, and the plasma display The luminous transmittance Y1 (%) using the white emission spectrum and the luminous transmittance Y3 (%) using the emission spectrum of the three-wavelength band fluorescent lamp F10 were evaluated.
[0428] その結果、 Yl = 34. 3、 Υ2 = 30. 9、 Υ3 = 32. 7、 Υ4=43.  [0428] As a result, Yl = 34.3, Υ2 = 30.9, Υ3 = 32.7, Υ4 = 43.
7であり、  7 and
Υ4-Υ2= 12. 8 ( > 5)  Υ4-Υ2 = 12.8 (> 5)
Υ1-Υ2 = 3. 4 ( > 1)  Υ1-Υ2 = 3.4 (> 1)
Υ1-Υ3 = 1. 6 ( > 1)  Υ1-Υ3 = 1.6 (> 1)
であった。  Met.
[0429] この様にして構成したディスプレイ装置を JIS Z8719— 1996で規定される発光ス ベクトルを有する F10型 3波長域発光形蛍光管を外光源として点灯させた室内に設 置し、画面中央部に白色を、残りを黒色を表示させた状態での明暗コントラストと、ま た電源断状態におけるフィルタの色をそれぞれ目視で評価した。  [0429] The display device configured in this manner is placed in a room where an F10 type three-wavelength-band emission fluorescent tube having a light emission vector specified in JIS Z8719-1996 is turned on as an external light source, and a central portion of the screen is displayed. Then, the contrast of light and dark when the white color was displayed and the remaining color was displayed black, and the color of the filter when the power was turned off were visually evaluated.
[0430] 比較例 16 :  [0430] Comparative Example 16:
電磁波シールド層として、近赤外線吸収フィルタの、外光抑制層が貼り合わせされ て ヽな 、面に貼り合わせた電磁波シールドメッシュ(線幅 12 m、線ピッチ 300 μ m 、開口率 92%)を使用し、その上にガラス板および外光入射面に上述した外光導入 層を貼り付け、電子ディスプレイ用フィルタを形成した。また、電磁波シールド層(す なわち、透明基材とメッシュとを組み合わせた構成)の可視光透過率は 83%であった  As the electromagnetic wave shielding layer, the electromagnetic wave shielding mesh (line width 12 m, line pitch 300 μm, aperture ratio 92%) bonded to the surface of the near-infrared absorption filter to which the external light suppression layer is bonded is used. Then, the above-described external light introducing layer was attached to the glass plate and the external light incident surface, thereby forming a filter for an electronic display. The visible light transmittance of the electromagnetic wave shielding layer (that is, the combination of the transparent substrate and the mesh) was 83%.
[0431] このフィルタについて、実施例 10と同様に Y1— Y4を測定したところ、 Yl =40. 7、 Y2 = 36. 6、Y3 = 38. 8、Υ4 = 51. 8であり、 [0431] For this filter, Y1-Y4 were measured in the same manner as in Example 10. Yl = 40.7, Y2 = 36.6, Y3 = 38.8, Υ4 = 51.8,
Υ4-Υ2= 15. 2 ( > 5)  Υ4-Υ2 = 15.2 (> 5)
Υ1-Υ2=4. 1 ( > 1)  Υ1-Υ2 = 4.1 (> 1)
Υ1-Υ3 = 1. 9 ( > 1)  Υ1-Υ3 = 1.9 (> 1)
であった。評価を実施例 10と同様にして行った。  Met. The evaluation was performed in the same manner as in Example 10.
[0432] <評価結果 > [0432] <Evaluation results>
実施例 10については比較例 16と比べて、明暗コントラストが向上していることが認 められた。また、フィルタの色はより引き締まった無彩色であった。  It was confirmed that the contrast of Example 10 was improved as compared with Comparative Example 16. In addition, the color of the filter was a tighter achromatic color.
[0433] 以下の諸例は第 6発明の説明のためのものである。 [0433] The following examples are for describing the sixth invention.
[0434] 以下の実施例および比較例において、表面粗さの測定および剥がれ強さの評価は 以下の様に行った。  [0434] In the following examples and comparative examples, measurement of surface roughness and evaluation of peel strength were performed as follows.
[0435] <ガラス表面粗さ測定 > [0435] <Glass surface roughness measurement>
ガラス表面を、非接触 3次元測定機 (三鷹光器株式会社製「ΝΗ-5Ν」(商品名))を 使用して、カットオフ値 0. 80mmで、: L mピッチで測定長 0. 1mmに渡ってスキャン 測定した。 1回のスキャンで得られるデータの平均値を Ra値とした。 1サンプルにっき 3回スキャンし、各回の Ra値を単純平均した値を最終的な表面粗さ Ra値とした。  Using a non-contact 3D measuring machine (“次 元 -5 機” (trade name), manufactured by Mitaka Optical Instruments Co., Ltd.) with a cutoff value of 0.80 mm, the measurement length is 0.1 mm at L m pitch. Scan was measured over The average value of the data obtained in one scan was defined as the Ra value. One sample was scanned three times, and the value obtained by simply averaging the Ra value of each time was used as the final surface roughness Ra value.
[0436] <剥離強度測定 > [0436] <Peel strength measurement>
以下の方法で剥離強度を測定した。なお、単位は kgfZ20mmとした。  The peel strength was measured by the following method. The unit was kgfZ20mm.
(1)フィルムを貼り合わせた実サイズ試料を、概ね A4版になる様に割り分けた。セラミ ック印刷を施したガラスは熱強化されており、切削加工ができないことからこの方法を 採用した。  (1) The actual size sample to which the film was attached was divided so as to be approximately A4 size. This method was adopted because the glass with ceramic printing is heat-strengthened and cannot be cut.
(2)割り分けた部分の表面フィルムに 20mm幅で約 200mmの長さのスリットを入れ た。そのうち約 90mm程度を、テンシロン引張試験機のチャックで挟める様に、ガラス 面力 剥がして試験片とした。  (2) A slit with a width of 20 mm and a length of about 200 mm was made in the surface film of the divided part. Approximately 90 mm of the glass was peeled off so that it could be sandwiched between the chucks of a Tensilon tensile tester to obtain test pieces.
(3) 23°C、湿度 50%の恒温恒湿室に 30分放置し、状態調節した。  (3) The sample was left in a constant temperature and humidity room at 23 ° C and a humidity of 50% for 30 minutes to adjust the condition.
(4) (3)と同温、同湿にてテンシロン引張試験機を使用し、 180°剥離強度を引張速 度 150mmZ分で、長さ 100mmに亘つて測定し、最高値を剥離強度とした。  (4) Using a Tensilon tensile tester at the same temperature and humidity as in (3), measure the 180 ° peel strength over a length of 100 mm at a tensile speed of 150 mmZ, and set the maximum value as the peel strength. .
[0437] 実施例 11 : 透明基板として、縦 580mm、横 980mm、厚さ 2. 5mmで、外周部分に黒色の額 縁印刷(幅約 50mm)がなされたガラス板を用意した。額縁印刷に際しては、セラミツ ク印刷に使用するインク (ガラスと有機顔料を主成分とする〕を複数種選択し、そのう ち、印刷後の表面粗さが算術平均高さ Raで 0. 15 mとなったものを選択した。印刷 がなされていないガラス表面の表面粗さ(Ra)は 0. 01 μ mであった。 Example 11: As a transparent substrate, a glass plate with a length of 580 mm, a width of 980 mm, a thickness of 2.5 mm, and a black frame printing (approximately 50 mm wide) on the outer periphery was prepared. In frame printing, multiple types of inks (mainly composed of glass and organic pigments) used for ceramic printing were selected, and the surface roughness after printing was 0.15 m in arithmetic average height Ra. The surface roughness (Ra) of the unprinted glass surface was 0.01 μm.
[0438] 次に、厚さ 125 m、幅 700mmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(東洋紡績社 製「A4300」(商品名))を基材とし、その片面に熱硬化性の接着剤 (武田薬品社製「 タケダック A310」(商品名))をロールコーターで塗布、乾燥して塗工量 4g/m2とした 。そして、両面がクロメート処理により黒ィ匕処理されている銅箔(古河サーキットフォイ 一ル社製「EXP— WS」(商品名)、幅 700mm、厚さ 9 μ m)を、クロメート層と接着剤 層が重なるよう、金属ロールとゴムロール力 なるラミネート装置を使用して貼り付け、 厚さ 137 mの複層シートを得た。 [0438] Next, a polyethylene terephthalate film ("A4300" (trade name) manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd.) having a thickness of 125 m and a width of 700 mm was used as a base material, and a thermosetting adhesive ("Takeda Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd." Takedac A310 ”(trade name)) was applied with a roll coater and dried to obtain a coating amount of 4 g / m 2 . Then, a copper foil ("EXP-WS" (trade name), 700 mm wide, 9 µm thick, manufactured by Furukawa Circuit Foil Co., Ltd.), both sides of which have been subjected to chromate treatment by chromate treatment, Using a laminating device having the strength of a metal roll and a rubber roll, the sheets were attached so that the layers overlapped to obtain a multilayer sheet having a thickness of 137 m.
[0439] 次!、で、マスキング処理およびエッチング処理を行った。具体的には、カゼインを感 光性レジストととし、複層シートを搬送させながらその片面 (銅箔面)全体を覆う様に 塗布した。パターン版としては図 13に示すような、メッシュ部とアース (接地)用の枠部 を形成するための形状を使用した。本実施例ではメッシュ角度 90° 、メッシュ線幅 12 μ m、メッシュピッチ 300 mのものを使用した。そして、このパターン版を使用して密 着露光し、現像の後 100°Cでべ一キングした。  [0439] Next, a masking process and an etching process were performed. Specifically, casein was used as a light-sensitive resist, and was applied so as to cover one surface (copper foil surface) of the multilayer sheet while transporting it. The shape used to form the mesh part and the frame part for grounding (grounding) as shown in Fig. 13 was used as the pattern plate. In this example, a mesh angle of 90 °, a mesh line width of 12 μm, and a mesh pitch of 300 m were used. Then, close exposure was performed using this pattern plate, and after the development, baking was performed at 100 ° C.
[0440] さらに、レジストパターンを耐エッチング用マスクとして、エッチング液 (塩ィ匕第二鉄 溶液)をスプレーで銅箔に吹きかけ、露出部分をエッチングしてメッシュ部およびァー ス用枠部を形成した。そして、水洗、レジストの剥離をアルカリ溶液で行った後、さら に洗浄処理および乾燥を行い、剥離フィルム(三菱ィ匕学ポリエステルフィルム社製「 MRF75」(商品名))に粘着剤 (綜研ィ匕学社製「SKダイン- 2094」(商品名))を厚さ 25 μ mで塗布乾燥後エージングした粘着付き剥離フィルムを、基材フィルムの残つ た面に転写することで粘着付き電磁波シールドフィルムを形成した。  [0440] Further, using a resist pattern as an etching-resistant mask, an etching solution (ferric ferric salt solution) is sprayed on the copper foil, and the exposed portion is etched to form a mesh portion and a frame portion for ground. did. After washing with water and stripping of the resist with an alkaline solution, further washing and drying are performed, and a release film (“MRF75” (trade name) manufactured by Mitsubishi Iridaku Polyester Film Co., Ltd.)) is coated with an adhesive (Soken Iridani). An electromagnetic wave shield film with adhesive by transferring the adhesive release film aged from SK Dyne-2094 (trade name) manufactured by Gakusha Co., Ltd. with a thickness of 25 μm, dried and aged on the remaining surface of the base film. Was formed.
[0441] 次に、この電磁波シールドメッシュフィルムをガラス板の上に重ね、位置合わせをし て裁断し、貼り合わせた。この状態で電磁波シールドメッシュフィルムと額縁印刷部分 の重なり部分の幅 dは各辺とも 40mmとした。貼り合わせ後、オートクレーブを使用し て 60°C、 0. 6MPa、 60分の条件で熱処理して実サイズサンプルを得た。 [0441] Next, this electromagnetic shielding mesh film was overlaid on a glass plate, aligned, cut, and bonded. In this state, the width d of the overlapping portion between the electromagnetic wave shielding mesh film and the frame printing portion was set to 40 mm on each side. After bonding, use an autoclave The sample was heat-treated at 60 ° C, 0.6 MPa, and 60 minutes to obtain an actual size sample.
[0442] 温度 60°Cでの保持時間 1時間、 60°Cから 10°Cへの降温時間 1時間、 10°Cで の保持時間 1時間、 10°C力も 60°Cへの昇温時間 1時間、合計 4時間を 1サイクルと するヒートサイクル試験を 150回繰り返した後、セラミック印刷部について上述の剥離 強度測定および浮き ·気泡などの外観観察を行った結果を表 6に示す。  [0442] Temperature 1 hour holding time at 60 ° C, 1 hour cooling time from 60 ° C to 10 ° C, 1 hour holding time at 10 ° C, 10 ° C force rising time to 60 ° C Table 6 shows the results of measuring the peel strength and observing the appearance of floating and air bubbles in the ceramic printed part after repeating the heat cycle test 150 times, one cycle consisting of one hour, for a total of four hours.
[0443] 実施例 12 :  Example 12:
セラミック印刷を行ったガラス基板のうち、印刷後の表面粗さが算術平均高さ Raで 0 . 10 μ mとなったものを選択した。印刷がなされて ヽな 、ガラス表面の表面粗さ (Ra) は 0. 01 mであった。それ以外は実施例 11と同様にして評価を行った結果を表 6 に示す。  Among the glass substrates subjected to ceramic printing, those having a surface roughness after printing of 0.10 μm in arithmetic average height Ra were selected. After printing, the surface roughness (Ra) of the glass surface was 0.01 m. Otherwise, the results of evaluation in the same manner as in Example 11 are shown in Table 6.
[0444] 比較例 17 :  [0444] Comparative Example 17:
セラミック印刷をしていないガラス板 (表面粗さ Ra=0. 01)を使用し、実施例 11と 同様にして作成した電磁波シールドメッシュフィルムを貼り付けた。貼り付け位置につ いてもほぼ同様になる様に位置合わせした。実施例 11と同様にして評価を行った結 果を表 6に示す。  Using a glass plate without ceramic printing (surface roughness Ra = 0.01), an electromagnetic shielding mesh film prepared in the same manner as in Example 11 was attached. Positioning was performed so that the position of attachment was almost the same. Table 6 shows the results of the evaluation performed in the same manner as in Example 11.
[0445] 実施例 13 :  Example 13:
<外光抑制層の形成 >  <Formation of external light suppression layer>
ポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルム(三菱化学ポリエステルフィルム社製 PETフィ ルム「T600E50W07」(商品名)、厚み 50 μ m)に、ポリメチルメタタリレート榭脂(三 菱レイヨン社製「ダイヤナール BR— 80」(商品名)) 30wt%トルエン溶液に上述の一 般式 (XVII)で表されるジフエニルスクァリリウム系化合物である以下の組成を有する 上述の化合物 Aを 0. 37 %7榭脂分、上述の化合物 Bを 0. 26 %7榭脂分、 P YL3G (三菱ィ匕学社製 (商品名)) 0. 80wt%Z榭脂分、 DME及びトルエンを混合 溶解し、グラビアコーターで塗工し、乾燥し、さらに、剥離フィルム(三菱ィ匕学ポリエス テルフィルム社製「MRF75」(商品名))に粘着剤 (綜研ィ匕学社製「SKダイン 2094 」(商品名))を厚さ 25 μ mで塗布乾燥後エージングした粘着付き剥離フィルムを色素 コーティング面に転写することで、膜厚 6 mのコーティング膜を有する粘着付き光学 機能性フィルムを得た。 [0446] このフィルタの透過スペクトル 16は図 12に示す様に、約 575nmに極小値 Kを有し ていた。 Polyethylene terephthalate film (PET film “T600E50W07” (trade name) manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Polyester Film Co., Ltd., trade name: 50 μm) and polymethyl methacrylate resin (“Dianal BR-80” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.) (Trade name)) In a 30 wt% toluene solution, the above compound A, which is a diphenylsquarylium-based compound represented by the above general formula (XVII) and having the following composition, is added in an amount of 0.37% 7% fat, Compound B of 0.26% 7% fat, P YL3G (manufactured by Mitsubishi Idakugaku Co., Ltd. (trade name)) 0.80% by weight of Z fat, DME and toluene are mixed and dissolved, and coated with a gravure coater. After drying, the release film ("MRF75" (trade name) manufactured by Mitsubishi Idani Polyester Film Co., Ltd.) is coated with an adhesive ("SK Dyne 2094" (trade name) manufactured by Soken Danigaku Co., Ltd.) to a thickness of 25 mm. After coating and drying at μm, By transferring the Ingu surface to obtain an adhesive with optically functional film having a coating film having a thickness of 6 m. [0446] The transmission spectrum 16 of this filter had a minimum value K at about 575 nm as shown in FIG.
[0447] く近赤外線カット層の形成 >  [0447] Formation of near infrared cut layer>
ポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルム(三菱化学ポリエステルフィルム社製 PETフィ ルム「T600E50W07」(商品名)、厚み 50 μ m、ヘイズ値 (JIS K7105による測定 値) 1. 3%)に、ポリメチルメタタリレート榭脂(三菱レイヨン社製「ダイヤナール BR— 8 0」(商品名)) 30wt%トルエン溶液にジィモ -ゥム系近赤外線吸収色素(N, N, Ν', Ν',ーテトラキス(ρ—ジブルチルァミノフエ-ル) ρ—フエ-レンジィモ-ゥムの六フッ 化アンチモン酸塩) 7. 6%Ζ榭脂分、トルエン及び ΜΕΚを混合溶解して、グラビアコ 一ターで塗工し、乾燥した。  Polyethylene terephthalate film (Mitsubishi Chemical Polyester Film's PET film “T600E50W07” (trade name), thickness 50 μm, haze value (measured by JIS K7105) 1.3%), and polymethyl methacrylate resin (Mitsubishi Rayon “Dianal BR-80” (trade name)) In a 30 wt% toluene solution, a dimmo-pum-based near-infrared absorbing dye (N, N, Ν ', Ν', -tetrakis (ρ-jibulchirua) Minofel) ρ-Phenylene dimodium hexafluoride antimonate) 7. Mix and dissolve 6% fat, toluene and ΜΕΚ, apply with gravure coater and dry. .
[0448] 次!、で、フィルムの裏面に、ポリメチルメタタリレート榭脂(ダイヤナール BR— 80; 三菱レイヨン社製) 30wt%トルエン溶液にジチオールニッケル錯体近赤外線吸収色 素 {ビス 2, 2'— [1, 2—ジ(3 クロ口フエ-ル)エチレンジィミン]ベンゼンチォラート } ニッケル (11) 9. 2wt%Z榭脂分、トルエン及び THFを混合溶解して同様にコーティ ングし、さらに剥離フィルム(三菱ィ匕学ポリエステルフィルム社製「MRF75」(商品名) )に粘着剤 (綜研ィ匕学社製「SKダイン- 2094」(商品名))を厚さ 25 μ mで塗布乾燥 しエージングした粘着付き剥離フィルムを、ジチオールニッケル錯体近赤外線吸収 色素コーティング面に転写することで粘着付き機能性フィルムを作製した。  [0448] Next, on the back surface of the film, a polymethylmethacrylate resin (Dianal BR-80; manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.) was added to a 30 wt% toluene solution of a dithiol nickel complex near infrared absorbing pigment {bis 2, 2 '— [1,2-di (3-chloroethyl) ethylenedimine] benzenethiolate} Nickel (11) 9.2wt% Z-fat, toluene and THF are mixed and coated in the same manner. Then, an adhesive (“SK Dyne-2094” (trade name) manufactured by Soken-Danigaku Co., Ltd.) with a thickness of 25 μm is applied to a release film (“MRF75” (trade name) manufactured by Mitsubishi Iridaku Polyester Film Co., Ltd.). The dried and aged adhesive release film was transferred to a dithiol nickel complex near infrared absorbing dye coating surface to produce an adhesive functional film.
[0449] <電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの形成 >  <Formation of Electronic Display Filter>
実施例 11で作成した、電磁波シールドメッシュフィルムを貼り付けたガラス基板のメ ッシュ面に、近赤外線カット層を粘着剤で貼り付け、さらに外光抑制層を粘着剤で貼 り付け、外光抑制機能および近赤外線カット機能を有する電子ディスプレイ用フィル タを形成した。  A near-infrared cut layer was adhered to the mesh surface of the glass substrate to which the electromagnetic wave shielding mesh film was applied, which was created in Example 11, with an adhesive, and an external light suppressing layer was further adhered with an adhesive, thereby suppressing external light. A filter for electronic displays having a function and a near-infrared cut function was formed.
[0450] この状態で実施例 11と同様にして高温高湿状態に放置した後、外光抑制層およ び近赤外線カット層を除去し、実施例 11と同様に剥がれ強度試験を行った結果を表 6に示す。  [0450] In this state, after leaving to stand in a high-temperature and high-humidity state in the same manner as in Example 11, the external light suppressing layer and the near-infrared cut layer were removed, and a peel strength test was performed in the same manner as in Example 11. Are shown in Table 6.
[0451] [表 6] 実施例 11 実施例 12 実施例 13 J:匕較 ί列 17 セラミック印刷 有り 有り 有り 無し 電磁波シールドメッシュフィルム 有り 有り 有り 有り 外光抑制層 無し し 有り 無し 近赤外線カツ卜層 無し 無し 有り 無し 額縁部分の表面の表面粗さ Ra . m) 0.15 0.10 0.15 0.01 初期の剥離強度(kgf/20mm) 3.2 2.7 3.1 1.7[0451] [Table 6] Example 11 Example 12 Example 13 J: 較 ί 17 17 Ceramic printing Yes Yes Yes No Electromagnetic wave shielding mesh film Yes Yes Yes Yes Outside light suppression layer No Yes Yes No Near infrared cut layer No No Yes No No Surface roughness Ra .m) 0.15 0.10 0.15 0.01 Initial peel strength (kgf / 20mm) 3.2 2.7 3.1 1.7
-10-60 °Cヒート 剥離強度(kgf/20mm) 3.1 2.6 2.9 1.5 サイクル 150回後 浮き ·気泡発生状態 無し 無し 無し 僅かに発生 <評価結果 > -10-60 ° C Heat Peeling strength (kgf / 20mm) 3.1 2.6 2.9 1.5 Cycles after 150 cycles Floating / bubbles None None None Slight <Evaluation results>
実施例 11 13及び比較例 17の評価結果を示す表 6から明らかな様に、表面粗さ が十分大き 、額縁印刷を行 L、、その表面を利用してフィルムを貼り付けた実施例 11 13では、高温高湿環境下に放置した後も十分強 1、剥がれ強度を有して 、ることが 認められた。一方、表面粗さの小さい状態でフィルムを貼り付けた比較例 17におい ては、何れも初期の剥離強度が低ぐ高温高湿環境下に放置した後の剥離強度は 更に低下し、剥がれの発生しやすい状態が確認された。  As is clear from Table 6 showing the evaluation results of Example 11 13 and Comparative Example 17, Example 11 13 in which the surface roughness was sufficiently large, frame printing was performed, and a film was stuck using the surface. It was confirmed that the sample had sufficient strength 1 and peeling strength even after being left in a high temperature and high humidity environment. On the other hand, in Comparative Example 17 in which the film was stuck with a small surface roughness, the peel strength after leaving in a high-temperature, high-humidity environment in which the initial peel strength was low was further reduced, and peeling occurred. A state that was easy to do was confirmed.

Claims

請求の範囲 [1] 発光表示デバイスを有する電子ディスプレイ装置に使用される電子ディスプレイ用 フィルタであって、以下の透過率特性を有することを特徴とする電子ディスプレイ用フ イノレタ。 Claims [1] A filter for an electronic display used in an electronic display device having a light-emitting display device, wherein the filter has the following transmittance characteristics.
(1)波長 400nm— 700nmの可視光領域に少なくとも一つの透過率の極小値が存 在する。  (1) At least one minimum value of the transmittance exists in the visible light region of wavelengths from 400 nm to 700 nm.
(2)透過率の極小値のなかの最小の透過率(%)と可視光領域の最大透過率(%)と の差が 10以上である。  (2) The difference between the minimum transmittance (%) among the minimum values of the transmittance and the maximum transmittance (%) in the visible light region is 10 or more.
(3)波長 540nm— 555nmの光線透過率の平均値(%)が 40%以下である。  (3) The average value (%) of the light transmittance at a wavelength of 540 nm to 555 nm is 40% or less.
(4)波長 525nmの光線透過率(%)を波長 540nm— 555nmの光線透過率の平均 値(%)で除した値が 1. 10以上である。  (4) The value obtained by dividing the light transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 525 nm by the average value (%) of the light transmittance at a wavelength of 540 nm to 555 nm is 1.10 or more.
(5)波長 545nmの透過率(%)、波長 437nmの透過率(%)および波長 612nmの 透過率(%)中の最大値と最小値の差が 10以下である。  (5) The difference between the maximum value and the minimum value in the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 545 nm, the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 437 nm, and the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 612 nm is 10 or less.
[2] 波長 545nmの透過率(%)、波長 437nmの透過率(%)および波長 612nmの透 過率(%)中の最大値と最小値の差が 5以下である請求項 1に記載の電子ディスプレ ィ用フイノレタ。  [2] The difference between the maximum value and the minimum value in the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 545 nm, the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 437 nm, and the transmittance (%) at a wavelength of 612 nm is 5 or less. Finoleta for electronic display.
[3] 480nm— 520nmの波長領域に透過率の極小値を有する請求項 1又は 2に記載 の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ。  3. The filter for an electronic display according to claim 1, wherein the filter has a minimum value of transmittance in a wavelength range of 480 nm to 520 nm.
[4] 530nm— 610nmの波長領域に透過率の極小値を有する請求項 1一 3の何れかに 記載の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ。 [4] The filter for an electronic display according to any one of [13] to [13], which has a minimum value of transmittance in a wavelength range of 530 nm to 610 nm.
[5] 530nm— 610nmの波長領域に最大吸収を有する化合物の含有により、 530nm 一 610nmの波長領域に透過率の極小値を発現させる請求項 4に記載の電子ディス プレイ用フィルタ。 5. The electronic display filter according to claim 4, wherein a minimum value of transmittance is developed in a wavelength range of 530 nm to 610 nm by containing a compound having a maximum absorption in a wavelength range of 530 nm to 610 nm.
[6] 437nm、 545nm、 612nmの何れかの波長を吸収する化合物を含有することによ り、透過率を制御する請求項 5に記載の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ。  6. The filter for an electronic display according to claim 5, wherein a transmittance is controlled by containing a compound absorbing any one of 437 nm, 545 nm, and 612 nm.
[7] 480— 520nmの波長域に最大吸収を有する化合物を含有する請求項 3に記載の 電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ。  7. The electronic display filter according to claim 3, comprising a compound having a maximum absorption in a wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm.
[8] 紫外線吸収剤を含有する層が設けられている請求項 1一 7の何れかに記載の電子 ディスプレイ用フィルタ。 [8] The electron according to any one of [17] to [17], further comprising a layer containing an ultraviolet absorbent. Display filter.
[9] 近赤外線カット層が設けられている請求項 1一 8の何れかに記載の電子ディスプレ ィ用フイノレタ。  [9] The finoleta for an electronic display according to any one of claims 118, wherein a near-infrared cut layer is provided.
[10] 電磁波シールド層が設けられている請求項 1一 9の何れかに記載の電子ディスプレ ィ用フイノレタ。  [10] The finoleta for an electronic display according to any one of claims 119, wherein an electromagnetic wave shielding layer is provided.
[11] 反射防止層が設けられている請求項 1一 10の何れかに記載の電子ディスプレイ用 フイノレタ。  [11] The finoleter for an electronic display according to any one of claims 110, further comprising an antireflection layer.
[12] ぎらつき防止(ノングレア)層が設けられて 、る請求項 1一 11の何れかに記載の電 子ディスプレイ用フィルタ。  [12] The electronic display filter according to any one of [11] to [11], further comprising an anti-glare (non-glare) layer.
[13] 発光表示デバイスを有する電子ディスプレイ装置に使用される電子ディスプレイ用 フィルタであって、 [13] An electronic display filter used in an electronic display device having a light emitting display device,
発光表示デバイスの緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過率 (%)より、 3波長域発光 形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過率 (%)が 5以上低い、または、発光 表示デバイスの白色発光スペクトルを使用した場合の視感透過率 (%)より、 3波長域 発光形蛍光管の緑色発光ピークの波長の光線透過率 (%)が 1以上低!ヽ透過特性を 有すると共に、以下の (A)— (D)の何れかの構成を有することを特徴とする電子ディ スプレイ用フィルタ。  The light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the three-band fluorescent tube is 5 or more lower than the light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the light emitting display device, or the light emitting display device is white. The light transmittance (%) at the wavelength of the green emission peak of the three-band fluorescent tube is 1 or more lower than the luminous transmittance (%) when using the emission spectrum! (4) An electronic display filter having transmission characteristics and having any one of the following configurations (A) to (D).
(A)電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの発光表示デバイス側表面に入射光の特定波長成 分の透過を抑制する外光抑制層と電子ディスプレイ装置からの電磁波放射を抑制す るための電磁波シールド層とが、電磁波シールド層が外光抑制層よりも発光表示デ バイス側になる様に、配置される。  (A) An external light suppressing layer for suppressing transmission of a specific wavelength component of incident light and an electromagnetic wave shielding layer for suppressing electromagnetic wave radiation from the electronic display device are provided on the surface of the filter for electronic display on the light emitting display device side. The electromagnetic wave shielding layer is disposed so as to be closer to the light emitting display device than the external light suppressing layer.
(B)電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの最外面に視感透過率 90%以上の外光導入層が 配置される。  (B) An external light introduction layer having a luminous transmittance of 90% or more is arranged on the outermost surface of the electronic display filter.
(C)電子ディスプレイ用フィルタがヘイズ値 1. 5%以下の透明基材で構成される。 (C) The electronic display filter is composed of a transparent base material having a haze value of 1.5% or less.
(D)電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの発光表示デバイス側表面に可視光透過率 60— 8 0%の電磁波シールド層が配置される。 (D) An electromagnetic wave shielding layer having a visible light transmittance of 60 to 80% is disposed on the surface of the filter for an electronic display on the light emitting display device side.
[14] 3波長域発光形蛍光灯 F10の発光スペクトル (JIS Z8719— 1996)を使用した場 合の視感透過率 (%)が、発光表示デバイスの白色発光スペクトルを使用した場合の 視感透過率(%)より 1以上低 、請求項 13に記載の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ。 [14] The luminous transmittance (%) when using the emission spectrum (JIS Z8719—1996) of the three-band fluorescent lamp F10 is the same as when using the white emission spectrum of the light-emitting display device. 14. The filter for an electronic display according to claim 13, wherein the filter is one or more lower than the luminous transmittance (%).
[15] 上記 (A)にお 、て、電磁波シールド層が導電性材料力も成る薄膜である請求項 13 の記載の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ。 15. The electronic display filter according to claim 13, wherein in (A), the electromagnetic wave shielding layer is a thin film having a conductive material strength.
[16] 上記 (A)にお ヽて、電磁波シールド層がメッシュ状導電性材料で形成される請求 項 13に記載の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ。 16. The electronic display filter according to claim 13, wherein in (A), the electromagnetic wave shielding layer is formed of a mesh conductive material.
[17] 上記 )において、外光導入層が最外面に設けられる請求項 13に記載の電子デ イスプレイ用フィルタ。 [17] The electronic display filter according to [13], wherein in (1), the external light introducing layer is provided on an outermost surface.
[18] 上記 (B)において、導電性材料の薄膜から成る電磁波シールド層が発光表示デバ イス側に設けられる請求項 13に記載の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ。  18. The electronic display filter according to claim 13, wherein in the above (B), an electromagnetic wave shielding layer made of a thin film of a conductive material is provided on the light emitting display device side.
[19] 上記 (C)において、導電性材料の薄膜から構成される電磁波シールド層が発光表 示デバイス側に設けられる請求項 13に記載の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ。 [19] The electronic display filter according to claim 13, wherein in (C), an electromagnetic wave shielding layer composed of a thin film of a conductive material is provided on the light emitting display device side.
[20] 上記(D)にお 、て、電磁波シールド層が開口率 65— 90%のメッシュ状導電性材 料で形成される請求項 13記載の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ。 20. The electronic display filter according to claim 13, wherein in the above (D), the electromagnetic wave shielding layer is formed of a mesh-shaped conductive material having an aperture ratio of 65 to 90%.
[21] 上記 (D)にお ヽて、電磁波シールド層が導電性材料の薄膜から成る請求項 13〖こ 記載の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ。 [21] The filter for an electronic display according to claim 13, wherein in (D), the electromagnetic wave shielding layer is formed of a thin film of a conductive material.
[22] 請求項 1に記載の透過率特性を有する請求項 13に記載の電子ディスプレイ用フィ ルタ。 [22] The filter for an electronic display according to claim 13, which has the transmittance characteristic according to claim 1.
[23] 発光表示デバイスを有する電子ディスプレイ装置に使用される電子ディスプレイ用 フィルタの支持体としての透明基板であって、  [23] A transparent substrate as a support for an electronic display filter used in an electronic display device having a light emitting display device,
透明基板表面の外周部に枠状の不透明領域を有し、  It has a frame-shaped opaque area on the outer periphery of the transparent substrate surface,
不透明領域の表面粗さが算術平均高さ (Ra)で 0. 05— 100 μ mであることを特徴 とする電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの透明基板。  A transparent substrate for a filter for an electronic display, wherein the surface roughness of an opaque area is 0.05 to 100 μm in arithmetic average height (Ra).
[24] 不透明領域が印刷によって形成される請求項 23に記載の電子ディスプレイ用フィ ルタの透明基板。 [24] The transparent substrate of the filter for an electronic display according to claim 23, wherein the opaque area is formed by printing.
[25] 透明基板がガラスであり、且つ、印刷がセラミック印刷である請求項 24に記載の電 子ディスプレイ用フィルタの透明基板。  25. The transparent substrate for an electronic display filter according to claim 24, wherein the transparent substrate is glass and the printing is ceramic printing.
[26] 不透明領域が印刷によって形成されたのち表面処理されている請求項 24に記載 の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの透明基板。 26. The transparent substrate for an electronic display filter according to claim 24, wherein the opaque region is formed by printing and then surface-treated.
[27] 不透明領域の表面粗さが算術平均高さ (Ra)で 0. 10— 100 μ mである請求項 23 一 26の何れかに記載の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの透明基板。 [27] The transparent substrate for an electronic display filter according to any one of [23] to [26], wherein the opaque region has a surface roughness of 0.10 to 100 µm in arithmetic average height (Ra).
[28] 透明基板が長方形であり、透明基板の長手方向に平行な方向における表面粗さが 他の方向における表面粗さよりも大きい請求項 23— 27の何れかに記載の電子ディ スプレイ用フィルタの透明基板。 28. The electronic display filter according to claim 23, wherein the transparent substrate is rectangular, and the surface roughness in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the transparent substrate is larger than the surface roughness in other directions. Transparent substrate.
[29] 請求項 23— 28の何れかに記載の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタの透明基板に、少な くとも 1枚の光学機能フィルムを貼り付けて形成したことを特徴とする電子ディスプレイ 用フィルタ。 [29] An electronic display filter, wherein at least one optical functional film is attached to the transparent substrate of the electronic display filter according to any one of claims 23 to 28.
[30] 光学機能フィルムが 530nm— 6 lOnmの波長域に最大吸収を有する化合物を含 有するフィルムである請求項 29に記載の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタ。  30. The electronic display filter according to claim 29, wherein the optical functional film is a film containing a compound having a maximum absorption in a wavelength range of 530 nm to 6 lOnm.
[31] 請求項 23に記載の透明基板を有する請求項 1に記載の電子ディスプレイ用フィル タ。  [31] The filter for an electronic display according to claim 1, comprising the transparent substrate according to claim 23.
[32] 請求項 1、 13及び 29の何れかに記載の電子ディスプレイ用フィルタが設けられて [32] An electronic display filter according to any one of claims 1, 13 and 29 is provided.
V、ることを特徴とする電子ディスプレイ装置。 V, an electronic display device.
[33] 電子ディスプレイ用フィルタが、透明な部材を介して発光表示デバイス表面と接す る請求項 32に記載の電子ディスプレイ装置。 33. The electronic display device according to claim 32, wherein the electronic display filter is in contact with the light emitting display device surface via a transparent member.
PCT/JP2004/013809 2003-09-30 2004-09-22 Electronic display filter and electronic display device WO2005034066A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2003341010 2003-09-30
JP2003-341010 2003-09-30
JP2003434186A JP2005189728A (en) 2003-12-26 2003-12-26 Filter for display unit, and display unit
JP2003-434186 2003-12-26

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2005034066A1 true WO2005034066A1 (en) 2005-04-14

Family

ID=34425321

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2004/013809 WO2005034066A1 (en) 2003-09-30 2004-09-22 Electronic display filter and electronic display device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
TW (1) TW200521490A (en)
WO (1) WO2005034066A1 (en)

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1816495A1 (en) * 2006-02-01 2007-08-08 Samsung SDI Co., Ltd. Optical filter and plasma display panel employing the same
US10495795B2 (en) 2014-05-23 2019-12-03 Eyesafe, Llc Light emission reducing compounds for electronic devices
US10642087B2 (en) 2014-05-23 2020-05-05 Eyesafe, Llc Light emission reducing compounds for electronic devices
CN112470045A (en) * 2018-07-23 2021-03-09 住友化学株式会社 Optical filter and display device
CN112469695A (en) * 2018-07-23 2021-03-09 住友化学株式会社 Compound and method for producing same
US10955697B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2021-03-23 Eyesafe Inc. Light emission modification
US10971660B2 (en) 2019-08-09 2021-04-06 Eyesafe Inc. White LED light source and method of making same
US11126033B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2021-09-21 Eyesafe Inc. Backlight unit with emission modification
US11592701B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2023-02-28 Eyesafe Inc. Backlight unit with emission modification
US11810532B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2023-11-07 Eyesafe Inc. Systems for monitoring and regulating harmful blue light exposure from digital devices

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7591888B2 (en) * 2006-02-10 2009-09-22 Nippon Kayaku Kabushiki Kaisha Porphyrazine coloring matter, ink, ink set and colored article
KR101321889B1 (en) * 2006-04-07 2013-10-25 니폰 가야꾸 가부시끼가이샤 Porphyrazine dye, ink, ink set, and colored matter
CN112859224A (en) * 2021-03-03 2021-05-28 武汉华星光电半导体显示技术有限公司 Color filter and display module

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001174627A (en) * 1999-12-20 2001-06-29 Toyobo Co Ltd Infrared ray absorption filter
JP2002323861A (en) * 2001-04-25 2002-11-08 Mitsui Chemicals Inc Manufacturing method for filter for display
JP2002333517A (en) * 2001-05-09 2002-11-22 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Filter for electronic display and electronic display device using the filter
JP2002341780A (en) * 2001-05-16 2002-11-29 Bridgestone Corp Light transmitting window material with shielding property against electromagnetic wave
JP2002352736A (en) * 2001-05-28 2002-12-06 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Plasma display
JP2003157017A (en) * 2001-11-21 2003-05-30 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Front filter for plasma display
JP2003167118A (en) * 2001-06-18 2003-06-13 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Filter for electronic display

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001174627A (en) * 1999-12-20 2001-06-29 Toyobo Co Ltd Infrared ray absorption filter
JP2002323861A (en) * 2001-04-25 2002-11-08 Mitsui Chemicals Inc Manufacturing method for filter for display
JP2002333517A (en) * 2001-05-09 2002-11-22 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Filter for electronic display and electronic display device using the filter
JP2002341780A (en) * 2001-05-16 2002-11-29 Bridgestone Corp Light transmitting window material with shielding property against electromagnetic wave
JP2002352736A (en) * 2001-05-28 2002-12-06 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Plasma display
JP2003167118A (en) * 2001-06-18 2003-06-13 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Filter for electronic display
JP2003157017A (en) * 2001-11-21 2003-05-30 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Front filter for plasma display

Cited By (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1816495A1 (en) * 2006-02-01 2007-08-08 Samsung SDI Co., Ltd. Optical filter and plasma display panel employing the same
US10495795B2 (en) 2014-05-23 2019-12-03 Eyesafe, Llc Light emission reducing compounds for electronic devices
US10642087B2 (en) 2014-05-23 2020-05-05 Eyesafe, Llc Light emission reducing compounds for electronic devices
US10871671B2 (en) 2014-05-23 2020-12-22 Eyesafe, Llc Light emission reducing compounds for electronic devices
US10901125B2 (en) 2014-05-23 2021-01-26 Eyesafe, Llc Light emission reducing compounds for electronic devices
US11947209B2 (en) 2014-05-23 2024-04-02 Eyesafe Inc. Light emission reducing compounds for electronic devices
US11686968B2 (en) 2014-05-23 2023-06-27 Eyesafe Inc. Light emission reducing compounds for electronic devices
CN112470045A (en) * 2018-07-23 2021-03-09 住友化学株式会社 Optical filter and display device
CN112469695A (en) * 2018-07-23 2021-03-09 住友化学株式会社 Compound and method for producing same
CN112470045B (en) * 2018-07-23 2023-08-08 住友化学株式会社 Optical filter and display device
US11592701B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2023-02-28 Eyesafe Inc. Backlight unit with emission modification
US11347099B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2022-05-31 Eyesafe Inc. Light management filter and related software
US11126033B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2021-09-21 Eyesafe Inc. Backlight unit with emission modification
US11810532B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2023-11-07 Eyesafe Inc. Systems for monitoring and regulating harmful blue light exposure from digital devices
US10955697B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2021-03-23 Eyesafe Inc. Light emission modification
US10998471B2 (en) 2019-08-09 2021-05-04 Eyesafe Inc. White LED light source and method of making same
US10971660B2 (en) 2019-08-09 2021-04-06 Eyesafe Inc. White LED light source and method of making same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW200521490A (en) 2005-07-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2005034066A1 (en) Electronic display filter and electronic display device
JP5267122B2 (en) Adhesive composition for optical filter, optical filter, and display device
CN1956122B (en) Near infrared absorbing and color compensation thin film composition for electronic device
WO2006046497A1 (en) Optical filter and its applications, and porphyrin compound used in optical filter
CN101026066A (en) Display filter and display apparatus having the same
WO2001057833A1 (en) Filter for displaying, display unit and production method therefor
JP2003195774A (en) Optical filter for display device
JPWO2008038729A1 (en) Adhesive composition for optical filter, optical filter, and display device
JP5015644B2 (en) Porphyrin compounds and display filters
JP2001228323A (en) Optical filter and plasma display panel(pdp)
US20100177416A1 (en) Optical member and optical filter for display device having the same
TW201003150A (en) Filter and display device having the same
JP2004264805A (en) Filter for electronic display and electronic display device using the filter
JP2008268331A (en) Filter for display, manufacturing method thereof, filter for plasma display, plasma display, filter for liquid crystal display, and liquid crystal display
JP4507756B2 (en) Electronic display filter and electronic display device using the filter
JP2004212980A (en) Electronic display filter
JP2005300984A (en) Filter for electronic display and electronic display device
JP2005077953A (en) Filter for electronic display
JP2006241459A (en) Electronic display-use filter and electronic display unit using the filter
JP2004272098A (en) Filter for electronic display and electronic display device using the filter
JP2005037534A (en) Transparent substrate of filter for display unit, filter for display unit, and display unit
JP2012163636A (en) Filter for display
JP2002189122A (en) Front surface protective filter for plasma display
JP2006138963A (en) Optical filter and its use
US20090189832A1 (en) Filter for a plasma display panel and plasma display device having the filter

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): BW GH GM KE LS MW MZ NA SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT LU MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase